iRC3100N Service Manual - USER MANUAL.pdf

Feb 11 2004
Service Manual
iR C3100 Series
iR C3100N

Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation,
maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For
this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes
in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will
release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this
manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with
local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the
individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be
copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent
of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2001 CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note,
Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or
problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric
outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the
topic in question.
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in
question.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.
Memo
REF.

Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name
accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric
signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front
door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
"High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked
in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are
not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this
Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and
isolate faults in the machine."

Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 System Construction.................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Overview of the Delivery Accessories System Configuration ........................... 1-1
1.1.2 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 1.................................................. 1-1
1.1.3 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 2.................................................. 1-4
1.1.4 Delivery Accessories System Configuration 3 ................................................... 1-6
1.1.5 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration........................... 1-7
1.1.6 Reader Heater System Configuration ................................................................. 1-8
1.1.7 Cassette Heater System Configuration 1 ............................................................ 1-9
1.1.8 Cassette Heater System Configuration 2 .......................................................... 1-10
1.1.9 Side Deck Heater System Configuration .......................................................... 1-12
1.1.10 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration.............................. 1-13
1.1.11 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories............................................. 1-15
1.2 Product Specifications ............................................................................................. 1-16
1.2.1 Names of Parts ..................................................................................................1-16
1.2.2 Using the Machine ............................................................................................1-20
1.2.3 User Mode Items ...............................................................................................1-25
1.2.4 User Maintenance .............................................................................................1-33
1.2.5 Safety ................................................................................................................1-36
1.2.6 Product Specifications .......................................................................................1-40
1.2.7 Function List .....................................................................................................1-42
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Making Pre-Checks.................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation ........................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Check to Make Before Installation ..................................................................... 2-8
2.2 Unpacking and Installation...................................................................................... 2-14
2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials ............................................... 2-14
2.2.2 Installing the Drum Unit ................................................................................... 2-16
2.2.3 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly................................ 2-19
2.2.4 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly....................................................... 2-22
2.2.5 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly...................................................... 2-27

Contents
2.2.6 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly.................................................... 2-32
2.2.7 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly ................................................. 2-33
2.2.8 After Mounting the Developing Assembly....................................................... 2-33
2.2.9 Fixing the Machine in Place.............................................................................. 2-35
2.2.10 Connecting the Cable ...................................................................................... 2-36
2.2.11 Setting Up the Cassette ................................................................................... 2-37
2.2.12 Mounting the Toner Cartridge ........................................................................ 2-38
2.2.13 Making Initial Settings for the Developing Assembly.................................... 2-42
2.2.14 Initializing the Drum Unit............................................................................... 2-43
2.2.15 Automatic Gradation Correction..................................................................... 2-44
2.2.16 Adjusting the Image Position.......................................................................... 2-45
2.2.17 Others .............................................................................................................. 2-50
2.2.18 If Not Connected to a Network ....................................................................... 2-51
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network................................................................ 2-52
2.3.1 Connecting to the Network ............................................................................... 2-52
2.3.2 Using PING....................................................................................................... 2-52
2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address ................................................ 2-53
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network .................................................................................. 2-54
2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network ........................................................................... 2-54
2.4.2 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address ..................................................... 2-54
2.4.3 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable............................................... 2-54
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations ............................................................................. 2-56
2.5.1 Checking the Images......................................................................................... 2-56
2.6 Relocating the Machine ........................................................................................... 2-57
2.6.1 Relocating the Machine..................................................................................... 2-57
2.7 Installing the Card Reader-C1 ................................................................................. 2-58
2.7.1 Points to Note.................................................................................................... 2-58
2.7.2 Checking the Contents ...................................................................................... 2-58
2.7.3 Installation......................................................................................................... 2-58
2.7.4 Using with NetSpot Accountant (NSA)............................................................ 2-63
2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1............................................................................... 2-64
2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1........................................................................ 2-64
2.9 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1 .......................................................................... 2-76
2.9.1 Checking the Contents ...................................................................................... 2-76
2.9.2 Installation......................................................................................................... 2-76
2.9.3 Making Checks After Installation ..................................................................... 2-81
2.10 Installing the Reader Heater Kit-B1 ...................................................................... 2-82
2.10.1 Checking the Contents .................................................................................... 2-82
2.10.2 Installation....................................................................................................... 2-82

Contents
Chapter 3 Basic Operation
3.1 Construction............................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Functional construction....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Connections Among Major PCBs....................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 DC Controller PCB............................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 Basic Sequence .......................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ....................................................... 3-6
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (full color) .................................. 3-8
3.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (mono color)............................. 3-10
Chapter 4 Main Controller
4.1 Construction............................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Construction and Functions ................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry..................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main)............................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (sub)................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.3 Expansion Bus PCB............................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.4 SRAM PCB......................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.5 HDD.................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3 Start-Up Sequence ................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence............................................................................................. 4-11
4.4 Actions when HDD Error ........................................................................................ 4-15
4.4.1 E602 in Detail ................................................................................................... 4-15
4.5 Image Processing..................................................................................................... 4-21
4.5.1 Outline of the Flow of Image Processing.......................................................... 4-21
4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module................................................. 4-21
4.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing......................................................................... 4-22
4.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks............................................ 4-23
4.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing ...................................................................... 4-24
4.6 Flow of Image Data ................................................................................................. 4-26
4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function)............................................................... 4-26
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data (Box function).................................................................. 4-26
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (SEND function).............................................................. 4-27
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission)............................................................. 4-28
4.6.5 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions ................................................ 4-29
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data (PDL function)................................................................. 4-30
4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................. 4-32

Contents
4.7.1 Controller Box ...................................................................................................4-32
4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) .............................................................................4-36
4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) ...............................................................................4-41
4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB ..........................................................................................4-42
4.7.5 SRAM PCB .......................................................................................................4-45
4.7.6 UFR Board ........................................................................................................4-46
4.7.7 Ethernet Board ..................................................................................................4-48
4.7.8 HDD ..................................................................................................................4-50
4.7.9 Controller Fan ...................................................................................................4-53
Chapter 5 Original Exposure System
5.1 Construction............................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .......................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Major Components.............................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System.................................................................... 5-4
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ....................................................................................... 5-4
5.2 Basic Sequence .......................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ....................................................... 5-7
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode,
1 original) ................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode,
1 original) ................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.3 Various Control........................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ..............................................................5-10
5.3.2 Contact Sensor ..................................................................................................5-13
5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction .....................................................................................5-16
5.3.4 Controlling the Scanning Lamp ........................................................................5-16
5.3.5 Detecting the Size of Originals .........................................................................5-18
5.3.6 Dirt Sensor Control ...........................................................................................5-23
5.3.7 Image Processing ..............................................................................................5-27
5.4.1 Copyboard Glass ...............................................................................................5-31
5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB .....................................................................................5-33
5.4.3 Inverter PCB ......................................................................................................5-40
5.4.4 Scanner Motor ...................................................................................................5-43
5.4.5 Contact Sensor ..................................................................................................5-44
5.4.6 Original Cover Sensor .......................................................................................5-48
5.4.7 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ................................................................................5-49

Contents
5.4.8 Original Sensor .................................................................................................5-52
5.4.9 Reader Heater (option) ......................................................................................5-55
Chapter 6 Laser Exposure
6.1 Construction............................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions.......................................... 6-1
6.2 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Laser Scanner Unit ..............................................................................................6-3
6.2.2 Dust-Proofing Glass Cleaning Pad .....................................................................6-5
Chapter 7 Image Formation
7.1 Construction............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System .................................................. 7-1
7.2 Image Formation Process........................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.1 2-Side Placement Control ................................................................................... 7-4
7.3 Basic Sequence .......................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.1 Power-On ............................................................................................................ 7-6
7.3.2 Copying/Printing (normal speed)........................................................................ 7-8
7.3.3 Copying/Printing (half-speed)............................................................................. 7-9
7.3.4 Copying/Printing a Mix of Color and Black-and-White Originals................... 7-10
7.4 Image Stabilization Control..................................................................................... 7-11
7.4.1 Timing of Image Stabilization Control............................................................. 7-11
7.4.2 ATR Control ..................................................................................................... 7-13
7.4.3 Drum Film Thickness Detection Control.......................................................... 7-18
7.4.4 PASCAL Control (image gradation density correction)................................... 7-18
7.4.5 Development Gradation Density Correction Control ....................................... 7-19
7.4.6 Auto Gradation Correction Function ................................................................ 7-20
7.5 Drum Unit................................................................................................................ 7-22
7.5.1 Drum Unit .........................................................................................................7-22
7.6 Developing Rotary................................................................................................... 7-28
7.6.1 Construction of the Developing Rotary ............................................................ 7-28
7.6.2 Developing Rotary Control............................................................................... 7-29
7.6.3 Developing Assembly Drive Path..................................................................... 7-32
7.7 Developing Unit....................................................................................................... 7-34
7.7.1 Construction of the Developing Unit................................................................ 7-34
7.7.2 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh control) ................................................... 7-35
7.7.3 Developing Bias Control................................................................................... 7-39

Contents
7.8 Toner Container ....................................................................................................... 7-41
7.8.1 Construction of the Toner Cartridge ................................................................. 7-41
7.8.2 Toner Level Detection Control ......................................................................... 7-42
7.8.3 Toner Supply Control........................................................................................ 7-44
7.9 Transfer Device........................................................................................................ 7-47
7.9.1 Construction of the Transfer Assembly ............................................................ 7-47
7.9.2 ITB Home Position Detection Control.............................................................. 7-48
7.9.3 Transfer Bias Control........................................................................................ 7-51
7.9.4 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)................................................. 7-53
7.9.5 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller.............................................. 7-54
7.9.6 ITB Waste Toner Collection Mechanism ......................................................... 7-55
7.9.7 Transfer Assembly Drive Path.......................................................................... 7-56
7.9.8 Transfer Assembly Swing Control.................................................................... 7-57
7.9.9 Separation.......................................................................................................... 7-59
7.10 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................ 7-61
7.10.1 Drum Unit ......................................................................................................7-61
7.10.2 Development Unit ...........................................................................................7-65
7.10.3 Rotary Upper Cover ........................................................................................7-72
7.10.4 Rotary Lower Cover ........................................................................................7-75
7.10.5 ITB Cleaning Unit ...........................................................................................7-76
7.10.6 ITB Waste Toner Unit .....................................................................................7-83
7.10.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit ..............................................................................7-83
7.10.8 ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit ....................................................................7-95
7.10.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt ..............................................................................7-97
7.10.10 ITB Home Position Sensor PCB .................................................................7-114
7.10.11 Primary Transfer Roller ..............................................................................7-130
7.10.12 Secondary Transfer External Roller ............................................................7-147
7.10.13 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller .............................................................7-150
7.10.14 ITB Cleaning Blade .....................................................................................7-168
7.10.15 ITB Fan .......................................................................................................7-176
7.10.16 Separator Eliminator ...................................................................................7-178
7.10.17 ATR Sensor Unit .........................................................................................7-179
7.10.18 Environment Sensor PCB ...........................................................................7-182
7.10.19 Patch Image Sensor .....................................................................................7-190
Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System
8.1 Basic Sequence .......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key .............. 8-1

Contents
8.1.2 Increase in Speed ................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2 Detecting Jams........................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.1 Stationary Jams ...................................................................................................8-5
8.2.2 Other Jams ...........................................................................................................8-5
8.3 Cassette...................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.3.1 Setting Up the Universal Cassette....................................................................... 8-7
8.3.2 Paper Level Sensor.............................................................................................. 8-8
8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit.............................................................................................. 8-13
8.4.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations........................................................................... 8-14
8.5 Registration Unit...................................................................................................... 8-15
8.5.1 Overview........................................................................................................... 8-15
8.6 Duplex Feeding Unit................................................................................................ 8-16
8.6.1 Sequence of Image Formation .......................................................................... 8-16
8.6.2 Flow of Paper (wo/ Delivery Option) ............................................................... 8-16
8.6.3 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -internal delivery) ..................................... 8-23
8.6.4 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -external delivery)..................................... 8-30
8.7.1 Pickup Unit 1 ....................................................................................................8-36
8.7.2 Pickup Unit 2 ....................................................................................................8-39
8.7.3 Sensor Mounting Plate ......................................................................................8-41
8.7.4 Pickup Roller .....................................................................................................8-46
8.7.5 Feed Roller ........................................................................................................8-47
8.7.6 Separation Roller ...............................................................................................8-47
8.7.7 Cassette Pickup Motor 1 ...................................................................................8-48
8.7.8 Cassette Pickup Motor 2 ...................................................................................8-49
8.7.9 Cassette Size Detection Sensor .........................................................................8-50
8.7.10 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ...........................................................................8-55
8.7.11 Cassette Paper Sensor .....................................................................................8-60
8.7.12 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) .................................................................8-65
8.7.13 Slide Resistor ..................................................................................................8-70
8.7.14 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ................................................................................8-74
8.7.15 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB .....................................................................8-78
8.7.16 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch ............................................................................8-83
8.7.17 Manual Feed Tray Unit ...................................................................................8-86
8.7.18 Manual Feed Unit ............................................................................................8-90
8.7.19 Manual Pickup Roller .....................................................................................8-94
8.7.20 Manual Feed Separation Pad ...........................................................................8-98
8.7.21 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear) ................................................................8-102
8.7.22 Registration Sensor .......................................................................................8-106

Contents
8.7.23 Registration Clutch ........................................................................................8-111
8.7.24 Vertical Path Roller .......................................................................................8-112
8.7.25 Duplex Feed Roller 2 ....................................................................................8-118
8.7.26 Duplex Feed Sensor ......................................................................................8-121
8.7.27 Duplex Feed Clutch .......................................................................................8-124
8.7.28 Delivery Assembly 1 .....................................................................................8-127
8.7.29 Delivery Drive Unit .......................................................................................8-131
Chapter 9 Fixing System
9.1 Construction............................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions .......................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Major Components.............................................................................................. 9-2
9.1.3 Construction of the Control System.................................................................... 9-5
9.2 Basic Sequence .......................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On ................................................................. 9-7
9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations During Printing .................................................. 9-7
9.3 Various Control Mechanisms .................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller .........................................................9-9
9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature .......................................................9-12
9.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper .........................................................................9-18
9.4 Protective Functions................................................................................................. 9-21
9.4.1 Detecting Overheating by the Main Thermistor (TH1) .................................... 9-21
9.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Sub Thermistor (TH2)....................................... 9-22
9.4.3 Detecting Overheating in Relation to a Triac Short-Circuit ............................. 9-23
9.4.4 Detecting Overheating by the Thermal Switch (TP1)....................................... 9-23
9.4.5 Detecting Overheating of the Heat Retention Heater (H3)............................... 9-24
9.4.6 Error .................................................................................................................. 9-25
9.5.1 Fixing Unit ........................................................................................................9-27
9.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame ..........................................................................................9-30
9.5.3 Fixing Roller .....................................................................................................9-39
9.5.4 Pressure Roller ..................................................................................................9-48
9.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor ....................................................................................9-55
9.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor ......................................................................................9-60
9.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch ......................................................................................9-64
9.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater .............................................................9-69
9.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater ............................................................................9-76
9.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide ...........................................................................................9-82

Contents
9.5.11 Fixing Delivery Guide ....................................................................................9-87
9.5.12 Fixing Inlet Sensor ..........................................................................................9-91
9.5.13 Fixing Delivery Sensor ...................................................................................9-97
Chapter 10 Externals and Controls
10.1 Control Panel ......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 LCD Processing .............................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.3 Adjusting the LCD Screen Contrast................................................................ 10-2
10.1.4 Control Panel CPU.......................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Counters................................................................................................................. 10-3
10.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count ...................................................................... 10-4
10.3 Fans........................................................................................................................ 10-6
10.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.2 2-Speed Control .............................................................................................. 10-7
10.3.3 Sequence of Operations .................................................................................. 10-8
10.4 Power Supply......................................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.1 Power Supply ..................................................................................................10-9
10.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB ......................................................10-14
10.4.3 Protection Function .......................................................................................10-15
10.4.4 Backup Battery ..............................................................................................10-16
10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function ...............................................................................10-16
10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure .............................................................................. 10-21
10.5.1 Option Power Supply Assembly ...................................................................10-21
10.5.2 Controller Power Supply Unit .......................................................................10-22
10.5.3 Printer Power Supply Unit ............................................................................10-23
10.5.4 Control Panel .................................................................................................10-28
10.5.5 Control Panel LCD Unit ...............................................................................10-29
10.5.6 DC Controller PCB .......................................................................................10-32
10.5.7 Leakage Breaker ...........................................................................................10-34
10.5.8 HVT PCB ......................................................................................................10-36
10.5.9 High-Voltage Sub PCB .................................................................................10-42
10.5.10 Control Panel CPU PCB .............................................................................10-44
10.5.11 Control Panel Key Switch PCB ..................................................................10-46
10.5.12 Control Panel Inverter PCB ........................................................................10-48
10.5.13 Main Power Switch .....................................................................................10-50
10.5.14 Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch ...............................................10-52

Contents
10.5.15 ITB Fan .......................................................................................................10-54
10.5.16 Toner Intake Fan .........................................................................................10-55
10.5.17 Machine Heat Discharge Fan ......................................................................10-57
10.5.18 Toner Intake Fan Filter ................................................................................10-61
10.5.19 Motor of Main Drive Assembly ..................................................................10-61
10.5.20 Right Door ...................................................................................................10-66
10.5.21 Cautions in Handling the Left Stay .............................................................10-68
Chapter 11 Maintenance and Inspection
11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.2 Reader Unit ..................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.3 Printer Unit...................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Durables and Consumables.................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.2 Reader Unit ..................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.3 Printer Unit...................................................................................................... 11-2
11.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ................................................................... 11-6
11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure............................................................. 11-6
11.3.2 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (reader unit)..................................... 11-8
11.3.3 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (printer unit) .................................... 11-8
11.3.4 Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing Work .............................................. 11-18
11.4 Cleaning ............................................................................................................... 11-20
11.4.1 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller.......................................................... 11-20
Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments
12.1 Image Adjustments ................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.1 Standards for Image Position .......................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 Checking the Image Position .......................................................................... 12-1
12.1.3 Cassette ........................................................................................................... 12-3
12.1.4 Manual Feed Tray ........................................................................................... 12-6
12.1.5 Side Paper Deck .............................................................................................. 12-7
12.2 Scanning System.................................................................................................. 12-10
12.2.1 After Replacing the CIS................................................................................ 12-10
12.2.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass........................................................... 12-10
12.2.3 After Replacing the ADF Reading Glass...................................................... 12-11
12.2.4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or After Initializing the RAM. 12-12

Contents
12.3 Laser Exposure System........................................................................................ 12-15
12.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit ....................................................... 12-15
12.4 Image Formation System..................................................................................... 12-16
12.4.1 After Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ........................................... 12-16
12.4.2 After Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Belt............................................ 12-16
12.4.3 After Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller................................................ 12-16
12.4.4 After Replacing the Drum Unit..................................................................... 12-16
12.4.5 After Replacing the Developing Unit (Y, M, C)........................................... 12-17
12.4.6 After Replacing the Developing Unit (Bk)................................................... 12-17
12.4.7 After Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller .............................. 12-18
12.5 Fixing System ...................................................................................................... 12-19
12.5.1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ............................................................ 12-19
12.5.2 After Replacing the Fixing Unit.................................................................... 12-19
12.5.3 After Replacing the Fixing Roller................................................................. 12-19
12.5.4 Nip Adjustment............................................................................................. 12-19
12.5.5 Point to Note About the Position of the Fixing Main Thermistor ................ 12-21
12.5.6 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Sub Thermistor........................... 12-21
12.5.7 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch.......................... 12-22
12.6 Electrical Components......................................................................................... 12-24
12.6.1 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB................................................. 12-24
12.6.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB....................................................... 12-26
12.6.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)........................................ 12-27
12.6.4 After Replacing the SRAM Board................................................................ 12-28
12.6.5 After Replacing the HDD ............................................................................. 12-28
12.6.6 When Replacing the HVT PCB .................................................................... 12-30
12.7 Pickup/Feeding System........................................................................................ 12-31
12.7.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Pickup Cassette .. 12-
31
12.7.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit.... 12-33
12.7.3 Adjust the Horizontal Registration for the Manual Feed Tray ..................... 12-34
12.7.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value..................................................... 12-35
Chapter 13 Correcting Faulty Images
13.1 Making lnitial Checks............................................................................................ 13-1
13.1.1 Checking the Site Environment ...................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Checking the Paper ......................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ................................................................... 13-1
13.1.4 Checking the Durables.................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts ...................................................... 13-1

Contents
13.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks..................................................... 13-2
13.1.7 Others .............................................................................................................. 13-4
13.2 Test Print................................................................................................................ 13-5
13.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 13-5
13.2.2 Test Print TYPE .............................................................................................. 13-5
13.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE .............................................................................. 13-5
13.2.4 16-Gradation (TYPE=4).................................................................................. 13-6
13.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5)......................................................................... 13-7
13.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6)................................................................................................ 13-8
13.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10)......................................................... 13-9
13.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12).............................................................................. 13-10
13.2.9 Full Color 16-Gradation (TYPE=14)............................................................ 13-11
13.3 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 13-13
13.3.1 Symptoms ......................................................................................................13-13
13.3.2 Image Faults ..................................................................................................13-14
13.3.3 Faulty Feeding ...............................................................................................13-34
13.3.4 Malfunction ...................................................................................................13-36
13.3.5 Printing/scanning ...........................................................................................13-48
13.3.6 Network .........................................................................................................13-49
13.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related .............................................................................13-50
13.3.8 Jam (Main Unit) ............................................................................................13-52
13.3.9 Error Code .....................................................................................................13-56
13.4 Outline of Electrical Components........................................................................ 13-79
13.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid .............................................................................................13-79
13.4.2 Motor .............................................................................................................13-80
13.4.3 Fan .................................................................................................................13-83
13.4.4 Sensor ............................................................................................................13-86
13.4.5 Switch ............................................................................................................13-92
13.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ..........................................................................13-93
13.4.7 PCBs ..............................................................................................................13-96
13.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
13-100
Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis
14.1 Error Code Table.................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1 Error Code....................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Error Code Details ................................................................................................. 14-5
14.2.1 Error Code Details Table ................................................................................ 14-5

Contents
14.3 Error Codes (SEND)............................................................................................ 14-40
14.3.1 Self-Diagnostic Display................................................................................ 14-40
14.3.2 List of Error Codes without Messages.......................................................... 14-43
14.4 Error Code Details ............................................................................................... 14-53
14.4.1 E code Overview........................................................................................... 14-53
14.4.2 E000 .............................................................................................................. 14-53
14.4.3 E001 .............................................................................................................. 14-53
14.4.4 E002 .............................................................................................................. 14-56
14.4.5 E003 .............................................................................................................. 14-58
14.4.6 E004 .............................................................................................................. 14-58
14.4.7 E006 .............................................................................................................. 14-58
14.4.8 E008 .............................................................................................................. 14-59
14.4.9 E010 .............................................................................................................. 14-59
14.4.10 E012 ............................................................................................................ 14-60
14.4.11 E013 ............................................................................................................ 14-60
14.4.12 E014 ............................................................................................................ 14-61
14.4.13 E020 ............................................................................................................ 14-61
14.4.14 E021 ............................................................................................................ 14-65
14.4.15 E026 ............................................................................................................ 14-65
14.4.16 E032 ............................................................................................................ 14-66
14.4.17 E045 ............................................................................................................ 14-66
14.4.18 E067 ............................................................................................................ 14-67
14.4.19 E070 ............................................................................................................ 14-67
14.4.20 E100 ............................................................................................................ 14-68
14.4.21 E110 ............................................................................................................ 14-69
14.4.22 E202 ............................................................................................................ 14-70
14.4.23 E225 ............................................................................................................ 14-70
14.4.24 E227 ............................................................................................................ 14-71
14.4.25 E240 ............................................................................................................ 14-71
14.4.26 E243 ............................................................................................................ 14-72
14.4.27 E248 ............................................................................................................ 14-72
14.4.28 E315 ............................................................................................................ 14-73
14.4.29 E351 ............................................................................................................ 14-74
14.4.30 E400 ............................................................................................................ 14-74
14.4.31 E490 ............................................................................................................ 14-75
14.4.32 E500 ............................................................................................................ 14-76
14.4.33 E503 ............................................................................................................ 14-76
14.4.34 E505 ............................................................................................................ 14-77
14.4.35 E514 ............................................................................................................ 14-78
14.4.36 E519 ............................................................................................................ 14-79

Contents
14.4.37 E530 ............................................................................................................ 14-79
14.4.38 E531 ............................................................................................................ 14-80
14.4.39 E532 ............................................................................................................ 14-81
14.4.40 E535 ............................................................................................................ 14-83
14.4.41 E537 ............................................................................................................ 14-84
14.4.42 E540 ............................................................................................................ 14-85
14.4.43 E542 ............................................................................................................ 14-86
14.4.44 E577 ............................................................................................................ 14-86
14.4.45 E580 ............................................................................................................ 14-87
14.4.46 E584 ............................................................................................................ 14-88
14.4.47 E590 ............................................................................................................ 14-88
14.4.48 E591 ............................................................................................................ 14-89
14.4.49 E592 ............................................................................................................ 14-89
14.4.50 E593 ............................................................................................................ 14-90
14.4.51 E5F0 ............................................................................................................ 14-91
14.4.52 E5F1 ............................................................................................................ 14-91
14.4.53 E5F2 ............................................................................................................ 14-92
14.4.54 E5F3 ............................................................................................................ 14-92
14.4.55 E5F4 ............................................................................................................ 14-93
14.4.56 E5F5 ............................................................................................................ 14-93
14.4.57 E5F6 ............................................................................................................ 14-94
14.4.58 E5F8 ............................................................................................................ 14-95
14.4.59 E5F9 ............................................................................................................ 14-95
14.4.60 E601 ............................................................................................................ 14-97
14.4.61 E602 ............................................................................................................ 14-97
14.4.62 E602 in detail .............................................................................................. 14-97
14.4.63 E604 .......................................................................................................... 14-103
14.4.64 E605 .......................................................................................................... 14-103
14.4.65 E606 .......................................................................................................... 14-104
14.4.66 E674 .......................................................................................................... 14-104
14.4.67 E677 .......................................................................................................... 14-105
14.4.68 E710 .......................................................................................................... 14-105
14.4.69 E711 .......................................................................................................... 14-106
14.4.70 E712 .......................................................................................................... 14-107
14.4.71 E713 .......................................................................................................... 14-107
14.4.72 E716 .......................................................................................................... 14-107
14.4.73 E717 .......................................................................................................... 14-108
14.4.74 E719 .......................................................................................................... 14-108
14.4.75 E730 .......................................................................................................... 14-110
14.4.76 E731 .......................................................................................................... 14-111

Contents
14.4.77 E732 .......................................................................................................... 14-112
14.4.78 E733 .......................................................................................................... 14-113
14.4.79 E740 .......................................................................................................... 14-114
14.4.80 E743 .......................................................................................................... 14-114
14.4.81 E744 .......................................................................................................... 14-115
14.4.82 E745 .......................................................................................................... 14-116
14.4.83 E746 .......................................................................................................... 14-117
14.4.84 E747 .......................................................................................................... 14-118
14.4.85 E803 .......................................................................................................... 14-118
14.4.86 E804 .......................................................................................................... 14-119
14.4.87 E805 .......................................................................................................... 14-120
Chapter 15 Service Mode
15.1 Outline ................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ........................................................................ 15-1
15.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections............................................... 15-2
15.1.3 Ending Service Mode...................................................................................... 15-3
15.1.4 Back-Up .......................................................................................................... 15-3
15.1.5 Initial Screen ................................................................................................... 15-5
15.1.6 2nd/3rd Item Screen........................................................................................ 15-5
15.1.7 4th Item Screen ............................................................................................... 15-6
15.2 DISPLAY（Status Display Mode）
....................................................................... 15-8
15.2.1 COPIER ..........................................................................................................15-8
15.2.2 FEEDER ........................................................................................................15-30
15.2.3 DISPLAY(Status Display Mode)Level2 ......................................................15-31
15.3 I/O （I/O Display Mode）
.................................................................................... 15-37
15.3.1 Overview....................................................................................................... 15-37
15.3.2 <DC-CON>................................................................................................... 15-38
15.3.3 <R-CON>...................................................................................................... 15-42
15.3.4 <FEEDER>................................................................................................... 15-44
15.3.5 <SORTER>................................................................................................... 15-45
15.3.6 <MN-CON>.................................................................................................. 15-53
15.4 ADJUST（Adjustment Mode）
............................................................................ 15-56
15.4.1 COPIER ........................................................................................................15-56
15.4.2 FEEDER ........................................................................................................15-94
15.4.3 SORTER .......................................................................................................15-95
15.4.4 ADJUST （Adjustment Mode）Level2 .......................................................15-95
15.5 FUNCTION （Operation/Inspection Mode）
.................................................... 15-109

Contents
15.5.1 COPIER .......................................................................................................15-109
15.5.2 FEEDER ......................................................................................................15-140
15.5.3 FUNCTION （operation/inspection mode）:Level 2 ................................15-143
15.6 OPTION （Machine Settings Mode）
................................................................ 15-145
15.6.1 COPIER .......................................................................................................15-145
15.6.2 SORTER .....................................................................................................15-176
15.6.3 BOARD .......................................................................................................15-177
15.6.4 OPTION （mechanical specifications setting mode）:Level 2 .................15-178
15.7 TEST （Test Print Mode）
................................................................................. 15-202
15.7.1 COPIER .......................................................................................................15-202
15.8 COUNTER （Counter Mode）
.......................................................................... 15-208
15.8.1 COPIER .......................................................................................................15-208
15.8.2 FEEDER ......................................................................................................15-219
Chapter 16 Upgrading
16.1 Outline.................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.1 Outline of the Version Upgrade ...................................................................... 16-1
16.1.2 Outline of the Service Support Tool ............................................................... 16-1
16.1.3 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use ................................. 16-4
16.2 Making Preparations ............................................................................................ 16-10
16.2.1 Registering the System software................................................................... 16-10
16.2.2 Making connections ...................................................................................... 16-16
16.3 Formatting the HDD ............................................................................................ 16-26
16.3.1 Formatting All Partitions............................................................................... 16-26
16.3.2 Formatting Selected Partitions ...................................................................... 16-26
16.3.3 Formatting Procedure.................................................................................... 16-28
16.4 Downloading System Software............................................................................ 16-41
16.4.1 Downloading the System Software ...............................................................16-41
16.4.2 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module .............................................16-53
16.4.3 Downloading the BOOT Software ................................................................16-65
16.4.4 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software ..................................................16-77
16.4.5 Downloading the G3 FAX Software .............................................................16-89
16.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data ....................................................... 16-101
16.5.1 Outline......................................................................................................... 16-101
16.5.2 Uploading Procedure ............................................................................... 16-102
16.5.3 Downloading Procedure .......................................................................... 16-112

Contents
Chapter 17 Service Tools
17.1 Special Tools.......................................................................................................... 17-1
17.2 Solvents and Oils ................................................................................................... 17-3

Contents
Contents
1.1 System Construction ..................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Overview of the Delivery Accessories System Configuration ...........1-1
1.1.2 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 1..................................1-1
1.1.3 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 2..................................1-4
1.1.4 Delivery Accessories System Configuration 3 ...................................1-6
1.1.5 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System Configuration...........1-7
1.1.6 Reader Heater System Configuration..................................................1-8
1.1.7 Cassette Heater System Configuration 1.............................................1-9
1.1.8 Cassette Heater System Configuration 2...........................................1-10
1.1.9 Side Deck Heater System Configuration ..........................................1-12
1.1.10 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration..............1-13
1.1.11 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories.............................1-15
1.2 Product Specifications..............................................................................1-16
1.2.1 Names of Parts ..................................................................................1-16
1.2.1.1 External View.............................................................................1-16
1.2.1.2 Cross Section..............................................................................1-18
1.2.2 Using the Machine ............................................................................1-20
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch....................................................1-20
1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch.......1-21
1.2.2.3 Control Panel..............................................................................1-24
1.2.3 User Mode Items...............................................................................1-25
1.2.3.1 Common Settings ...................................................................1-25
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings .......................................................................1-27
1.2.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning...........................................................1-27
1.2.3.4 Printing Various Reports............................................................1-28
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings .........................................................1-29
1.2.3.6 Copy Function Settings ..........................................................1-30
1.2.3.7 Common Transmission Function Settings .................................1-30
1.2.3.8 Box Function Settings................................................................1-32
1.2.3.9 Printer Function Setting .............................................................1-32
1.2.3.10 Address List Settings................................................................1-33
1.2.4 User Maintenance..............................................................................1-33

1.2.4.1 Cleaning .....................................................................................1-33
1.2.4.2 Inspection...................................................................................1-34
1.2.5 Safety ................................................................................................1-36
1.2.5.1 CDRH Regulations ....................................................................1-36
1.2.5.2 Handling the Laser Unit.............................................................1-37
1.2.5.3 Safety of the Laser Light............................................................1-39
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner ..........................................................................1-39
1.2.6 Product Specifications ......................................................................1-40
1.2.6.1 System and Functions ................................................................1-40
1.2.6.2 Others.........................................................................................1-42
1.2.7 Function List.....................................................................................1-42
1.2.7.1 First Copy Time .........................................................................1-42
1.2.7.2 Printing Speed............................................................................1-43
1.2.7.3 Types of Paper ...........................................................................1-44

Chapter 1
1-1
1.1 System Construction
1.1.1 Overview of the Delivery Accessories System
Configuration 0002-0763
The machine's delivery accessories may be configured into any of the following 3 patterns.
- if a large volume of paper must be dealt with or multiple types of processing (e.g., stapling,
punching) are needed, delivery accessories configuration 1
- if no more than a stapling level of processing is needed, delivery accessories system
configuration 2
- if no more than a sorting level (3-output) of processing is needed, delivery accessories
system configuration 3
See the diagrams of individual constructions that follow.
1.1.2 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 1 0001-2267
The following is a diagram of the system configurations:

Chapter 1
1-2
F-1-1
T-1-1
[1] Finisher-Q1
(marketing scheduled for August
2003)
[1a] Installation Procedure
- Installing the Finisher-Q1
- Installing the Buffer Path 4
- Installing the Relay Delivery Assembly 5
[1]
[3]
[3a]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2a]
[1a]
[6a]
[4a]
[2]

Chapter 1
1-3
The following is a list of functions and accessories needed to make use of these functions:
T-1-2
T-1-3
[2] Saddle Finisher-Q2
(marketing scheduled for August
2003)
- Installing the Saddle Finisher-Q2
- Installing the Buffer Path
- Installing the Relay Delivery Assembly
- Installing the Saddle (for Q2)
[3] Punch Unit [3a] Installation Procedure
- Installing the Punch Unit
[4] Buffer Path [4a] Installation Sheet
[5] Relay Delivery Assembly
(for Finisher-Q1/Saddle Finisher
Q2)
[6] Accessories Power Supply-P1 (if
120/230 V, standard; needed for
installation of 1 thorough 5)
- Installing the Accessories Power Supply-
P1
[7] Buffer Path Unit-C1
Function Accessories
- 2-output delivery
- stapling
Finisher-Q1 or Saddle Finisher-Q2
Accessories Power Supply-P1
Buffer Path Unit-C1
- 3-output delivery
- stapling
Finisher-Q1 or Saddle Finisher-Q2
Buffer Path Unit-C1

Chapter 1
1-4
T-1-4
T-1-5
1.1.3 Delivery Accessorizes System Configuration 2 0001-2278
The following is a diagram of the system configuration:
- saddling Saddle Finisher-Q2
Buffer Path Unit-C1
- punching Finisher-Q1 or Saddle Finisher-Q2
Buffer Path Unit-C1
Punch Unit

Chapter 1
1-5
F-1-2
T-1-6
[1] Finisher Block [1a] Installation Procedure
- Installing the Finisher-P1
- Installing the Relay Delivery Assembly 2
[2] Relay Delivery Assembly (for
Finisher-P1)
[3] Copy Tray-J1 [3a] Installation Procedure
- Installing the Copy Tray-J1
[4] Accessories Power Supply-P1 (if 120/
230 V, standard; needed for
installation of 1 or 2)
P1
[5] Finisher-P1
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4a]
[3a]
[1a]

Chapter 1
1-6
1.1.4 Delivery Accessories System Configuration 3 0001-2281
F-1-3
T-1-7
[1] Internal Delivery Tray
[2] Inner 2-Way Tray-C1 (power
supplied by printer unit, does not
require Accessories Power Supply-
P1)
- Installing the Inner 2-Way Tray-C1
- Installing the Inner Delivery Tray
[3] Copy Tray-J1 [3a] Installation Procedure
- Installing the Copy Tray-J1
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3a]
[2a]

Chapter 1
1-7
1.1.5 Pickup/Original Handling Accessories System
F-1-4
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1a]
[9a] [3a]
[8a]
[6a]
[4a]
[6]

Chapter 1
1-8
T-1-8
1.1.6 Reader Heater System Configuration 0001-2285
[1] DADF-L1 [1a] Installation Procedure
- Installing the ADF-L1
[2] Platen Cover Type-H1
[3] Original Holder-J1 [3a] Installation Procedure
- Installing the Original Holder-J1
[4] Side Paper Deck-Q1 [4a] Installation Procedure
- Installing the Side Paper Deck-Q1
[5] Card Reader-B1, Card Reader
Mounting Kit-B1
[6] 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 [6a] Installation Procedure
- Installing the 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1
[7] Envelope Cassette-C1 (100V)
[8] Envelope Cassette Attachment-C1
(115/200V)
- Installing the Envelope Cassette
Attachment-C1
[9] Accessories Power Supply-P1 (if 120/
230V, standard; required for Side Paper
Deck-Q1 4)
P1

Chapter 1
1-9
F-1-5
T-1-9
1.1.7 Cassette Heater System Configuration 1 0001-2286
[1] Reader Heater Unit-B1
[2] Heater PCB-B1
- Installing the Heater PCB
- Installing the Cassettes Heater Unit-24
(mounting to printer unit)
- Reader Heater Unit-B1
[1]
[2a]
[2]

Chapter 1
1-10
F-1-6
T-1-10
1.1.8 Cassette Heater System Configuration 2 0001-2284
[1] Cassette Heater Unit-24
(installation to the printer unit indicated)
(requires Heater PCB-B1 for operation)
[2] Heater PCB-B1
- Installing the Heater PCB-B1
- Installing the Cassette Heater Unit-24
(installation to the printer unit)
- Installing the Reader Heater Unit-B1
[2a]
[1] [2]

Chapter 1
1-11
F-1-7
T-1-11
[1] Heater PCB-B1
(installation to printer unit)
- Installing the Reader Unit-BL
(installation to cassette pedestal indicated)
(requires Heater PCB-B1 and Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1 for operation)
[3] Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3a]
[1a]

Chapter 1
1-12
1.1.9 Side Deck Heater System Configuration 0001-5918
F-1-8
T-1-12
- Installing the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
(installation to cassette pedestal)
[1] Heater PCB-B1
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3a]
[1a]

Chapter 1
1-13
1.1.10 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System
- Installing the Cassette Hater Unit-24
(installation to printer unit)
- Installing the Reader Unit-B1
(requires heater PCB-B1 and Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1 for operation)
[3] Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
- Installing the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit-B1
- Installing the Cassette Unit-25
(installation to cassette pedestal)

Chapter 1
1-14
F-1-9
[1] Super G3 Fax Board-N1 (standard if iR C3100F)
[2] Ethernet Board (standard)
[3] UFR Board or Open Interface Board
[4] USB Interface Board-A2 or TokenRing Board-TB84
[5] Image Conversion Board-A1
[6] PS Print Server Unit-D1
[7] PDL Expansion Kit-B1 (LIPS; boot ROM for LIPS model: 100 V model only)
[8] Color iR 256 MB Expansion RAM (optional for 100-V model or standard for 120/230-
V model)
[9] SEND Function Expansion CIP/CIU (dongle for functional expansion)
[10] iR Security Kit AIP/AIU (dongle for functional expansion)
[4]
[10]
[5]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[7] [8]
[1]
[9]

Chapter 1
1-15
1.1.11 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories 0001-2319
The following is a table of functions expected of printing/transmitting accessories:
T-1-13
The following is a brief explanation of the functions expected of the accessories; for details,
see the chapters that follow:
- UFR Printer/Scanner-B1
adds the GDI-UFR printing function and a scanning function in combination with
ScanGear.
- SEND Function Expansion CIU-CIP/CIU
adds a transmission function; the setup work calls for a PC, requiring the selection of CIP
(parallel port) or CIU (USB port) depending on the type of connection offered by the PC.
- Image Conversion Board-A1
needed when a transmission/fax function is added.
- USB Interface Board-A2
adds a printing function by connection to a PC in a local configuration (USB); requires a
UFR board.
- Super G3 Fax Board-N1
adds the G3 fax function.
UFR
Printer/
Scanner
Kit-B1
SEND
Expansio
n Kit-
CIP/CIU
Image
Conversio
n Board-
A1
USB
Interface
Board-A2
Super G3
Fax
Board-N1
GDI-UFR
printing yes*
- - - -
SEND
function -
yes yes - -
Faxing - - yes - yes
Local
printing yes*
- - yes -

Chapter 1
1-16
1.2 Product Specifications
1.2.1 Names of Parts
1.2.1.1 External View 0001-2293
F-1-10
[1] ADF reading glass retainer
[2] Copyboard cover
[3] Reader cover (front)
[4] Control panel
[5] Support cover (right)
[6] Support cover
[7] Delivery tray right cover
[8] Delivery tray
[1]
[3]
[2]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]

Chapter 1
1-17
[9] Delivery tray lower cover
[10] Front cover
[11] Cassette 1
[12] Cassette 2
[13] Left cover (lower)
[14] Left cover
[15] Left cover (rear)
[16] Delivery tray rear cover
F-1-11
[17] Reader cover (right)
[18] Copyboard glass
[19] Reader cover (rear)
[20] Rear cover (right)
[21] Rear cover (left)
[22] Right cover (lower rear)
[23] Right cover (upper rear)
[17] [18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]

Chapter 1
1-18
[24] Manual feed pickup tray
[25] Right cover (lower front)
[26] Right door unit
[27] Right cover (upper)
1.2.1.2 Cross Section 0001-2297
F-1-12
[9] [10]
[11]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[38]
[39]
[40]
[41]
[45]
[42]
[43]
[44]
[37]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]

Chapter 1
1-19
T-1-14
[1] CIS unit [23] Feed roller (cassette 1)
[2] ADF reading glass [24] Separation roller (cassette 1)
[3] Copyboard glass [25] Vertical path roller 2
[4] Intermediatetransferbeltcleanerunit [26] Feed roller (cassette 2)
[5] Patch sensor unit [27] Separation roller (cassette 2)
[6] Intermediate transfer unit [28] Pickup roller (cassette 2)
[7] Intermediate transfer belt [29] Brush roller
[8] Primary transfer roller [30] Photosensitive drum
[9] Intermediate transfer belt fan duct [31] Primary charging roller
[10] Delivery roller [32] Drum unit
[11] Fixing outlet roller [33] Laser scanner unit
[12] Fixing roller [34] Dust-blocking sheet
[13] Pressure roller [35] Toner receptacle
[14] Duplex feed roller 1 [36] Toner cartridge (M)
[15] Secondary transfer inside roller [37] Developing assembly (M)
[16] Secondary transfer external roller [38] ATR sensor
[17] Duplex feed roller 2 [39] Developing assembly (Y)
[18] Secondary transfer outside roller
releasing arm
[40] Toner cartridge (Y)
[19] Registration roller [41] Toner cartridge (C)
[20] Manual feed pickup roller [42] Fax unit
[21] Pickup roller (cassette 1) [43] Developing assembly (C)
[22] Vertical path roller 1 [44] Developing assembly (Bk)
[45] Toner cartridge (Bk)

Chapter 1
1-20
1.2.2 Using the Machine
1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch 0001-2299
The machine has 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch.
Normally, the machine goes on when its main power switch is turned on, i.e., when it is not
in power save mode, low power mode, or sleep mode.
F-1-13
[1] Control panel power switch
[2] Main power lamp
[3] Main power switch

Chapter 1
1-21
Never turn off the power while the progress bar is indicated. The HDD is being
accessed, and turning off the power can well damage the HDD (E602).
F-1-14
1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch 0001-2302
Be sure always to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power
switch.
While Printing to the Printer/Receiving a Fax
Be sure that the Start/Memory lamp on the control panel is off when operating the main
power switch. (Turning off the main power switch can result in the loss of the data being
processed.)

Chapter 1
1-22
F-1-15
When Downloading Is Under Way
Never turn off the main power switch/control panel power switch while downloading is
under way. (Turning off the main power switch while downloading is under way can
cause the machine operation to fail.)
C
0
9
Error
Clear
Main Power
Start
Stop
Start/Memory

Chapter 1
1-24
1.2.2.3 Control Panel 0001-2304
F-1-17
T-1-15
[1] Reset key [10] Start/Memory lamp
[2] Keypad [11] Clear key
[3] Power Save key [12] ID key
[4] Control panel power switch [13] Contrast dial
[5] Counter Check key [14] Additional Function key
[6] Stop key [15] Help key

Chapter 1
1-25
1.2.3 User Mode Items
1.2.3.1 Common Settings 0001-2305
- Factory Settings
T-1-16
[7] Start key [16] Touch pen
[8] Main power lamp [17] Touch panel
[9] Error lamp
Mode Description
initial settings initial function: *copy/transmit/box/MEAP
system initial screen: on/*off
priority on system device: *on/off
post-auto clear function *return/do not return
buzzer input sound: *on/off
invalid input sound: on/*off
replenish pre-warning sound: on/off
warning sound: *on/off
job end sound: *on/off
residual original alert sound: on/*off
paper level message display *ON/OFF
priority on text/photo with black-and-
while selected for auto color selection
text/*photo
inch input enable/disable inch input
(on/*off; on if 230V model)
cassette auto selection for copy, off for manual, on for others
for printer, on for all
for box, off for manual, on for others

Chapter 1
1-26
for fax, off for manual, on for others
for copy, off for manual, on for others
envelope cassette selection ENV.1/ENV.2
paper type selection yes
save power mode -10%, -25%, -50%, no return
power consumption in sleep *low/high
special tray selection for tray A, copy/box/fax/printer/others
may be tray A, B, or C
LTRR/STMT original distinction manual/*on if LTRR/on if STMT
special tray selection (w/ finisher; fax
reception)
yes
output priority copy: *1/2/3
printer: 1/*2/3
box: 1/2/*3
fax reception: 1/2/*3
others: 1/2/*3
manual feed envelope selection on/*off (in Japanese model; outside Japan, always on)
manual feed paper standard mode
selection
on (paper size/paper type)/*off
local print standard mode paper selection: auto paper/cassette 1 thorough 5
number of prints: *1 to 2000
sort: sort/group/staple sort/*shift sort/shift group/rotation
sort/rotation group/punch hole/Z-fold
double-sided print: on (left/right, top/bottom)/*off
post-print file deletion: on/*off
file merge: on/*off
display language switch-over ON/*OFF
scan color reversal ON/*OFF
Mode Description

Chapter 1
1-27
1.2.3.2 Timer Settings 0001-2306
- Factory Settings
T-1-17
1.2.3.3 Adjustment and Cleaning 0001-2308
- Factory Settings
T-1-18
job-to-job shift *ON/OFF
cleaning alert for original reading
area
* ON/OFF
JPEG compression rate for remote
scan
high/*medium/low
gamma value for remote scan 1.0, 1.4, *1.8, 2.2
function control mode *ON/OFF
common settings initialization initialize?: yes/no
Mode Description
date/time by time zone/daylight saving *off
auto sleep time 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min; *1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4 hr
auto clear rime 0=disable;1, *2, ---, 9 min (in 1-min increments)
weekly timer 00:00 to 23:59 from Sunday to Saturday (in 1-min
increments)
low power mode shift interval 10, *15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min; 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4 hr
Mode Description
zoom fine tuning XY independent; -1.0 to +1.0% (in 0.1% increments)/*0%
Mode Description

Chapter 1
1-28
1.2.3.4 Printing Various Reports 0001-2309
- Factory Settings
T-1-19
middle bind staple edging (w/
finisher)
Start key
middle bind position change (w/
finisher)
size: A3, 11x17/B4/A4R, LTRR
auto gradation correction no display
full correction (text printing to read start x 3 times)
quick correction (no test printing)
density correction copy/transmit, 9 steps each (at time of shipment, set to 5)
copy box/black-and-white transmit/color transmit, 9 steps
each (at shipment, set to 5)
machine inside cleaning Start key
feeder cleaning Start key
toner replacement without prompt black/yellow/magenta/cyan
Mode Description
Transmit (in keeping with specifications) transmission result report: *only if error/on/off
original indication: *on/off
communications control report auto printing after every 100 communications: *on/
off
printing at specified time: on/*off
time specification *00:00 to 23:59
transmission/reception separation: (toggle) on/*off
fax (in keeping with specifications) fax transmission result report: *only if error/on/off
original indication: *on/off
Mode Description

Chapter 1
1-29
1.2.3.5 System Control Settings 0001-2322
T-1-20
fax communications control report auto printing after every 40 communications: *on/
off
printing at specified time: on/*off
time specification: *00:00 to 23:59
transmission/reception separation: (toggle) on/*off
fax reception result report only if error: /ON/*OFF
fax box reception report *ON/OFF
list print (transmission) address list: list print
user data list (transmission) print user data list?: yes/no
user data list (fax) user data list: print user data list? yes/no
user data list (network) user data list: print user data list? yes/no
Mode Description
system administrator
information
by ID, address
group ID ON/*OFF
communications control setting by e-mail/fax/box
remote user interface *ON/OFF
restrictions on address list ID/access No.: on/*off
device information setting by device name/site of installation
network setting (TCP/IP) on/*off; various information
(Net Ware) on/*off; various information
(Apple Talk) on/*off; individual phases
(SMB) on/*off; various information
(SNMP) *on/off; various information
Mode Description

Chapter 1
1-30
1.2.3.6 Copy Function Settings 0001-2323
T-1-21
1.2.3.7 Common Transmission Function Settings 0001-2324
T-1-22
(special report) *ON/OFF
(spool function) ON/*OFF
(start-up time) *5 sec; 0 to 300 sec
(Ethernet driver) auto detection: *on/off; or others
(e-mail/I fax) SMTP: *on/off; POP: *on/off; others
Mode Description
preference key 1 *no setting (settings include magnification, sorter, page
separation)
preference key 2 *no setting (settings include magnification, sorter, page
separation)
priority of image orientation ON/*OFF
copy wait time ON/*OFF
auto vertical/horizontal rotation *ON/OFF
standard mode change set/initialize
copy function initialization yes/no
Mode Description
common transmission
function setting
sender registration (99 max.)
user abbreviation (various choices)
FTP transmission selection (on/*off)
Mode Description

Chapter 1
1-31
error file clear (*on/off)
JPEG compression rate (high/*medium/low)
transfer error processing (always print/save/*off)
number of retries (*3; may be 0 through 5)
transmission function change (read: 150x150; file: TIFF/JPEG;
others)
routine task registration (M1 to M9)
PDF image level (data/*plain/image quality; text mode: on/*off)
transmission screen (*default/one-touch/new)
source (indicate/*do not indicate)
color transmission gamma (1.0/1.4/1.8/*2.2)
transmission function initialization (yes/no)
common reception function
setting
cassette selection (all; *on/off)
image reduction (on/*off)
reception information (attach/*do not attach)
2-on-1 (on/*off)
fax basic registration user telephone number (input accepted)
line type (*20 pps/10 pps/push-tone)
volume control (alarm sound, communication sound)
fax transmission function
setting
ECM (*on/off)
pause length (*2 sec; 1 through 15 sec)
auto redial (*on/off)
fax reception function
setting
ECM (*ON/OFF)
Mode Description

Chapter 1
1-32
1.2.3.8 Box Function Settings 0001-2325
T-1-23
1.2.3.9 Printer Function Setting 0001-2327
T-1-24
Mode Description
box setting user box setup/register (99 max.)
read setup (register/initialize)
fax box setup/register (49 max.)
Mode Description
settings number of copies (1 to 2000; *1)
simplex/duplex (double-sided/*single-sided)
save blank paper (*yes/no)
pickup (size: A4; type: plain; do not replace)
print adjustment (super smooth; toner density for individual colors; save
toner)
page layout (bind lengthwise, margin 0; -30 to +30 mm; horizontal
correction 0/vertical correction 0; -50- to +50 mm)
error skip (yes/*no)
print deletion interval (*1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 24 hr)
time-out (*15 sec/disabled; may be varied between 5 and 300)
RIP (yes/*no)
sort (*no/rotation sort/rotation group)
transparency interleaf (*no/blank paper interleaf/printed paper interleaf)
printer operation mode (*auto; or from 6 other choices)
emulation (*no; from other 4 choices)

Chapter 1
1-33
1.2.3.10 Address List Settings 0001-2330
T-1-25
1.2.4 User Maintenance
1.2.4.1 Cleaning 0001-2332
- Copyboard Glass and Back of Copyboard Cover (Platen Cover Type H)
Advise the user to be sure to clean the surface of the copyboard glass and the back of the
copyboard cover at least once a once.
Cleaning Procedure
Wipe the surface of the copyboard glass [1] and the back of the copyboard cover (white
plate) [2] with a cloth moistened with mild detergent (well wrung); then, dry wipe them.
auto switch-over (LIPS/ESC-P/15577/HP-GL; all)
color mode (*auto/full color/monochrome)
gradation (*standard/zoom 1/zoom 2; *yes apply to graphics; *yes apply
to image)
halftone selection (text: resolution/gradation/*error diffusion; graphics:
resolution/gradation/error diffusion; image: resolution/error/error
diffusion)
printer initialize (yes/no)
LIPS/emulation (12 items)
utility printer initialize (yes/no)
Mode Description
address registration individual items
address list name registration address list from 1 to 10; individual items
one-touch button registration #001 to #200; individual items
Mode Description

Chapter 1
1-34
F-1-18
F-1-19
1.2.4.2 Inspection 0001-2334
- Checking the Operation of the Leakage Breaker
Advise the user to be sure to check the leakage breaker at least once or twice a month and

Chapter 1
1-35
keep a record of checks.
Inspection Procedure
1) Turn on the main power switch.
2) Press the test button [1] of the breaker with the tip of a ball-point pen [2].
3) Check to see that the breaker switch shifts to the OFF side and the power goes off.
F-1-20
4) Turn off the main power switch.
5) Shift the breaker switch [1] to the ON side.
F-1-21
If the breaker switch stops between ON and OFF sides, shift it back to the OFF side first
and then shift it to the ON side.

Chapter 1
1-36
F-1-22
F-1-23
1.2.5 Safety
1.2.5.1 CDRH Regulations 0001-2337
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration
put into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations
apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser
products not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States. The label
shown here indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required

Chapter 1
1-37
on all laser products that are soled in the United States.
F-1-24
A different description may be used for a different product.
1.2.5.2 Handling the Laser Unit 0001-2338
If you must service the area around the machine's laser unit, be sure to take full care to avoid
exposure to laser light: do not insert a tool (e.g., screwdriver or those with a high
reflectance) into the laser path; also, remove watches, rings, and the like before starting the
work, as they reflect laser light.
The machine's laser light is red in color, and an appropriate label ([1] to [4]) is attached to
all covers that can reflect laser light. Keep also in mind that the machine's laser unit cannot
be adjusted in the field.

Chapter 1
1-39
F-1-26
1.2.5.3 Safety of the Laser Light 0001-2336
Laser light can prove to be hazardous to the human body. The machine's laser unit is fully
enclosed in a protective housing and external covers so that its light will not escape outside
as long as the machine is used normally.
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner 0001-2339
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
[3]
[4]

Chapter 1
1-40
Toner on Clothing or Skin
1. If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then,
wash it off with water.
2. Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the
fibers of the cloth.
3. Do not bring toner into contact with plastic material. It tends to react easily.
1.2.6 Product Specifications
1.2.6.1 System and Functions 0001-6142
Body Desktop
Photosensitive medium OPC (62 mm in diameter)
Exposure method by laser
Charging method by charging roller
Development method
(mono)
by dry, 2-component toner
Development method
(color)
by dry, 2-component toner
Cassette pickup method separation retard (center reference)
Multifeeder pickup method simplified duplex method (center reference)
Transfer method by intermediate belt
Transfer method (primary
transfer)
by transfer roller
Transfer method
(secondary transfer)
by transfer roller
Separation method by curvature + static eliminator
Drum cleaning method by cleaning blade
Trasnsfer cleaning method by cleaning blade
Fixing method Fixing method

Chapter 1
1-41
Delivery method face-down
Warm-up time 6 min or less (at power-on)
Toner type non-magnetic, negative (S toner; for both mono and full color)
Print area maximum imaging area: 305 x 450.5 mm; guaranteed
maximum imaging area: 300 x 450.5 mm
Copying resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Printing resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Duplex method tray-less duplexing
Toner level detection
function
yes
Cassette capacity 550 sheets (of 80 g/m2 paper)
Multifeeder tray capacity 55 sheets (of 64 g/m2 paper)
Non-image width (leading
edge)
2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm (single-/double-sided)
Non-image width (left/
right)
2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm mm (single-sided left/double-sided left)
Image margin (leading
edge)
2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm mm (single-sided); 2.5 -2.0, +2.0 mm
(double-sided)
Image margin (left/right) 2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm mm (single-sided, left edge); 2.5 -2.0,
+2.0mm (double-sided, left side)
Image margin (trailing
edge)
4 mm (single-sided; reference only); 4 mm (double-sided,
reference only)
Energy save mode yes (saving at -10%, -25%, -50%; no return time; shift to low-
power mode after specific period of time)
Low-power mode yes (fixing assembly remains on; shifts to sleep mode after
specific period of time)
Sleep mode yes
Option See sections on system configurations.

Chapter 1
1-42
1.2.6.2 Others 0001-6594
1.2.7 Function List
1.2.7.1 First Copy Time 0002-1152
T-1-26
Operating environment
(temperature range)
5 deg C to 30 deg C
(humidity range)
5% RH to 80% RH
(atmospheric pressure)
0.6 to 1.0 bar
Noise During printing: 71dB or less (BK) During printing: 73dB or
less (4C) During standby: 50dB or less
Power consumption Maximum: 1185W During standby: 281.1W During
continuous printing: 706.92W (BK) During continuous
printing: 526.26W (4C)
Ozone Maximum: 0.02ppm or less Average: 0.01ppm or less
Dimensions Width (W): 565mm Depth (D): 755mm Height (H): 754mm
Weight Main unit: 65kg (cartridge not included)
Single-sided
Full color Bk mono
A4 plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
Cassette as source
23.9 8
A4 heavy paper (106 to 163 g/m2) 37.6 23.2
Manual feed tray as source 37.6 8
(unit: sec)

Chapter 1
1-43
1.2.7.2 Printing Speed 0002-1153
T-1-27
Single-sided Auto Duplexing (FD
delivery)
Paper type Paper size Full color Bk mono Full color Bk mono
Plain paper
(64 to 105 g/m2)
A3/LDR 3.5
(3.1)
16.0
(14.2)
1.7
(-)
4.8
(-)
B4/LGL 3.5
(3.1)
16.0
(14.2)
1.7
(-)
4.8
(-)
A4R/LTRR/
B5R
3.5
(3.1)
16.0
(14.2)
1.7
(-)
4.8
(-)
A4/LTR/B5 7.0
(3.5)
31.8
(22.8)
3.5
(-)
10.3
(-)
A5R/STMTR 7.0
(3.5)
16.0
(14.2)
3.5
(-)
4.8
(-)
12×18 3.5
(3.1)
15.0
(13.0)
1.7
(-)
4.5
(-)
Heavy paper
(106 to 163 g/m2)
A3/LDR 1.6
(1.6)
2.2
(2.2)
---- ----
B4/LGL 1.6
(1.6)
2.2
(2.2)
---- ----
A4R/LTRR/
B5R
1.6
(1.6)
2.2
(2.2)
---- ----
A4/LTR/B5 3.2
(1.9)
4.5
(3.2)
---- ----
Transparency LTR/A4 3.2
(1.9)
7.0
(7.0)
---- ----
Postcard (manually fed) ---- 1.9 3.2 ---- ----
Envelope from cassette
(Monarch)
---- 1.6
(1.9)
2.4
(3.2)
---- ----
from manual
feed tray
(Monarch)
---- 1.6
(1.9)
2.4
(3.2)
---- ----

Chapter 1
1-44
Values inside parentheses represent manual feeding. (unit: copies/min)
1.2.7.3 Types of Paper 0002-1154
T-1-28
Type Size
Source
Manual
feed tray
Cassette
Side paper
deck-Q1
Plain paper, eco paper, recycled
paper
A3, B4, A4R, LDR,
LGL, LTRR
yes yes no
A4, LTR yes yes yes
B5, EXE yes yes no
A5R, STMTR yes yes no
B5R yes yes no
A5, STMT, SRA3 yes no no
12"x 18" yes yes no
Special
paper
Heavy paper A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,
B5RLDR, LGL, LTR,
LTRRSRA3, 12"x 18"
yes yes no
Transparency A4, LTR yes yes no
Postcard Postcard A46R
modified; double-
postcard A5/A5R
modified
yes no no
4-plane postcard A4/A4R modified yes no no
Label paper A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR yes no no
3-hole paper same as plain paper yes yes yes
Tracing paper A3, B4, A4 yes yes no
Envelope Com10, Monarch, DL,
ISO-C5ISO-B5, YOKEI
No. 4
yes yes no

Contents
Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks....................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation ........................................................2-1
2.1.2 Check to Make Before Installation .....................................................2-8
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ......................................................................2-14
2.2.1 Unpacking and Removing the Fixing Materials ...............................2-14
2.2.2 Installing the Drum Unit ...................................................................2-16
2.2.3 Preparing for the Mounting of the Developing Assembly................2-19
2.2.4 Mounting the Cyan Developing Assembly.......................................2-22
2.2.5 Mounting the Black Developing Assembly ......................................2-27
2.2.6 Mounting the Yellow Developing Assembly....................................2-32
2.2.7 Mounting the Magenta Developing Assembly .................................2-33
2.2.8 After Mounting the Developing Assembly.......................................2-33
2.2.9 Fixing the Machine in Place..............................................................2-35
2.2.10 Connecting the Cable ......................................................................2-36
2.2.11 Setting Up the Cassette ...................................................................2-37
2.2.12 Mounting the Toner Cartridge ........................................................2-38
2.2.13 Making Initial Settings for the Developing Assembly....................2-42
2.2.14 Initializing the Drum Unit...............................................................2-43
2.2.15 Automatic Gradation Correction.....................................................2-44
2.2.16 Adjusting the Image Position..........................................................2-45
2.2.17 Others ..............................................................................................2-50
2.2.18 If Not Connected to a Network .......................................................2-51
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................2-52
2.3.1 Connecting to the Network ...............................................................2-52
2.3.2 Using PING.......................................................................................2-52
2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address ................................2-53
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ..................................................................2-54
2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network ...........................................................2-54
2.4.2 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address .....................................2-54
2.4.3 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable...............................2-54
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations .............................................................2-56
2.5.1 Checking the Images.........................................................................2-56

2.6 Relocating the Machine ...........................................................................2-57
2.6.1 Relocating the Machine ....................................................................2-57
2.7 Installing the Card Reader-C1 .................................................................2-58
2.7.1 Points to Note....................................................................................2-58
2.7.2 Checking the Contents......................................................................2-58
2.7.3 Installation.........................................................................................2-58
2.7.4 Using with NetSpot Accountant (NSA)............................................2-63
2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1 ..............................................................2-64
2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1........................................................2-64
2.9 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1 ..........................................................2-76
2.9.1 Checking the Contents......................................................................2-76
2.9.2 Installation.........................................................................................2-76
2.9.3 Making Checks After Installation.....................................................2-81
2.10 Installing the Reader Heater Kit-B1 ......................................................2-82
2.10.1 Checking the Contents....................................................................2-82
2.10.2 Installation.......................................................................................2-82

Chapter 2
2-1
2.1 Making Pre-Checks
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation 0001-7300
Select the site of installation against the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's
before delivery of the machine:
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for
exclusive use by the machine.
2) The environment of the room must be as indicated in the following diagram, and the
machine must not be installed near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or
refrigerator:
F-2-1
3) The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or
ammonium gas.
If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the window.
Humidity (%RH)
80
60
40
20
10
0 10 15 20 27.5 30
(32) (50) (59) (68) (81.5)(86)
Temperature
75
25

Chapter 2
2-2
4) The room must be well ventilated. (The level of ozone generated by the machine in use
will not affect the individuals around it. However, some may find its odor to be
unpleasant, as when working in a poorly ventilated room.)
5) The floor of the machine must be level so that the feet of the machine will remain in
contact and the machine will remain level.
6) The machine must be at least 10 cm away from any wall, permitting unobstructed use.
F-2-2
Without a Finisher or Side Paper Deck-P1 Installed
100 mm min.
1238
mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min.
500 mm min. 1035mm

Chapter 2
2-3
F-2-3
With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 Installed
F-2-4
With the Finisher-P1 Installed
100 mm min.
1238mm
1228mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min.
500 mm min.
100 mm min.
1238mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min.
500 mm min.
1228.5mm

Chapter 2
2-4
F-2-5
With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 and Finisher-P1 Installed
F-2-6
With the Finisher-Q1 Installed
100 mm min.
1238mm
1422mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min.
500 mm min.
100 mm min.
1238mm
1683mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min.
500 mm min.

Chapter 2
2-5
F-2-7
With the Saddle Finisher-Q2 Installed
F-2-8
With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 and Finisher-Q1 Installed
100 mm min.
1238mm
1787mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min.
500 mm min.
100 mm min.
1238mm
1876mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min.
500 mm min.

Chapter 2
2-6
F-2-9
With the Side Paper Deck-Q1 and Saddle Finisher-Q2 Installed
F-2-10
With the Finisher-Q1 and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/PI Installed
1980mm
100 mm min.
1238mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min. 500 mm min.
1790mm
100 mm min.
1238mm
500
mm
min.

Chapter 2
2-7
F-2-11
With he Saddle Finisher -Q2 and Paper Deck Unit-L1/M1/N1/PI Installed
F-2-12
With the Side Paper Deck-Q1, Finisher-Q1, and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 Installed
100 mm min.
1238mm
1894mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min.
500 mm min.
100 mm min.
1238mm
1983mm
500
mm
min.
500 mm min.
500 mm min.

Chapter 2
2-8
F-2-13
With the Side Paper Deck-Q1, Saddle Finisher-Q2, and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1
Installed
7) The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area. It is important to make sure,
however, that the machine is not near the air vent (for suction) of the room.
2.1.2 Check to Make Before Installation 0004-6602
1-1 Points to Make Before Installation
Be sure to go through the following before starting the work:
1) If you are installing the machine after moving it from a cold to warm location, be sure to
leave the machine unpacked for at least 2 hours so that the machine is fully used to the
site temperature, thus avoiding image faults caused by condensation. (The term
"condensation" refers to the formation of droplets of water on the surface of a metal
object brought in from a cold to warm place, i.e., as the result of the rapid cooling of the
moisture (vapor) around the object.)
2) The machine weighs a maximum of about 65 kg/ 143.3lb. Be sure to work in a group of
4 persons when lifting it.
1-2 Recording the Service Mode Settings
Be sure to record the following service mode items as part of the installation work. Fill in
100 mm min.
1238mm
2087mm
500
mm
min.

Chapter 2
2-9
the blanks as instructed herein, and be sure all these blanks have been filled at the end of the
installation work:
T-2-1
<Service Label>
T-2-2
<Drum Counter Label>
1-3 Checking the Contents
Check to be sure that none of the following contents is missing:
Initial screen Level 1 item Level 2 item Level 3 item Check
COPIER ADJUST DENS
REF-Y
REF-M
REF-C
SGNL-Y
SGNL-M
SGNL-C
Initial screen Level 1 item Level 2 item Level 3 item Check
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DR-I-INT

Chapter 2
2-11
T-2-3
Memo
The developing assembly fixing stepped screw may come in 2 pieces: collar and shank; if
so, be sure to put them together.
Check the documentation and CD against the following table:
T-2-4
[1] Drum unit 1pc [9] Touch pen 1pc
[2] Developing assembly (black) 1pc [10] Service book case 1pc
[3] Developing assembly (cyan,
magenta, yellow)
1pc each [11] Cassette size label
2pc
[4] Lower right cover 1pc [12] Wire saddle 3pc
[5] Adjusting screw 2pc [13] Do Not Copy label 4pc
[6] Developing assembly fixing
stepped screw
4pc [14] Power cable
1pc
[7]
Drum unit fixing screw
(M4x20; white)
2pc [15]
Key switch unit (not in EUR
model)
1pc
[8] Reader communications cable 1pc
iR C3100 230V
Operators manual: Reference guide
Operators manual:Copying and Mail Box Guide
Operators manual CD-ROM: NW/RUI guide
Software lisence agreement(JEFIG)

Chapter 2
2-12
T-2-5
T-2-6
T-2-7
iR C3100C 230V EUR
Operators manual: User's Guide
Operators manual CD-ROM (Ref,Copy/Box)
Operators manual CD-ROM (NW/RUI)
License agreement for software (JEFIG)
iR C3100N 230V
Operators manual: Reference guide
Operators manual: Copying and Mail Box Guide
Operators manual CD-ROM:NW/RUI
Network Quick Start Guide
UFR Driver/Utility CD-ROM
ScanGear CD
User Manual CD-ROM: printer guide
Release Note
Software lisence agreement
iR C3100CN 230V EUR
Operators manual: User's Guide
Network Quick Start Guide
User Manual CD-ROM: Printer Guide

Chapter 2
2-13
Operators manual: CD-ROM Ref,Copy/Box)
Operators manual CD-ROM: NW/RUI guide
UFR/PS/PCL Driver/Utility CD-ROM
ScanGear CD
Software lisence agreement
Release Note
iR C3100CN 230V EUR

Chapter 2
2-14
2.2 Unpacking and
Installation
2.2.1 Unpacking and
Removing the
Fixing Materials 0001-7766
1) Unpack the machine, and remove the
plastic covering.
- If you are installing a pedestal together
with the machine, unpack it also.
2) If you are installing the machine on a
Cassette Pedestal-Y1, open the right
door [1] of the pedestal.
3) Working as a group of 4 persons, hold
the grips [2], and place the machine on
the pedestal.
F-2-15
The machine weighs as much as 100 kg
(including the DADF). Be sure always
to work as a group of 4 persons when
lifting it.
Memo:
When placing the machine on a cassette
pedestal, be sure to match the 2 positioning
pins [1] found on the top surface of the
pedestal against the holes found in the base
of the machine.
F-2-16
4) Close the right door of the pedestal (in
the case of the 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1).
5) Remove the fixing tape/fixing material
from the individual parts.
- front door
- right door
- manual feed assembly
- cassette 1/2
- inside of cassette 1/2
- DADF (if found)
- copyboard glass
6) Push the cassette releasing button, and

Chapter 2
2-15
remove the cassettes 1 and 2.
Go through steps 6) through 8) only if
you are installing the machine on a 2-
Cassette Pedestal-Y1.
7) Join the machine and the pedestal using
a screw [1]. The screw comes with the 2-
Cassette Pedestal-Y1.
8) Slide the cassette 1 and 2 back in.
9) Remove the optical system fixing screw
[1] from the outside of the reader unit
right cover. (Store away the screw for
possible future relocation of the
machine.)
F-2-17
10) Open the right door.
11) Remove the 2 fixing assembly
releasing rolls [1]. One roll is set on
front side, another one roll is set rear
side.
When removing the fixing assembly
releasing roll, be sure not to force down
the jam guide [2] of the fixing assembly.
Otherwise, the force can damage the jam
guide of the fixing assembly.
F-2-18
F-2-19
12) Close the right door.

Chapter 2
2-16
2.2.2 Installing the
Drum Unit 0001-7796
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the ITB releasing lever fixing
screw (M3x20; black) [1].
F-2-20
3) Remove the wrapping from the drum
unit.
- Be sure to remove the drum protective
sheet.
- The drum counter reading recording
label comes with the drum protective
sheet. Use it for the next step (i.e.,
initializing the drum unit).
F-2-21
4) Remove the 2 charging roller releasing
rolls [1] of the drum unit.
F-2-22
Be sure not to touch or damage the
surface of the photosensitive drum in the
drum unit.
5) Check to see if there is a build-up of dust
in the area [1] of the drum unit and the
area [2] of the optical hood. As needed,
clean the areas with a cloth moistened
with water.
F-2-23

Chapter 2
2-17
F-2-24
Do not dry wipe the area. Otherwise,
static charges will build up to attract
dust.
Memo:
The laser light moves through the area
between [1] and [2] of the figure to reach
the photosensitive drum. The presence of
dust in the area will block some of the
light, thus causing white lines in the
images.
6) Turn the ITB releasing lever [1]
clockwise until it becomes locked,
thereby releasing the ITB.
F-2-25
A protrusion is found on the back of the
ITB releasing lever [1]. The ITB
releasing lever becomes locked in place
when it is turned until the protrusion has
ridden over the stopper [2].
F-2-26
The photosensitive drum [1] and the

Chapter 2
2-18
ITB [2] are in contact, and turning the
ITB releasing lever clockwise will cause
the releasing member [3] (operating in
conjunction with the lever) to push up
the ITB [2], thereby moving the ITB [2]
away from the photosensitive drum [1].
F-2-27
At this time, the ITB is slack temporarily.
If left as it is for a long time, however, the
ITB can suffer deformation. Be sure to
limit the time during which the ITB
remains slack.
7) Fit the drum unit [1] in the machine.
When fitting the drum unit in the
machine, be sure to hold it level and
move it until it butts against the rear of
the machine. If moved at an angle, the
photosensitive drum can interfere with
components inside the machine to
damage them.
F-2-28
8) Fix the drum unit in place using the 2
drum unit fixing screws (M4x20; white)
[1].
F-2-29
9) Turn the ITB releasing lever
[2]
[3]
[1]

Chapter 2
2-19
counterclockwise.
10) Fix the ITB releasing lever in place
using the ITB releasing lever fixing
screw (M3x20; black) [1].
F-2-30
2.2.3 Preparing for
the Mounting of
the Developing
Assembly 0001-7798
When turning the rotary by hand, take
care not to touch the rotating area.
1) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and detach the
delivery tray [2].
1. Take care not to damage the transfer belt
by the rib found on the back of the
delivery tray.
2. Take care not to hit the delivery sensor
flag against the tray to break it.
3. Detaching the delivery tray will expose
the ITB. If you must detach it for the
work, be sure to take full care not to
touch the belt.
F-2-31
2) Open the toner cartridge access cover
[1].
F-2-32
3) Remove the rotary lock fixing [1] (1
self-tapping screw).

Chapter 2
2-20
F-2-33
4) Remove the delivery tray lower cover
[1] (1 screw [2]).
F-2-34
5) Remove the waste toner bottle retainer
[1]. (1 TP screw [2])
6) Detach the waste toner bottle [3].
F-2-35
7) Close the toner cartridge access
cover[1].
F-2-36
8) Remove the protective plate [1]. (1
screw [2])

Chapter 2
2-21
F-2-37
Take care not to touch the ITB while
detaching the part.
9) Turn the rotary to the point of
replacement for the cyan developing
assembly as follows:
Memo:
A colored marking is used to identify the
point of replacement for cyan, yellow, and
magenta. There is no label, however, for
the black developing assembly.
F-2-38
9-1) While unlocking the rotary using a
screwdriver [1], turn the rotary [2]
counterclockwise by hand until it is near
the point of replacement for cyan.
F-2-39
Memo
Positioning a Screwdriver
To help free the rotary lock, try inserting a
screwdriver by positioning it as follows (2/

Chapter 2
2-22
3 of the angular hole).
F-2-40
9-2) Fix the rotary in place to the front side
plate using the rotary fixing [1]. Be sure
that the marking UP of the rotary fixing
[1] faces upward. The rotary fixing is the
one removed in the foregoing step
"Preparing for the Mounting of the
Developing Assembly."
F-2-41
F-2-42
Mount the developing assemblies
strictly in the following order:
1. cyan
2. black
3. yellow
4. magenta
Otherwise, the weight of the rotary can
cause it to rotate unexpectedly.
2.2.4 Mounting the
Cyan Developing
Assembly 0001-7838
1) Make a cut in the package bag of the
cyan developing assembly with scissors,
and take out the developing assembly.
Memo:
To check the color of the toner inside a
developing assembly, refer to the color of

Chapter 2
2-23
the label attached to the front of the
developing assembly.
The packaging bag is transparent; be user
to check the color of the label [1] before
opening it.
F-2-43
2) Remove the tape [1] used on the toner
shutter.
F-2-44
3) Check to see that the toner shutter [1] is
fitted all the way in the direction of the
arrow in the figure. Otherwise, move it
in the direction of the arrow unit it stops.
- if the butting is not adequate, the toner
cartridge may not settle in place.
- if the butting is not adequate, toner
leakage may occur.
F-2-45

Chapter 2
2-24
F-2-46
4) Remove the protective sheet [1] used to
cover the developing cylinder.
F-2-47
5) Hold the cyan developing assembly [1]
as shown in the figure.
F-2-48
Do not touch the sleeve surface.
6) Fit the cyan developing assembly [1] in
the rotary.
- Be sure to set the rear of the developing
assembly at an angle.
Memo:
Fit the gear and the protrusion of the
developing assembly in the hole of the
rotary flange (rear).

Chapter 2
2-25
F-2-49
- Set the front of the developing assembly
in the rotary.
When fitting the developing assembly,
take care not to bring the developing
assembly into contact with the rotary
fixing. Otherwise, the rotary fixing can
become displaced.
Memo:
Fit the protrusion of the developing
assembly in the hole of the rotary flange
(front). For a better view of the protrusion
of the developing assembly, stand to the
left of the machine's front.
F-2-50
F-2-51
7) While pushing the cyan developing
assembly in the direction of the arrow A,
fix it in place using the included
developing assembly fixing stepped
screw [1] (screw hole [2]).

Chapter 2
2-26
F-2-52
F-2-53
Memo:
If the developing assembly fixing stepped
screw came separately with its collar, be
sure to put them together before use.
8) Check to make sure there is play of
about 1.5 to 2 mm in up/down and right/
left directions of the cyan developing
assembly [1]. If not, the developing
assembly fixing stepped screw may be
failing to force the developing assembly
correctly. Loosen the developing
assembly fixing stepped screw once, and
tighten it back.
F-2-54
9) Remove the rotary fixing.
10) While freeing the rotary lock using a
the point of replacement for black.

Chapter 2
2-27
F-2-55
Memo
F-2-56
11) You need not use the rotary fixing to
fix the rotary in place at the point of
replacement for black; simply remove
the screwdriver so that it will lock into
place on its own. (In other word, the
black developing assembly does not
need a rotary fixing.)
Check the position of the screw hole
used to secure the black developing
assembly to see if the rotary is locked
correctly in position in relation to the
black developing assembly. If not, start
over.
F-2-57
2.2.5 Mounting the
Black Developing
Assembly 0002-5229
1) Cut the packaging bag of the black

Chapter 2
2-28
developing assembly with scissors, and
take out the developing assembly.
2) Remove the tape [1] used on the toner
shutter.
F-2-58
3) Check to make sure that the toner shutter
[1] is fully butted in the direction of the
arrows. If not, move the toner shutter [1]
in the direction of the arrow until it is
fully butted.
- if the butting is not adequate, the toner
cartridge may not settle in place.
- if the butting is not adequate, toner
leakage may occur.
- if the butting is not adequate, collection of
waste toner (from auto carrier refresh)
may fail, or the feedscrew/ sleeve used
to move the toner may fail.
F-2-59
F-2-60
4) Remove the protective sheet [1] used to
cover the developing cylinder.

Chapter 2
2-29
F-2-61
5) Hold the black developing assembly [1]
as shown.
Take care not to touch the cylinder
surface.
F-2-62
6) Fit the black developing assembly [1] in
the rotary.
- Set the rear of the developing assembly in
the rotary at an angle.
Memo:
Fit the gar and the protrusion of the
developing assembly in the hole of the
rotary flange (rear).
F-2-63
- Set the front of the developing assembly
in the rotary.
When fitting the developing assembly,
take care not to bring the developing
assembly into contact with the rotary
fixing. Otherwise, the rotary fixing can
become displaced.

Chapter 2
2-30
Memo:
Fit the protrusion of the developing
assembly into the hole of the rotary flange
(front).
F-2-64
F-2-65
7) While pushing the developing assembly
in the direction of the arrow A, fix it in
place using the included black
developing assembly fixing screw [1]
(screw hole [2]).
F-2-66
F-2-67
Memo:
If the developing assembly fixing screw
came separately with its collar, be sure to
put them together before use.

Chapter 2
2-31
8) Check to see if there is play of about 1.5
to 2 mm in up/down and left/right
directions of the black developing
assembly [1]. If not, the developing
assembly fixing screw may not be
pushing the developing assembly
correctly. Loosen the developing
assembly fixing stepped screw once, and
tighten it back.
F-2-68
9) While freeing the rotary using a
the point of replacement for yellow.
F-2-69
Memo
F-2-70
10) Fix the rotary in place to the front plate
using the rotary fixing [1]. Be sure that

Chapter 2
2-32
the marking "UP" on the rotary fixing
[1] faces upward.
F-2-71
F-2-72
2.2.6 Mounting the
Yellow
Developing
Assembly 0002-5232
Perform steps 1) through 9) shown for
installing the cyan developing assembly
for the yellow developing assembly.
Thereafter, perform the following steps to
fix the rotary in place for magenta:
1) While keeping the rotary unlocked using
a screwdriver [1], turn the rotary
counterclockwise by hand so that it is
positioned near the point of magenta
replacement.
F-2-73
Memo

Chapter 2
2-33
F-2-74
2) Fix the rotary in place to the front plate
using the rotary lock fixing [1]. Be sure
that the UP marking on the rotary lock
fixing [1] faces upward.
F-2-75
F-2-76
2.2.7 Mounting the
Magenta
Developing
Assembly 0002-5247
Perform steps 1) through 9) under
"Mounting the Cyan Developing
Assembly" for the magenta developing
assembly.
2.2.8 After Mounting
the Developing
Assembly 0002-5249
[1], and fit the rotary fixing [2]. (1 self-
tapping screw).

Chapter 2
2-34
F-2-77
2) Fit the protective plate [1]. (1 screw [2])
F-2-78
Take care not to touch the ITB while
attaching the part.
3) Fit the waste toner bottle [3].
4) Fit the waste toner bottle retainer [1]. (1
TP screw [2])
F-2-79
5) Mount the delivery tray lower cover [1].
(1 screw [2])
F-2-80
6) Close the toner cartridge access cover.
7) Mount the delivery tray [2], and tighten
the 2 screws [1].

Chapter 2
2-35
F-2-81
Be sure that the delivery tray [1] covers
the rib area [2] of the delivery tray lower
cover.
F-2-82
8) Close the front cover.
2.2.9 Fixing the
Machine in Place 0001-8288
- If a Pedestal Is Used
1) Move the machine to its permanent
position, and fix it in place using the 4
adjusters of the pedestal.
- If No Pedestal Is Used
1) Take out the cassettes 1 and 2, and
temporarily tighten the adjusting screw
[1] on the base plate of the machine
(with the foot of the adjusting screw
lightly in contact).
F-2-83
2) Check the table or the floor to see that
the machine will not wobble; if it does,
tighten the adjusting screw to stop it as
follows:
- if it moves in the direction of the arrow A,
tighten the screw on the right in the
figure.
- if it moves in the direction of the arrow B,
tightened the screw on the left in the

Chapter 2
2-36
F-2-84
4) Put back the cassettes 1 and 2.
2.2.10 Connecting
the Cable 0005-5443
1) Fit the 3 wire saddles [1] to the rear
cover (right) of the printer unit.
F-2-85
2)Fit the reader communication cable [2]
to the reader printer. Bundle the cable
using the wire saddles as shown, and be
sure to push the connectors on both ends
of the cable until a click is felt.
F-2-86
3) If you are installing a cassette pedestal,
remove the lattice connector cover, and
fit the lattice connector [1] of the
cassette pedestal to the machine.
F-2-87
[A]
[A]
[B]
[B]
[1]
[2]

Chapter 2
2-37
4) Connect the power plug to the power
outlet.
1. Power supply voltage shall be +/-10% of
the rating.
2. The amperage of the power supply must
be as rated.
3. Before connecting the power plug,
check to be sure that the main power
switch is off.
- The machine issues a message to indicate
that it is loading programs.
that its printer is getting ready for a job.
- In about 6 min, the machine issues a
message to indicate that it is checking
the network settings.
- Be sure to set up the cassette before the
machine completes its warm-up period.
(For instructions, see "Setting Up the
Cassette.")
2.2.11 Setting Up the
Cassette 0001-7937
1) Press the cassette release button, and
slide out the cassette to the front.
2) Check the type of paper that the user
uses, check to see that the size
configuration switch [1] of the cassette
is set to the paper size. As necessary,
change the switch position.
3) Set the paper size dial [1] to suit the size
of the paper in question.
F-2-88
4) Pick the lever [1] of the side guide plate,
and move the side guide plate to the
desired position.
5) Push the trailing edge guide plate [2] to
the right to detach. Mach the trailing
edge guide plate against a specific size
index found on the cassette bottom.
F-2-89

Chapter 2
2-38
6) Attach the cassette size label [1] that
matches the selected size of paper to the
front of the cassette.
F-2-90
7) Deposit paper in the cassette; then, slide
in the cassette.
8) Perform the same for the other cassette.
9) If a cassette pedestal is used, set it by
referring to its Installation Procedure.
2.2.12 Mounting the
Toner Cartridge 0001-7943
If the developing rotary fails to stop at
an appropriate position and thus
prevents mounting of a toner cartridge,
move it as follows before attempting to
set the toner cartridge:
1) Check to see that the screen indicates
[ready].
2) Make the following selections, and
press [OK]:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DEV-
DR-Y/M/C/K (select the desired color).
3) Check to see that the message has
changed from [service] to [ready]; then,
open the front cover and the toner
cartridge access cover, and mount the
toner cartridge in question.
1) Take out the toner cartridge from its
packaging bag.
2) When the machine has completed its
warm-up period, start service mode by
pressing the Additional Function key,
the 2 and 8 keys at the same time, and
then the Additional Function key once
again.
3) Mount the yellow toner cartridge as
follows:
3-1) Make the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DEV-
DR-Y. Then, check to see that the screen
indicates [ready], and press [OK].
Check to see that the developing rotary
moves to the point of replacement for
the yellow toner cartridge.
F-2-91
[1]

Chapter 2
2-39
3-2) Check to see that the screen indicates
[OK!] and [ready]; then, open the front
cover and the toner cartridge access
cover.
F-2-92
3-3) Hold the toner cartridge as shown with
both your hands, and move it to and for
about 5 times so as to turn over the toner
inside it.
F-2-93
When moving the toner cartridge, take
care not to touch the shutter area or turn
the knob; otherwise, the toner may start
to leak.
F-2-94
3-4) Keep the toner cartridge so that its
side with 2 arrows face upward; then, fit
it into the machine in the direction of the
arrow.
F-2-95
When fitting the toner cartridge into the
printer unit, be sure that the guide [1] of
the toner cartridge is inside the bend on
the rail [2] of the rotary assembly.
Check to be sure that the guide [1] of the
toner cartridge has not ridden over the
rail [2] of the rotary when it is fitted into
OK!

Chapter 2
2-40
the printer unit; otherwise, the machine
may suffer leakage of toner.
F-2-96
3-5) Turn the knob of the toner cartridge
clockwise until it stops.
F-2-97
3-6) Close the toner cartridge access cover
and the front cover.
4) Fit the magenta toner cartridge as
follows:
4-1) Wait until the screen indicates
[ready].
4-2) Make the following selections, and
press [OK]:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-
P>DEV-DR-M. See that the
developing rotary moves to the point
of replacement for the magenta toner
cartridge.
4-3) Check to see that the screen shows
[OK!] and [ready]; then, mount the
magenta toner cartridge as you did the
yellow toner cartridge.
5) Mount the cyan toner cartridge as
follows:
[ready].
press [OK];
P>DEV-DR-C. See that the
of replacement for the cyan toner
cartridge.
5-3) Check to see that the screen indicates
[OK!] and [ready]; then, mount the
cyan toner cartridge as you did the
yellow toner cartridge.
6) Mount the black toner cartridge as
follows:
Memo:
You need not shake the black toner
OK NG
[1]
[2]

Chapter 2
2-41
cartridge before mounting it.
[ready].
press [OK]:
P>DEV-DR-K. See that the
of replacement for the black toner
cartridge.
6-3) See that the screen indicates [OK!]
and [ready]; then, open the front
cover and the toner cartridge access
cover.
When the toner cartridge access cover
is opened, the rotary [1] may not be at
the point of cartridge replacement; if
such is the case, turn it counterclockwise
until the rotary is locked in position so
that the black toner cartridge may be
fitted in place.
F-2-98
6-4) With the side of the toner cartridge
indicating 2 arrows facing upward,
slide the cartridge in the direction of
the arrow.
F-2-99
6-5) Turn the knob of the toner cartridge
clockwise (from UNLOCK position
to LOCK position) until it stops.

Chapter 2
2-42
F-2-100
After turning the toner cartridge knob,
check to see that the triangle marking of
the toner cartridge knob is positioned
against LOCK; otherwise, the machine
can suffer leakage of toner.
F-2-101
7) Close the toner cartridge access cover.
2.2.13 Making Initial
Settings for the
Developing
Assembly 0001-7998
If you want to use service mode from
this point on, be sure to check to see that
the screen indicates [ready] before doing
so.
1) Execute stirring of the developer.
- Make the following selections, and press
[OK]:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>STI
R-4.
- When done, the machine indicates [OK!].
(in about 2 min)
2) Make ATR initial settings.
[OK]:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>IN-
3.
(in about 40 sec)
4) Record the result of the following on the
service label:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>IN-
3. Be sure that the following 6 items
have been noted:
- for ADJ>DENS>REF-Y of the label,
record the value of
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>REF-Y.
- for ADJ>DNES>REF-M of the label,
record the value of
Lock
Unlock
OK NG sample

Chapter 2
2-43
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS-REF-M.
- for ADF>DENS>REF-C of the label,
record the value of
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>REF-C.
- for ADJ>DENS>SGNL-Y of the label,
record the value of
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS-Y.
- for ADJ>DENS>SGNL-M of the label,
record the value of
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>SGNL-M.
- for ADJ>DENS>SGNL-C of the label,
record the value of
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>SGNL-C.
6) Supply toner to the developing
assembly.
[OK]:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>SP
LY-H-4.
(in bout 1 min)
2.2.14 Initializing
the Drum Unit 0001-8272
1) Initialize the drum unit by making the
following selections and pressing [OK]:
- COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DRM-
LIFE
The machine flashes [active] on its screen
while it executes initialization, which takes
about 1 min.
Do not press any of the keys, open the
door, or turn off the power switch while
initialization is under way (while
[active] is flashing); otherwise, go back
to step 1) and start over.
2) When initialization is done, check to see
that the value of the following is '0%':
- COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>DRM-
LIFE
Otherwise, go back to step 2) and start
over.
3) Record the value of the following
service mode item in the Remarks
column of the drum counter label
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DR-I-INT
4) Press the Reset key twice to end service
mode.
5) Record the date and the counter reading
to the drum counter label.
F-2-102
7) Attach the drum counter label to the
front of the drum unit.

Chapter 2
2-44
F-2-103
2.2.15 Automatic
Gradation
Correction 0001-8292
If the machine is not equipped with a
copyboard cover, fit the copyboard
cover to it. If you are installing a DADF,
perform the steps up to A. "DADF"
under 2. "Installation" of the DADF-L1
Installation Procedure.
1) Clean the machine's copyboard glass.
2) Place A3, A4, 11x17, or LTR paper in
the cassette. (See the instructions on
how to set up the cassette.)
3) Press the Additional Function key.
4) Make the following selections: adjust/
clean>auto gradation correction>full
correction>test print 1.
- The test print 1 will be printed out.
5) Place the printout of the test print 1 on
the copyboard glass as instructed on the
control panel screen.
6) Close the copyboard cover/ DADF.
7) Press [start to read].
- The machine reads the printout of the test
print 1.
- When a message appears prompting you
to remove the test print, remove the
printout of the test print 1 from the
copyboard glass.
8) Press [test print 2].
- The machine prints out the test print 2.
control panel scan.
- The machine reads the print out of the test
print 2.
- When a message appears promoting you
to remove the test print, remove the
printout of the test print 2 from the
copyboard glass.
12) Press [test print 3].
- The machine prints the test print 3.
control panel screen.
- The machine reads the printout of the test
print 3.

Chapter 2
2-45
that it has completed full correction. In
response, remove the printout of the test
print 3 form the copyboard glass.
16) Press the Reset key once to end user
mode.
2.2.16 Adjusting the
Image Position 0001-8326
1. Adjusting the Margin (1st side;
mechanical adjustment)
1) Make a copy using the cassettes 1 and 2
as the source of paper; then, check to see
that the margin on the front side is 2. +/-
1.5 mm.
F-2-104
- If the value for the cassette 1 or 2 is not as
indicated, make the following
adjustments:
2) If a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 is used, open
its right door [1].
3) Open the lower right cover [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the
cover (lower front) [3].
F-2-105
4) Slide out the cassettes 1 and 2.
5) Check the index position [1] on the
adjusting plate.
F-2-106
- Making Adjustments for the Cassette 1
0
2
4
6
8
10
(–) (+)
2.5±1.5mm
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 2
2-46
6) Free the 2 claws [2], and pull the grip
(right front) [1] in the direction of the
arrow to detach.
F-2-107
7) Loosen the fixing screw [2] of the
adjusting plate [1].
8) By referring to the index you took note
of in step 5), move the adjusting plate
back and forth. Moving it toward the
rear of the machine will increase the
margin on the image front.
F-2-108
9) Tighten the fixing screw.
10) Slide in the cassette 1.
11) Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the
source of paper; then, check to see that
the margin in the image front direction is
2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
12) Mount back the grip (front right).
13) Mount back the machine's front right
cover.
- Making Adjustments to the Cassette 2
7) By referring to the index you took note
of in step 5), move the adjusting plate
back and forth. Moving it toward the
margin on the image front side.
F-2-109
9) Slide back the cassette 2.
source of paper; then, check to see that
the margin in the image front direction is

Chapter 2
2-47
2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
11) Mount back the machine's right front
cover.
2. Adjusting the Margin (2nd side)
source of paper; then, check to make
sure that the margin on the front side is
2.5 +/-2.0 mm.
F-2-110
2) If the margin is as indicated, change the
adjustment value of the horizontal
registration for the 2nd side for the
cassette 1.
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-
C1RE
An increase by '1' will decrease the margin
on the front side by 0.1 mm.
3) Enter the adjustment value for the
horizontal registration of the 2nd side
for the cassette 1 as the adjustment value
for the horizontal registration of the 2nd
side of the cassette 2.
C2RE
2.5 +/-2 mm.
5) If the value is not as indicated, change
the adjustment value of the 2nd side for
the cassette 2.
C2RE
An increase by '1' (for DJ-C2RE) will
decrease the horizontal registration on
the front side by 0.1 mm.
6) Record the new values on the service
label.
- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE
mode.
3. Adjusting the Margin for the Manual
Feed Tray (1st side; mechanical
adjustment)
1) Place paper in the manual feed tray. For
instructions, see the label attached to the
manual feed tray.
2) Make a copy using the manual feed tray
as the source of paper; then, check to
make sure that the margin on the front
side is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
0
2
4
6
8
10
(–) (+)
2.5±2.0mm

Chapter 2
2-48
F-2-111
- If the value is not as indicated, make the
following adjustments:
3) Remove the paper from the manual feed
tray.
manual feed tray upper cover.
5) With reference to the value you took
note of in step 2), move the manual feed
upper cover back and forth. Moving it
toward the rear of the machine will
increase the margin on the front side.
F-2-112
6) Tighten the fixing screw of the manual
feed tray upper cover.
7) Place paper in the manual feed tray.
8) Make a copy; then, check to make sure
that the margin on the image front side is
2.0 +/-1.5 mm.
4. Adjusting the Margin (manual feed
tray; 2nd side)
1) Make a double-sided copy using the
manual feed tray as the source of paper;
then, check to make sure that the margin
on the front side for the 2nd side is 2.5 +/
-2.0 mm.
0
2
4
6
8
10
(–) (+)
2.5±1.5mm

Chapter 2
2-49
F-2-113
2) If the value is not as indicated, change
the horizontal registration adjustment
value for the 2nd side for the manual
feed tray.
MFRE
An increase by '1'(ADJ-MFRE) will
decrease the margin on the front side by
0.1 mm.
3) Record the new adjustment value on the
service label.
- ADJ-MFRE
mode.
5. Adjusting the Margin Along the
Leading Edge (1st side)
- Make a copy using the cassette 1 as the
sure that the margin along the image
leading edge (L1) is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm. If
not, make adjustments as follows:
1) Make the following selections in service
mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-
ADJ>REGIST.
2) Change the setting to make adjustments.
(A change of '1' will cause a shift of 0.1
mm, with a higher value moving the
image toward the leading edge.)
F-2-114
service label.
- REGIST
6. Adjusting the Margin Along the
Leading Edge (2nd side)
- Make a double-sided copy using the
cassette 1 as the source of paper; then,
check to see if the margin along the
image leading edge for the 2nd side (L)
is 2.5 +/-2.0 mm. If not, make
adjustments as follows:
mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-
ADJ>RG-REFE.
2) Change the setting, and make
adjustments. (A change of '1' will cause
0
2
4
6
8
10
(–) (+)
2.5±2.0mm
Image
L1
An increase in REGIST will shift the image
toward the leading edge of the paper.

Chapter 2
2-50
a shift of 0.1 mm, with a higher setting
moving the image toward the leading
edge.)
F-2-115
service label.
- RG-REFE
7. Correcting the Shading Position
If the output image made in copyboard
cover mode has a line, go through the
following:
mode: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-
XY>ADJ-S.
2) Change the setting to change the
shading position:
- Try +5, +10, -5, or -10 to look for the best
position (where the standard white plate is
free of scratches and dirt).
2.2.17 Others 0004-7404
1.Service Book Case
1) Peel off the double-sided adhesive tape
from the ribbed side of the service book
case [1], and attach the case to the
pedestal bottom plate.
F-2-116
Areas to Avoid:
- inside the machine (i.e., behind the front
cover)
- over the louver
- over the grip
Memo:
If no pedestal is used, attach the case to the
left cover.
2. Touch Pen
1) Fit the touch pen [1] to the control panel.
Image
L1
An increase in RG-REFE will shift
the image toward the leading edge of
paper (toward the trailing edge of feed).

Chapter 2
2-51
F-2-117
3. Lower Right Cover
1) Mount the lower right cover [1].
(Perform this step if you are installing the
machine on a pedestal other than a
Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1.)
F-2-118
4. Do Not Copy Label
1) Select the Do Not Copy label [1] of the
appropriate language, and attach it to the
reader cover (front) as indicated in the
figure.
F-2-119
2.2.18 If Not
Connected to a
Network 0005-3940
MEMO
Memo
If the machine is not connected to a
network, its control panel will display
the message “Check Connection to the
Network.” To disable the message, set
the following service mode item to ‘0’:
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> NWERR-
SW (level 2)
[1]

Chapter 2
2-52
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network
2.3.1 Connecting to the Network 0000-8240
Go through the following steps only if you are connecting the machine to a network:
1) Turn off the control panel power switch.
3) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power switch.
4) Inform the user's system administrator that the installation work is over, and ask him/her
to set up the machine for use on the user's network.
5) When network settings have been made, turn off the control power switch, and then turn
off and then on the main power switch.
2.3.2 Using PING 0000-4373
Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to a network:
If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING function to see that the
Ethernet PCB has been correctly mounted and the network settings have been correctly
made. If the user's network environment is based on IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other
hand, you need not make a PING-based check.
1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING.
2) Enter the IP address using the keypad on the control panel, and press the OK key.
3) Press the Start key.
- If the PING check is successful, the machine will indicate 'OK'; otherwise, it will indicate
'NG'.

Chapter 2
2-53
F-2-120
2.3.3 Making Checks Using a Remote Host Address 0000-4374
You can execute PING using a remote host address, thereby checking the connection to the
network.
The term "remote address" refers to the IP address of a PC terminal connected to and
operating in a TCP/IP network environment to which the machine belongs.
1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the connection to the network
using PING.
2) Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address.
3) Enter the remote host address you obtained in PING.
4) If the indication is 'OK", the machine is correctly connected to the network.
5) If the indication is 'NG", the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Go
through the following troubleshooting steps:
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
+/- OK
<NETWORK> < 1/1 > <READY >
PING
IP address input
Result(OK/NG)

Chapter 2
2-54
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network
2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network 0000-4375
Go through the following steps only if the machine is connected to the network:
If the connection to the network is not correct, you may suspect the following:
a. poor connection between the network and the Ethernet PCB
b. wrong TCP/IP setting on the machine
c. faulty Ethernet PCB or poorly mounted PCB
d. faulty user network
2.4.2 Making Checks Using a Loopback Address 0000-8237
A loopback address returns before it reaches the network PCB; therefore, executing PING
using a loopback address will enable you to find out whether the TCP/IP settings of the
machine are correct.
1) Enter the loopback address (127.0.0.1) to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', check the TCP/IP settings of the machine once again, and
then execute PING once again.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', check the local host address.
2.4.3 Checking the Connection of the Network Cable 0000-8238
The local host address is the IP address of the machine; therefore, executing PING using the
local host address, which returns after it has reached the network PCB, enables you to find
out if the network PCB is good or not.
1) Enter the IP address of the machine to PING.
- if the machine indicates 'NG', make the following checks/corrections, and execute PING
once again.
a. faulty IP address of the machine: check with the system administrator to find out if the IP
address (and its settings) assigned to the machine is correct.
b. poor connection of the network PC: check the connectors associated with the network

Chapter 2
2-55
PCB.
c. faulty network PCB: replace the network PCB.
- if the machine indicates 'OK', suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to
the system administrator, ask for corrective action.

Chapter 2
2-56
2.5 Checking the Images/Operations
2.5.1 Checking the Images 0001-8222
1) Place the test chart on the copyboard glass, and make copies using the individual
cassettes as the source of paper. then, check the images.
- check to see that the machine does not produce any abnormal noise.
- check to see that the images are produced correctly at different magnifications.
- check to see that the machine produces as many copies as specified normally.
2) Make settings (Additional Function ; e.g., date, time) to suit the needs of the user.
3) Start service mode.
- press the Additional Function key, press the 2 and 8 keys at the same time, press the
Additional Function key once gain.
4) Make the user-related settings to suit the needs of the user (COPIER>OPTION>USER).
5) Print out test prints in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT).
6) Put away the printed test print [1] in the service book case.
F-2-121
7) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.
8) Clean up the area around the machine, and fill out the service book.

Chapter 2
2-57
2.6 Relocating the Machine
2.6.1 Relocating the Machine 0001-7304
If you need to relocate the machine after installation by truck or other means of
transportation, be sure to perform the following work in advance:
If you want to move the machine intact with its pedestal, be sure not to use the machine's
grips; otherwise, the machine will come off the pedestal as when it is moved over a step.
Be sure to lift the pedestal.
1) Fix the scanner in place using the scanner fixing screw [1] that has been set aside from
the time of installation.
F-2-122
2) Put paper on the copyboard glass.
3) Remove all toner cartridges and developing assembly so that the developing rotary will
not rotate in response to vibration occurring in transit.

Chapter 2
2-58
2.7 Installing the Card Reader-C1
2.7.1 Points to Note 0001-2860
You will need a Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1 to install the Card Reader-C1.
2.7.2 Checking the Contents 0001-2898
<Card Reader-C1>
[1] Card Reader-C1 1 pc
[2] Screw (RS tightening; M4x10) 1 pc.
[3] Toothed washer 1 pc.
<Card Reader Mounting Kit-B>
[1] Card reader base 1 pc.
[2] Relay harness 1 pc.
[3] TP screw (M4x8) 1 pc.
[4] TP screw (M4x25) 1 pc.
[5] Toothed washer 1 pc.
2.7.3 Installation 0001-2930
When you have installed the Card Reader-C1, enter the numbers of the cards to be used
in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD); otherwise, the reader will
not recognize cards upon insertion.
3) Disconnect the power cable (from the power outlet) [3].

Chapter 2
2-59
F-2-123
4) Disconnect the reader power cable [1].
5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the rear right cover [3].
F-2-124
6) Remove the face plate [2] of the rear right cover using nippers or the like.
[3] Disconnect.
[2] OFF
[1] OFF
ON/OFF

Chapter 2
2-60
F-2-125
7) Connect the relay cable [1] to the machines' connector assembly.
F-2-126
8) Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws.
9) Mount the card Reader-C1 [1] and the card reader base [2] using the included TP screw
(M4x8) [4] together with its washer [3].

Chapter 2
2-61
F-2-127
10) Route the relay cable [2] through the wire saddle.
F-2-128
11) Connect the machine's cable [1] to the relay cable [2] of the Card Reader-C1.

Chapter 2
2-62
F-2-129
12) Taking care so that that the harness will not be trapped, mount the card Reader-C1 [1]
using a TP screw (M4x25) [3] together with its washer [2].
F-2-130
13) Connect the power cable to the power outlet, and turn on the power. Check to see that
the machine has entered a standby state, and start service mode.
14) Enter the numbers of the cards to be used in service mode
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD).
- Enter the lowest number of the card numbers the user is planning to use.
[1]
[2]

Chapter 2
2-63
- As many as 300 cards may be used (starting with the number you have entered).
16) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
2.7.4 Using with NetSpot Accountant (NSA) 0001-9160
1) Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control settings>group ID
control>count control; then, check to see IDs 00000001 thorough 00001000 have been
created (i.e., if you entered '1' as the first number in service mode):
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD).
2) Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control settings>network
settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address; then set up the following: IP address, gateway
address, subnet mask.
Take care. If you fail to register [system control group] and [system control ID No.], you
will not be able to perform 'register card to device' as part of NSA setup work.
3) Under [system administrator info] of Additional Function, enter any number for [system
control group] and [system control ID No.].
4) Turn off the control panel switch.
5) Turn off and then on the main power switch.

Chapter 2
2-64
2.8 Installing the NE Controller-A1
2.8.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1 0001-2145
If you want to install an NE controller-A1 to the machine, be sure to observe the following:
1. follow the laws and regulations of the country in question.
2. check to see that the host machine has properly been installed.
3. check to see that the host machine's power plug is disconnected.
4. identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
5. prepare the unit setup data on the PC at the service station.
1) Remove the 2 screws [2], and detach the upper cover [1] of the unit.
F-2-131
2) Connect the connector [3] of the power supply to the connector [4] of the unit.
F-2-132
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[3]

Chapter 2
2-65
3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the face plate [2] of the host machine's upper cover.
F-2-133
4) Remove the wire saddle [3], and detach the cable [4] of the unit.
F-2-134
5) Connect the cable [5] of the unit to the connector [6] of the host machine's DC controller.

Chapter 2
2-66
F-2-135
6) Fix the unit [7] in place to the host machine's rear cover using 4 screws [8]. (Use the
screws that come with the unit.)
F-2-136
7) Remove the slack from the cable lying between the host machine and the unit; bundle the
excess length of cable, and fix it in place using the harness band [9].

Chapter 2
2-67
F-2-137
8) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch [10] on the PCB to ON (SW2-4 so that the communication
between the unit and the host machine will be in IPC mode).
F-2-138
9) If IC6 [11] is found on the PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch [12] (SW2-7) to ON;
otherwise, shift it to OFF.
[9]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW2
[10]

Chapter 2
2-68
F-2-139
If IC6 [11] is not found, there is no need to mount one.
If you are mounting a ROM (IC6) [11] for upgrading the unit or replacing the ROM, be sure
to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch [12] to ON (SW2-7).
10) Set the bits of the DIP switch [13] (SW3) on the PCB as indicated:
F-2-140
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW2
[12]
[11]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW2
[13]

Chapter 2
2-69
T-2-8
11) Connect the power supply to the power plug; then, check to see that LED1 [14] on the
PCB (green) comes on.
Notation Setting SW3-1 SW3-2 Description
OFF OFF set the modem signal transmission level
to -16 dBm.
ON OFF set the modem signal transmission level
to -14 dBm.
SW3-1 see right OFF ON set the modem signal transmission level
to -12 dBm.
SW3-2 ON ON set the modem signal transmission level
to -10 dBm.
SW3-3 OFF set to OFF at all times.
SW3-4 ON set the line of the unit to push pulse.
OFF set the line of the unit to dial pulse.
SW3-5 ON set the dial pulse speed to 20 PPS.
OFF set the dial pulse speed to 10 PPS.
SW3-6 - not used

Chapter 2
2-70
F-2-141
12) Initialize the RAM of the unit.
See the bits of the DIP switch [15] (SW2) of the PCB as indicated; then, press the push
switch [16] (SW4) so that LED5 [17] (red) goes on.
T-2-9
bits of SW2 Setting
SW2-1 OFF
SW2-2 OFF
SW2-3 ON
SW2-4 ON
SW2-5
OFF
SW2-6 OFF
SW2-7 See step 9).
SW2-8 OFF
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
SW2
[14]

Chapter 2
2-71
F-2-142
13) When LED5 [17] (red) has come on, set the bits of the DIP switch [15] (SW2) on the
PCB as indicated, and press the push switch [16] (SW4) so that LED5 [17] (red) goes off
to indicate that RAM has been initialized.
T-2-10
bits of SW2 Setting
SW2-1 OFF
SW2-2 OFF
SW2-3 OFF
SW2-4 ON
SW2-5
OFF
SW2-6 ON
SW2-7 See step 9).
SW-8 OFF
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW2
[15]
[16]
[17]

Chapter 2
2-72
F-2-143
14) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch [18] (SW2-6) on the PCB to OFF.
F-2-144
15) Connect the telephone line to the unit.
If the unit is to be used on its own, connect the modular jack cable to the connector [19]
(LINE) of the unit.
If the extension function of the unit is to be used, connect the existing telephone or fax to
the connector [20] (TEL) of the unit, and connect the telephone line to the other connector
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW2
[15]
[16]
[17]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW2
[18]

Chapter 2
2-73
[19] (LINE) of the unit.
F-2-145
16) Call the service station, and ask for initial setup work for the unit. (In response to an
incoming call, LED4 (red) [21] of the unit will come on.)
F-2-146
17) Call the service station, and check to find out if the initial setup work for the unit has
ended. If the work failed, go back to RAM initialization, and go through steps 11) through
13).
Be sure to find out if the settings of the unit are correct by contacting the service station.
18) Check to find out if a call may be placed using the unit to the PC located at the service
station.
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
SW2
[20] [19]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
SW2
[21]

Chapter 2
2-74
Press the push switch [16] (SW4) of the PCB. In response, LED6 [22] (red) will go on;
it goes off when the transmission is done, and starts to flash if it fails.
A press on the push switch (SW4) [16] while LED6 [22] is flashing will initiate
transmission for a second time.
A press on the push switch (SW1) [23] while LED6 [22] is flashing will cancel the
ongoing transmission by the unit.
F-2-147
19) Check to see that the communication between the unit and its host machine is normal.
Connect the host machine's power plug, and turn on the power switch; then, see that
LED2 [2] (orange) flashes.
F-2-148
20) Press the host machine's Start key, and check to see that LED3 [25] (pink) flashes each
time delivery takes place.
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
SW2
[22]
[16]
[23]
LED4
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
SW2
[24]

Chapter 2
2-75
F-2-149
21) Attach the Switch Settings label [26] to the upper cover; then, record the individual
switch settings.
22) Mount the upper cover [1] in place with 2 screws [2]. When doing so, be sure that heat
cable of the power supply is secured by the cable guide inside and is not trapped by the
upper cover [1].
F-2-150
LED1 LED2 LED3
2
1
LED5
LED6
LED4
IC6
SW1
SW4
SW3
6
1
BAT1
CN4
1
2
CN3 CN2
SW2
[25]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[26]

Chapter 2
2-76
2.9 Installing the Key Switch Unit-A1
Key Switch Unit-A1
[1] Key Switch Unit 1 PC.
[2] Control key 1 pc.
[3] Binding screw (M4x6) 1 pc.
Before stating the work, be sure to go through the following on the host machine in strict
order:
1. turn off the control panel power switch.
2. turn off the main power switch.
3. disconnect the power cable (from the power outlet).

Chapter 2
2-77
F-2-151
1) Remove the 3 wire saddles [1].
2) Disconnect the connector [2], and detach the reader communication cable [3].
F-2-152
3) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2].
[3] Disconnect.
[2] OFF
[1] OFF
ON/OFF

Chapter 2
2-78
F-2-153
4) Disconnect the reader power cable [1].
5) Remove the 4 screws [2], and detach the rear right cover [3].
F-2-154
6) Remove the screw [2], and detach the bracket [1] from the key switch.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1] [1]

Chapter 2
2-79
F-2-155
7) Mount the key switch unit [2] to the key switch breaker [1] using the included screw [3]
(M4x6).
F-2-156
8) Mount the key switch bracket [1] with a screw [2].

Chapter 2
2-80
F-2-157
9) Connect the connector [1] of the key switch unit.
F-2-158
10) Remove the face plate [2] from the rear right cover [1] using nippers.

Chapter 2
2-81
F-2-159
11) Mount the rear cover of the host machine using 9 screws.
12) Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws.
13) Fit the reader communications cable.
14) Fit the reader power cable.
15) Fit the power cable (for the power outlet).
2.9.3 Making Checks After Installation 0000-8764
1) Start service mode.
2) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>KEY.
4) Turn off and then on the main power.
5) Check to see that the message "set the control key" has appeared.
6) Fit the key to the key switch unit.

Chapter 2
2-82
2.10 Installing the Reader Heater Kit-B1
[1] Reader Heater 2 pc.
[2] Clamp 3 pc.
[3] Screw (M4x6) 2 cp.
F-2-160
Thee are 2 locations for the heaters. Any of the 2 heaters may be used for any of the
locations.
Before starting the work, be sure to go through the following on the host machine in
strict order:
1. turn off the control panel power switch.

Chapter 2
2-83
2. turn off the main power switch.
3. disconnect the power cable (from the power outlet).
F-2-161
1) Open the copyboard cover/ADF.
2) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the glass retainer (right) [2].
3) Remove the copyboard glass (for copyboard cover) [3].
4) Remove the 2 screws [4], and detach the glass retainer (left) [5].
5) Remove the copyboard glass (for ADF) [6].
[3] Disconnect.
[2] OFF
[1] OFF
ON/OFF

Chapter 2
2-84
F-2-162
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass surface and the
white plate on its back. (The presence of dirt will cause a black line in the images.)
6) Mount the clamp [1].
7) Fix the heater [3] in place using a screw [2].
8) Fit the connector [4] of the heater, and fix the harness of the heater in place using the
clamp [1].

Chapter 2
2-85
F-2-163
9) Pull the drive belt (front side) [1] to the right to move the contact sensor unit [2] to the
center.
F-2-164
10) Peel off the protective sheet [1], and fit the 2 clamps [2]. (Keep the protective sheet
peeled until step 12).)
11) Fix the heater [4] in place using a screw [3].
12) Fit the connector [5] of the heater in place, and fit the harness of the heater to the clamp
[2].

Chapter 2
2-86
F-2-165
13) Put back the protective sheet.
14) Mount the copyboard glass (for DF) and the copyboard glass (for copyboard cover).
15) Mount the glass retainer (let, right) using 2 screws each.
16) Connect the power cable.

Contents
Contents
3.1 Construction...............................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Functional construction.......................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Connections Among Major PCBs.......................................................3-2
3.1.3 DC Controller PCB .............................................................................3-4
3.2 Basic Sequence...........................................................................................3-6
3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On .......................................3-6
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (full color) ..................3-8
3.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (mono color).............3-10

Chapter 3
3-1
3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional construction 0001-4573
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional blocks: general control
block, original exposure block, reader control block, printer control block, laser exposure
block, image formation block, pickup/feed block, and fixing/delivery block. For detailed
discussions of individual functions, see the chapters that follow.
F-3-1
T-3-1
[A] General Control System [1] HDD
main controller PCB [2] Accessories PCB
[B] Original Exposure System [3] Photosensitive drum
[C] Reader Unit Controller System [4] Charging
[A]
MN-CON
[D]
DC-CON
[H]
[G]
[11]
[12]
[5]
[10]
[7]
[8]
[6]
[3]
[E]
[F]
[4]
[9]
[C] R-CON
[B]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 3
3-2
3.1.2 Connections Among Major PCBs 0001-4576
The following is a diagram showing connections among individual PCBs:
reader controller PCB [5] Development
[D] Printer Unit Control System [6] Primary transfer
DC controller PCB [7] Secondary transfer/Separation
[E] Laser Exposure System [8] Fixing
[F] Image Formation System [9] Delivery/Reversal/Duplexing
[G] Fixing/Delivery System [10] Pickup
[H] Pickup/Feed System [11] Cassette 1
[12] Cassette 2

Chapter 3
3-3
F-3-2
J502
J1204
J1302
J113
J511
J1212A
J1212B
J501
J211
J222
J251 J217
J218
J252
J253
J212
J502
J506
J1201
J1
J507
J203
J640
J210
J2076
J303
J302
J254
J250
J1202
J1203
J2069
J2079
J2080 J2081
J1110
J1111
J6801
J6802
J5018
Reader unit
Printer unit
J301
J326A
J326B
J323
J323
J324
J325
J325
J321A
J329 J327
J1102
J1303
J512
J501
J205
J647
J2078
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[10]
[14]
[12]
[13]
[11]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[9]
[8]
[15]
[16]
[7]
J601
J1

Chapter 3
3-4
T-3-2
Memo:
The arrows in the diagram indicate PCB connections, not the direction of signals.
3.1.3 DC Controller PCB 0001-4577
The machine's DC controller PCB has the following functional construction:
[1] Reader controller PCB [11] AC driver PCB
[2] CIS inverter PCB [12] Accessories power supply PCB
[3] Control panel CPU PCB [13] Printer power supply PCB
[4] Control panel inverter PCB [14] Controller power supply PCB
[5] Keypad PCB [15] BD PCB
[6] Main control PCB (main) [16] Laser driver PCB
[7] Main controller PCB (sub) [17] Cassette size relay PCB
[8] DC controller PCB [18] Upper cassette size PCB
[9] High-voltage PCB (main) [19] Lower cassette size PCB
[10] High-voltage PCB (sub)

Chapter 3
3-5
F-3-3
T-3-3
BAT1: battery for SRAM (IC18) backup
IC23: CPU (equipped with boot ROM)
IC31: reset IC
IC16: flash ROM (holds system software)
IC18: SRAM (retains settings data, e.g., service mode settings)
IC19,30: used for clutch control, solenoid control, fan control
IC37: used for high-voltage control, fixing control, motor control, image control, PWM
control (for laser/high voltage)
IC16
IC18
IC19
IC23
IC30
IC37
IC31
BAT1
J324
J323
J308 J306 J304
J305 J303
J403
J307
J329
J421
J420
J327
J326
J325
J328
J309
J310
J311
J312
J313
J314
J315
J316
J322
J422
J317
J318
J319
J320 J321
J301
+24V
+3V
+5V
+13V

Chapter 3
3-6
3.2 Basic Sequence
3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0001-4578
T-3-4
Period Description
WMUP (warm-up) the drive system is at rest; lasts until the fixing roller reaches 50 degrees
Celcius.
SREADY (scanner
ready)
from when shading correction ends to when the Start key is pressed or
the main power switch is turned off.
WMUPR (warm-up
rotation)
the drive system goes on; lasts until the fixing roller reaches 190 degrees
Celcius.
PSTBY (printer
standby)
the machine is ready to accept a copy/print request signal.

Chapter 3
3-7
F-3-4
*1: if the copyboard cover (ADF) is "open," stands by at point of original size detection.
*2: uses the main or sub heater to perform temperature control (to 190 degrees Celcius)
depending on the difference in the readings of the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub
thermistor (TH2).
*3: if the temperature at a the start of the warm-up period is less than 170 degrees Celcius,
turns off the main heater; if 170 degrees Celcius or higher, turns on the main heater.
*4: executes half-speed rotation if printing does not start at the end of the warm-up period.
*5: omits the sequence if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 50 degrees Celcius
or higher at the start of the warm-up period.
*6: as a rule, executes (image stabilization control during auto adjustment) only if the
surface temperature of the fixing roller at the start of the warm-up period is less than 50
degrees Celcius.
Main power
switch ON
Main power
switch ON
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Drum/ITB motor
(M9)
Developing rotary
motor (M8)
Developing cylinder
clutch (CL3)
Auto adjustment
190 degrees
185 degrees
50 degrees
*2
*2
*3
Repeats ON/OFF
300 sec *4
*6
*5
360 sec (approx.)
480 sec
Y M C Bk
Shading correction
Shading correction
SREADY STBY
Reader motor
(M501)
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
HP sensor
(PS501)
Shading
position*1 Shading position*1
Shading position
- scanning lamp intensity
stabilization control
- gain adjustment : reverse
: forward
Rotates, stops during auto adjustment

Chapter 3
3-8
- ATR correction control
- drum film thickness detection control
- primary transfer ATVC control
- development gradation density correction control
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (full
color) 0001-4579
Full color, A4, 1 copy, Cassette 1
T-3-5
Period Description
PSTBY (print standby) when the machine is ready to accept a copy/print request signal.
PINTR (initial rotation) from when a print request signal is received to when an image signal is
generated.
PRINT from when all toner has been transferred to paper and the paper is
delivered.
LSTR (last rotation) from when the paper has been delivered to when all drive has been
stopped.

Chapter 3
3-9
F-3-5
[1] stabilizes the rotation.
[2] makes the following moves: rotary HP>Bk point of development>Y point of
development (1st color).
[3] moves to rotary HP.
[4] holds toner/carrier on the developing cylinder.
[5] transfers to paper.
[6] cleans the secondary transfer outside roller.
[7] picks up paper from the cassette.
[8] executes pre-registration.
[9] executes registration.
[10]controls to 190 degrees Celcius.
[12]executes half-speed rotation (to increase temperature of the pressure roller).
PSTBY PSTBY
PINTR
[1]
[1]
[8]
[7]
Y
Y
M
M
C Bk
C Bk
Y M C Bk
PRINT LSTR
Image reguest
signal (PVREQ)
Laser activation
Drum/ITB motor
(M9)
Primary
charging bias
Primary
transfer bias
Secondary
transfer bias
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL1)
Registration
clutch (CL2)
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub heater
(H2)
Fixing heat
retention
heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Developing
rotary motor (M8)
Developing bias
Laser scanner
motor (M1)
[10]
[10]
[11]
[11]
[10]
[10]
[12]
Start key
ON
[3]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[4]
[2]

Chapter 3
3-10
3.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations for a Print Job (mono
color) 0001-4580
Mono, A4, 2 copies, Cassette 1
T-3-6
Period Description
PSTBY (print standby) whine the machine is ready to accept a copy/print request signal.
PINTR (initial rotation) from when a print request signal has been received to when an image
signal is generated.
PRINT from when all toner has been transferred to paper to when the paper is
delivered.
LSTR (last rotation) from when the paper has been delivered to when all drive is stopped.

Chapter 3
3-11
F-3-6
[1] stabilizes the rotation.
[2] makes the following moves: rotary HP>point of Bk development
[3] moves to rotary HP.
[4] retains toner/carrier on the developing cylinder.
[5] transfers to paper.
[6] executes secondary transfer outside roller cleaning.
[7] picks up paper from the cassette.
[8] executes pre-registration.
[9] executes registration.
[12]performs half-speed rotation (to increase the temperature of the pressure roller).
PSTBY PSTBY
PINTR
[1]
[1]
[8]
[7] [7]
PRINT LSTR
Image request
signal (PVREQ)
Laser activation
Drum/ITB motor
(M9)
Primary
charging bias
Primary
transfer bias
Secondary
transfer bias
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M6)
Cassette 1 pickup
solenoid (SL1)
Registration
clutch (CL2)
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention
heater (H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Development
rotary motor (M8)
Developing bias
Laser scanner
motor (M1)
[10]
[10]
[11]
[11]
[10]
[10]
[12]
Start key
ON
[3]
[5]
[5]
[9] [8] [9]
[6]
[4]
[2]

Contents
Contents
4.1 Construction...............................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Construction and Functions.................................................................4-1
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry .....................................................4-3
4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main)...............................................................4-3
4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (sub).................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Expansion Bus PCB ............................................................................4-6
4.2.4 SRAM PCB.........................................................................................4-6
4.2.5 HDD ....................................................................................................4-7
4.3 Start-Up Sequence....................................................................................4-11
4.3.1 Overview...........................................................................................4-11
4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence.............................................................................4-11
4.4 Actions when HDD Error.........................................................................4-15
4.4.1 E602 in Detail ...................................................................................4-15
4.5 Image Processing .....................................................................................4-21
4.5.1 Outline of the Flow of Image Processing..........................................4-21
4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module .................................4-21
4.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing.........................................................4-22
4.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks............................4-23
4.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing ......................................................4-24
4.6 Flow of Image Data..................................................................................4-26
4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function)...............................................4-26
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data (Box function)..................................................4-26
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (SEND function) ..............................................4-27
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission).............................................4-28
4.6.5 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions ................................4-29
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data (PDL function) .................................................4-30
4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure...................................................................4-32
4.7.1 Controller Box...................................................................................4-32
4.7.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right)...............................................4-32
4.7.1.2 Removing the Controller Box Cover .........................................4-32
4.7.1.3 Removing the Left Cover (rear).................................................4-33
4.7.1.4 Removing the Controller Fan.....................................................4-33

4.7.1.5 Removing the Controller Box....................................................4-33
4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ............................................................4-36
4.7.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover..........................................................4-36
4.7.2.4 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)..............................4-37
4.7.2.5 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main).....................4-40
4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub)...............................................................4-41
4.7.3.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ..............................................4-41
4.7.3.4 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ................................4-42
4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB..........................................................................4-42
4.7.4.4 Removing the SRAM Board......................................................4-44
4.7.4.5 Removing the Expansion Bus PCB ...........................................4-44
4.7.4.6 After Replacing the Expansion Bus PCB ..................................4-44
4.7.5 SRAM PCB.......................................................................................4-45
4.7.5.3 Removing the SRAM Board......................................................4-46
4.7.5.4 After Replacing the SRAM Board.............................................4-46
4.7.6 UFR Board........................................................................................4-46
4.7.6.4 Removing the UFR Board .........................................................4-48
4.7.7 Ethernet Board ..................................................................................4-48
4.7.7.4 Removing the Ethernet Board....................................................4-49
4.7.8 HDD..................................................................................................4-50
4.7.8.1 Handling the HDD .....................................................................4-50

Contents
4.7.8.4 Removing the HDD....................................................................4-51
4.7.8.5 After Replacing the HDD...........................................................4-51
4.7.9 Controller Fan ...................................................................................4-53
4.7.9.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right)...............................................4-53
4.7.9.3 Removing the Controller Fan.....................................................4-54

Chapter 4
4-1
4.1 Construction
4.1.1 Construction and Functions 0000-7710
The machine's main controller block consists of the following components and provides the
functions indicated:
T-4-1
Item Description
Main controller PCB (main) controls the system, controls the memory,
controls image processing for output to the
printer
Main controller PCB (sub) processes images from the reader unit
Expansion bus PCB serves as the interface for the color LCD
controller, card reader, etc.
SRAM PCB retains service mode settings and HDD control
information
Image memory (SRAM) retains image data temporarily
Boot ROM stores programs used for booting
HDD stores system software, retains image data for
Box/fax functions

Chapter 4
4-2
F-4-1
Main controller
PCB (main)
DC controller PCB
SRAM
PCB
Main controller
PCB (sub)
Expansion
bus PCB
HDD
Reader input
image processing
- system control
- printer output
image processing
BOOT ROM
Printer unit
Memory control
Reader unit
Image memory
(SDRAM)

Chapter 4
4-3
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry
4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main) 0002-0606
The following shows the major control functions of the main controller PCB (main)
grouped according to jack/IC:
F-4-2
T-4-2
Jack No. Description
J1101 expansion bus PCB slot
J1101
J1102
J1103
J1104
J1105
J1106
HDD0
J1107
J1108
J1112
IC3
IC2
IC15
IC9
IC23
IC12
IC35
IC31

Chapter 4
4-4
T-4-3
J1102 main controller PCB (sub) connection slot
J1103 image conversion board connection slot
J1104 USB interface board/TokenRing connection slot
J1105 UFR board/OPEN I/F board connection slot
J1106 Ethernet board connection slot
J1107 image memory (SDRAM, 512 MB; standard)
J1108 image memory (SDRAM, 256 MB; optional for 100-V model or standard for
120/230-V model)
J1112 boot ROM connection slot
HDD0 hard disk connection connector
IC No. Description
IC9 controls the processing of images coming from IC12 for output to the
printer.
IC12 controls image input/output functions, image rotation function,
resolution conversion function, and binary processing function.
IC15 controls the conversion of 4-bit serial image data coming from IC9 into
8-bit parallel image data; keeps track of video count.
IC23 CPU: system control
raster JPEG compression/decompression
network controller
PCI bus controller
ROM/RAM controller
serial communication controller
IC31 I/O processing of signals

Chapter 4
4-5
4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (sub) 0002-0688
The following shows the major functions of the main controller PCB (sub) grouped
according to jack/IC:
F-4-3
T-4-4
T-4-5
IC35 HDD controller
J1302 connector for reader unit communication
IC No. Description
IC15 controls image processing of input image data from the reader unit.
IC17 controls indication of images read by the scanner.
IC No. Description
IC17
IC15
J1302

Chapter 4
4-6
4.2.3 Expansion Bus PCB 0002-0689
The following shows the major functions of the expansion bus PCB grouped according to
jack/IC:
F-4-4
T-4-6
T-4-7
4.2.4 SRAM PCB 0002-0690
The following is a discussion of the major control functions of the SRAM indicated with
reference to ICs:
J1403 connector for the SRAM PCB.
IC No. Description
IC8 LCD controller
IC10 NE controller, coin vendor, interface ASIC for card reader connection
BAT backup battery for SRAM
IC8
IC12
IC10
J1403

Chapter 4
4-7
F-4-5
T-4-8
4.2.5 HDD 0001-9933
The HDD is formatted so that there are 9 partitions (blocks) with specific tasks assigned to
them:
T-4-9
IC No. Description
IC1,2,3 (SRAM) retains control information on the image data stored on the HDD; retains
service mode settings data and Additional Function settings data
Partition Description
DOSDEV retains multipurpose data
FSTDEV retains image data
DOSDEV2 retains thumbnail display data for image data
FSTPDEV retains image data
DOSDEV3 retains multi-purpose files (e.g., PDL spool)
PDLDEV retains PDL-related files (font, registered form, ICC profile, PDL function
color correction information file)
DOSDEV4 retains user data (address books, transfer settings)
BAT1
Face Back
IC3
IC2
IC1

Chapter 4
4-8
F-4-6
The machine's system software consists of the following:
T-4-10
BOOTDEV retains system software
DOSDEV5 for future expansion
System software Description Location Remarks
System system model (controls
comprehensive system
functions)
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Language language module (controls
LCD)
HDD (BOOTDEV)
RUI language module (controls
remote UI)
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Partition Description
HDD
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
DOSDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
DOSDEV5
BOOTDEV
FSTPDEV

Chapter 4
4-9
Boot starts up the machine boot ROM DIMM
G3FAX controls G3 fax G3 fax board DIMM
Dcon controls the DC controller DC control PCB soldered
flash ROM
Rcon controls the reader controller reader controller PCB soldered
flash ROM
System software Description Location Remarks

Chapter 4
4-10
F-4-7
Main controller PCB (main)
DC controller PCB
HDD
Reader unit
BOOTDEV
BOOTDEV
SYSTEM
Language
RUI
BOOT
DCON
RCON
G3FAX
G3 Fax unit

Chapter 4
4-11
4.3 Start-Up Sequence
4.3.1 Overview 0000-7737
The system software used to control the operation of the machine is stored on the HDD.
When the machine is started up, the CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system
software from the HDD into the image memory (SDRAM) of the main controller PCB for
use as instructed by the boot program of the boot ROM.
The following screen remains on the control panel white the CPU is reading the system
memory from the HDD into the image memory (SDRAM), with the bar indicating the
progress of the startup sequence.
F-4-8
Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated. The CPU is accessing
the HDD, and turning off the power can cause a fault (E602) on the HDD.
4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence 0000-7741
<Boot ROM Area>
- Self-Diagnostic Program (interval 1)
Progress bar

Chapter 4
4-12
When the main power switch is turned on, the CPU of the main controller PCB runs a
self-diagnostic program, which checks the condition of the image memory (SDRAM)
and the HDD. If a fault is found, the machine will indicate its presence by an error code.
- Boot Program (interval 2)
When the self-diagnostic program ends normally, the CPU on the main controller PCB
executes the boot program to read the system software from the HDD, writing it to the
system area of the image memory (SDRAM).
<Image Memory (SDRAM) Area> (interval 3)
The machine initializes its various parts using the system software written into memory by
the boot program (i.e., I/F settings for the main controller).
When all ends normally, the machine becomes ready for a job (indicating the Operation
screen on the control panel, and changing the Start LED key from red to green).
F-4-9
1 3
2

Chapter 4
4-13
F-4-10
Image memory (SDRAM)
CPU
HDD
System area Image data
area
BootROM
Self diagnosis
program
Boot program
: access to program at time of execution.
- Self diagnosis program being executed

Chapter 4
4-14
F-4-11
Image memory (SDRAM)
CPU
HDD
System area Image data
area
Boot ROM
Self
diagnosis
program
Boot
program
: access to program at time of execution
: flow of system program
System
software
- Boot Program in Execution

Chapter 4
4-15
4.4 Actions when HDD Error
4.4.1 E602 in Detail 0002-3236
If the machine suffers a fault associated with E602-xxyy, it calls for different remedial
actions as identified by the sub code.
if E602-xxyy is indicated, be sure always to turn off and then on the machine (so
that it will run auto recovery sequence).
T-4-11
xx Partition yy Description
00 HDD as a
whole
01 The machine cannot recognize the HDD. The machine cannot find
BOOTDEV at time of startup.
Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the connection
of the 2 types of cables (power, IDE) connecting to the
HDD; then, turn on the power.
When doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if the
power is supplied.
02 The machine cannot find the system software for the CPU of the
main controller (main) in BOOT DEV.
Remedy:
03 The machine detects a read error sector while it is reading data from
BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
06 The machine cannot find the system software for the CPU of the
main controller (sub) in BOOTDEV.
D
F NG
F
E
NG
H F
E
NG NG

Chapter 4
4-16
T-4-12
Remedy:
07 The machine cannot find an appropriate ICCProfile in BOOTDEV/
PDLDEV.
Remedy:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
FF
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
not identified
01, 02 The machine has encountered a read error or a file system
error while starting up.
Remedy:
if xxyy is 0701, 0702.
Remedy:
Ask the user to use the RUI to collect address book
data, transfer settings, and user mode
data.
if xxyy is 0801, 0802.
Remedy:
if xxyy is FF01, FF02.
Remedy:
F
E
NG
F
E
NG
I F
B
NG NG
J F
C
NG NG
J F
E
NG NG
A F
E
NG NG

Chapter 4
4-17
03 The machine has encountered an HDD contact fault or,
operating system error.
Remedy:
Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of cable
(power, IDE) connecting to the HDD; then, turn on the
main power.
While doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if
power is supplied.
11,21 The machine has encountered an HDD contact fault.
Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the 2
types of cable (power, IDE) connecting to the HDD;
then,turn on the power.
While doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if
the power is supplied.
13,25 The machine has encountered a read error.
Remedy:
if xxyy is 0713, 0725.
Remedy:
if xxyy is 0813, 0825.
Remedy:
10,12,14,2
2,23,
24
The machine has encountered a system error or a packet data
error.
E D
F
NG NG
D
F NG
I F
B
NG NG
I F
C
NG NG
I F
E
NG NG

Chapter 4
4-18
A :
1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-
TYPE.
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to execute:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HDCHECK*.
3) When done, turn off and then on the main power.
B :
1) Find the appropriate CHK-TYPE from the table 'HDD Format' ; then, make the
followingselections, and type: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR.
C :
1)** Start up the machine in normal mode (i.e., turn on the main power while pressing the
1 and 7 keys ; then, make the following selections, and press the OK key:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD).
2) Execute formatting of DOSDEV4 using the Service Support Tool.
D:
1) Replace the main controller (main) board.
2) Remove the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM from the previous board, and
mount them on the new board.
E:
1)** Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the power while pressing the 2 and 8
keys).
2) Format the HDD (ALL) using the Service Support Tool, and download the system
software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
F:
Remedy:
F
E
NG

Chapter 4
4-19
1)** Replace the HDD, and start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main
power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys).
2) Format the HDD (ALL) using the Service Support Tool, and download the system
software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
G:
TYPE.
H:
1) Turn off the main power; then, turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys
(so that the machine will automatically start its remedial program*, turning the
control panel solid black).
2) When done (i.e., when the control panel turns white), turn off and then on the main
power.
If the machine does not run its remedial program in response to the foregoing step, go
to E.
I :
1) Find the appropriate CHK-TYPE in the table "HDD Format"; then, make the following
selections and enter CHK-TYPE.
2) Make the selections, and press the OK key to execute:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK*.
J:
1) Make the following selections, and enter '4': OPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-
TYPE.
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK (1 to 5 min).

Chapter 4
4-20
* Takes about 30 to 50 min.
** As necessary, ask the user to use the RUI to collect address book data, transfer settings,
and user mode settings.
T-4-13
HDD Format
Partition CHK-TYPE Typical data item deleted
DOSDEV 1 all relating to images (reservation, Box, fax); mode
memory, routine task button
FSTDEV 1
DOSDEV2 1
FSTPDEV 1
DOSDEV3 2 PDL spool
PDLDEV 3 PDL-related file (font, registration form, ICCProfile)
DOSDEV4 4 user data (address book, transfer settings), system
software
BOOTDEV 4
DOSDEV5 5 -
non specific 0 -

Chapter 4
4-21
4.5 Image Processing
4.5.1 Outline of the Flow of Image Processing 0000-7745
The machine processes images as follows using its various functions:
F-4-12
4.5.2 Construction of the Image Processing Module 0000-7749
The machine's major image processing is handled by the main controller PCB (main), and
the following modules are associated with the work:
- SEND
- FAX
- PullScan
- E-Mail
- PDL Print
- BOX
PC
Original
Copying
A
A
A
Printing
Scanning
Image data
Another iR machine

Chapter 4
4-22
F-4-13
4.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing 0000-7750
The image data (RGB) collected by the contact image sensor is processed by the main
controller PCB (sub).
Reader unit
SRAM
PCB Expansion bus PCB
IC9
SDRAM
IC12
IC23
Reader controller PCB
HDD
Main controller
PCB (main)
IC15
Processes image data
read by the reader unit.
Converts 4-bit serial
image data into 8-bit parallel
image data;controls video count.
Processes image data
from IC12 for output
to the printer.
Controls image
input/output.
- CPU
- controls communications
- controls memory access
- image memory
- temporarily stores program
DC controller PCB
IC15 Main controller
PCB (sub)
Reader input image
processing block

Chapter 4
4-23
F-4-14
4.5.4 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks 0000-7753
IC12 is used to compress/decompress and edit various data.
RGB
4
RGB 24
Performs processing
in place of conventional
input masking.
(corrects RGB filter
colors of the CCD).
In the case of
monochrome mode;
hereafter, Bk signals only.
- anti see-through (BE)
- Bk generation
(mono mode)
- framing
- blanking
- frame erasing
Input direct
mapping
- edge emphasis
- smoothing
RGB phase
correction
Input gamma correction
ACS
evaluation
Black character
identification
ACS evaluation
IC15 IC17
IC12
Main controller PCB (sub)
Reader unit

Chapter 4
4-24
F-4-15
4.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing 0000-7754
Main controller PCB processes image data from the Reader unit for output to the printer.
RGB 24 4-image area signal
SDRAM
HDD
PC
PDL input
Rotation
Color conversion
Binary processing
JPEG
compression
JPEG compression
JPEG
decompression
JPEG
decompression
IC23
IC9
RGB 24
IC12
Reader unit
Y M C Bk
for fax transmission
Resolution
conversion/
magnification

Chapter 4
4-25
F-4-16
- image data serial/
parallel conversion
- video count
Main controller
PCB (man)
RGB 24
Reader unit
RGB 24
area signal
CMYK
- F value adjustment
- color balance correction
- framing
- blanking
- background removal (AE)
- Bk generation
output direct mapping
RGB-to-CMY conversion
output gamma correction
Best screen selection
Smoothing
RGB 24 area signal
Y,M,C,Bk 24 area signal
If ACS identifies the original
as being black-and-white,
the machine generates
the Bk signal here.
(Otherwise, the data is
let to pass through the block.)
The text area is subjected
to UCR processing.
The correction LUT is prepared
as part of PASCAL control.
If color mode is selected,
the Bk signal is generated here.
Y,M,C,Bk
To DC controller
PCB

Chapter 4
4-26
4.6 Flow of Image Data
4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function) 0000-7755
The following shows the flow of image data when copier functions are used:
F-4-17
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data (Box function) 0000-7757
The following shows the flow of image data when Box functions are used.
RGB 24
RGB 24
SDRAM
HDD
Reader unit
Main controller
PCB (sub)
DC controller PCB
image area signal
JPEG
compression
Rotation
Color conversion
JPEG
decompression
Magnification

Chapter 4
4-27
F-4-18
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (SEND function) 0000-7760
The following shows the flow of image data when SEND functions are used.
RGB 24
RGB 24
SDRAM
HDD
Reader unit
Main controller
PCB (sub)
DC controller PCB
image area signal
JPEG
compression
JPEG
decompression
Decompression
conversion
Rotation

Chapter 4
4-28
F-4-19
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission) 0000-7764
The following shows the flow of image data when fax transmission functions are used:
RGB 24
RGB 24
SDRAM
HDD
Main controller
PCB (sub)
Reader unit
Image conversion board
for B/Wimage
image area signal
Rotation
Resolution
conversion
JPEG
compression
JPEG
decompression
Ethernet board
Binary
processing
MMR
compression

Chapter 4
4-29
F-4-20
4.6.5 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions 0000-7766
The following is the flow of image data used for fax reception functions.
RGB 24
RGB
SDRAM
HDD
Main controller
PCB (sub)
Reader unit
Fax board
image area signal
JPEG
decompression
MMR
compression
JPEG
compression
Resolution
conversion
Rotation
Binary
processing

Chapter 4
4-30
F-4-21
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data (PDL function) 0000-7770
The following shows the flow of image data when PDL functions are used:
SDRAM
HDD
DC controller PCB
Resolution
conversion
Rotation
Fax board

Chapter 4
4-31
F-4-22
SDRAM
HDD
RGB
RGB
RGB
CMYK
CMYK
GDI-UFR
LIPS
PS
DISPLAY LIST data
LIPS data
PS Print Server
Unit-D1
PS data
Open interface board UFR board
Main controller
PCB (main)
DC controller PCB
JPEG decompression
JPEG compression

Chapter 4
4-32
4.7 Parts Replacement
Procedure
4.7.1 Controller Box
4.7.1.1 Removing the
Rear Cover (right) 0002-5415
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the
reader communication cable.
2) Free the reader power supply cable [2]
from the cable clamp [3].
F-4-23
3) Detach the rear cover (left) [1] and the
other rear cover (right) [2] at the same
time. (9 screws [3])
F-4-24
Controller Box Cover 0002-5528
1) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach the
controller box cover [2].
F-4-25
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 4
4-33
Left Cover (rear) 0002-5548
rear left cover [2].
A claw is found on the side (one side)
of the cover. Pay attention to it when
detaching the cover.
F-4-26
Controller Fan 0002-0165
1) Disconnect the connector [1] of the host
machine, and remove the 2 screws [2];
then, detach the controller fan [3].
F-4-27
Controller Box 0000-9917
1) Remove the 7 screws [1].
Free the DC controller PCB base [2].
(You need not detach it.)

Chapter 4
4-34
F-4-28
2) Free the wire saddle [1], and slide the
DC controller PCB base [2] in the
direction of the arrow.
Fit the removed screw in the hole [3];
then, temporarily fix the DC controller
PCB base [2] in place.
F-4-29
main controller PCB; then, remove the 8
wire saddles.
If a fax unit is installed, you will have
to disconnect 12 connectors in the case
of a Japanese model or 11 connectors in
the case of a non-Japanese model.

Chapter 4
4-35
F-4-30
F-4-31
4) Remove the 7 screws, and detach the
controller box [2].
F-4-32
F-4-33
F-4-34

Chapter 4
4-36
If a fax unit is installed, you will find a
connector [1] on the modular PCB found
behind the controller box. Be sure to
disconnect this connector before
detaching the controller box from the
machine.
F-4-35
4.7.2 Main Controller PCB
(main)
Rear Cover 0002-5418
F-4-36
F-4-37
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 4
4-37
F-4-38
F-4-39
Main Controller PCB
(main) 0000-8109
1) Remove the 7 screws.

Chapter 4
4-38
F-4-40
Fit the removed screw in the hole [3], and
temporarily fix the DC controller PCB
base in place.
F-4-41
3) Disconnect the connector [1] of the
controller fan.
F-4-42
4) Remove the boot ROM [1] and the
image memory (SDRAM) [2].

Chapter 4
4-39
F-4-43
5) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
F-4-44
6) Remove the screws [1] [3] [5] [7], 3 pc.
each; then, detach the following:
- expansion bus PCB [2]
- main controller PCB (sub) [4]
- UFR board [6]
- Ethernet board [8]
F-4-45
7) Disconnect the 10 connectors [1], and
remove the 8 screws [2]; then, slide the
main controller PCB (main) [3] in the
direction of the arrow to detach.
to disconnect 12 connectors [1] in the
case of a Japanese model or 11
connectors in the case of a non-Japanese
model.
F-4-46

Chapter 4
4-40
F-4-47
4.7.2.5 After Replacing
the Main Controller
PCB (main) 0000-8110
When you have mounted the main
controller PCB (main), be sure to mount
the PCBs you may have removed before
starting the work:
[1] Boot ROM
[2] Image memory (SDRAM)
[3] Expansion bus PCB
[4] Main controller PCB (sub)
[5] UFR board
[6] Ethernet board
F-4-48
F-4-49

Chapter 4
4-41
4.7.3 Main Controller PCB
(sub)
DDIS cable.
F-4-50
2) Remove the rear cover (right) [1]. (9
screws [3])
F-4-51
F-4-52
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]

Chapter 4
4-42
F-4-53
Main Controller PCB
(sub) 0000-8112
main controller PCB (sub) [2].
F-4-54
4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB
DDIS cable.

Chapter 4
4-43
F-4-55
screws [3])
F-4-56
F-4-57
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]

Chapter 4
4-44
F-4-58
SRAM Board 0002-0214
1) Free the 2 locks [1], and detach the
SRAM board [2].
F-4-59
Expansion Bus PCB 0000-9926
expansion bus PCB [2].
F-4-60
the Expansion Bus
PCB 0000-9929
Mount the SRAM PCB [1] removed for the
old extension bus PCB to the extension bus
PCB [2] you have newly mounted.

Chapter 4
4-45
F-4-61
4.7.5 SRAM PCB
DDIS cable.
F-4-62
screws [3])
F-4-63
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]

Chapter 4
4-46
F-4-64
1) Free the 2 locks [1], and detach the
SRAM board [2].
F-4-65
the SRAM Board 0000-8115
- Inform the user that replacing the SRAM
board will cause all image data in Box to
be lost. Be sure to obtain the user's
consent before starting the work.
- Be sure that the SRAM board you are
using is a new one.
The machine will be likely to
malfunction if you use a RAM that
has been used in a different printer
unit.
1) Replace the SRAM board, and turn on
the main power. (The machine will
execute automatic initialization.)
2) See that the machine indicates the
message "Turn On the Power Switch on
the Right Side" on its control panel.
Turn off and then on the power.
3) Initialize the RAM.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MN-
CON
Make the foregoing selections, and press
the OK key.
4.7.6 UFR Board
DDIS cable.

Chapter 4
4-47
F-4-66
screws [3])
F-4-67
F-4-68
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]

Chapter 4
4-48
F-4-69
UFR Board 0002-0137
UFR board [2].
F-4-70
4.7.7 Ethernet Board
DDIS cable.
F-4-71
[1]
[1]

Chapter 4
4-49
screws [3])
F-4-72
F-4-73
F-4-74
Ethernet Board 0000-8206
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]

Chapter 4
4-50
Ethernet board [2].
F-4-75
4.7.8 HDD
4.7.8.1 Handling the
HDD 0002-0209
When removing the HDD, be sure to
protect against static destruction. Keep
the HDD free of impact.
F-4-76
F-4-77
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 4
4-51
F-4-78
HDD 0000-8117
1) Remove the 6 screws [1], and
disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then,
detach the HDD unit [3].
F-4-79
HDD from the HDD unit.
F-4-80
the HDD 0000-8121
A. If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not
Used
1) Format the HDD.
Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e.,
turn on the main power while holding
down the 2 and 8 keys).
Using the SST's HD formatting function,
execute formatting of all partitions. (For
details, see the instructions on how to
upgrade the machine.)
2) Download the system software.
Using the SST, download the system,
language, and RUI files.
It may take about 5 min for the machine
to start up after a download session.
B. If a Card Reader and NetSpot

Chapter 4
4-52
Accountant (NSA) Are Used
A card ID used by the NSA exists on the
HDD. If you have replaced the HDD,
you must also download the card data
used by the NSA once again; otherwise,
you will not be able to make use of
statistical management functions of the
NSA.
You will first have to format the HDD
and download the system software as for
A above; thereafter, you need to perform
additional steps:
1) Format the HDD.
3) Make the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CA
RD
4) Enter a card number.
Enter the number of the first card of those
to be used for group control, and press
the OK key. (For instance, if the group
will be using numbers between 1
through 1000, enter '1'.)
5) Turn off and then on the machine's main
power.
6) Make a check.
Make the following selections in
Additional Function: system control
settings>group ID control>count
control; then, check to make sure the
following IDs are made ready:
ID00000001 through ID00001000.
7) Set the appropriate addresses.
settings>network settings>TCP/IP
settings>IP address. Then, set the
following addresses: IP address,
gateway address, subnet mask.
8) Enter a number.
Additional Function, and enter a
number: system administrator
information settings>system control
group ID/system control ID No.
power.
Unless you set up the system control ID
and the system control ID No., you will not
be able to register a card to the machine
while using NSA.
10) Download the card ID.
Keep the machine in a standby state, and
download the card ID through the NSA.
11) Check the count control.
Additional Function to bring up the
Count Control screen: system control
settings>group ID control; then, check
to see that only the ID data you have
downloaded are indicated.
12) Check to see that the operation is
normal.
Using a user card that has been registered
to the NSA, make copies; then, check
that the number of copies you have

Chapter 4
4-53
made are associated with the card you
have used in the machine.
4.7.9 Controller Fan
DDIS cable.
F-4-81
screws [3])
F-4-82
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]

Chapter 4
4-54
F-4-83
Controller Fan 0000-8235
1) Disconnect the connector [1] of the host
machine, and remove the 2 screws [2];
then, detach the controller fan [3].
F-4-84

Chapter 5 Original
Exposure
System

Contents
Contents
5.1 Construction...............................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ..........................5-1
5.1.2 Major Components..............................................................................5-2
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System....................................................5-4
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB .......................................................................5-4
5.2 Basic Sequence...........................................................................................5-7
5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On .......................................5-7
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key
(book mode, 1 original)............................................................................5-8
5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a Press on the Start Key
(ADF mode, 1 original)............................................................................5-9
5.3 Various Control........................................................................................5-10
5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System..............................................5-10
5.3.1.1 Overview....................................................................................5-10
5.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control ................................................................5-11
5.3.2 Contact Sensor ..................................................................................5-13
5.3.2.1 Overview....................................................................................5-13
5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)............5-14
5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction.....................................................................5-16
5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction .........5-16
5.3.3.2 Changing the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction ...........5-16
5.3.4 Controlling the Scanning Lamp ........................................................5-16
5.3.4.1 Scanning Lamp...........................................................................5-16
5.3.4.2 Overview....................................................................................5-17
5.3.4.3 Activation Control......................................................................5-17
5.3.4.4 Error Detection...........................................................................5-17
5.3.5 Detecting the Size of Originals .........................................................5-18
5.3.5.1 Overview....................................................................................5-18
5.3.5.2 Points of Original Size Detection...............................................5-18
5.3.5.3 Overview of Detection Operation ..............................................5-20
5.3.6 Dirt Sensor Control ...........................................................................5-23
5.3.6.1 Overview....................................................................................5-23

5.3.7 Image Processing ..............................................................................5-27
5.3.7.1 Overview....................................................................................5-27
5.3.7.2 Driving the CCD........................................................................5-28
5.3.7.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction for the CCD Output.....5-29
5.3.7.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output..........................................5-29
5.3.7.5 Shading Correction (outline)......................................................5-30
5.3.7.6 Shading Correction ....................................................................5-30
5.3.7.7 Shading Adjustment...................................................................5-30
5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ..................................................................5-31
5.4.1 Copyboard Glass...............................................................................5-31
5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ................................................5-31
5.4.1.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass .......................................5-31
5.4.1.3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass............................................5-32
5.4.1.4 After Replacing the ADF Reading Glass ..................................5-33
5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB .....................................................................5-33
5.4.2.1 Before Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ...........................5-33
5.4.2.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover .............................................5-33
5.4.2.4 Removing the Reader Controller PCB.......................................5-35
5.4.2.5 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or After Initializing the
RAM ..................................................................................................5-38
5.4.3 Inverter PCB .....................................................................................5-40
5.4.3.3 Removing the Inverter PCB.......................................................5-42
5.4.4 Scanner Motor...................................................................................5-43
5.4.4.2 Removing the Scanner Motor ....................................................5-43
5.4.5 Contact Sensor ..................................................................................5-44
5.4.5.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover ............................................5-44
5.4.5.4 Removing the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)...............................5-46
5.4.5.5 After Replacing the CIS.............................................................5-47
5.4.6 Original Cover Sensor.......................................................................5-48

Contents
5.4.6.2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (front/rear)5-
49
5.4.7 Contact Sensor HP Sensor ................................................................5-49
5.4.7.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass.................................................5-49
5.4.7.3 Removing the Contract Sensor Home Position Sensor..............5-51
5.4.8 Original Sensor..................................................................................5-52
5.4.8.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover..............................................5-52
5.4.8.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor (AB/Inch-configuration)...5-53
5.4.9 Reader Heater (option)......................................................................5-55
5.4.9.2 Removing the Reader Heater (right)..........................................5-55
5.4.9.4 Removing the Reader Heater (left) ............................................5-56

Chapter 5
5-1
5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0000-7715
The following are the major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions associated
with the original exposure system:
T-5-1
Item Description
Source of light Xenon lamp (white)
Scan in book mode: scan by a moving contact image sensor
(CIS)
in ADF mode: scan by a stationary contact image sensor
(CIS; stream reading)
Reading resolution 600 dpi (main scanning direction) x 600 dpi (sub scanning
direction)
Number of gradations 256
Productivity (w/ ADF in use) 28 ipm (single-sided, A4/LTR)
Carriage position detection by contact image sensor (CIS) HP sensor (PS501)
Magnification 25% to 400%
in main scanning direction: image processing by the main
control PCB (main)
in sub scanning direction: image processing by the main
controller PCB (main)
Lens rod lens array
CCD number of lines: 3 (RGB)
Number of pixels: 7488
maximum reading width: 310 mm
CIS drive control by reader motor (M501)

Chapter 5
5-2
5.1.2 Major Components 0000-7724
The original exposure system consists of the following major components:
Scanning lamp activation
control
[1] by inverter circuit
[2] error detection
Original size identification [1] Book Mode
main scanning
direction:
by contact image sensor (CIS)
sub scanning mode: by reflection sensor (AB/Inch)
[2] ADF mode
main scanning
direction:
by slide guide in ADF
sub scanning
direction:
by photo sensor in ADF
Item Description

Chapter 5
5-3
F-5-1
T-5-2
Item Notation Description
Contact image sensor (CIS) xenon lamp (2 pc. of 2400 lx)
Reader motor M501 pulse motor (carriage drive control)
CIS HP sensor PS501 photointerrupter (CIS home position
detection)
Copyboard cover open/
closed sensor
PS502/PS503 photointerrupter (copyboard cover state
(open/closed) detection)
(PS502) sub scanning direction by angle of copyboard
cover (lamp ON)
copyboard cove/ADF: 25 deg (approx.)
*1: accessories settings (100/230V model only)
Reamer motor (M501)
Original sensor 2
Original sensor 1
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(rear: PS503)
Copyboard cover
Open/closed sensor
(front: PS502)
Reader heater*1
Reader heater*1
CIS HP sensor
(PS501)
Contact image
sensor (CIS)
Inverter PCB

Chapter 5
5-4
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0000-7730
The control system of the original is constructed as follows:
F-5-2
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB 0000-7731
The following shows the functional construction of the reader controller PCB:
(PS503) main scanning direction by angle of
copyboard cover (about 17 deg )
Original sensor 1 --- original size detection (AB)
Original sensor 2 --- original size detection (Inch)
J
5
0
0
J
5
0
1
J
5
0
5
J
5
0
2
J
5
1
0
J
5
1
1
J
5
1
2
J
5
0
6
J5018
J5015
J
5
0
3
/
5
0
4
Reader motor (M501)
Rear controller PCB
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(rear: PS503)
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(front: PS502) CIS HP
sensor (PS501)
CIS
Inverter PCB
To ADF
To printer
To ADF
To printer
(main controller)
Reader motor drive control
Scanning lamp activation control
CIS control
Image signal

Chapter 5
5-5
F-5-3
T-5-3
Jack Description
J500 used to supply power to the ADF.
J501 used for power from the machine (printer unit).
J502 used for communication with the machine (printer unit).
J503 used for communication with the ADF.
J504 used for communication with the ADF.
J505 used for connection to the main motor.
J506 used for connection with the original cover open/closed sensor, CIS HP sensor.
DC24V
DC15V
DC5V
DC3.3V
J500 J501
J503
J502
J504
J510
J511
J512
J505
J506
J508
IC515
IC513
IC514
IC517
IC521
IC522
IC520
IC519
IC501
IC505
CPU

Chapter 5
5-6
T-5-4
J510 used for connection with the contact image sensor (CIS).
J511 used for connection with the original size sensor (AB/Inch).
J512 used for connection with the inverter PCB.
IC Description
IC501 reader motor driver
IC505 image data parallel/serial conversion
IC513 EEPROM (backup of service mode settings)
IC514 EEPROM (backup of service mode settings)
IC515 image processing (shading correction)
IC517 A/D converter
IC519 CPU (boot program storage)
IC520 system software storage (flash ROM)
IC521 A/D converter
IC522 A/D converter
Jack Description

Chapter 5
5-7
5.2 Basic Sequence
5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0000-7733
F-5-4
F-5-5
*1: if the copyboard cover/ADF is 'open', corresponds to the point of original size detection
: reverse
: forward
Shading correction
Main power switch
ON
SREADY STBY
Reader motor
(M501)
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
CIS HP sensor
(PS501)
- scanning lamp intensity stabilization
- CIS output gain adjustment
Shading
position CIS output offset correction
Shading
position *1
shading
position *1
Shading
position
Original
leading
edge
Original size
detection
position
1. Check CIS position
2. shading adjustment
3. move to standby position *1
*1:only if the copyboard cover/ADF is 'open'
*1
CIS HP
sensor
HP

Chapter 5
5-8
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a
Press on the Start Key (book mode, 1 original) 0000-7734
F-5-6
F-5-7
: reverse
: forward
*1: if the copyboard cover/ADF is 'open', corresponds to the point of original size detection
Start key
ON
SCRW
SCFW
STBY STBY
Reader motor
(M501)
Scanning lamp
CIS HP sensor
(PS501)
Shading correction
Copyboard glass
start position
Not if within 1 min
of previous operation
Shading
position*1
Shading
position*1
Shading
position
Original
trailing edge
Copyboard glass read
start position
2. After shading correction,
move to start position
4. Mode to standby position
3. Scan original
*2: only if 1 min or more passed from previous operation.
*1: shifts only if the copyboard cover (ADF) is 'open'
*2
Shading
position
Original
leading
edge
original
trailing
edge
Original size
detection
position
*1
CIS HP
sensor
HP
*2
*1

Chapter 5
5-9
5.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operations in Response to a
Press on the Start Key (ADF mode, 1 original) 0001-4991
F-5-8
F-5-9
: reverse
: forward
Shading correction
Start key
ON
SCFW
SCRW
STBY STBY
Reader motor
(M501)
Scanning lamp
CIS HP sensor
(PS501)
Stream reading
start position
Original
trailing edge
SREADY
Shading
position
Shading
position
Shading
position
Shading
position
Shading
potion
Stream reading
start position
2. Scan original
*1
*1
*1:only if 1 min or more passed since previous operation
CIS HP
sensor
HP
Copyboard glass reading
start position

Chapter 5
5-10
5.3 Various Control
5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System
5.3.1.1 Overview 0000-7735
The following components are associated with the scanner drive system:
F-5-10
[1] Reader Motor (M501) Drive Signal
used to turn on/off the motor and change its direction/speed of rotation.
[2] Contact Image Sensor (CIS) Home Position sennsaor (PS501) Detection Signal
[1]
[2]
[3]
(reverse)
(reverse)
Carriage
CIS HP sensor
Reader motor
Contact image
sensor (CIS
Reader control PCB
Copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(PS503)
copyboard cover
open/closed sensor
(PS502)
Guide shaft
Carriage drive belt
Sensor
light-blocking
plate

Chapter 5
5-11
used to indicate that the contact image sensor (CIS) is in home position,
[3] Copyboard Cover Sensor (front, PS502; rear, PS503) Detection Sugnal
used to indicate the state (open/closed) of the copyboard cover.
used to turn on/off the motor and change its direction/speed of rotation.
[2] Contact Image Sensor (CIS) HP Sensor (PS501) Detection Signal
used to indicate that the contact image sensor (CIS) is in home position.
[3] Copyboard Cover Sensor (front, PS502; rear, PS503) Detection Signal
Used to indicate the state (open/closed) of the copyboard cover.
5.3.1.2 Reader Motor Control 0000-7738
The reader motor driver turns on/off the reader motor and controls its direction/speed of
rotation.
F-5-11
<Memo>
The machine uses any of the following scan speeds according to selected mode:
T-5-5
Function Mode Scan speed
Copy full color mode 118 mm/sec
black-and-white mode 118 mm/sec
Reader control PCB
3.3V +24V
OPT_MCK
CCW
MD_POW
M_ENABLE
RETURN
M_VREF
+5V
J505
B*
B
A
A*
CPU Motor
driver
1
2
3
4
M501

Chapter 5
5-12
a. Moving Forward to Scan an Image
when scanning the image, the machine controls the contact image sensor (CIS) by
controlling the motor as follows:
F-5-12
b. Moving in Reverse After an Image Scan
The machine maintains a specific speed (147 mm/sec) to move the contact image sensor
(CIS) to shading position after making an image scan.
SEND full-color mode (originals other than of 300 dpi or
lower; 320x450m 12"x18")
236 mm/sec
full-color mode (originals of 300 dpi or lower;
320x450, 12"x18")
118 mm/sec
black-and-white mode 236 mm/sec
Function Mode Scan speed
Start position
Accelerated
Original leading edge
Normal speed
Original
trailing edge Stop
Travel
speed
Travel distance
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[1] acceleration area: accelerates to a speed suited to the selected mode.
[2] margin area: drives to ensure a specific speed.
[3] image read area: scans an image at a specific speed.
[4] deceleration area: after the trailing edge of the image, decelerates and stops.
Decelerated

Chapter 5
5-13
5.3.2 Contact Sensor
5.3.2.1 Overview 0001-3293
The machine uses a contact image sensor (CIS) to read images, line-by line.
T-5-6
Item Description
Scanning lamp used to illuminate originals.
Rod lens array used to collect light reflected by originals.
CCD array used to collect reflected light coming through a rod lens array.

Chapter 5
5-14
F-5-13
5.3.2.2 Analog Control Inside the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) 0002-1329
The contact image sensor (CIS) read images in keeping with the following flow of analog
image processing:
uses a rod lens array to collect light reflected by the original.
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamps
(scan direction)
CCD array
Rod lens array
Image reading line
Scanning lamps
CCD

Chapter 5
5-15
-> receives light using a CCD array.
-> uses the CCD array to turn the light into an electrical signal (photo conversion), thus
preparing output.
The machine's CCD array consists of 16 channels (units) in total. Each of these channels is
equipped with an output correction table, and generates image signals after gain correction
on input intensity signals.
F-5-14
If any of the following occurs, be sure to execute the following service mode item to correct
the output among the channels:
- there is a difference in the output of the image density among channels after replacement
of the contact image sensor (CIS).
- the CCD-LUT setting is not 0 after replacement of the reader controller PCB.
<Service Mode>
D
r
i
v
e
r
c
i
r
c
u
i
t
1
9
1
0
8
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
5
1
6
1
4
1
9
1
0
8
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
5
1
6
1
4
1
9
1
0
8
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
5
1
6
1
4
CCD channel (x 16)
468 pixels
Output
Input
Ideal output characteristics
Actual output
characteristics

Chapter 5
5-16
- setting CIS unit gain correction data
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CCD-LUT
CCD Gain Fine Correction
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ2
(making adjustments using a D-10 chart)
5.3.3 Enlargement/Reduction
5.3.3.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction 0000-7742
Book mode, ADF in use
The machine reads the original in main scanning direction at 100%; any change needed in
magnification is made by processing data on the main controller PCB (main).
5.3.3.2 Changing the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction 0000-7756
Book mode, ADF in use
The machine reads the original in sub scanning direction at 100%; any change needed in
magnification is made by processing data on the main controller PCB (main).
5.3.4 Controlling the Scanning Lamp
5.3.4.1 Scanning Lamp 0000-7763
The machine's scanning lamp is a xenon lamp, in which xenon gas is sealed inside a tube.
Along the glass tube are 2 electrodes, while the inside the glass tube is coated with
phosphorous material. When a high-frequency voltage is applied to the electrodes, electrons
occur within the gas, thus causing the phosphorous material to emit light.

Chapter 5
5-17
F-5-15
5.3.4.2 Overview 0000-7759
The scanning lamp is controlled for the following, and is composed of the items indicated:
- activation/de-activation
- error detection
F-5-16
5.3.4.3 Activation Control 0000-7765
The scanning lamp is turned on/off using the drive signal (LAMP_ON) generated by the
CPU of the reader controller PCB. In response to the signal, the inverter PCB uses the drive
voltage (+16 V) from the reader controller PCB to generate high-frequency voltage in the
activation control circuit to turn on the xenon lamp.
5.3.4.4 Error Detection 0000-7768
An error in the intensity of the lamp is checked against the presence/absence of a fault when
the lamp is initially tuned on (e.g., at time of shading correction).
E225 (CIS intensity error)
- fault in the inverter PCB
Fluorescent
medium
Electrode
Opening
Electrode
Electrode
Electrode
Glass tube
1
2
3
3
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
Inverter PCB
Activation
control circuit
CPU
GND
LANP_ON
14.5V
J5015
J5018
J512
Xenon tube
CIS

Chapter 5
5-18
- fault in the reader controller PCB
- fault in the contact image sensor (CIS)
- fault in the flexible cable (poor contact)
5.3.5 Detecting the Size of Originals
5.3.5.1 Overview 0000-7771
The machine identifies the size of an original based on the measurements it takes of the light
reflected by the original at specific points of the CCD (inside the CIS) and the output of the
reflection sensor.
main scanning direction: CCD (4 points for AB; 3 points for Inch)
sub scanning direction: reflection photosensor (1 point for AB; 1 point for Inch)
1) External Light Search (main scanning direction only)
While keeping the scanning lamp on, the machine measures the level of light at specific
points of the CCD for main scanning direction.
2) Detecting the Sensor Output Level
The machine turns on the scanning lamp, and measures the CCD levels at individual
points of detection in main scanning direction.
The machine also turns on the reflection photosensor and measures its output for sub
scanning direction.
The machine identifies the size of the original based on the resulting combination of the
measurement and the output.
5.3.5.2 Points of Original Size Detection 0000-7775
The length in main scanning direction is measured by checking the intensify of light at
specific points while moving the contact image sensor (CIS) to a point 30 mm from the
leading edge of the original. The length in sub scanning direction, on the other hand, is
measured by means of the sensors mounted to the following locations:

Chapter 5
5-19
F-5-17
Point of original
detection 1
Point of original
detection 2
Point of original
detection 3
Point of original
detection 4
B5
A5 A4R
A4
STMT-R
LTR-R
LTR 11" 17"
LGL
B5R
Index plate
Original sensor 1
Index plate
B4
A3
Original size detection position
Point of original
detection 3
Point of original
detection 2
Point of original
detection 1
30mm
AB-Configuration
Inch-Configuration
30mm
Original sensor 2
Butting point
Butting point
Main
scanning
direction
Main
scanning
direction
Sub scanning direction
Sub scanning direction

Chapter 5
5-20
5.3.5.3 Overview of Detection Operation 0000-7776
- Book Mode
1 original (A4R), copyboard cover (or ADF) closed
1. Standby
CIS: in home position
xenon lamp: off
original sensor: off
F-5-18
2. Copyboard Cover Opened
CIS: moves to point of original detection
xenon lamp: off
F-5-19
3. Copyboard Cover Closed (15 deg C or more, less than 25 deg C )
a. External Light Detection
The machine executes an external light search.
CIS HP
Original sensor
Reader unit
Copyboard cover
Copyboard glass
CIS
point of detection 1
1
2
3
4
5
Original sensor
(External light)

Chapter 5
5-21
F-5-20
b. Size Detection in Sub Scanning Direction
The copyboard cover sensor identifies a "closed" state.
CIS: at point of original detection
xenon lamp: off
original sensor: on
F-5-21
4. Copyboard Cover Closed (less than 15 deg C)
c. Size Detection in Main Scanning Direction
The machine turns on the xenon lamp inside the CIS, and uses the CCD inside the CIS to
check the reflected light.
CIS: at point of original detection
xenon lamp: on
original sensor: on
25
(External light)
Original(A4R)
1
2
3
4
5
Original sensor
Original(A4R)
1
2
3
4
5
Original sensor
25

Chapter 5
5-22
F-5-22
5. Copyboard Cover Fully Closed
After the copyboard cover sensor has identified a "closed" state, the machine checks for
a change in the output level of the original sensor (CCD point of detection) for 3 sec. If
there is no change in the level of output, the machine identifies the condition to indicate
the presence of an original.
The machine uses combinations of changes in the levels of 6 locations to identify the size
of the original:
F-5-23
6. Standby (in wait for a press on the Start key)
CIS: moves to home position
xenon lamp: off
Original(A4R)
1
2
3
4
5
Original sensor
15
Original(A4R)
1
2
3
4
5
Original sensor

Chapter 5
5-23
F-5-24
F-5-25
5.3.6 Dirt Sensor Control
5.3.6.1 Overview 0001-4990
When reading an original, the machine changes the point of reading or corrects image data
in reference to the presence/absence of dust on the stream reading glass/ADF platen roller,
thereby avoiding the effects of dust on images. The machine executes this control only
when the ADF is used and, in addition, when it is closed.
<Timing of Control>
- at the end of a job
CIS HP
Copyboard glass
AB-Configuration
A3
A4
B4
B5
A4R
A5
B5R
No original
Original
size 1 2 3 4 5
Original
sensor1
Inch-Configuration
11"X17"
LTR
LGL
LTR-R
STMT-R
No original
Original
size 1 2 3
Original
sensor2
: Change absent
: Change present

Chapter 5
5-24
- between sheets (each time a sheet is read)
- at the start of a job (only if any of the following is met)
/first job after power-on
/presence of dust at all points of detection at the end of the previous job
/failure of dust detection at the end of the previous job (e.g., the ADF is opened)
F-5-26
<Particulars of Control>
- At the End of a Job (dust detection)
The contact image sensor (CIS) checks the light reflected by the platen roller of the ADF
at a point of reading to find out the presence/absence of dust. If the presence of dust is
detected, the contact image sensor moves to the next candidate point (2 times max.; A -
> B -> C; B -> C -> A; or C -> A -> B).
The point identified will be used as the point of reading for the next job.
- For the control at the end of a job, the sensor will never move to point D.
- For the control at the end of a job, a message prompting cleaning of the glass surface will
be indicated if an original is placed in the ADF while the presence of dust has been
detected at all points (A, B, C). The Start key is disabled until the message is cleared.
- At the Start of a Job (dust avoidance)
The same detection mechanism as used at the end of a job is executed; if the presence of
dust is detected at all points (A, B, C), the sensor is moved to point D for reading operation.
If the control is at the end of a job that takes place at point D, it will be after moving the
sensor to point D.
Main power
switch
ON
Dust detection control
STBY
WMUPR
Start key
ON
1st
SCAN
2nd
SCAN

Chapter 5
5-25
F-5-27
- Between Sheets
The contact image sensor (CIS) is not moved for detection of dust.
The machine undertakes reading at a point determined by control executed at the end of a
job or at the start of a job; if the presence of dust is identified, the machine executes image
correction.
D A B C
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
At start of job
At end of job

Chapter 5
5-26
T-5-7
F-5-28
Location Image
correctio
n
Gain correction
against reference
position
A reading reference location yes no
B point about 0.5 mm toward roller inside from
reference position
yes no
C point about 1.0 mm toward roller inside from
reference position
yes no
D point about 4.0 mm toward roller outside from
reference position (no dust detection)
no yes
Scanning lamp
Stream
reading
glass
Contact image sensor (CIS)
Platen roller
Lens
0.5mm
0.5mm
D A B C

Chapter 5
5-27
<Service Mode>
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DST-POS (level 1)
- use it to set an original reading position when the ADF is in use.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L1 (level 1)
- use it to adjust the dust reading detection level for between sheets.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L2 (level 1)
- use it to adjust the dust reading detection level for the end of a job.
5.3.7 Image Processing
5.3.7.1 Overview 0001-4976
The image processing system has the following major specifications and functions:
T-5-8
F-5-29
The PCB used by the image processing system has the following functions:
- CCD Number of lines: 3 (RGB, 1 line each)
Number of pixels: 7488
Size of pixel: 42.3 um
- Shading Correction Shading correction; executed for each job
Shading adjustment: executed in service mode
CCD
Analog image processing block Digital image processing block
Shading processing
Analog image
processing
A/D
conversion
Contact image
sensor (CIS)
Controller block

Chapter 5
5-28
T-5-9
The machine processes images using its reader controller PCB line by line, and the
processing consists in the following;
1. Analog Image Processing
- drives the CCD
- performs gain correction and offset correction for the CCD output
- performs A/D conversion for the CCD output
2. Digital image Processing
- performs shading correction
F-5-30
5.3.7.2 Driving the CCD 0001-4979
The machine's CCD sensor is a linear image sensor that consists of 3 lines (RGB, 1 line
- Reader Controller PCB drives the CCD, performs analog image processing,
performs A/D conversion, performs shading
correction
CCD (RGB, 1 line each)
Analog
image signal
Analog
image processing
- gain correction
- offset correction
A/D
conversion
CCD drive control
SCD control
signal
Line correction
data
Digital
image signal
Even-numbered
pixel
Odd-numbered
pixel
Odd-
numbered
pixel
Even-
numbered
pixel
CCD/AP circuit
10
Digital
image signal
8
Contact image sensor (CIS)
Target
value
J203
EEP-ROM
SRAM
CPU
Shading
correction

Chapter 5
5-29
each), and it is composed of 7488-pixel photocells. The signals generated through photo
conversion at the light-receiving segment are sent as analog signals according to pixels in
the order of G, B, and R.
F-5-31
5.3.7.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction for the CCD Output 0001-4980
The analog video signal from the CCD is subjected to gain correction (in which the rate of
amplification is corrected to a specific level) and offset correction (in which the output
voltage in the absence of incident light is also corrected to a specific level).
5.3.7.4 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output 0001-4981
The analog signal after correction is then converted into 8-bit digital signals that comply
with the individual levels of pixel voltage by the A/D converter.
CCD15 CCD13
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
CCD1
CCD2
CCD16 CCD14
R
G
B
R
G B R
G B R
G B G B ......
output
Single analog
shift register

Chapter 5
5-30
5.3.7.5 Shading Correction (outline) 0001-4983
An original of even density does not necessarily mean uniform CCD output because of the
following factors:
1. variation in the sensitivity of each pixel of the CCD
2. uneven intensity across the rod lens array
3. difference in intensity of light between the center and ends of the scanning lamp
4. deterioration of the scanning lamp
The machine performs shading correction to correct any discrepancy in the output of the
CCD. It performs shading correction at power-on and or for each job.
5.3.7.6 Shading Correction 0001-4985
The machine executes shading correction for each scan of the original. It measures the
density of the standard white plate, and compares the measurement against the target value
stored in the shading correction circuit; the machine then sets up the difference as the
shading correction value, and uses it to correct any variation among CCD pixel when
scanning the originals, thus evening out the image density levels.
F-5-32
5.3.7.7 Shading Adjustment 0001-4984
The machine measures the density of the standard while plate, and uses the result as density
data. The data is then subjected to computation to obtain the target value for use during
shading correction.
CCD output
Original density
Standard while plate
Characteristics
before correction
Target value
Measurement
Characteristics
after correction
White

Chapter 5
5-31
Procedure
5.4.1 Copyboard Glass
Copyboard Glass 0000-8289
1) Open the copyboard cover (or ADF).
glass retainer [2]; then, detach the
copyboard glass [3].
F-5-33
When removing the copyboard glass,
take care not to touch the following:
- glass surface
- standard white plate
The presence of dirt can cause white/
black lines in the images. If dirt is found,
clean it with lint-free paper moistened
with alcohol.
F-5-34
the Copyboard Glass 0002-4562
A. Enter the value indicated by the bar

Chapter 5
5-32
code found at the upper right on the
copyboard glass (copyboard cover)
using the following service mode items:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Y
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Z
(standard white plate white level data X, Y,
Z)
F-5-35
B. Enter the value indicated by the bar code
found at the upper left of the copyboard
glass (copyboard sheet) using the
following service mode item:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BOOK-RG
(offset value against color displacement
caused by copyboard glass)
F-5-36
ADF Reading Glass 0000-8298
1) Open the copyboard glass (or ADF).
glass retainer [2].
3) Remove the ADF reading glass [3].
F-5-37
When removing the ADF reading
glass, take care not to touch the glass
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
BOOK-RG
-04

Chapter 5
5-33
surface.
be sure to clean it using lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
the ADF Reading
Glass 0002-4567
Enter the value indicated by the bar code
found on the ADF reading glass using the
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>DF-RG
caused by stream reading glass)
F-5-38
5.4.2 Reader Controller PCB
5.4.2.1 Before Replacing
the Reader Controller
PCB 0002-3678
If an ADF is used, be sure to execute P-
PRINT of service mode to obtain its
printout:
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-
PRINT
Reader Rear Cover 0002-3679
1) Open the copyboard cover (or the ADF).
2) Disconnect the reader communications
cable [1] and the ADF communications
cable [2] (if equipped with an ADF).
F-5-39
reader rear cover [2].
DF-RG
002

Chapter 5
5-34
F-5-40
F-5-41
- glass surface
with alcohol.

Chapter 5
5-35
F-5-42
Reader Controller
PCB 0000-8305
1) Remove the cover [1].
F-5-43
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and
detach the flexible cable [2].
F-5-44
cover [3].

Chapter 5
5-36
F-5-45
detach the 4 wire saddles [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws [3].
F-5-46
5) Go to the back of the machine, and free
the cable from the 5 wire saddles [1];
then, disconnect the connector [2].
F-5-47
F-5-48
cover [2].

Chapter 5
5-37
F-5-49
free the cable from the wire saddle [2].
F-5-50
9) Remove the 2 screws [1], and pull out
the reader controller PCB base [2].
F-5-51
10) Remove the 9 screws [1], and detach
the reader controller PCB [2].

Chapter 5
5-38
F-5-52
the Reader Controller
PCB or After
Initializing the RAM 0002-4571
- Before replacing the reader controller
PCB, be sure to generate the latest P-
PRINT printout.
<if you are initializing the RAM of the
reader controller without replacing the
PCB>
- Using the SST, upload the reader
controller backup data; after initializing
the RAM, download the data, thus
eliminating the need for the following
adjustment.
1. Reader Unit-Related Adjustment
1) Using the SST, download the latest
system software (R-CON).
m o d e :
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>R-
CON; then, press the OK key to
initialize the RAM. Thereafter, turn off
and then on the main power.
3) Enter the appropriate values using the
following service mode items:
a. standard white plate white level data
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-
PLT-X,Y,Z
b. offset value against color
displacement for copyboard glass
(copyboard cover)
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BOOK-
RG
c. offset value against color
(ADF)

Chapter 5
5-39
F-5-53
d. service label (behind reader unit left
cover) values
d-1. CIS read position adjustment (fixed
reading)
C O P I E R > A D J U S T > A D J -
XY>ADJ-X
d-2. main scanning direction position
adjustment (fixed reading)
XY>ADJ-Y
d-3. shading position adjustment (fixed
reading)
XY>ADJ-S
d-4. sub scanning direction color
displacement correction
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-
RG
d-5. main/sub scanning direction MTF
value
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-
MG,SG
d-6. auto gradation correction target
value
COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL>OF
ST-P-Y,M,C,K
If the value of the following was not 0
before the replacement of the reader
controller PCB:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>CCD-
LUT.
Set a value other than '0' once again, and
make the following adjustments using
the D-10 Chart.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-
ADJ2
2. ADF-Related Adjustment
The machine keeps ADF-related
service mode data in the RAM of the
reader controller; as such, you will have
to make the appropriate adjustments if
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
DF-RG BOOK-RG

Chapter 5
5-40
you have replaced the reader controller
or initialized the RAM.
1) Enter the values indicated in the P-
PRINT printout you have previously
generated for the following:
a. main scanning direction position
adjustment (stream reading)
C O P I E R > A D J S U T > A D J -
XY>ADJ-Y-DF
b. original stop position adjustment
FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST
c. original feed speed (magnification)
adjustment
FEEDER>ADUST>LA-SPEED
2) Make adjustments using the following
items:
a. tray width adjustment
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A4
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A5R
FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-
LTR
LTRR
b. CIS read position adjustment (stream
reading)
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>S
TRD-POS
c. white level adjustment
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-
WLVL1
WLVL2
When you have finished the foregoing
adjustments, put the P-PRINT printout [1]
you have previously generated in the
service book cassette to replace the old P-
PRINT printout.
F-5-54
5.4.3 Inverter PCB

Chapter 5
5-41
F-5-55
F-5-56
F-5-57
- glass surface
with alcohol.

Chapter 5
5-42
F-5-58
Inverter PCB 0000-8315
remove the 2 screws [2].
F-5-59
2) While freeing the 3 hooks [1], detach the
inverter PCB [2].
F-5-60

Chapter 5
5-43
5.4.4 Scanner Motor
F-5-61
F-5-62
Scanner Motor 0000-8316
1) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then,
disconnect the connector [2], and detach
the 2 wire saddles [3].
F-5-63
2) Remove the spring [1], and detach the
scanner motor [2].

Chapter 5
5-44
F-5-64
5.4.5 Contact Sensor
Reader Front Cover 0002-3843
copyboard glass retainer (right) [2].
F-5-65
copyboard glass retainer (left) [2].
F-5-66
reader front cover [4].
F-5-67

Chapter 5
5-45
F-5-68
F-5-69
F-5-70
- glass surface
with alcohol.

Chapter 5
5-46
F-5-71
Contact Image Sensor
(CIS) 0000-8407
1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the
direction of the arrow so that the contact
image sensor (CIS) [2] will move where
it is shown in the figure.
F-5-72
plate [2].
F-5-73

Chapter 5
5-47
3)
When detaching the contact sensor
unit, take care not to touch the scanning
lamp and the lens assembly.
F-5-74
Disconnect the connector [1], and remove
the flexible cable retainer [2]; then, remove
the other flexible cable [3], and detach the
contact image sensor (CIS).
F-5-75
When mounting it, be sure to connect
the flexible cable [1] before fitting the
contact image sensor (CIS) [2] to the
machine.
F-5-76
the CIS 0002-4560
Be sure to enter the values indicated on the

Chapter 5
5-48
CIS label attached to the contact image
sensor (CIS) using the following service
mode items:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG
caused by CIS)
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG
(MTF correction value for main scanning
direction)
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-SG
(MTF correction value for sub scanning
direction)
F-5-77
Also, be sure to update the values indicated
on the service label attached behind the
reader left cover by the values indicated on
the CIS label.
Reference:
The machine is not shipped out of the
factory with the CIS label attached to it.
5.4.6 Original Cover Sensor
F-5-78
-012. 72. 70
CCDU-RG
MTF-MG
MTF-SG

Chapter 5
5-49
F-5-79
Copyboard Cover
Open/Closed Sensor
(front/rear) 0000-8322
remove the screw [2]; then, detach the
sensor base [3].
F-5-80
2) Detach the 2 sensors [1] from the sensor
base.
F-5-81
5.4.7 Contact Sensor HP
Sensor

Chapter 5
5-50
F-5-82
- glass surface
with alcohol.
F-5-83

Chapter 5
5-51
glass retainer [2].
F-5-84
surface.
Contract Sensor Home
Position Sensor 0000-8404
1) Pull the drive belt [1] in the direction of
the arrow so that the contact image
sensor (CIS) [2] is where indicated in
the figure.
F-5-85
remove the CIS home position sensor
[3].
When detaching the sensor, do so as if
to push it under the claw [2] found at the
rear.
F-5-86

Chapter 5
5-52
After replacing the sensor, pull the
drive belt (rear) [1] in the direction of
sensor (CIS) [2] is returned to the
farthest left.
F-5-87
5.4.8 Original Sensor
F-5-88
F-5-89

Chapter 5
5-53
F-5-90
- glass surface
with alcohol.
F-5-91
Original Size Sensor

Chapter 5
5-54
(AB/Inch-
configuration) 0000-8323
1) Remove the cover.
F-5-92
detach the flexible cable [2].
F-5-93
cover [3].
F-5-94
4) Free the hook [1], and detach the
original sensor [2].
F-5-95

Chapter 5
5-55
5.4.9 Reader Heater (option)
F-5-96
- glass surface
with alcohol. F-5-97
Reader Heater (right) 0000-8325
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free

Chapter 5
5-56
the cable from the wire saddle [2].
2) Remove the screw [3], and detach the
reader heater (right) [4].
F-5-98
glass retainer [2].
F-5-99
surface.
Reader Heater (left) 0000-8326
1) Pull the drive belt (front) [1] in the
direction of the arrow so that the contact
image sensor (CIS) [2] is where it is
indicated in the figure.

Chapter 5
5-57
F-5-100
2) Peel the protective sheet [1], and
disconnect the connector [2].
3) Free the cable from the wire saddle [3],
and remove the screw [4]; then, detach
the reader heater (left) [5].
F-5-101
After replacing the sensor, pull the
drive belt (rear) [1] in the direction of
sensor is returned to the farthest left.
F-5-102

Contents
Contents
6.1 Construction...............................................................................................6-1
6.2 Parts Replacement Procedure.....................................................................6-3
6.2.1 Laser Scanner Unit..............................................................................6-3
6.2.1.1 Removing the Left Cover.............................................................6-3
6.2.1.2 Removing the Left Grip (front)....................................................6-3
6.2.1.3 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ...............................................6-3
6.2.1.4 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit ......................................6-5
6.2.2 Dust-Proofing Glass Cleaning Pad......................................................6-5
6.2.2.1 Removing the Dust-Blocking Glass Cleaning Pad ......................6-5

Chapter 6
6-1
6.1 Construction
T-6-1
T-6-2
T-6-3
T-6-4
Laser Light
Wave length 785 to 800p nm (infrared)
Output 5 mW
Number of beams 2
Scanner Motor
Type of motor DC brushless
Revolution 16000 rpm (approx.)
Type of bearing Oil
Polygon Mirror
Number of facets 6
Control Mechanisms
Synchronization In main scanning direction
In sub scanning direction (write start position)
Intensity control APC control
PWM control

Chapter 6
6-2
Others Laser activation
Laser scanner motor control
Laser shutter control
Control Mechanisms

Chapter 6
6-3
Procedure
6.2.1 Laser Scanner Unit
Left Cover 0002-0498
left cover [2].
F-6-1
Left Grip (front) 0001-8205
left grip (front) [2].
F-6-2
Laser Scanner Unit 0000-9265
anti-vibration plate [2].
F-6-3
2) Pull out the dust-blocking sheet [1] to
the front to detach.
[2]
[1]
[1]

Chapter 6
6-4
F-6-4
3) Free the cable from the 3 cable clamps
[1], and disconnect the 3 connectors [2].
F-6-5
laser scanner unit fixing plate [2].
F-6-6
5) Lift the laser scanner unit [1], and free
the 4 bosses [2]; then, pull it to the front
to detach.
F-6-7
Take care not to touch the element on
the laser drive PCB [2] or the dust-
blocking glass [1] (laser exposure area)

Chapter 6
6-5
of the laser scanner unit. Also, take care
not to hit the laser drive PCB [2] against
the machine.
F-6-8
the Laser Scanner Unit 0001-6204
Enter the values indicated on the label
attached to the laser scanner unit using the
- COPIER>ADJUST>LASER>LA-
DELAY
6.2.2 Dust-Proofing Glass
Cleaning Pad
Dust-Blocking Glass
Cleaning Pad 0002-2972
2) Pull out the dust-blocking glass cleaning
tool [1] to the front to detach.
F-6-9
3) Free the claw [1], and detach the dust-
blocking glass cleaning pad [2].
F-6-10

Contents
Contents
7.1 Construction...............................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System ..................................7-1
7.2 Image Formation Process...........................................................................7-4
7.2.1 2-Side Placement Control ...................................................................7-4
7.3 Basic Sequence...........................................................................................7-6
7.3.1 Power-On ............................................................................................7-6
7.3.2 Copying/Printing (normal speed)........................................................7-8
7.3.3 Copying/Printing (half-speed).............................................................7-9
7.3.4 Copying/Printing a Mix of Color and Black-and-White Originals...7-10
7.4 Image Stabilization Control .....................................................................7-11
7.4.1 Timing of Image Stabilization Control .............................................7-11
7.4.2 ATR Control......................................................................................7-13
7.4.3 Drum Film Thickness Detection Control..........................................7-18
7.4.4 PASCAL Control (image gradation density correction)...................7-18
7.4.5 Development Gradation Density Correction Control .......................7-19
7.4.6 Auto Gradation Correction Function ................................................7-20
7.5 Drum Unit ................................................................................................7-22
7.5.1 Drum Unit .........................................................................................7-22
7.5.1.1 Construction of the Drum Unit ..................................................7-22
7.5.1.2 Charging Bias Control................................................................7-23
7.5.1.3 Drum Cleaning...........................................................................7-24
7.5.1.4 Drum Unit Drive Path ................................................................7-26
7.6 Developing Rotary ...................................................................................7-28
7.6.1 Construction of the Developing Rotary ............................................7-28
7.6.2 Developing Rotary Control...............................................................7-29
7.6.3 Developing Assembly Drive Path.....................................................7-32
7.7 Developing Unit.......................................................................................7-34
7.7.1 Construction of the Developing Unit ................................................7-34
7.7.2 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh control)....................................7-35
7.7.3 Developing Bias Control...................................................................7-39
7.8 Toner Container .......................................................................................7-41
7.8.1 Construction of the Toner Cartridge .................................................7-41

7.8.2 Toner Level Detection Control.........................................................7-42
7.8.3 Toner Supply Control .......................................................................7-44
7.9 Transfer Device........................................................................................7-47
7.9.1 Construction of the Transfer Assembly ............................................7-47
7.9.2 ITB Home Position Detection Control .............................................7-48
7.9.3 Transfer Bias Control........................................................................7-51
7.9.4 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB).................................7-53
7.9.5 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller .............................7-54
7.9.6 ITB Waste Toner Collection Mechanism .........................................7-55
7.9.7 Transfer Assembly Drive Path..........................................................7-56
7.9.8 Transfer Assembly Swing Control....................................................7-57
7.9.9 Separation .........................................................................................7-59
7.10 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................7-61
7.10.1 Drum Unit ......................................................................................7-61
7.10.1.1 Removing the Drum Unit.........................................................7-61
7.10.1.2 Points to Note When Mounting the Drum Unit.......................7-63
7.10.1.3 After Replacing the Drum Unit................................................7-64
7.10.2 Development Unit...........................................................................7-65
7.10.2.1 Finisher-P1 in Use....................................................................7-65
7.10.2.2 Removing the Delivery Tray ...................................................7-65
7.10.2.3 Removing the Delivery Tray Lower Cover .............................7-66
7.10.2.4 Removing the ITB Waste Toner Unit......................................7-67
7.10.2.5 Removing the Developing Unit ...............................................7-67
7.10.2.6 Points to Keep in Mind When Fitting the Developing Unit ....7-70
7.10.2.7 After Replacing the Developing Unit (Y, M, C) .....................7-71
7.10.2.8 After Replacing the Developing Unit (Bk)..............................7-72
7.10.3 Rotary Upper Cover........................................................................7-72
7.10.3.2 Removing the Rotary Upper Cover .........................................7-74
7.10.3.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Drum Unit.......................7-75
7.10.4 Rotary Lower Cover .......................................................................7-75
7.10.4.1 Removing the Left Cover.........................................................7-75
7.10.4.2 Removing the Left Grip (front)................................................7-76
7.10.4.3 Removing the Rotary Lower Cover.........................................7-76
7.10.5 ITB Cleaning Unit...........................................................................7-76
7.10.5.1 Preparing for the Removal of the ITB Cleaning Unit..............7-76

Contents
7.10.5.2 Removing the Delivery Tray....................................................7-77
7.10.5.4 Removing the ITB Waste Toner Unit ......................................7-78
7.10.5.5 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit ............................................7-78
7.10.5.6 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB Cleaning Unit...........7-80
7.10.6 ITB Waste Toner Unit.....................................................................7-83
7.10.6.1 Removing the ITB Waste Toner Unit ......................................7-83
7.10.7 Intermediate Transfer Unit..............................................................7-83
7.10.7.3 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)...................................7-86
7.10.7.4 Removing the Right Door ........................................................7-87
7.10.7.5 Removing the Fixing Unit........................................................7-88
7.10.7.6 Removing the Fixing Release Arm Plate.................................7-89
7.10.7.7 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)..............7-90
7.10.7.8 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB Unit ..........................7-93
7.10.7.9 Points to Note When Mounting the Drum Unit .......................7-94
7.10.7.10 After Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ....................7-95
7.10.8 ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit ....................................................7-95
7.10.8.3 Removing the ITB Waste Toner Detection Unit......................7-96
7.10.9 Intermediate Transfer Belt ..............................................................7-97
7.10.9.2 Removing the Delivery Tray..................................................7-100
7.10.9.3 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear).................................7-100
7.10.9.4 Removing the Right Door ......................................................7-101
7.10.9.5 Removing the Fixing Unit......................................................7-103
7.10.9.6 Removing the Fixing Release Arm Plate...............................7-104
7.10.9.7 Removing Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)..................7-104
7.10.9.8 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)....................7-107
7.10.9.9 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB ................................7-110
7.10.9.10 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB Unit ......................7-111
7.10.9.11 Points to Note When Mounting the Drum Unit ...................7-112
7.10.9.12 After Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Belt...................7-113
7.10.10 ITB Home Position Sensor PCB.................................................7-114

Contents
7.10.10.1 Removing the Drum Unit.....................................................7-114
7.10.10.2 Removing the Delivery Tray ...............................................7-116
7.10.10.3 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear) ..............................7-117
7.10.10.4 Removing the Right Door....................................................7-118
7.10.10.5 Removing the Fixing Unit ...................................................7-119
7.10.10.6 Removing the Fixing Release Arm Plate.............................7-120
7.10.10.7 Removing the Intermediate Toner Unit (ITB unit)..............7-121
7.10.10.8 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) .................7-124
7.10.10.9 Removing the ITB Home Position Sensor PCB ..................7-126
7.10.10.10 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB............................7-127
7.10.10.11 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB Unit....................7-128
7.10.10.12 Points to Note When Mounting the Drum Unit.................7-130
7.10.11 Primary Transfer Roller..............................................................7-130
7.10.11.7 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)..........7-137
7.10.11.8 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) .................7-140
7.10.11.9 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller................................7-143
7.10.11.10 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB............................7-143
7.10.11.11 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB Unit....................7-145
7.10.11.12 Points to Note When Mounting the Drum Unit.................7-146
7.10.11.13 After Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller.....................7-147
7.10.12 Secondary Transfer External Roller............................................7-147
7.10.12.1 Removing the Separation Static Eliminator.........................7-147
7.10.12.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller ..............7-148
7.10.12.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Secondary Transfer Outside
Roller................................................................................................7-148
7.10.12.4 After Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller .....7-150
7.10.13 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller.............................................7-150

Contents
7.10.13.4 Removing the Right Door ....................................................7-154
7.10.13.5 Removing the Fixing Unit....................................................7-156
7.10.13.7 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit (ITB unit)..........7-157
7.10.13.8 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)..................7-160
7.10.13.9 Removing the Secondary Transfer Inside Roller.................7-163
7.10.13.10 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB ............................7-165
7.10.13.11 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB Unit ....................7-166
7.10.13.12 Points to Note When Mounting the Drum Unit .................7-167
7.10.14 ITB Cleaning Blade.....................................................................7-168
7.10.14.1 Preparing for the Removal of the ITB Cleaning Unit..........7-168
7.10.14.2 Removing the Delivery Tray................................................7-169
7.10.14.3 Removing the Delivery Tray Lower Cover .........................7-170
7.10.14.4 Removing the ITB Waste Toner Unit ..................................7-170
7.10.14.5 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit ........................................7-170
7.10.14.6 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade......................................7-172
7.10.14.7 When Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade............................7-173
7.10.14.8 Points to Note When Mounting the ITB Cleaning Unit.......7-174
7.10.15 ITB Fan .......................................................................................7-176
7.10.15.3 Removing the ITB Cleaning Fan .........................................7-177
7.10.16 Separator Eliminator ...................................................................7-178
7.10.16.1 Removing the Separation Static Eliminator.........................7-178
7.10.17 ATR Sensor Unit.........................................................................7-179
7.10.17.1 Removing the Left Cover.....................................................7-179
7.10.17.4 Removing ATR Sensor Unit ................................................7-180
7.10.18 Environment Sensor PCB ...........................................................7-182
7.10.18.2 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)...............................7-184
7.10.18.3 Removing the Right Door ....................................................7-185
7.10.18.4 Removing the Fixing Assembly Release Arm Plate............7-186
7.10.18.5 Removing the Fixing Unit....................................................7-186
7.10.18.6 Removing the Patch Image Read Sensor .............................7-188

Contents
7.10.18.7 Removing the Environment Sensor PCB.............................7-188
7.10.18.8 Points to Note When Mounting the Drum Unit...................7-189
7.10.19 Patch Image Sensor.....................................................................7-190
7.10.19.4 Removing the Fixing Assembly Release Arm Plate............7-194
7.10.19.6 Removing the Patch Image Read Sensor.............................7-196
7.10.19.7 Points to Note When Mounting the Drum Unit...................7-196

Chapter 7
7-1
7.1 Construction
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System 0000-9261
T-7-1
T-7-2
Drum Unit
Photosensitive drum
Drum type OPC
Drum diameter 62 mm
Cleaning mechanism cleaning blade
brush roller
process speed 137 mm/sec
Primary charging assembly
Charging method roller charging
Charging roller diameter 14 mm
Cleaning mechanism none
Developing Unit
Developing cylinder diameter 20 mm
Development method dry, 2-component
Toner non-magnetic negative (S
toner)
Toner level detection (to ensure a
specific level)
video count data, patch
image density
measurement
Starter comes filled

Chapter 7
7-2
T-7-3
T-7-4
Toner Cartridge
Toner level detection
Toner detection path image density
measurement
Toner level indication toner supply amount (video
count data, patch image
density measurement)
Toner amount Y: 170 g
M: 170 g
C: 170 g
Bk: 635 g
(including about 95 g of
carrier)
Intermediate transfer
assembly
Construction intermediate transfer belt
(ITB)
(ITB)
Drive method from drum/ITB motor
through gears
Feed speed
Plain paper 137 mm/sec
Thick paper, postcard,
transparency*1
68.5 mm/sec
Cleaning mechanism Cleaning blade
*1: in the case of full color mode, 68.5 mm/sec; of mono color mode, 137 mm/sec.

Chapter 7
7-3
T-7-5
Image stabilization control
ATR control corrects toner density
(supply amount)
Drum film thickness detection
control
corrects development
contrast
Development contrast control determines appropriate
primary charging DC bias
and developing DC bias
ATVC control ensures good transfer
PASCAL control corrects image gradation
density characteristics
development gradation density
correction control
corrects development
gradation density
characteristics
Intermediate transfer
assembly

Chapter 7
7-4
7.2 Image Formation Process
7.2.1 2-Side Placement Control 0000-9344
The machine uses the paper placement control mechanism to increase productivity.
In principle, when full color copies are made or when thick paper is used to generate
multiple output, the machine forms images for 2 output sides on its ITB.*1
The machine uses the ITB HP signal when forming images for both 1st and 2nd sides.
EX: Full color, Plain paper, A4, 2 copies
The machine forms 4-color (YMCBk) images on its ITB in the following sequence:
F-7-1
T-Y1/M1/C1/Bk1: time from when the ITB HP signal is detected to when the PVREQ
signal for the 1st side is sent.
T-Y2/M2/C2/Bk2: time from when the ITB HP signal is detected to when the PVREQ
signal is sent.
*1 The machine uses the 1-side placement mechanism for the following, as they do not
permit the use of the 2-side placement mechanism:
- there is a delay in the transmission of the image data for the 2nd side from the main
controller.
- the length of the paper in sub scanning direction is in excess of 216 mm.
- the manual feed tray is used as the source of paper.
ITB HP signal
PVREQ signal
Image on ITB
T-Y1 T-Y2
Y1 Y2 M1 M2 C1 C2 Bk1 Bk2
T-M1 T-M2 T-C1 T-C2 T-Bk1 T-Bk2
*2 *2 *2 *2
Length of 1 ITB cycle Length of 1 ITB cycle Length of 1 ITB cycle Length of 1 ITB cycle

Chapter 7
7-5
- the No. 3 delivery slot is used for delivery.
- the first 2nd or the last 2nd copy is being handled in duplex mode.
- envelopes are used.
*2: the HP signal is ignored in this interval.

Chapter 7
7-6
7.3 Basic Sequence
7.3.1 Power-On 0000-9343
The machine goes thorough the following sequence of operations when its main power
switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 50 deg C
(as in the morning, when the machine is turned on after being left alone for a long time).
<Characteristics>
- immediately after the start of the sequence, the machine checks the home position of the
developing rotary and removes charges from the drum surface.
- stirs up the developer inside the individual developing units (colors), and deposits an even
coating of developer on the developing cylinder.
- the machine takes about 360 sec from when the main power switch is turned on to when
it enters a standby state.
- the machine executes the following image stabilization control mechanisms while warm-
up rotation is taking place:
ATR correction control, drum film thickness detection control, primary transfer ATVC
control, developing gradation density correction control

Chapter 7
7-7
F-7-2
*1: in about 30 sec after the machine enters a standby state, it causes the secondary transfer
outside roller to move away from the ITB.
<if the main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is
50 deg C or more>
- the machine does not stir the developer.
- in principle, the machine does not execute image stability control; however, it executes
development gradation density correction if any of the following conditions exists:
- there has been a significant change in the environment since the previous execution of the
developing gradation density correction mechanism.
- the cumulative number of copies has reached 200 if full color or 1000 if mono color.
- the machine takes about 11 to 60 sec from when the main power switch is turned on to
when it enters a standby state.
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Primary charging
bias (AC)
Developing
bias (DC)
Developing
bias (AC)
Drum/ITB motor
(M9)
Secondary transfer
outside roller swing
clutch (CL9)
Patch image reader
sensor (PS23)
ATR sensor
(PS27)
Secondary toner bias
ITB cleaning
clutch (CL8)
Primary transfer
bias
Main motor
(M2)
Developing rotary
motor
Toner supply
Developing cylinder
clutch (CL3)
WMUPR
Y M C Bk
PSTBY
Main power
switch
ON
CNTR
Rotation, suspension during automatic adjustment
Bk Bk
Y M C
Bk
YMC Bk
Y M C
Blade in contact
Charge removal from drum
Stirring developer
Blade in contact
Roller in contact
Blade not in contact
Primary transfer ATVC
YMC
Drum film thickness detection
Development gradation density correction control
ATR control
*1
*1

Chapter 7
7-8
7.3.2 Copying/Printing (normal speed) 0000-9346
Full color, Plain paper, A4, 2 copies
<Characteristics>
- in the case of multiple output, the machine forms images for 2 sides of the same color on
the ITB in succession. (2-side placement)
- while an image is on the ITB, the machine keeps the ITB cleaning blade and the secondary
transfer outside roller from the ITB.
F-7-3
*1: the machine applies a specific level of bias so as to prevent adhesion of toner and carrier
form the developing cylinder to the drum.
*2: the machine moves the secondary transfer roller from the ITB 30 sec after it has entered
a standby state.
<Mono Color Copying/Printing>
- the machine always uses the 1-side placement mechanism (as there is no need for
depositing images of different colors on the ITB, i.e., the image formed on the ITB is
immediately transferred to paper).
PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
ITB HP signal
Drum /ITB motor
(M9)
ITB cleaning clutch
(CL8)
Main motor
(M2)
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Developing bias
(DC)
Developing bias
(AC)
Developing cylinder
clutch (CL3)
Primary transfer
bias
Secondarytransferoutside
rollerswingclutch(CL9)
Secondary transfer
bias
Primary charging
bias (AC)
Developing rotary
motor (M8)
Start key
ON
Stabilized rotation
Secondary transfer ATVC
ITB cleaning
ITB cleaning
Y1
Y M Bk
Y M Bk
Y2 Bk1 Bk2
1st copy 2nd copy Secondary transfer outside
roller cleaning
*1 *1
*2
*2

Chapter 7
7-9
- the machine keeps the ITB cleaning blade and the secondary transfer outside roller in
contact with the ITB at all times (even while an image is being formed on the ITB.
7.3.3 Copying/Printing (half-speed) 0001-4757
Full color, Thick paper, Postcard, Transparency, A4, 1 copy
<Characteristics>
- after forming an image on the ITB (all colors), the machine slows down the drum/ITB
motor until they rotate at half its normal speed before it starts transfer operation.
F-7-4
*1: while the drum/ITB motor is rotating at a low speed, the machine applies a specific
primary charging bias so as to prevent the toner on the ITB from returning to the drum.
*2: the machine applies a specific level of developing bias so that the toner and carrier on
the developing cylinder will not adhere to the drum.
*3: the machine moves the secondary transfer outside roller from the ITB about 30 sec after
it has entered a standby state.
<Mono Color Copying/Printing>
- Unlike when using normal speed, the machine forms images for 2 sides on the ITB in
Y M C Bk
Y M C Bk
Y
Y
M
M
C
C
Bk
Bk
PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
ITB HP signal
Drum/ITB motor
(M9)
ITB cleaning clutch
(CL8)
Primary charging
bias (DC)
Developing bias
(DC)
Developing bias
(AC)
Developing cylinder
clutch (CL3)
Primary transfer
bias
Secondary transfer
outside roller swing
clutch CL9)
Secondary transfer
bias
Primary charging
bias (AC)
Developing rotary
motor (M8)
Start key
ON
*2
Stabilized rotation Half-speed rotation
Secondary transfer ATVC
IITB cleaning
ITB cleaning
Secondary transfer
outside roller cleaning
*2
*3
*3
*1
Main motor (M2)

Chapter 7
7-10
succession to increase the productivity of making multiple copies/prints. (2-side
placement)
7.3.4 Copying/Printing a Mix of Color and Black-and-
White Originals 0000-9349
The machine does not use special processing for the sequence it uses to make copies/prints
of a mix of color and black-and-white originals; in other words, its operation is the same as
the operation it uses to make copies/prints of color only or black-and-while only originals.

Chapter 7
7-11
7.4 Image Stabilization Control
7.4.1 Timing of Image Stabilization Control 0001-6270
At Power-On
<Characteristics>
- in principle, the machine executes image stabilization control only when the surface
temperature of the fixing roller is less than 50 deg C. However, it executes development
gradation density correction control if any of the following conditions exist when the
surface temperature of the fixing roller is 50 deg C or more:
- there has been a significant change in the environment since the execution of the previous
development gradation correction control.
- the cumulative number of copies has reached 200 if full color or 1000 if mono color.
- when the cover is opened/closed, toner cartridge is replaced, or return is made from a jam
state, the machine executes image stabilization control if the surface temperature of the
fixing roller is less than 50 deg C at the time.
- the machine takes about 127 sec to complete the execution.
F-7-5
*1: corrects the patch density target value (ATR sensor), corrects the toner supply amount
(patch image read sensor).
The following is a table of times taken by automatic control, including image stabilization
control.
Main power
switch ON
ATR control *1 Drum film
thickness
detection
control
Primary transfer
ATVC control
Development
graduation
density
correction control
STBY
WMUPR

Chapter 7
7-12
T-7-6
In Response to a Press on the Start Key (mono color)
F-7-6
*1: corrects the toner supply amount; executes every 80 copies of 6 % originals (about 11
sec).
*2: executes every 200 copies (small size; about 6 sec).
Operation Time
(approx.)
Power-on/Cover
open/close
if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is
less than 50 deg C
about 258 sec
if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 50
deg C or more
about 11 sec
Return from jam
state
less than 50 deg C
about 263 sec
deg C or higher
about 24 sec
Toner cartridge
replacement
less than 50 deg C
about 319 sec
deg C or more
about 75 sec
Return from low-power mode about 11 sec
Start key
ON
ATR control *1
LSTR
PRINT
STBY INTR
secondary transfer
ATVC control
1st
PRINT
80th
PRINT
200th
PRINT
secondary transfer
ATVC control *2

Chapter 7
7-13
In Response to a Press on the Start Key (full color)
F-7-7
*1: corrects the patch density target value; executes every 50 copies (about 25 sec).
*2: executes every 50 copies (small size; about 6 sec)
During Last Rotation
F-7-8
*1: the cumulative copies/prints made since the previous execution of ATR control
(correction of the toner supply amount based on the patch image density measurement)
has reached 48 (Bk only; about 11 sec).
*2: there has been a significant change in the environment (about 40 sec).
*3: the cumulative number of copies/prints made since the previous execution of ATR
control (correction of the density target value based on the measurement of the developer
density on the developing cylinder) has reached 40 for full color (Y, M, C only; about 25
sec).
7.4.2 ATR Control 0000-7855
The machine executes ATR control to keep the density (ratio of toner/carrier) inside the
developing unit to a specific level, which otherwise would change over time.
Start key
ON
LSTR
PRINT
STBY INTR
secondary transfer
ATVC control
1st
PRINT
50th
PRINT
- ATR control *1
- secondary transfer ATVC control *2
ATR control*3
STBY
PRINT LSTR
ATR control*1
Last
PRINT
Primary transfer
ATVC control*2

Chapter 7
7-14
The machine is not equipped with a means (sensor) of directly measuring the level of toner
inside the developing unit. In its place, the machine forecasts the consumption of toner with
reference to video count data to make up for the consumption of toner. The toner supply
amount computed from the video count data is corrected at such times as programmed: the
machine uses the difference in potential between the primary charging bias and the
developing bias to form a patch density on the photosensitive drum. It reads the density of
the patch using the patch image read sensor, and compares the result against the density
target value to increase or decrease the toner supply amount. If the density of the patch
image changes because of changes in the developer characteristics, the machine will not be
able to keep the density of the developer inside the developing unit to a specific level, which
would cause the toner to move astray inside the machine or carrier to stick to the drum. To
prevent such a problem, the machine corrects the density target value at such times as
programmed, thereby keeping the density of developer inside the developing unit to a
specific level. (In the case of Y, M, or C, the machine uses the density of the developer
measured by the ATR sensor; in the case of Bk, on the other and, the machine corrects the
density target value based on the reading of the counter designed for the developing unit
(Bk; i.e., how may sheets have moved past it).

Chapter 7
7-15
F-7-9
[1] Patch image read sensor
[2] ATR sensor
[3] ATR sensor shutter
Bk
C
M
Y
[2] [3]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-16
Flow of ATR Control
F-7-10
These individual measurements may be checked in service mode.
Bk: Selects a density target with reference
to the number of pages (image formations)
since installation
Y/M/C: Determines a density target correction
value with reference to the initial density and
the developer density on the developing
cylinder (measured by the ATR sensor)
Density target
Correction of Density Target Correction of Toner Supply Amount
Basic Control
Measures the patch image
density.
(patch image read sensor)
Video count data
Computes the toner supply
amount from the video
count data.
Determines the toner
supply amount.
Toner supply operation
Computes a corrective value
for the toner supply amount
based on the density target
and the density measurement.
<Conditions Prompting>
- the supply amount has reached
a specific value.
- the number of pages
(image formations) has reached
a specific value.
<Conditions Prompting>
Bk: the cumulative number of pages
(image formations) produced since
installation has reached a specific
number.
Y/M/C:the cumulative number of pages
(image formations) produced in
full-color mode has reached a
specific number.

Chapter 7
7-17
T-7-7
Memo:
Checking the Soiling of the Window
When the window of the light-emitting/receiving segment of the patch image read sensor
becomes soiled with stray toner, the machine will not be able to accurately measure the
density of the patch image. To avoid the problem, the machine checks the patch image read
sensor for soiling. While initial multiple rotation is under way, the machine measures the
light from the surface of the drum without depositing any toner on it (drum background
measurement); it will assume that the window is soiled if the measurement is lower than a
specific level (COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS>P-SENS-P), thus indicating an error code
(E020-0081) and stopping its operation.
Although the machine does not check the ATR sensor for soiling, the sensor is equipped
Item Description Optimum
value
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
DENS-Y/M/C/K Use it to check the discrepancy of the patch image
density from the target value. (%) [patch image read
sensor]
-25 to +25
P-SENS-P Use it to check the background measurement taken of
the photosensitive drum. (P wave; positive reflection
component) [P wave; patch image read sensor]
400 to 600
SGNL-Y/M/C Use it to check the measurement of the developer
density on the developing cylinder. [ATR sensor]
225 to 863
REF-Y/M/C Use it to check the reference signal value of the
developer density on the developing cylinder. (direct
light from LED) [ATR sensor]
464 to 560
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
SGNL-Y/M/C Use it to check the initial setting of the developer
density on the developing cylinder. [ATR sensor]
336 to 752
REF-Y/M/C Use it to check the initial reference signal value of the
developer density on the developing cylinder. (direct
light from LED) [ATR sensor]
464 to 560

Chapter 7
7-18
with a shutter to prevent soiling; the shutter opens only when the ATR sensor measures the
developer density on the developing cylinder and remains closed at other times.
7.4.3 Drum Film Thickness Detection Control 0001-5930
As more and more copies are made, the film thickness of the photosensitive drum decreases;
to make up for the decrease in the film thickness and, thus to correct the development
contrast, the machine checks the film thickness with reference to the current flowing over
the drum surface to determine the development contrast correction value.
1. using a specific level of charging AC bias, the machine removes charges from the drum
surface.
2. the machine applies a specific level of charging DC bias to the primary charging roller,
and measures the current flowing in response (i.e., current flowing over the drum surface)
using the high-voltage PCB.
3. the machine communicates the detected current level to the DC controller PCB, and finds
out the thickness of the drum film from the current level.
4. the machine determines the development contrast correction value based on the film
thickness of the drum.
<Timing of Control>
See "Timing of Image Stabilization Control>
7.4.4 PASCAL Control (image gradation density
correction) 0001-2313
The machine executes PASCAL control to ensure stable gradation density characteristics
of images. It corrects the characteristics that otherwise would tend to change as a result of
changes in the environment and deterioration of the photosensitive drum.
It reads a gradation pattern (64-gradation) of a test print using its reader unit to prepare an
image density correction table.
starts up

Chapter 7
7-19
generates a text pattern (3 types, stored in the main controller) automatically.
reads the test pattern print-out placed in the reader unit.
prepares an image correction table A.
<Timing of Control>
- as needed (when 'Full Adjust' is under way under auto gradation correction in Additional
Function)
7.4.5 Development Gradation Density Correction Control 0001-2314
The machine executes development gradation density correction so that the gradation
density characteristics of images formed on the drum are stable against the changes that
otherwise would occur because of changes in the environment and the deterioration of the
environment.
The machine reads the patch image pattern (YMCK; 9 gradations each) formed on the
photosensitive drum using the patch image read sensor, and prepares an image density
correction table.
starts up
using the patch image read sensor, measures the light reflected by the surface of the drum.
forms a patch image pattern on the drum drawn from patterns stored in the main controller
(without toner in the patch image)
using the patch image read sensor, measures the density of the patch image pattern.
prepares an image correction table B or C.

Chapter 7
7-20
<Timing of Control>
- as needed (while 'Full Adjust' or 'Quick Adjust' under auto gradation correction is under
way in Additional Function
- automatic
7.4.6 Auto Gradation Correction Function 0001-2882
The machine corrects the mage density correction table so as to obtain an ideal set of
gradation characteristics. It executes the control in response to a command sent in
Additional Function.
F-7-11
The machine permits the selection of 'Full Adjust' or 'Quick Adjust' for Additional Function
auto gradation correction. In full or quick mode of correction, the machine combines
PASCAL control and development gradation density correction control for execution.
Full Adjust
1. using the density data of the gradation pattern in the test pattern collected by the reader
unit, prepares an image correction table A. (PASCAL control)
2. from the density data of the gradation pattern on the drum read by the patch image read
Actual gradation
characteristics
Ideal gradation
characteristics
0 255
1.45
Image density
Relationship between laser output and image density

Chapter 7
7-21
sensor, prepares an image correction table B.
Quick Adjust
1. using the density data of the gradation pattern on the drum read by the patch image read
sensor, prepares an image correction table C.
2. using the image correction table B and the image correction table C, corrects the image
correction table A.

Chapter 7
7-22
7.5 Drum Unit
7.5.1 Drum Unit
7.5.1.1 Construction of the Drum Unit 0000-9350
T-7-8
Component Description
[1] Photosensitive drum forms a static (latent) image using laser light.
[2] Brush roller stirs up the toner remaining on the drum from
previous transfer to the ITB, thereby reducing its
adhesion to the drum.
[3] Waste toner collection case collects toner scarped off by the cleaning blade.
[4] Cleaning blade (polyurethane rubber) scrapes off and removes the toner remaining on the
drum from previous transfer to the ITB.
[5] Primary charging roller charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to an
even layer of negative potential.

Chapter 7
7-23
F-7-12
7.5.1.2 Charging Bias Control 0000-9352
AC component: output by constant current control.
DC component: output in keeping with the output of the environment sensor (temperature,
humidity) and the drum film thickness current value.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]

Chapter 7
7-24
F-7-13
[1] Primary charging roller
CHGDCPWM: PWM signal for charging DC
CHGACPWM: PWM signal for charging AC
CHG-OUT: charging bias output signal
CHGIMONITOR: charging current detection signal
7.5.1.3 Drum Cleaning 0000-9353
The machine uses a cleaning blade to clean its photosensitive drum.
[1]
HV
CHG-OUT
CHGIMONITOR
24V
CHGDCPWM
CHGACPWM
DC-CON
ITB
J326A
J501
J323
J505
J506

Chapter 7
7-25
T-7-9
F-7-14
If the application of primary charging bias lasts too long (e.g., because of continuous
copying/printing), the byproduct of discharge (ozone oxides) occurring in the primary
charging assembly will build up on the drum surface, temporarily increasing the friction
between the photosensitive drum surface and the cleaning blade, which ultimately warps the
cleaning blade and lowers the cleaning performance. To prevent such a problem, the
machine executes idle rotation of the drum, in which the byproduct of discharge is removed.
While the machine rotates the drum idly, it indicates the message "Drum Cleaning Under
Way" on its control panel.
[1] Brush roller stirs up the toner on the drum, thereby reducing
its adhesion to the drum.
[2] Cleaning blade (polyurethane rubber) remains in contact with the drum at all times, and
scrapes off residual toner from the drum.
[3] Waste toner case collects toner scarped off by the cleaning blade.
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-26
<Timing of Start-up and Duration>
- while copying/printing is under way (about 150 sec) after the number of copies/prints
made in succession has reached 800 images*1.
- during last rotation (about 180 sec max.*2)
*1: in the case of mono color, 800 copies; of full color, 200 copies.
*2: rotates the drum idly for a shorter or longer period of time according to the number of
copies/prints.
F-7-15
- Full color, Plain paper, A4, 400 copies
7.5.1.4 Drum Unit Drive Path 0000-9351
T-7-10
Component Source of drive
[1] Photosensitive drum drum/ITB motor (M9)
[2] Brush roller drum/ITB motor through gears
[3] Primary charging roller photosensitive drum (linked to drum)
Start key
ON
LSTR
PRINT
STBY INTR
"Drum Cleaning Under Way"
(about 150 sec)
1st
PRINT
201th
PRINT
200th
PRINT
400th
PRINT
"Drum Cleaning Under Way"
(about 180 sec)

Chapter 7
7-27
F-7-16
J311A
DC-CON
[2]
ITB
M9 [1]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-28
7.6 Developing Rotary
7.6.1 Construction of the Developing Rotary 0001-5033
The developing assembly consists of a developing rotary and 4 toner cartridges (YMCBk);
the rotary in turn is equipped with 4 developing units YMCBk.
The developing rotary rotates counterclockwise to move the developing unit to the point of
development (where the drum cylinder comes face to face with the drum) at time of
development.
F-7-17
[1] Developing rotary
[2] Developing unit (Y)
[1]
[4]
[8]
[3]
[7] [2]
[6]
[5]
[9]

Chapter 7
7-29
[3] Developing unit (M)
[4] Developing unit (C)
[5] Developing unit (Bk)
[6] Toner cartridge (Y)
[7] Toner cartridge (M)
[8] Toner cartridge (C)
[9] Toner cartridge (Bk)
7.6.2 Developing Rotary Control 0001-5034
The developing rotary is controlled with reference to the rotary home position, which is
where the developing rotary is rotated by 30 deg after the rotary HP sensor has detected the
passage of the HP detecting sensor flag mounted to the circumference of the developing
rotary. The machine uses this position to move the individual developing units to the point
of development (where the developing cylinder comes face to face with the drum) and to
the point of cartridge replacement and point of developer density measurement (where the
YMC developing cylinder comes face to face with the ATR sensor).

Chapter 7
7-30
- Developing Rotary Home Position
F-7-18
[1] Rotary HP sensor
[2] HP detection sensor flag
[3] Developing position detecting sensor flag
- Basic Sequence of Operations of the Developing Rotary (at power-on)
F-7-19
[1] rotation for detection of rotary HP
[2] move from rotary HP to point of Bk development
[2]
[1]
[3]
Bk
Y
M
C
[3]
[3]
[3]
[2]
Rotary HP
sensor (PS24)
Developing
cylinder clutch (CL3)
Developing
rotary motor (M8)
Main power switch
ON
WMUPR CNTR
[1]
Y M C Bk
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[9] [10]
[8]
STBY

Chapter 7
7-31
[3] move from point of Bk development to point of Y development
[4] move from point of Y development to point of M development
[5] move from point of M development to point of C development
[6] move from point of C development to point of Bk development
[7] rotation during image stabilization control
[8] ATR control
[9] primary transfer ATVC
[10]development gradation density correction
- Basic Sequence of Operations (developing rotary; full color)
F-7-20
[2] move from point of Bk development to point of Y development
[3] move from point of Y development to point of M development
[4] move from point of M development to point of C development
[5] move from point of C development to point of Bk development
[6] move from point of Bk development to rotary HP
- Basic Sequence of Operations (developing rotary; mono color)
F-7-21
[2] move from point of Bk development to rotary HP
Start key
ON
STBY INTR PRINT
[1] [2] [3]
Y M C Bk
[4] [5]
LSTR
Rotary HP
sensor (PS24)
Developing
Developing
rotary motor (M8)
[6]
STBY INTR PRINT
[1]
Bk
[2]
LSTR
Rotary HP
sensor(PS24)
Developing
Developing
rotary motor (M8)
Start key
ON

Chapter 7
7-32
E021 (developing rotary rotation error)
1. the rotary HP sensor flag cannot be detected.
2. the sensor flag length detected during rotation is too long or too short.
3. the development sensor flag is not detected when the rotary stops at a point of
development.
7.6.3 Developing Assembly Drive Path 0001-5035
T-7-11
Component Source of drive Remarks
[1] Developing rotary rotary motor (M8) uses the rotary home position to
control the drive of the
developing rotary.
[2] Developing cylinder main motor (M2) driven when the clutch (CL3)
goes on.
[3] Developer stirring screw main motor (M2) driven when the clutch (CL3)
goes on.
[4] Toner feed screw main motor (M2) driven when the clutch (CL7)
goes on.

Chapter 7
7-33
F-7-22
Bk
Y
M
C
J313 J311A
J311B
M8
DC-CON
[1]
[2]
[4]
ITB
CL3
CL7
M2
[3]

Chapter 7
7-34
7.7 Developing Unit
7.7.1 Construction of the Developing Unit 0000-9308
The machine's developing units differ between the Bk unit and the Y/M/C unit; while the
former (Bk) is equipped with a waste carrier collection unit, the later (Y/M/C) is not.
T-7-12
[1] Developing cylinder retains developer (toner/carrier).
[2] Developing blade forms an even layer of developer on the developing
cylinder.
[3] Toner buffer assembly retains toner from the toner cassette temporarily.
[4] Toner feedscrew feeds toner from the buffer assembly to the developing
chamber.
[5] Developer stirring screw stirs up the developer and supplies it to the developing
cylinder.
[6] Waste carrier collection unit collects waste toner*1.
*1: Bk developing unit only.

Chapter 7
7-35
F-7-23
7.7.2 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh control) 0000-9312
The machine uses the ACR control mechanism to enable longer use of carrier in the Bk
[2]
[5]
[6]
[4] [1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4] [1]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-36
developing unit.
The machine supplies developer (toner/carrier) from the Bk cartridge and, at the same item,
collects the waste toner from the developing unit to the waste carrier collection chamber
inside the toner cartridge.
<Descriptions of Mechanism>
1) As more and more developer is supplied from the toner cartridge, the amount of
developer inside the developing unit increases.
2) The increase in the amount of developer is collected by the waste carrier collection unit
while it is circulated inside the developing unit. Most of the developer being collected at
this time consists of used (waste) carrier.
3) When the developing rotary rotates, the waste carrier falls on its own weight and is
colleted inside the waste carrier collection chamber in the toner cartridge.

Chapter 7
7-37
F-7-24
[1] Waste carrier collection unit (inside developing unit)
[2] Waste carrier collection chamber (inside toner cartridge)
<Control Details/Start-up Timing/Time Required>
When the amount of toner supply reaches its specified level in monochrome mode, ACR
control is executed in last rotation or while copying/ printing.
a. In last rotation
Any of ACR Control No. 1 to No.3 is executed according to the amount of toner supplied
BK
BK
[1]
[2]

Chapter 7
7-38
during one copy/print operation.
F-7-25
ACR Control (No.1)
Start-up Timing: Once every 15 sheets with a 5% image document (as a guide)
Time Required: Approx. 5 sec.
ACR Control (No.2)
Time Required: Approx. 15 to 26 sec.
ACR Control (No.3)
Start-up Timing: Once every 1800 sheets (accumulated quantity) with a 5% image
document (as a guide)
Last PRINT LSTR STBY
STBY
Start key
ON
*2: Waste carrier in the developing unit is circulated for enhancement of its collection efficiency.
*1: Correcting the amount of toner supply (Patch image detection).
It is executed only when start-up conditions of ACR Control are satisfied.
ACR Control (No.1)
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
ACR Control (No.2)
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
ATR
Control *1
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
Developing
cylinder
rotation *2
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
Developing
cylinder
rotation *2
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
Developing
cylinder
rotation *2
Developing
cylinder
rotation *2
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
ACR Control (No.3)

Chapter 7
7-39
b. While copying/printing
F-7-26
F-7-27
7.7.3 Developing Bias Control 0000-9311
AC component: fixed.
DC component: in keeping with the output of the environment sensor (temperature,
humidity), drum film thickness detection current.
Start key
ON
Nth PRINT
STBY INTR (N+1)th PRINT
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
ATR
Control *1
Developing
cylinder
rotation *2
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
Developing
rotary
rotation
(2 rotations)
Between
Sheets
ACR Control
*2: Waste carrier in the developing unit is circulated for enhancement of its collection efficiency.
*1: Correcting the amount of toner supply (Patch image detection).

Chapter 7
7-40
F-7-28
Developing Bias Control
[1] Developing cylinder
DEVDCPWM2: PWM signal for developing DC
DEVACPWM: PWM signal for development AC
DEVAC2: remote signal for developing AC
DEV-OUT: developing bias output signal
ITB
DEV-OUT
[1]
DEVDCPWM2
DEVAC2
DEVACPWM
HV
24V
DC-CON
J326A
J501
J323
J505
J506

Chapter 7
7-41
7.8 Toner Container
7.8.1 Construction of the Toner Cartridge 0001-2844
The machine uses different types of toner cartridge between Bk and Y/M/C; the latter type
is not equipped with a toner feedscrew, and relies on the rotation of the developing rotary
for movement of toner.
The Bk cartridge comes filled with toner and carrier mixed to a specific ratio; the amount
of toner it contains is about 3 times that in a Y/C cartridge.
T-7-13
Black Color
[1] Toner feedscrew stirs up toner, and moves it to the buffer assembly
inside the developing unit.
none
[2] Toner shutter opens or closes in response to the shutter open/
close knob.
[3] Toner case comes filled with toner; about 635 g (including
about 95 g of carrier).
content: 170 g
[4] Waste carrier collection
chamber
collects waste carrier. none
[5] Supply mouth moves and directs toner through it to the
[6] Collection mouth moves waste carrier through it to the waste carrier
collection chamber.
none
[7] Shutter open/close knob opens/closes the shutter.

Chapter 7
7-42
F-7-29
7.8.2 Toner Level Detection Control 0001-2847
The machine is not equipped with a means (sensor) to directly check the level of toner inside
the toner cartridge (all 4 cartridges), and uses the measurements it takes of the patch images
it forms on the photosensitive drum to find out the presence/absence of toner.
1) supplies toner to the inside of the developing unit.
2) forms a patch image on the photosensitive drum, and reads its density using the patch
image read sensor.
3) compares the measurement against the reference value
|
v
[1]
[2]
[2]
[7]
[7]
[5]
[1]
[5]
[6]
Y/M/C
[4]
[3]
Bk

Chapter 7
7-43
i) if measurement >= reference value,
-> the machine assumes that toner exists inside the toner cartridge, and ends toner level
detection control.
ii) if measurement < reference value
-> the machine repeats steps 1 through 3 a specific number of times; if the measurement still
does not exceed the reference value, the machine will assume that toner does not exist
inside the toner cartridge, and moves the developing rotary to the point of toner cartridge
replacement and then indicates the message "No toner" on its control panel.
<Timing of Start-Up/Duration>
- if the patch image density measurement at time of ATR control is less then the reference
value for a specific number of times.
- when the toner cartridge access cover/front cover is opened/closed after the machine
identifies the absence of toner (the machine is not equipped with a sensor to check the
presence/absence of the toner cartridge; it will execute toner level detection control
automatically when the toner cartridge access cover/front cover is opened and closed
after it has identified the absence of toner regardless of the presence/absence of a
cartridge).
It takes about 70 sec for the machine to execute the control mechanism.
Memo:
In addition to the message "No toner," the machine uses the following 2 types of indications
to inform the user of the level of toner:
a) Toner Level Meter
From the amount of toner consumed so far (i.e., from the number of toner supply
operations) and the amount of toner held by a single toner cartridge, the machine assumes
the remaining level of toner and indicates it by means of a 4-step meter (100%, 75%, 50%,
10%). The meter will remain 10% even when the toner level is computed to be less than
10%; the meter will be 0% only when the machine identifies the absence of toner as the
result of patch image density measurement executed in relation to the aforementioned toner
level detection control mechanism.
b) "Add toner"
From the amount of toner consumed so far (from the number of toner supply operations)
and the amount of toner held by a single toner cartridge, the machine assumes the remaining

Chapter 7
7-44
level of toner; it indicates the message when the result of computation is less than 10%.
E026 (toner level detection operation upper limit)
Indicated if the toner density fails to return to a normal level after the machine has executed
toner replacement and toner recovery mechanism 5 times in succession following the
identification of the absence of toner. The machine supplies toner and then checks the level
of toner; if it repeats detection without a new toner cartridge, the toner inside the developing
unit will be exhausted, possibly causing stray toner and damage to the ITB. To avoid such
a problem, the machine puts a limit on the number of times it executes toner level detection
operations after the absence of toner has been identified:
0101- for Y toner cartridge
0201- for M toner cartridge
0301- for C toner cartridge
0401- for Bk toner cartridge
7.8.3 Toner Supply Control 0001-2845
The toner inside the toner cartridge is first sent to the buffer assembly of the developing unit
for storage. Then, the movement of the toner feedscrew supplies toner from the toner buffer
assembly to the developing chamber in an amount determined as the result of ATR control.
The Bk toner cartridge uses a toner feedscrew mounted inside it to move toner, while a Y,
M, or C toner cartridge relies on the rotation of the developing rotary (for lack of a
feedscrew) to move toner along the protrusions arranged in a spiral inside the cartridge.

Chapter 7
7-45
F-7-30
[1] Toner feedscrew (Bk only)
[2] Toner buffer assembly
[3] Toner feedscrew
[4] Developing rotary
M2: main motor
M8: developing rotary motor
Bk
Y
M
C
J313 J311A
J311B
M8
DC-CON
[4]
ITB
CL3
CL7
M2
[1]
[3]
[2]

Chapter 7
7-46
F-7-31
Moving the Toner Using the Rotation of the Developing Rotary (Y/M/C)
M
C
Y

Chapter 7
7-47
7.9 Transfer Device
7.9.1 Construction of the Transfer Assembly 0000-9298
T-7-14
[1] Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) receives images (toner) formed on the
photosensitive drum.
[2] Drive roller drives the ITB.
[3] ITB home position sensors detects the home position sticker (white) attached
to the inside of the ITB.
[4] Tension roller retains ITB tension.
[5] Primary transfer roller applies transfer bias to transfer the toner from the
photosensitive drum to the ITB.
[6] Secondary transfer inside roller transfers the toner from the ITB to paper using the
application of transfer bias from the secondary
transfer outside roller to the secondary transfer
inside roller.
[8] Separation static eliminator removes residual charges from the ITB.
[9] ITB cleaning blade scrapes off the toner remaining on the ITB.
[10] ITB waste toner feedscrew moves the waste toner from inside the ITB
cleaning unit to the waste toner case.
[11] Stray toner blocking sheet prevents the waste toner from moving astray inside
the machine at time of cleaning.
[12] Inside blade scrapes the toner for the inside of the ITB.

Chapter 7
7-48
F-7-32
7.9.2 ITB Home Position Detection Control 0001-5495
When the ITB home position sensor detects the sticker (white) attached to the back of the
ITB after the Start key is pressed, the machine generates the ITB home position signal, used
to form and transfer images.
[3] [1]
[2]
[11]
[4]
[12]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[11] [9]
[10]

Chapter 7
7-49
F-7-33
[1] ITB HP sensor
[2] ITB HP sticker (2 pc.)
- Full color, Normal speed
The machine uses the ITB home position signal (hereafter, ITB HP signal) to generate the
PVREQ signal for individual colors (image request signal). The machine uses the PVREQ
signal when it forms and transfers images.
F-7-34
[1]
[2]
INTR PRINT
ITB HP signal
Laser
Primary
transfer bias
Registration
clutch (CL2)
Start key
ON
PVREQ signal
Secondary
transfer bias
Y M C Bk

Chapter 7
7-50
- Full color, Normal speed, 1 copy
- Mono color, Normal speed
The machine forms images not in synch with the ITB HP signal. It generates the PVREQ
signal a specific period of time after it has become ready to form images, and uses the signal
to form and transfer images.
F-7-35
- Half-speed (both full and mono color)
The machine uses the ITB home position signal to generate the PVREQ signal (image
request signal) for individual colors to serve as a reference when forming and transferring
images.
The machine operates in half-speed mode to ensure good fixing on paper; after transfer to
the ITB, it reduces the speed of the drum/ITB motor (DC brushless motor used to drive the
fixing motor and the ITB) to half (68.5 mm/sec) the normal speed. After reducing the speed
of the motor, the machine detects the ITB HP signal and turns on the registration clutch
using the ITB HP signal as the reference.
INTR PRINT
ITB HP signal
Laser
Primary
transfer bias
Registration
clutch (CL2)
Start key
ON
PVREQ signal
Secondary
transfer bias
Bk 1st Bk 2nd

Chapter 7
7-51
F-7-36
- Mono color, Half-speed, 1 copy
7.9.3 Transfer Bias Control 0000-9300
Primary transfer bias: output in keeping with the output of the environment sensor
(temperature, humidity), print mode (mono, full color), and color.
Secondary transfer bias: output in keeping with the output of the environment sensor
(temperature, humidity), print mode (mono, full color), pickup (single-, double-sided), and
paper type.
ITB HP signal
Laser
Primary
transfer bias
Registration
clutch (CL2)
PVREQ signal
Drum/ITB motor
signal (M9)
INTR PRINT
Start key
ON
Secondary
transfer bias
Bk
a b a b
Half-speed rotation
a
b

Chapter 7
7-52
F-7-37
[1] Primary transfer roller
[2] Secondary transfer roller
TR1PWM: PWM signal for primary transfer
TR2CVPWM: PWM signal for secondary transfer
TR1-OUT: primary transfer bias output signal
TR2-OUT: secondary bias output signal
TR1MONITOR: primary transfer current detection signal
TR2MONITOR: secondary transfer current detection signal
TR2_SUB: secondary transfer output detection signal
RVTR2DC, HV_SUB_OPEN_S: bias mode switching signal for secondary transfer
TR1-OUT
TR2-OUT
ITB
TR1MONITOR
TR2MONITOR
TR1PWM
TR2CVPWM
RVTR2DC
[2]
[1]
HV
24V
DC-CON
J326B
J502
J323
J504 T901
J506
HV_SUB
J1
J507
24V
TR2_CS
HV_SUB_OPEN_S
RVTR2DC

Chapter 7
7-53
7.9.4 Cleaning the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) 0000-9303
The machine uses a cleaning blade to clean the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).
T-7-15
[1] ITB cleaning blade moves into contact with the ITB at all times to
scrape off toner remaining on the ITB; while the
machine is in standby, remains away from the
ITB.
[2] Stray toner blocking sheet prevents toner from moving astray during
cleaning operation.
[3] ITB waste toner feedscrew moves waste toner in the direction of the ITB
waste toner case.

Chapter 7
7-54
F-7-38
7.9.5 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller 0002-0787
The machine cleans the secondary transfer outside roller using static charges.
The machine alternately applies biases of opposite polarities to the secondary transfer
outside roller (same and opposite in relation to the bias used when forming images), thereby
returning the toner remaining on the secondary transfer outside roller to the ITB.
<Timing of Control>
- end of copy/print job
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-55
- return from jam state
- after formation of a patch image or test pattern as part of image stabilization control
7.9.6 ITB Waste Toner Collection Mechanism 0000-9305
The waste toner scraped off the ITB is collected in the ITB waste toner unit. The level of
waste toner inside the unit is checked by means of a waste toner sensor (LED, photo
transistor).
F-7-39
[1] ITB cleaning unit
[2] Waste toner sensor (light-emitting)
[3] Waste toner sensor (light-receiving)
[4] ITB waste toner unit
When the machine finds that the unit is full of waste toner, it indicates the message "Replace
DC-CON
J308
GND
+5V
W_TONERFULL
GND
+5V
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-56
the waste toner container." If copies/prints are made in succession thereafter, the machine
will indicate an error code (E013) as soon as it has handled 500 copies (A4) and stops
operation.
7.9.7 Transfer Assembly Drive Path 0000-9299
T-7-16
Component Source of drive
[1] Drive roller drum/ITB motor (M9)
[2] Tension roller linked to ITB
[3] Primary transfer roller linked to ITB
[4] Secondary transfer inside roller linked to ITB
[5] Secondary transfer outside roller linked to ITB
[6] ITB waste toner feedscrew drum/ITB motor (M9)

Chapter 7
7-57
F-7-40
7.9.8 Transfer Assembly Swing Control 0000-9301
- ITB Cleaning Blade
When the clutch (CL8) goes on, the drive of the main motor (M2) is transmitted to a cam;
when the releasing lever moves up and down, its associated ITB cleaning blade moves into
contact with or moves away from the ITB. The ITB cleaning blade remains away from the
ITB while the machine is in a standby state.
- Secondary Transfer Outside Roller
When the clutch (CL9) goes on, the drive of the main motor (M2) is transmitted to a cam,
and the transfer locking arm pushes the secondary transfer arm, causing the latter to move
away from the ITB. The secondary transfer outside roller moves away from the ITB if no
copy/print job arrives within about 30 sec after the machine enters a standby state.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
M9
J311A
DC-CON

Chapter 7
7-58
F-7-41
[1] ITB cleaning swing cam
[2] Releasing lever
[3] ITB cleaning blade
[4] Transfer locking cam
[5] Transfer locking arm
[1] [3]
[2]
J311B
J320A
DC-CON
J311A
M2
CL8
CL9
[4] [5]
[7]
[6]

Chapter 7
7-59
[6] Secondary transfer arm
Points to Note When Turning Off the Power
If you need to turn off the machine for service work, be sure to turn off the control panel
power switch before turning off the main power switch. If the secondary transfer outside
roller is left in contact with the ITB for a long time, the ITB can suffer traces of the roller.
To avoid these traces, the machine is designed to automatically move the secondary
transfer roller away from the ITB if there is no next job within about 30 sec after it has
entered a standby state. Likewise, the machine moves away the secondary transfer
outside roller when the control panel power switch is turned off. If you turn off the main
power switch within about 30 sec after the machine enters a standby state, the machine
will not be able to move the secondary transfer outside roller from the ITB, permitting it
to leave traces on the belt.
F-7-42
7.9.9 Separation 0000-9307
The machine uses a curvature method to separate paper; it is also equipped with a static
eliminator to assist separation. The eliminator removes positive changes remaining on
paper, thus preventing adhesion of paper (especially thin paper with little body) to the ITB.
STBY
Roller away
Roller in
contact
Control panel
power switch
OFF
LSTR
30sec.
Roller away
Roller in
contact

Chapter 7
7-60
F-7-43
[2] ITB
[3] Separation static eliminator
[2]
[3]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-61
Procedure
7.10.1 Drum Unit
Drum Unit 0001-6860
1) Open the front cover and the toner
cartridge access cover, and check to be
sure that the toner cartridge (magenta)
[1] is positioned as shown. If not, close
the front cover and the toner cartridge
access cover, and turn on the machine's
main power switch. Then, after making
[1] is positioned as shown, turn off the
machine's control panel power switch
and main power switch.
F-7-44
2) Remove the screw [1] (black; M3x20).
F-7-45
3) Remove the 2 fixing screws [1]
(M4x20).
F-7-46
clockwise until it is locked. There is a
protrusion behind the area indicated in
the figure [2]; turn the ITB release lever
until the protrusion has ridden over the
stopper [3].

Chapter 7
7-62
F-7-47
F-7-48
5) Slide out the drum unit [1] to the front to
detach.
F-7-49
6) To return the ITB release lever to its
initial position (where it was before
removing the drum unit), unlock it and
turn it counterclockwise.
ITB [2] are in contact with each other;
turning the ITB release lever clockwise
causes the release member [3]
(operating in conjunction with the lever)
to move up, thus moving the ITB [2]

Chapter 7
7-63
F-7-50
Left as it is for a long time, however, it
can start to deform. So that the ITB
remains slack as short a time as possible,
be sure to return the ITB release lever to
its initial position as soon as you have
removed the drum unit.
Take care not to touch or damage the
surface of the photosensitive drum of the
drum unit.
7.10.1.2 Points to Note
When Mounting the
Drum Unit 0001-6867
- Take care not to touch or damage the
drum unit.
- When fitting the drum unit in the
machine, be sure to slide it until it butts
against the rear of the machine while
holding it level. Otherwise, the
photosensitive drum will interfere with
the machine's internal components,
possibly damaging them.
- Before fitting the drum unit, check to be
sure that the area [1] and the area [2] (for
the drum unit and the optical hood,
respectively) are free of dust and dirt. As
necessary, wipe it with a cloth
moistened with water.
Do not dry wipe the areas; otherwise,
static electricity will build up to attract
dust.
F-7-51
[2]
[3]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-64
F-7-52
Memo:
The beam of laser light moves between
area [1] and area [2] of the figure; a buildup
of dust in these areas can well block part of
the laser light, leaving a white line in
images.
1) Initialize the drum unit. Execute the
following service mode item.
-
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DRM
-LIFE
While initialization is under way, the
machine flashes "ACTIVE" on its screen.
It indicates "OK!" at the end of
initialization in about 1 min.
Do not touch any of the keys, open the
door, or turn off the power while
initialization is under way. Otherwise,
go back to step 1) and start over.
that the value of the following service
mode item is '0':
LIFE
If not '0', go back to sep 1) and start over.
3) Record the value indicated in the
following service mode item in the
Remarks field of the drum initial value
label (attached to the light-blocking
sheet of a new drum unit):
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DR-I-
INT
As necessary, record the date of drum unit
replacement and the counter reading on
the drum initial value label.
4) Attach the drum initial value label to the
front [1] of the drum unit.

Chapter 7
7-65
F-7-53
5) Execute 'Full Adjust' of auto gradation
correction in Additional Function.
7.10.2 Development Unit
7.10.2.1 Finisher-P1 in
Use 0003-1924
If the machine is equipped with a
Finisher-P1, be sure to detach it before
removing the finisher unit. To detach the
finisher rail [1], remove the screw [2],
and force it in the direction of the arrow.
F-7-54
If you try to detach the developing unit
without first removing the finisher rail, the
developing cylinder can interfere with the
finisher rail.
Memo:
Recommended Work in the Presence of a
Finisher-P1
To facilitate the removal of the developing
unit, it is a good idea to remove not only
the finisher rail but also the finisher itself
before starting to remove the developing
unit.
Delivery Tray 0002-0317
delivery tray [2].

Chapter 7
7-66
F-7-55
Points to Note When Mounting the
Delivery Tray
Be sure that the delivery tray [1] fully
covers the ribs [2] of the delivery tray
lower cover.
F-7-56
Delivery Tray Lower
Cover 0002-0318
[1].
F-7-57
delivery tray lower cover [1].
F-7-58

Chapter 7
7-67
ITB Waste Toner Unit 0001-8422
waste toner unit retainer [2]; then,
detach the ITB waste toner unit [3].
F-7-59
Developing Unit 0000-9364
protective plate [2].
F-7-60
rotary fixing plate [2]. If you are
removing the black developing unit, you
may skip this step, as the rotary fixing
plate is not needed for the unit.
F-7-61
3) Close the toner cartridge access cover,
and insert a screwdriver through the

Chapter 7
7-68
angular hole [1]; turn the developing
rotary [2] counterclockwise slowly by
hand so that the desired developing unit
is at the point of replacement. When the
cartridge reaches its point of
replacement, the developing rotary will
be fixed in place by the work of the
rotary fixing arm.
F-7-62
F-7-63
4) Open the toner cartridge access cover,
and turn the knob [2] of the toner
cartridge [1] counterclockwise until it
stops; then, pull out the toner cartridge
[1] to the front to detach.
F-7-64
When removing the toner cartridge,
work with care so that the toner will not
spill around the toner cartridge
replacement mouth.
5-1) In the case of a color developing unit
(Y, M, or C), move the developing
assembly rotary to the point of
replacement, and fix it in place using the
rotary fixing plate you have previously
removed. Fit the rotary fixing plate [1]
so that the UP marking on it faces up.

Chapter 7
7-69
F-7-65
F-7-66
5-2) If you are removing a developing unit
with the Finisher-P1 connected, fit the
rotary fixing plate [1] where shown [B]
to fix the developing rotary in place. Be
sure that the rotary fixing plate [1] is
fitted so that the LF marking faces up.
F-7-67
F-7-68
Memo:
The point of replacement for the
developing unit (Bk) is the same as that of
the toner cartridge (Bk), freeing you from
the need to perform steps 5-1) and 5-2).
6) Remove the screw [1]. Keep in mind
that in the case of a color developing
unit (Y, M, or C), a different screw [1] is

Chapter 7
7-70
removed, depending on where the
developing rotary is fixed in place.
F-7-69
F-7-70
7) Remove the developing unit [1].
F-7-71
7.10.2.6 Points to Keep
in Mind When Fitting
the Developing Unit 0001-3637
- Before starting the work, check to be sure
that the shutter [1] is forced in the
direction of the arrow. If not, move it in
the direction of the arrow until it butts
against the shutter [1]. If it is not fully
butted against the shutter, you may not
be able to fit the toner cartridge
correctly.
F-7-72

Chapter 7
7-71
- When fixing the developing unit using a
screw [1], be sure to force the casing of
the developing unit in the direction of
the arrow as you tighten the screw. After
tightening the screw, try pushing the
casing of the developing unit in the
direction of the arrow to make sure that
there is play of about 1.5 to 2 mm. If
there is no play, remove the screw [1],
and tighten it while forcing the casing of
the developing unit in the direction of
the arrow.
F-7-73
Memo:
This step is performed so that the screw
base will not ride over the developing
cartridge guide plate [1]. If you tighten the
screw while it rides over the guide plate,
the spatial relationship between the
photopositive drum and the developing
cylinder will be wrong, causing blank
output.
F-7-74
the Developing Unit
(Y, M, C) 0001-6774
1) Execute the following service mode
item (color):
- COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL>
STIR-Y/M/C
item (color):
INIT-Y/M/C (If you have replaced the
Y, M, and C cartridges at the same time,
execute INIT-3.)
item (color):
SPLY-Y/M/C
4) Record the value for the following
service mode item (color) on the service
label:

Chapter 7
7-72
- COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> SGNL-Y/
M/C
- COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> REF-Y/M/
C
the Developing Unit
(Bk) 0001-6215
item:
STIR-K
item:
SPLY-K
item; thereafter, check to see that the
value has been initialized to '0':
- COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> DV-
UNT-K
7.10.3 Rotary Upper Cover
Drum Unit 0002-6741
F-7-75
F-7-76
(M4x20).

Chapter 7
7-73
F-7-77
stopper [3].
F-7-78
F-7-79
detach.
F-7-80

Chapter 7
7-74
F-7-81
drum unit.
Rotary Upper Cover 0002-6742
The ITB is located immediately above
the rotary upper cover. Take full care not
to touch the ITB when removing the
rotary upper cover. If you inadvertently
touched it, be sure to execute ITB
cleaning in service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>T
BLT-CLN.
1) Free the claw [2] found at the front of
the rotary upper cover [1]; then, hold the
center [3] of the rotary upper cover [1],
and detach it in the direction of the
arrow.
F-7-82
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]

Chapter 7
7-75
When Mounting the
Drum Unit 0002-6744
drum unit.
dust.
F-7-83
F-7-84
Memo:
images.
7.10.4 Rotary Lower Cover
left cover [2].

Chapter 7
7-76
F-7-85
Left Grip (front) 0002-6623
left grip (front) [2].
F-7-86
Rotary Lower Cover 0002-6625
2) Remove the 2 screws [1]; then, pull the
rotary lower cover [2] to the front to
detach.
F-7-87
7.10.5 ITB Cleaning Unit
7.10.5.1 Preparing for the
Removal of the ITB
Cleaning Unit 0001-8374
mode, and press the OK key:
- COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITB-
CLSW
While the mode is being executed, the
screen flashes 'ACTIVE'; it changes to
'OK!' at the end of the execution.
3) Turn off the control panel power switch;
then, wait for 15 sec or more, and turn
[2]
[1]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-77
off the main power switch.
Memo:
The machine operates as follows in
response to the execution of this service
mode:
- it changes the position of the developing
assembly rotary. (If the developing
cylinder is positioned immediately
under the ITB cleaning unit, the base of
the ITB cleaning unit can rub against the
surface of the developing cylinder to
cause damage. The developing
assembly rotary is rotated so that the Bk
toner cartridge is positioned
immediately under the ITB cleaning
unit.)
- if a Finisher-P1 is installed, the finisher
delivery tray is moved as far up as it
moves. (If the finisher delivery tray is in
down position, mounting the ITB
cleaning unit can prove to be difficult.)
delivery tray [2].
F-7-88
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
F-7-89

Chapter 7
7-78
Delivery Tray Lower
Cover 0002-0309
[1].
F-7-90
F-7-91
F-7-92
ITB Cleaning Unit 0000-9358

Chapter 7
7-79
F-7-93
2) Check to be sure that the toner cartridge
(Bk) [1] is positioned under the ITB
cleaning unit [2]. If not, turn the
developing assembly rotary by hand so
that the toner cartridge (Bk) moves to a
point immediately under the ITB
cleaning unit.
F-7-94
3) Remove the screw [1], and fit the screw
to the screw hole [2].
F-7-95
Memo:
To fix the arm [3] in place, fit the screw in
the screw hole [2].
If the arm is not fixed in place, the cleaning
blade will come into contact with the ITB
when the ITB cleaning unit is removed,
damaging the ITB.
4) Slide out the ITB cleaning unit [1] to the
front to detach.

Chapter 7
7-80
F-7-96
When removing the ITB cleaning unit,
take care not to impose excess force on the
nozzle area [1] of the unit; otherwise, the
area can suffer damage.
F-7-97
If you have to place the ITB cleaning
unit on the floor after removing it from the
machine, be sure to orient it as shown (i.e.,
so that the releasing arm is parallel with the
floor); otherwise, the waste toner inside the
ITB cleaning unit can start to leak.
F-7-98
When Mounting the
- Be sure that the screw [1] is fitted to the
ITB cleaning unit before mounting the
ITB cleaning unit to the machine.
Otherwise, the ITB cleaning blade will
remain in contact with the ITB,
damaging the ITB when the ITB

Chapter 7
7-81
cleaning unit is being mounted.
F-7-99
- When carelessly attaching the ITB
cleaning unit to the main body, the end
seal [1] may be tilted to clash the ITB
unit guide assembly [2] (the surface
indicated by a heavy line in the figure),
and the seal may get deformed or
removed. This damage on the seal may
result in scattering of the waste toner
inside the machine. To prevent this
scattering, attach the ITB cleaning unit
in the following steps: [A] Slant the
front edge of the ITB cleaning unit
toward the left, and insert the ITB
cleaning unit toward the rear side of the
machine temporally; [B] Move the unit
until it becomes parallel to the ITB,
ensuring that the end seal [1] does not
clash the ITB unit guide assembly [2]
(the surface indicated by a heavy line in
the figure); [C] Push the unit straight to
the rear side of the machine.
F-7-100
[A]
[B]
[C]
[1] [2]

Chapter 7
7-82
F-7-101
Memo: The figures below show the end
seal [1] in normal condition and the one in
abnormal condition (upward-tilted one).
F-7-102
F-7-103
- After mounting the ITB cleaning unit to
the machine, be sure to put back the
screw [1] where the screw [2] is found.
Otherwise, there will be a gap to the ITB
cleaning blade, preventing cleaning of
the ITB.
F-7-104
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-83
7.10.6 ITB Waste Toner Unit
F-7-105
7.10.7 Intermediate Transfer
Unit
Drum Unit 0002-8700
F-7-106
F-7-107
(M4x20).

Chapter 7
7-84
F-7-108
stopper [3].
F-7-109
F-7-110
detach.
F-7-111

Chapter 7
7-85
F-7-112
drum unit.
delivery tray [2].
F-7-113
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
[2]
[3]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-86
F-7-114
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0455
1) Disconnect the power cable [1] from the
printer unit.
right cover (upper rear) [3].
F-7-115
Point to Note When Mounting the
Right Cover (upper rear; if an Inner
2-Way Tray-C1, Finisher-P1,
Finisher-Q1, or Saddle Finisher-2 is
installed)
Take full care not to trap the harness [1]
by the cut-off [2] of the right cover
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-87
F-7-116
Right Door 0002-0332
1) Open the right cover.
2) Detach the joint pin [1], and lift the inner
2-way tray [2] to separate it from the
right door. Perform this step if an Inner
2-Way Tray-C1, Finisher-P1, Finisher-
Q1, or Saddle Finisher-Q2 is installed.
F-7-117
joint plate [2]. Perform this step if an
Inner 2-Way Tray-C1, Finisher-P1,
Finisher-Q1, or Saddle Finisher-Q2 is
installed.
F-7-118
remove the clamp [2].
5) Remove the 2 screws [3] used to fix the
hinge in place.
F-7-119
6) Detach the right door [1] together with
the hinge [2].

Chapter 7
7-88
F-7-120
Mounting the Right Door
1) Match the hinge [1] found at the bottom
of the right door against the boss [1].
2) Engage the hinge [2] found at the top of
the right door on the hook of the
machine side plate.
F-7-121
Be sure to close the right door before
tightening the 2 screws used to fix the
hinge in place.
Fixing Unit 0001-8261
connector cover [2].
F-7-122
free the fixing harness from the clamp
[2].
F-7-123
fixing assembly [2].

Chapter 7
7-89
F-7-124
Memo:
Of the 4 screws, the 2 on the left are
stepped screws.
Placing the Fixing Assembly
If you need to place the fixing assembly on
a table or the floor, be sure its area of
duplexing rolls [1] faces upward.
Particularly, avoid placing it with its screw
area [2] or the inlet sensor area [3]
facing down; otherwise, these areas will
likely suffer damage.
F-7-125
1. When you have replaced the fixing
assembly, be sure to initialize the
service mode counter using the
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FX-
UP-RL
2. If you replaced the existing assembly
with a used one, be sure to enter the
counter reading of the used fixing
assembly using the following service
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Release Arm
Plate 0001-4442
plate [2].

Chapter 7
7-90
F-7-126
Intermediate Transfer
Unit (ITB unit) 0001-8252
1) Remove the screw [1], and remove the
screw [2].
F-7-127
2) With the fixing drive gear assembly [1]
fully lifted in the direction of the arrow,
fit the previously removed fixing release
arm plate [4] into the hole of the fixing
release arm [2] to hold the fixing drive
gear assembly [1] in place.
F-7-128
F-7-129
Memo:
Step 2) is performed so that the ITB unit
and the fixing drive gear assembly will not
interfere with each other when the ITB unit
is removed.

Chapter 7
7-91
Be sure to put back the fixing release
arm plate used to hold the fixing drive
gear assembly in place as follows when
mounting the ITB unit:
1) If you have attached the delivery tray,
remove it for the time being.
If the fixing release arm plate is mounted
in the presence of the delivery tray, the
fixing release arm (rear) will get stuck
on the boss of the delivery tray,
preventing transmission of drive to the
fixing roller.
2) Remove the fixing release arm plate [1]
so that the fixing drive gear assembly
will be freed.
F-7-130
fully moved by hand in the direction of
the arrow, fit the fixing releasing arm
plate [2] in to the hole to secure it in
place.
F-7-131
4) Fix the fixing releasing arm plate [1] in
place using a screw [2]. Thereafter, try
moving the fixing release arm back and
forth to be sure that the fixing drive gear
assembly moves in response.
F-7-132
3) Remove 2 screws [1], and detach the
contact guide [2].

Chapter 7
7-92
F-7-133
the cable from the cable guide.
F-7-134
5) Lift the 2 points of the ITB fan duct [1]
to free the claw; then, detach the ITB fan
duct [2].
F-7-135
6) Remove the 2 screws [1] (TP; M3x6)
and the 2 screws [2] (binding; M4x14);
then, lift the 2 grips [3] to detach from
the bushing assembly, and detach the
ITB unit
F-7-136
When removing the ITB unit, be sure to
take full care not to touch or damage the
ITB. When you have removed the ITB

Chapter 7
7-93
unit, try not to place it on the floor or a
desk without paper under it.
If you must leave the ITB unit alone for
a long time after removing it, be sure to
cover the surface of the photosensitive
drum to protect it against light.
When Mounting the
ITB Unit 0000-9269
- When fitting the ITB unit [1] in the
machine, move the unit in the direction
of the arrow a (toward the machine
front) and then along the rails in the
direction of the arrow b.
F-7-137
- When you have fitted the ITB unit in the
machine, be sure to give the gear [1] a
full turn before tightening the screw to
fix it in place. Merely fitting the ITB unit
in the machine does not always mean
that the gear [1] and the other gear [2]
have fully been engaged; the turn will
mesh them correctly.
F-7-138
- Be sure to fit the 4 fixing screws of the
ITB unit in the following sequence; if
not tightened in the correct sequence,
images may show lines at intervals of
96.7 mm.
[1]>[2]>[3] or [4]; screw [3] (TP; M3x6)
and screw [4] (binding; M4x14) may be
tightened in any order.

Chapter 7
7-94
F-7-139
F-7-140
When Mounting the
Drum Unit 0002-8701
drum unit.
dust.
F-7-141

Chapter 7
7-95
F-7-142
Memo:
images.
7.10.7.10 After
Replacing the
Unit 0001-8425
Execute the following service mode item:
- COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-
P>1ATVC-EX
7.10.8 ITB Waste Toner
Detection Unit
delivery tray [2].
F-7-143
Delivery Tray
lower cover.

Chapter 7
7-96
F-7-144
Delivery Tray Lower
Cover 0002-0313
[1].
F-7-145
F-7-146
ITB Waste Toner
Detection Unit 0000-9361
waste toner unit retainer [2] and the ITB
waste toner unit [3]; then, remove the
two screws [4], and detach the inside
cover (middle) [5].
F-7-147

Chapter 7
7-97
inside cover (left) [2].
F-7-148
3) Free the cable from the 2 cable clamps
[1]; then, disconnect the connector [2],
remove the screw [3], and detach the
ITB waste toner detention unit [4].
F-7-149
7.10.9 Intermediate Transfer
Belt
Drum Unit 0002-8702
F-7-150

Chapter 7
7-98
F-7-151
(M4x20).
F-7-152
stopper [3].
F-7-153
F-7-154
detach.

Chapter 7
7-99
F-7-155
F-7-156
drum unit.
[2]
[3]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-100
delivery tray [2].
F-7-157
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
F-7-158
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0003-5718
printer unit.

Chapter 7
7-101
F-7-159
installed)
(upper right).
F-7-160
F-7-161
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-102
installed.
F-7-162
hinge in place.
F-7-163
the hinge [2].
F-7-164
machine side plate.
F-7-165
hinge in place.

Chapter 7
7-103
F-7-166
[2].
F-7-167
F-7-168
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 7
7-104
F-7-169
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Release Arm
Plate 0001-8315
plate [2].
F-7-170
7.10.9.7 Removing
screw [2].
F-7-171

Chapter 7
7-105
F-7-172
F-7-173
Memo:
is removed.
fixing roller.
will be freed.
F-7-174
place.

Chapter 7
7-106
F-7-175
F-7-176
contact guide [2].
F-7-177
F-7-178
duct [2].

Chapter 7
7-107
F-7-179
ITB unit
F-7-180
Belt (ITB) 0000-9270
Do not place the ITB unit directly on
the floor or a desk. Be sure to place
paper underneath.
ITB retainer [2].
F-7-181

Chapter 7
7-108
sheet base (rear) [2].
F-7-182
sheet base (front) [2].
F-7-183
4) Remove the 2 tension springs [1].
F-7-184
F-7-185
5) While pushing the bushings [1] and [2]
of the secondary transfer inside roller
toward the inside, slide them in the
direction of the arrows until they stop.

Chapter 7
7-109
F-7-186
Memo:
This step loosens the ITB and thus
facilitates the removal of the ITB.
6) Insert a long screwdriver into the
angular hole [3] found in the frame
(drive gear side) [2] of the ITB unit [1]
so that the ITB unit is on its own.
During the work after you have used a
screwdriver to keep the ITB unit
upright, take care so that the unit will not
tumble down. Otherwise, the force
occurring around the angular opening
[3], in which the screwdriver is found,
will cause damage to the unit.
F-7-187
F-7-188
7) Detach the ITB [1] by pulling it in
upward direction.

Chapter 7
7-110
F-7-189
Once detached and on its own, the ITB
unit tends to be extremely unstable. Be
sure to take full care when detaching it.
When Mounting the
ITB 0000-9271
- When placing the ITB unit upright, be
sure that the drive gear side is at the
bottom.
- When mounting the ITB [1], be sure to
orient it so that the end with a marking
(red) [2] is at the top in the ITB frame.
F-7-190
- When mounting the sheet base (front) [1],
take full care so that the plastic film [2]
will not ride over the ITB [3].
F-7-191

Chapter 7
7-111
F-7-192
- When mounting the sheet base (rear) [1],
be sure that the plastic film [2] will not
ride over the ITB [3].
F-7-193
F-7-194
When Mounting the
ITB Unit 0001-8284
F-7-195

Chapter 7
7-112
F-7-196
96.7 mm.
[1]>[2]>[3] or [4]; screw [3] (TP; M3x6)
F-7-197
F-7-198
When Mounting the
Drum Unit 0002-8703
drum unit.

Chapter 7
7-113
dust.
F-7-199
F-7-200
Memo:
images.
7.10.9.12 After
Replacing the
Belt 0001-8289
P>1ATVC-EX

Chapter 7
7-114
7.10.10 ITB Home Position
Sensor PCB
Drum Unit 0002-8704
F-7-201
F-7-202
(M4x20).
F-7-203
stopper [3].

Chapter 7
7-115
F-7-204
F-7-205
detach.
F-7-206

Chapter 7
7-116
F-7-207
drum unit.
delivery tray [2].
F-7-208
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
[2]
[3]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-117
F-7-209
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0307
printer unit.
F-7-210
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-118
F-7-211
F-7-212
installed.
F-7-213
hinge in place.
F-7-214
the hinge [2].

Chapter 7
7-119
F-7-215
machine side plate.
F-7-216
hinge in place.
F-7-217
[2].
F-7-218

Chapter 7
7-120
F-7-219
Memo:
stepped screws.
F-7-220
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Release Arm
Plate 0001-8348
plate [2].

Chapter 7
7-121
F-7-221
Intermediate Toner
screw [2].
F-7-222
F-7-223
F-7-224
Memo:
is removed.

Chapter 7
7-122
fixing roller.
will be freed.
F-7-225
place.
F-7-226
F-7-227
contact guide [2].

Chapter 7
7-123
F-7-228
F-7-229
duct [2].
F-7-230
ITB unit
F-7-231

Chapter 7
7-124
Belt (ITB) 0001-8356
paper underneath.
ITB retainer [2].
F-7-232
F-7-233
F-7-234

Chapter 7
7-125
F-7-235
F-7-236
F-7-237
Memo:

Chapter 7
7-126
F-7-238
F-7-239
upward direction.
F-7-240
ITB Home Position
Sensor PCB 0000-9277
1) Hold the inside blade [1] by both its
edges, and detach it in upward direction.

Chapter 7
7-127
F-7-241
plate [2].
F-7-242
3) Turn over the ITB unit, and disconnect
the connector [1]; then, detach the ITB
home position sensor PCB [2].
F-7-243
7.10.10.10 Points to
Note When Mounting
the ITB 0001-8358
bottom.
F-7-244

Chapter 7
7-128
F-7-245
F-7-246
F-7-247
F-7-248
Note When Mounting
the ITB Unit 0001-8359

Chapter 7
7-129
F-7-249
F-7-250
96.7 mm.
[1]>[2]>[3] or [4]; screw [3] (TP; M3x6)
F-7-251
F-7-252

Chapter 7
7-130
Note When Mounting
drum unit.
dust.
F-7-253
F-7-254
Memo:
images.
7.10.11 Primary Transfer
Roller
Drum Unit 0002-8706

Chapter 7
7-131
F-7-255
F-7-256
(M4x20).
F-7-257
stopper [3].
F-7-258

Chapter 7
7-132
F-7-259
detach.
F-7-260
F-7-261
drum unit.
[2]
[3]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-133
delivery tray [2].
F-7-262
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
F-7-263
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0458
printer unit.

Chapter 7
7-134
F-7-264
installed)
(upper right).
F-7-265
F-7-266
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-135
installed.
F-7-267
hinge in place.
F-7-268
the hinge [2].
F-7-269
machine side plate.
F-7-270
hinge in place.

Chapter 7
7-136
F-7-271
[2].
F-7-272
F-7-273
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 7
7-137
F-7-274
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Release Arm
Plate 0001-8321
plate [2].
F-7-275
screw [2].
F-7-276

Chapter 7
7-138
F-7-277
F-7-278
Memo:
is removed.
fixing roller.
will be freed.
F-7-279
place.

Chapter 7
7-139
F-7-280
F-7-281
contact guide [2].
F-7-282
F-7-283
duct [2].

Chapter 7
7-140
F-7-284
ITB unit
F-7-285
Belt (ITB) 0001-8328
paper underneath.
ITB retainer [2].
F-7-286

Chapter 7
7-141
F-7-287
F-7-288
F-7-289
F-7-290

Chapter 7
7-142
F-7-291
Memo:
F-7-292
F-7-293
upward direction.

Chapter 7
7-143
F-7-294
Primary Transfer
Roller 0000-9272
1) Lift the primary transfer roller [2] by
both its edges to detach it from the
bushing assembly.
F-7-295
Do not hold it by the sponge or rubber
areas.
Note When Mounting
the ITB 0001-8329
bottom.

Chapter 7
7-144
F-7-296
F-7-297
F-7-298
F-7-299

Chapter 7
7-145
F-7-300
Note When Mounting
F-7-301
F-7-302
96.7 mm.
[1]>[2]>[3] or [4]; screw [3] (TP; M3x6)

Chapter 7
7-146
F-7-303
F-7-304
Note When Mounting
drum unit.
dust.
F-7-305

Chapter 7
7-147
F-7-306
Memo:
images.
7.10.11.13 After
Replacing the Primary
Transfer Roller 0001-6883
P>1ATVC-EX
7.10.12 Secondary Transfer
External Roller
Separation Static
Eliminator 0001-8393
2) Put paper between the separation static
eliminator [1] and the secondary transfer
outside roller [2]; then, remove the
screws [3], and pull out the separation
static eliminator [1] toward the front.
F-7-307
Memo:
It is important to put paper in between to
prevent damage to the secondary transfer
roller by molded segment of the separation
static eliminator when removing the
eliminator.

Chapter 7
7-148
Secondary Transfer
Outside Roller 0000-9280
1) While holding down the auxiliary guide
[1] by hand, remove the 2 screws [2];
then, detach the secondary transfer
outside roller assembly [3].
F-7-308
- Be sure to hold the auxiliary guide and the
secondary transfer outside roller in place
when removing the pin; otherwise, these
parts will slide out by the work of a
spring.
- Be sure not to touch the secondary
transfer outside roller. Use paper when
holding it.
2) Detach the arms [1] [2] from the
secondary transfer external roller
assembly.
F-7-309
Do not touch the secondary transfer
roller. Be sure to use paper when
holding it.
When Mounting the
Secondary Transfer
- Do not touch the secondary transfer
outside roller. Use paper when holding
it.
- The secondary transfer roller [1] has its
own orientation. Be sure to mount it so
that the edge with a marking (blue) [2] is
toward the front.

Chapter 7
7-149
F-7-310
- Be sure that the spring attached to the arm
of the secondary transfer outside roller is
fitted within the protrusion [1]. Also, be
sure that the spring attached to the
auxiliary guide is within in the
protrusion [2].
F-7-311
- Be sure that the claw [1] of the arm found
on both edges of the secondary transfer
roller assembly are inside the frame.
F-7-312
- When fixing the arm [2] of the secondary
transfer outside roller [1] by means of a
pin [3], keep the pin half way; thereafter,
push the pin fully inside when mounting
the auxiliary guide [4].

Chapter 7
7-150
F-7-313
F-7-314
7.10.12.4 After
Replacing the
Secondary Transfer
- If you have replaced the secondary
transfer outside roller, be sure to apply
about 10 mg of grease (FY9-6008) to the
end [2] (side without the blue marking)
at the rear of the secondary transfer
outside roller [1].
F-7-315
7.10.13 Secondary Transfer
Internal Roller
Drum Unit 0003-5684

Chapter 7
7-151
F-7-316
F-7-317
(M4x20).
F-7-318
stopper [3].
F-7-319

Chapter 7
7-152
F-7-320
detach.
F-7-321
F-7-322
drum unit.
[2]
[3]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-153
delivery tray [2].
F-7-323
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
F-7-324
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0303
printer unit.

Chapter 7
7-154
F-7-325
installed)
(upper right).
F-7-326
F-7-327
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-155
installed.
F-7-328
hinge in place.
F-7-329
the hinge [2].
F-7-330
machine side plate.
F-7-331
hinge in place.

Chapter 7
7-156
F-7-332
[2].
F-7-333
F-7-334
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 7
7-157
F-7-335
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Release Arm
Plate 0001-8334
plate [2].
F-7-336
screw [2].
F-7-337

Chapter 7
7-158
F-7-338
F-7-339
Memo:
is removed.
fixing roller.
will be freed.
F-7-340
place.

Chapter 7
7-159
F-7-341
F-7-342
contact guide [2].
F-7-343
F-7-344
duct [2].

Chapter 7
7-160
F-7-345
ITB unit
F-7-346
Belt (ITB) 0001-8338
paper underneath.
ITB retainer [2].
F-7-347

Chapter 7
7-161
F-7-348
F-7-349
F-7-350
F-7-351

Chapter 7
7-162
F-7-352
Memo:
F-7-353
F-7-354
upward direction.

Chapter 7
7-163
F-7-355
Secondary Transfer
Inside Roller 0000-9274
of the secondary transfer roller assembly
[1] toward the inside, slide them out in
the direction of arrows until they stop.
F-7-356
roller support members [2] and [3].
F-7-357

Chapter 7
7-164
F-7-358
3) Move the secondary transfer inside
roller assembly [1] in the direction of the
arrow [A] unit it stops; then, move it in
the direction of the arrow [B] to detach.
F-7-359
F-7-360
Memo:
Move the secondary transfer inside roller
in the direction of the arrow so that you can
remove the protrusion [1].
F-7-361
4) Remove the 2 E-rings [1], and detach the
bushing [2] and the other bushing [3].

Chapter 7
7-165
F-7-362
Be sure not to hold the rubber portion
of the secondary transfer inside roller.
Note When Mounting
the ITB 0001-8341
bottom.
F-7-363
F-7-364

Chapter 7
7-166
F-7-365
F-7-366
F-7-367
Note When Mounting
F-7-368

Chapter 7
7-167
F-7-369
96.7 mm.
[1]>[2]>[3] or [4]; screw [3] (TP; M3x6)
F-7-370
F-7-371
Note When Mounting
drum unit.

Chapter 7
7-168
dust.
F-7-372
F-7-373
Memo:
images.
7.10.14 ITB Cleaning Blade
7.10.14.1 Preparing for
the Removal of the
mode, and press the OK key:
- COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITB-
CLSW

Chapter 7
7-169
While the mode is being executed, the
screen flashes 'ACTIVE'; it changes to
'OK!' at the end of the execution.
3) Turn off the control panel power switch;
then, wait for 15 sec or more, and turn
off the main power switch.
Memo:
The machine operates as follows in
response to the execution of this service
mode:
- it changes the position of the developing
assembly rotary. (If the developing
cylinder is positioned immediately
under the ITB cleaning unit, the base of
the ITB cleaning unit can rub against the
surface of the developing cylinder to
cause damage. The developing
assembly rotary is rotated so that the Bk
toner cartridge is positioned
immediately under the ITB cleaning
unit.)
- if a Finisher-P1 is installed, the finisher
delivery tray is moved as far up as it
moves. (If the finisher delivery tray is in
down position, mounting the ITB
cleaning unit can prove to be difficult.)
delivery tray [2].
F-7-374
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
F-7-375

Chapter 7
7-170
Delivery Tray Lower
Cover 0002-0311
[1].
F-7-376
F-7-377
F-7-378

Chapter 7
7-171
F-7-379
2) Check to be sure that the toner cartridge
(Bk) [1] is positioned under the ITB
cleaning unit [2]. If not, turn the
developing assembly rotary by hand so
that the toner cartridge (Bk) moves to a
point immediately under the ITB
cleaning unit.
F-7-380
3) Remove the screw [1], and fit the screw
to the screw hole [2].
F-7-381
Memo:
To fix the arm [3] in place, fit the screw in
the screw hole [2].
If the arm is not fixed in place, the cleaning
blade will come into contact with the ITB
when the ITB cleaning unit is removed,
damaging the ITB.
4) Slide out the ITB cleaning unit [1] to the
front to detach.

Chapter 7
7-172
F-7-382
When removing the ITB cleaning unit,
take care not to impose excess force on the
nozzle area [1] of the unit; otherwise, the
area can suffer damage.
F-7-383
If you have to place the ITB cleaning
unit on the floor after removing it from the
machine, be sure to orient it as shown (i.e.,
so that the releasing arm is parallel with the
floor); otherwise, the waste toner inside the
ITB cleaning unit can start to leak.
F-7-384
ITB Cleaning Blade 0000-9360
1) Remove the screw [1] that you fitted
before removing the ITB cleaning unit.

Chapter 7
7-173
F-7-385
2 end seal members [2] and the ITB
cleaning blade [3].
F-7-386
When removing or fitting the fixing
screw of the ITB cleaning blade, keep the
ITB cleaning unit assembly [1] lifted with
your hand so that the shutter assembly [2]
will not come into contact with the floor.
The resulting excess force can damage the
shutter assembly.
F-7-387
7.10.14.7 When
Replacing the ITB
Cleaning Blade 0004-5158
- When replacing the ITB cleaning blade,
be sure to remove the waste toner
collecting in the brush assembly [1] of the
end seal member.

Chapter 7
7-174
F-7-388
When Mounting the
- Be sure that the screw [1] is fitted to the
ITB cleaning unit before mounting the
ITB cleaning unit to the machine.
Otherwise, the ITB cleaning blade will
remain in contact with the ITB,
damaging the ITB when the ITB
cleaning unit is being mounted.
F-7-389
- When carelessly attaching the ITB
cleaning unit to the main body, the end
seal [1] may be tilted to clash the ITB
unit guide assembly [2] (the surface
indicated by a heavy line in the figure),
and the seal may get deformed or
removed. This damage on the seal may
result in scattering of the waste toner
inside the machine. To prevent this
scattering, attach the ITB cleaning unit
in the following steps: [A] Slant the
front edge of the ITB cleaning unit
toward the left, and insert the ITB
cleaning unit toward the rear side of the
machine temporally; [B] Move the unit
until it becomes parallel to the ITB,
ensuring that the end seal [1] does not
clash the ITB unit guide assembly [2]
(the surface indicated by a heavy line in
the figure); [C] Push the unit straight to
the rear side of the machine.

Chapter 7
7-175
F-7-390
F-7-391
Memo: The figures below show the end
seal [1] in normal condition and the one in
abnormal condition (upward-tilted one).
F-7-392
[A]
[B]
[C]
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-176
F-7-393
- After mounting the ITB cleaning unit to
the machine, be sure to put back the
screw [1] where the screw [2] is found.
Otherwise, there will be a gap to the ITB
cleaning blade, preventing cleaning of
the ITB.
F-7-394
7.10.15 ITB Fan
delivery tray [2].
F-7-395
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
[1]

Chapter 7
7-177
F-7-396
Delivery Tray Lower
Cover 0002-0315
[1].
F-7-397
F-7-398
ITB Cleaning Fan 0000-9362
waste toner unit [3]; then, remove the
two screws [4], and detach the inside
cover (middle)
F-7-399
2) Open the right door, and loosen the 2
screws [1]; then, remove the screw [2],

Chapter 7
7-178
and detach the support cover (right) [3].
F-7-400
3) Remove the screw [1] and the other 2
screws [2];then, detach the ITB cooling
fan cover [3].
F-7-401
remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the
ITB cooling fan [3].
F-7-402
7.10.16 Separator Eliminator
Separation Static
Eliminator 0000-9279
2) Put paper between the separation static
eliminator [1] and the secondary transfer
outside roller [2]; then, remove the
screws [3], and pull out the separation
static eliminator [1] toward the front.

Chapter 7
7-179
F-7-403
Memo:
It is important to put paper in between to
prevent damage to the secondary transfer
roller by molded segment of the separation
static eliminator when removing the
eliminator.
7.10.17 ATR Sensor Unit
left cover [2].
F-7-404
delivery tray [2].
F-7-405
[2]
[1]
[1]

Chapter 7
7-180
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
F-7-406
Delivery Tray Lower
Cover 0002-0321
[1].
F-7-407
F-7-408
7.10.17.4 Removing
ATR Sensor Unit 0000-9369
1) Turn the developing assembly rotary by
hand so that the Bk toner cartridge is in
position of replacement.

Chapter 7
7-181
waste toner unit [3]; then, remove the 2
screws [4], and detach the inside cover
(middle) [5].
F-7-409
inside cover (left) [2].
F-7-410
F-7-411
ATR sensor unit [2].
F-7-412

Chapter 7
7-182
7.10.18 Environment Sensor
PCB
Drum Unit 0001-8409
F-7-413
F-7-414
(M4x20).
F-7-415
stopper [3].

Chapter 7
7-183
F-7-416
F-7-417
detach.
F-7-418

Chapter 7
7-184
F-7-419
drum unit.
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0323
printer unit.
F-7-420
installed)
(upper right).
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-185
F-7-421
F-7-422
installed.
F-7-423
hinge in place.
F-7-424
the hinge [2].

Chapter 7
7-186
F-7-425
machine side plate.
F-7-426
hinge in place.
Fixing Assembly
Release Arm Plate 0001-8412
plate [2].
F-7-427
F-7-428

Chapter 7
7-187
[2].
F-7-429
F-7-430
Memo:
stepped screws.
F-7-431
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL

Chapter 7
7-188
Patch Image Read
Sensor 0001-8414
1) Using a stubby screwdriver, remove the
2 screws [1], and detach the sensor
protective cover [2].
F-7-432
2) Remove the screw [1]; then, lifting the
sensor PCB holder [2] slightly toward
the front, pull out the patch image read
sensor PCB [3] in upward direction at an
angle.
F-7-433
- Do not touch the volume element on the
sensor PCB. If you touched it
inadvertently, be sure to replace it.
- Do not touch the window surface of the
sensor. If you touched it inadvertently,
be sure to wipe it with a moist cloth.
(Never dry wipe it.)
3) Disconnect the connector [1].
F-7-434
Environment Sensor
PCB 0000-9291
1) Free the cable [1] from the cable guide,
and remove the 2 screws [2].

Chapter 7
7-189
F-7-435
2) Turn over the sensor PCB holder [1],
and disconnect the connector [2]; then,
slide the environment sensor PCB [3] at
an angle to detach.
F-7-436
When Mounting the
Drum Unit 0001-8415
drum unit.
dust.
F-7-437

Chapter 7
7-190
F-7-438
Memo:
images.
7.10.19 Patch Image Sensor
Drum Unit 0001-8400
F-7-439
F-7-440
(M4x20).

Chapter 7
7-191
F-7-441
stopper [3].
F-7-442
F-7-443
detach.
F-7-444

Chapter 7
7-192
F-7-445
drum unit.
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0322
printer unit.
F-7-446
installed)
(upper right).
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 7
7-193
F-7-447
F-7-448
installed.
F-7-449
hinge in place.
F-7-450
the hinge [2].

Chapter 7
7-194
F-7-451
machine side plate.
F-7-452
hinge in place.
Fixing Assembly
Release Arm Plate 0001-8404
plate [2].
F-7-453
F-7-454

Chapter 7
7-195
[2].
F-7-455
F-7-456
Memo:
stepped screws.
F-7-457
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL

Chapter 7
7-196
Patch Image Read
Sensor 0000-9290
1) Using a stubby screwdriver, remove the
2 screws [1], and detach the sensor
protective cover [2].
F-7-458
2) Remove the screw [1]; then, lifting the
sensor PCB holder [2] slightly toward
the front, pull out the patch image read
sensor PCB [3] in upward direction at an
angle.
F-7-459
- Do not touch the volume element on the
sensor PCB. If you touched it
inadvertently, be sure to replace it.
- Do not touch the window surface of the
sensor. If you touched it inadvertently,
be sure to wipe it with a moist cloth.
(Never dry wipe it.)
F-7-460
When Mounting the
Drum Unit 0001-8408
drum unit.

Chapter 7
7-197
dust.
F-7-461
F-7-462
Memo:
images.

Chapter 8 Pickup/
Feeding System

Contents
Contents
8.1 Basic Sequence...........................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key8-1
8.1.2 Increase in Speed.................................................................................8-1
8.2 Detecting Jams ...........................................................................................8-5
8.2.1 Stationary Jams ...................................................................................8-5
8.2.1.1 Stationary Jam at Power-On.........................................................8-5
8.2.2 Other Jams...........................................................................................8-5
8.2.2.1 Wrong Size Jam ...........................................................................8-5
8.2.2.2 Wrong Material Jam.....................................................................8-6
8.2.2.3 Cover Open Jam...........................................................................8-6
8.3 Cassette ......................................................................................................8-7
8.3.1 Setting Up the Universal Cassette.......................................................8-7
8.3.2 Paper Level Sensor..............................................................................8-8
8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit..............................................................................8-13
8.4.1 Overview...........................................................................................8-13
8.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations...........................................................8-14
8.5 Registration Unit......................................................................................8-15
8.5.1 Overview...........................................................................................8-15
8.6 Duplex Feeding Unit................................................................................8-16
8.6.1 Sequence of Image Formation ..........................................................8-16
8.6.2 Flow of Paper (wo/ Delivery Option) ...............................................8-16
8.6.3 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -internal delivery)......................8-23
8.6.4 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -external delivery).....................8-30
8.7.1 Pickup Unit 1.....................................................................................8-36
8.7.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear).....................................8-36
8.7.1.2 Removing the Right Door ..........................................................8-36
8.7.1.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear).....................................8-38
8.7.1.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)...................................8-38
8.7.1.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 .............................................8-39
8.7.2 Pickup Unit 2.....................................................................................8-39
8.7.2.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear).....................................8-39

8.7.2.3 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2.............................................8-40
8.7.3 Sensor Mounting Plate......................................................................8-41
8.7.3.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear) ....................................8-41
8.7.3.2 Removing the Right Door..........................................................8-41
8.7.3.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) ....................................8-43
8.7.3.7 Removing the Sensor Base ........................................................8-44
8.7.3.8 Mounting the Sensor Base .........................................................8-45
8.7.4 Pickup Roller ....................................................................................8-46
8.7.4.1 Removing the Pickup Roller/Feed Roller/Separation Roller.....8-46
8.7.5 Feed Roller........................................................................................8-47
8.7.6 Separation Roller ..............................................................................8-47
8.7.7 Cassette Pickup Motor 1...................................................................8-48
8.7.7.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1.....................................8-49
8.7.8 Cassette Pickup Motor 2...................................................................8-49
8.7.8.2 Removing the Leakage Breaker.................................................8-49
8.7.8.3 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 2.....................................8-50
8.7.9 Cassette Size Detection Sensor.........................................................8-50
8.7.9.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) ....................................8-53
8.7.9.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor...........................................8-54
8.7.10 Cassette Retry Paper Sensor ...........................................................8-55
8.7.10.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear) ..................................8-55
8.7.10.2 Removing the Right Door........................................................8-56
8.7.10.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) ..................................8-58

Contents
8.7.10.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front).................................8-58
8.7.10.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 ...........................................8-58
8.7.10.7 Removing the Sensor Base.......................................................8-59
8.7.10.8 Removing the Cassette Retry Paper Sensor.............................8-60
8.7.11 Cassette Paper Sensor .....................................................................8-60
8.7.11.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)...................................8-63
8.7.11.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor.......................................8-65
8.7.12 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B).................................................8-65
8.7.12.8 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ..................8-69
8.7.13 Slide Resistor ..................................................................................8-70
8.7.13.3 Removing the Manual Feed Unit .............................................8-72
8.7.13.4 Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit ..........................................8-73
8.7.13.5 Removing the Slide Resistor....................................................8-74
8.7.14 Cassette Pickup Solenoid ................................................................8-74

Contents
8.7.14.7 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid .................................8-78
8.7.15 Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB.....................................................8-78
8.7.15.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear) ..................................8-81
8.7.15.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1...........................................8-81
8.7.15.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2...........................................8-82
8.7.15.7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB......................8-82
8.7.16 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch............................................................8-83
8.7.16.3 Removing the Rear Cover........................................................8-85
8.7.16.4 Removing the Main Power Switch ..........................................8-85
8.7.16.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch .............................8-86
8.7.17 Manual Feed Tray Unit...................................................................8-86
8.7.17.3 Removing the Manual Feed Unit.............................................8-89
8.7.17.4 Removing Manual Feed Tray Unit ..........................................8-90
8.7.18 Manual Feed Unit ...........................................................................8-90
8.7.19 Manual Pickup Roller .....................................................................8-94
8.7.19.4 Removing the Pickup Roller....................................................8-97
8.7.20 Manual Feed Separation Pad ..........................................................8-98
8.7.20.3 Removing the Manual Feed Unit...........................................8-100
8.7.20.4 Removing the Pickup Roller..................................................8-101
8.7.20.5 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad..........................8-102
8.7.21 Transparency Sensor (Front/Rear)................................................8-102

Contents
8.7.21.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear).................................8-104
8.7.21.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)...............................8-104
8.7.21.5 Removing the PIck-up Assembly 1........................................8-105
8.7.21.6 Removing the Transparency Sensor.......................................8-105
8.7.22 Registration Sensor .......................................................................8-106
8.7.22.3 Removing the Rear Cover......................................................8-108
8.7.22.4 Removing the Main Power Switch ........................................8-108
8.7.22.5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch ...........................8-109
8.7.22.6 Removing the Contact Guide and the Pre-Registration Guide Fixing
Boss..................................................................................................8-109
8.7.22.7 Removing the Inside Front Cover (right)...............................8-110
8.7.22.8 Removing the Registration Sensor.........................................8-110
8.7.23 Registration Clutch........................................................................8-111
8.7.23.2 Removing the Registration Clutch.........................................8-112
8.7.24 Vertical Path Roller.......................................................................8-112
8.7.24.3 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear).................................8-115
8.7.24.4 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)...............................8-115
8.7.24.5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 .........................................8-115
8.7.24.6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 .........................................8-116
8.7.24.7 Removing the Sensor Base.....................................................8-116
8.7.24.8 Removing the Vertical Path Roller ........................................8-117
8.7.25 Duplex Feed Roller 2 ....................................................................8-118
8.7.25.3 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor........................................8-120
8.7.25.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Roller 2......................................8-120
8.7.26 Duplex Feed Sensor ......................................................................8-121

Contents
8.7.26.3 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor........................................8-123
8.7.27 Duplex Feed Clutch ......................................................................8-124
8.7.27.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear) ................................8-124
8.7.27.2 Removing the Right Door......................................................8-124
8.7.27.4 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch........................................8-126
8.7.28 Delivery Assembly 1.....................................................................8-127
8.7.28.1 Removing the Delivery Tray .................................................8-127
8.7.28.2 Removing the Support Cover.................................................8-127
8.7.28.3 Removing the Delivery Tray Right Cover.............................8-128
8.7.28.4 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear) ................................8-128
8.7.28.6 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1......................................8-130
8.7.29 Delivery Drive Unit ......................................................................8-131
8.7.29.1 Removing the Delivery Tray .................................................8-131
8.7.29.2 Removing the Support Cover.................................................8-131
8.7.29.3 Removing the Delivery Tray Right Cover.............................8-131
8.7.29.5 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1......................................8-133
8.7.29.6 Removing the Delivery Drive Assembly...............................8-134

Chapter 8
8-1
8.1 Basic Sequence
8.1.1 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press
on the Start Key 0000-8589
- Basic Sequence of Operations for Making 3 Prints
F-8-1
8.1.2 Increase in Speed 0000-7866
The machine increases the speed of moving paper over specific intervals. An overview and
the associated accessories for the increase in speed are as follows:
- No Delivery Accessory
Starts printing
Cassette 1 pickup motor
(M6)
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
(SL1)
Cassette 1 retry sensor
(PS10)
Main motor
(M2)
Registration sensor (PS9)
Registration clutch
(CL2)
Fixing motor(M11)
Fixing inlet sensor
(PS35)
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
Delivery motor 1 (M4)
Delivery sensor (PS14)
*1 *3
*2
PRINT
0.8 sec
A
*1 pickup
*3 registration
*2 pre-registration
cassette 1 pickup motor rotation
increased
cassette 1: 3 sheets of paper
A increase in sheet-to-sheet distance
in full-color mode

Chapter 8
8-2
F-8-2
1. Increase in Speed for Pickup Operation
The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup)
- Finisher-P1 in Use
[1

Chapter 8
8-3
F-8-3
1. Increase in Speed for Pickup
The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup).
2. Increase in Speed for Reversal
The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for delivery to tray 3).
- Finisher-Q1/Q2 in Use
[1]
[2]

Chapter 8
8-4
F-8-4
1. Increase in Speed for Pickup
The speed is 1.5 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for manual feed pickup).
2. Increase in Speed After Fixing
The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed.
3. Increase in Speed for the Buffer Path
The speed is 2.5 times as high as the process speed (increase if for large size; no increase if
for delivery to saddle).
4. Increase in Speed for Reversal
The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed (no increase if for delivery to tray 3).
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

Chapter 8
8-5
8.2 Detecting Jams
8.2.1 Stationary Jams
8.2.1.1 Stationary Jam at Power-On 0001-4453
The machine makes a check to see that there is no paper over the following sensors before
it starts initial multiple rotation at power-on:
T-8-1
8.2.2 Other Jams
8.2.2.1 Wrong Size Jam 0001-4502
A wrong size jam is identified when paper being used is shorter than the specified paper
length.
T-8-2
Sensor
Cassette 1 retry sensor (PS10)
Cassette 2 retry sensor (PS11)
Fixing inlet sensor (PS25)
No. 1 delivery sensor (PS14)
Duplex feed sensor (PS17)
Sensor

Chapter 8
8-6
8.2.2.2 Wrong Material Jam 0001-4503
A wrong material jam is identified when the transparency sensor detects the wrong type of
paper.
T-8-3
8.2.2.3 Cover Open Jam 0001-4504
A door open jam is identified when the machine detects the opening of the door while it is
making copies/prints.
T-8-4
Sensor
Transparency sensor (PS26)
Sensor
Front cover open sensor (PS22)
Right cover open sensor (PS18)

Chapter 8
8-7
8.3 Cassette
8.3.1 Setting Up the Universal Cassette 0000-8451
The following are default sizes the machine will assume when U1 through U4 are detected:
T-8-5
The following is a list of sizes that may be assigned in addition to default sizes in service
mode:
T-8-6
U1 G-LTR
U2 FLSC
U3 G-LGL
U4 A-LTR
Universal U1 Through U4
Size
FLSC
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-OFI
M-OFI
FOLI
A-FLS
G-LTR
G-LGL
A-LTR (LTR)

Chapter 8
8-8
8.3.2 Paper Level Sensor 0000-7995
The level of paper inside the cassette is checked using the following sensors:
T-8-7
A-LTRR (LTRR)
Cassette 1 Cassette 2
Paper level sensor A PS3 PS5
Paper level sensor B PS4 PS6
Paper sensor PS1 PS2
Universal U1 Through U4
Size

Chapter 8
8-9
F-8-5
[1] Flag
[2] Cassette paper sensor
[3] Lifter clutch
[4] Cassette paper level sensor A
[5] Cassette paper level sensor B
[6] Paper level sensor flag
[7] Lifter gear
[8] Tray
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]

Chapter 8
8-11
F-8-6
OFF
OFF
When full with paper
Paper
Cassette paper
level sensor B
Cassette paper
level sensor A
When there is little paper
OFF ON
When half full with paper
Paper
Cassette paper
level sensor B
Cassette paper
level sensor A
Paper
Cassette paper
level sensor B
Cassette paper
level sensor A
When there is no paper
Paper tray
Cassette paper sensor
Flag
ON
ON
View from the Front
of the Machine

Chapter 8
8-12
T-8-8
Paper level
sensor A
Paper level
sensor B
Paper sensor Paper level
Control panel
indication
OFF OFF OFF 100% to 50% of capacity
ON OFF OFF 50% to 50 sheets (approx.)
ON ON OFF 50 sheets or less (approx.)
--- --- ON No paper

Chapter 8
8-13
8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit
8.4.1 Overview 0001-8636
The paper inside the cassette is held up by the work of the lifer plate. When pickup takes
place, the pickup roller moves down to come into contact with the stack of paper. The
pickup roller starts to move down when the pickup solenoid goes on. The feed roller and the
separation roller make sure that no more than a single sheet of paper is moved forward to
the paper path. The vertical path roller serves to move paper as far as the registration roller.
The pickup path roller, pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are driven by the
pickup motor.
F-8-7
[1] Cassette paper sensor
[2] Pickup roller (roller A)
[3] Feed roller (roller B)
[4] Separation roller (roller C)
[5] Pickup vertical path roller
[9]
[10]
[7]
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

Chapter 8
8-14
[6] Cassette retry paper sensor
[7] Vertical path guide
[8] Lower right cover
[9] Holding plate
[10] Lifter plate
8.4.2 Basic Sequence of Operations 0001-8619
Basic Sequence
F-8-8
Starts printing
Cassette 1 pickup motor
(M6)
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
(SL1)
Cassette 1 retry sensor
(PS10)
Main motor
(M2)
Registration clutch
(CL2)
Fixing motor(M11)
Fixing inlet sensor
(PS35)
Delivery motor 1 (M4)
Delivery sensor (PS14)
*1 *3
*2
PRINT
0.8 sec
A
*1 pickup
*3 registration
*2 pre-registration
cassette 1 pickup motor rotation
increased
cassette 1: 3 sheets of paper
A increase in sheet-to-sheet distance
in full-color mode

Chapter 8
8-15
8.5 Registration Unit
8.5.1 Overview 0001-4411
The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M2). The registration clutch (CL2)
found between the registration roller and the main motor goes on and off to control the
registration roller so that the paper and the image on the intermediate transfer belt will
match.
F-8-9
M2
DC controller PCB
Mainmotor
drive
signal
J311
J320-B8
REG_CL*
Ragistration
cluch
drive
signal
CL2

Chapter 8
8-16
8.6 Duplex Feeding Unit
8.6.1 Sequence of Image Formation 0001-4746
The machine goes thorough the following sequence to form images when making double-
sided copies/prints:
F-8-10
8.6.2 Flow of Paper (wo/ Delivery Option) 0001-4747
A4/LTR, Black-and-White, 5 Sheets
A number in a circle indicates the 1st side, while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side.
Although a different sheet-to-sheet interval is used for full-color operation, the sequence of
image formation is the same.
4 A4/LTR
sheets
5 A4/LTR
sheets
6 A4/LTR
sheets
3 A3/LDR
sheets
indicates the 1st side of the 1st sheet.
indicates the 2nd side of the 1st sheet.
indicates a pair of sheets used for double-placement.
1-2 2-2 1-1 3-2 2-1
2-1
4-2 3-1
2-2 1-1 3-2
4-1
4-2 5-2
5-2
3-1 4-1 5-1
1-2
2-1
2-2 1-1 3-2 4-2 3-1 4-1 6-2 5-1 6-1
1-2
1-1
1-2
1-2 1-1 2-2 2-1 3-2 3-1

Chapter 8
8-17
F-8-11
The 1st sheet is picked up.
F-8-12
An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up.
1
1
2

Chapter 8
8-18
F-8-13
The 1st sheet is turned over and moved to duplexing registration. An image is formed for
the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet.
F-8-14
The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved
for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up.
1
2
3
2
1

Chapter 8
8-19
F-8-15
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and for the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet.
The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing.
F-8-16
The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing
registration. The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 4th sheet is picked up.
1
2
3
1
4
3
2
1

Chapter 8
8-20
F-8-17
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet.
The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.
F-8-18
The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is reversed and is moved for duplexing
registration. The 3rd sheet is picked for registration once again. The 5th sheet is picked up.
3
4
2
2
1
5
4
3
2
1

Chapter 8
8-21
F-8-19
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet.
The 4th sheet is moved for duplexing.
F-8-20
The 3rd sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is turned over and moved for registration. The 4th
sheet is moved for registration once again.
4
3
3
5
2
1
3
5
4
2
1

Chapter 8
8-22
F-8-21
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.
F-8-22
The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again.
4
4
5
3
2
1
5
3
4
2
1

Chapter 8
8-23
F-8-23
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet.
F-8-24
The 5th sheet is delivered.
8.6.3 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -internal
delivery) 0001-4749
A4/LTR, 5 sheets, Delivery to tray 1/2
5
3
4
5
2
1
3
2
1
4
5

Chapter 8
8-24
Although a different sheet-to-sheet interval is used for full-color operation, the sequence of
image formation is the same.
F-8-25
F-8-26
1
1
2

Chapter 8
8-25
F-8-27
The 1st sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. An image is formed
for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet.
F-8-28
The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again. The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved
for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up.
2
1
1
2
3

Chapter 8
8-26
F-8-29
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The
2nd sheet is moved for duplexing.
F-8-30
The 1st sheet is delivered. The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing
registration. The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 4th sheet is picked up.
1
3
1
2
4
2
1 3

Chapter 8
8-27
F-8-31
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet.
The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.
F-8-32
The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 4th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing
registration. The 3rd sheet is moved for registration once again. The 5th sheet is picked up.
2
3
2
4
1
5
1
2
3
4

Chapter 8
8-28
F-8-33
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet.
The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.
F-8-34
The 3rd sheet is delivery. The 5th sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing
registration. The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again.
3
5
4
3
1
2
3
1
2
4
5

Chapter 8
8-29
F-8-35
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet. The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing.
F-8-36
The 4th sheet is delivered. The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again.
4
4
1
1
2
3
5
4
1
2
3
5

Chapter 8
8-30
F-8-37
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet.
F-8-38
The 5th sheet is delivered.
8.6.4 Flow of Paper (w/ Delivery option -external
delivery) 0001-4750
A4/LTR, 3 sheets, Delivery to tray 3
5
4
1
2
3
5
4
1
2
3
5

Chapter 8
8-31
Although a different sheet-to-sheet interval is used for full-color or A3/LDR size operation,
the sequence of image formation is the same.
F-8-39
F-8-40
1
2
1

Chapter 8
8-32
F-8-41
The 1st sheet is turned over, and is moved for duplexing registration. An image is formed
for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet.
F-8-42
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is turned over, and is
moved for duplexing registration. The 3rd sheet is picked up.
1
2
3
2
1
1

Chapter 8
8-33
F-8-43
The 1st sheet is turned over, and an image is formed for the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet. The
2nd sheet is kept in wait for duplexing registration.
F-8-44
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 2nd sheet. The 3rd sheet is tuned over, and is
moved for duplexing registration.
1
3
2
2
3
2
1

Chapter 8
8-34
F-8-45
The 2nd sheet is turned over, and is delivered. The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing.
F-8-46
An image is formed for the 1st side of the 3rd sheet.
2
2
3
1
2
1
3
3

Chapter 8
8-35
F-8-47
The 3rd sheet is turned over, and is delivered.
3
2
3
1

Chapter 8
8-36
Procedure
8.7.1 Pickup Unit 1
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0446
printer unit.
F-8-48
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-49
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-37
F-8-50
installed.
F-8-51
hinge in place.
F-8-52
the hinge [2].
F-8-53
machine side plate.

Chapter 8
8-38
F-8-54
hinge in place.
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0384
1) Open the right door [1] of the pedestal
(if a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 is installed).
2) Open the lower right cover [2].
right cover (lower rear) [3].
F-8-55
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0079
right cover (lower front) [3].
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-39
F-8-56
Pickup Assembly 1 0001-1972
1) Slide out the cassette 1/2.
2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]; then,
free the harness from the 2 wire saddles
[2] and the 2 clamps [3].
F-8-57
3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and take out
the pickup unit 1 [2].
F-8-58
8.7.2 Pickup Unit 2
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0385
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-40
F-8-59
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0080
F-8-60
the harness from the guide; then, remove
the 4 screws [2], and detach the pickup
assembly 2 [3].
F-8-61
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3] [3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-41
8.7.3 Sensor Mounting Plate
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0425
printer unit.
F-8-62
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-63
F-8-64
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-42
installed.
F-8-65
hinge in place.
F-8-66
the hinge [2].
F-8-67
machine side plate.
F-8-68
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-43
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0401
F-8-69
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0086
F-8-70
F-8-71
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-44
F-8-72
assembly 2 [3].
F-8-73
Sensor Base 0001-1808
1) Remove the 2 TP screws [1] and the
binding screw [2] from the rear of the
pickup assembly, and detach the bracket
[3].
F-8-74
Pickup Unit 1
F-8-75
Pickup Unit 2

Chapter 8
8-45
remove the screw; then, detach the
cassette pickup solenoid [3].
3) Remove the bushing and the 5 screws
[4]; then, detach the sensor base [5].
F-8-76
8.7.3.8 Mounting the
Take care not to orient the pickup unit
facing down when mounting the sensor
base; otherwise, the gears will fall out.
1) After fitting the bushing [1] to the frame,
mount the gear shaft [2].
F-8-77
2) Fit the 6 points [A] indicated in the
figure in the holes of the base; then,
mount the sensor base [2] using 4 screws
[1].
F-8-78
3) Mount the gear [1] and the E-ring [2].
Be sure not to leave out the pickup
solenoid [1]. When mounting it, be sure
that the stop [2] is fully engaged with the
cam gear [3].

Chapter 8
8-46
F-8-79
Try turning the gears to be sure that
they turn without resistance.
8.7.4 Pickup Roller
Pickup Roller/Feed
Roller/Separation
Roller 0003-5923
1) Slide out the cassette.
2) Open the right door (in the case of the
separation roller).
3) Pick the tabs of the individual rollers,
and detach the pickup roller [1], feed
roller [2], and separation roller [3].
F-8-80
Point to Note When Replacing the
Feed/Separation Roller 1
The collar (roller core) of the machine's
feed/separation roller is black.
Be sure not to use a collar (mint green)
used for the feed/separation roller of a
different model; otherwise, the
ingredients used in the roller will build
up on the intermediate transfer belt,
causing transfer faults.
The collar (roller core) of a separation/
feed roller shipped as a service part is
black.
Although some machines come with a
separation/feed roller that has a gray
collar, be sure to use a separation/feed
roller with a black collar if you need to
replace the roller.

Chapter 8
8-47
8.7.5 Feed Roller
Pickup Roller/Feed
Roller/Separation
Roller 0003-5924
separation roller).
F-8-81
black.
replace the roller.
8.7.6 Separation Roller
Pickup Roller/Feed
Roller/Separation
Roller 0003-5925
separation roller).
F-8-82

Chapter 8
8-48
black.
replace the roller.
8.7.7 Cassette Pickup Motor 1
F-8-83
F-8-84
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-49
Cassette Pickup Motor
1 0001-1610
pickup motor 1 [3].
F-8-85
8.7.8 Cassette Pickup Motor 2
F-8-86
F-8-87
Leakage Breaker 0001-3735
1) Remove the 4 fastons [1].
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-50
The cords connected to the fastons are
color-coded; be sure the colors are
correctly matched when connecting
them once again.
F-8-88
leakage breaker [3].
F-8-89
Cassette Pickup Motor
2 0001-1653
pickup motor 2 [3].
F-8-90
8.7.9 Cassette Size Detection
Sensor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0437
printer unit.

Chapter 8
8-51
F-8-91
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-92
F-8-93
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-52
installed.
F-8-94
hinge in place.
F-8-95
the hinge [2].
F-8-96
machine side plate.
F-8-97
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-53
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0389
F-8-98
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0383
F-8-99
assembly 2 [3].
F-8-100
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-54
2) Disconnect that 3 connectors [1]; then,
F-8-101
F-8-102
Cassette Size Sensor 0001-1769
1) Remove the snap stop, and detach the
PCB cover [1].
F-8-103
2) Disconnect the connector from the
cassette size sensor relay PCB (in the
case of the size sensor 1, disconnect the
connector [1]; in the case of the size
sensor 2, disconnect the connector [2]).
3) Free the harness from the clamp (in the
case of the size sensor 1, the 2 clamps
[3]; in the case of the size sensor 2, the 4
clamps [3] and [4]).

Chapter 8
8-55
F-8-104
cassette size sensor together with the
PCB [2] (in the case of the size sensor 1,
together with the size sensor 2; in the
case of the size sensor 2, remove the
sensor on its own).
F-8-105
5) Detach the cover [1] from the PCB.
F-8-106
6) Detach the size sensor [1] from the PCB.
F-8-107
8.7.10 Cassette Retry Paper
Sensor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0443
printer unit.

Chapter 8
8-56
F-8-108
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-109
F-8-110
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-57
installed.
F-8-111
hinge in place.
F-8-112
the hinge [2].
F-8-113
machine side plate.
F-8-114
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-58
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0397
F-8-115
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0088
F-8-116
F-8-117
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-59
F-8-118
assembly 2 [3].
F-8-119
[3].
F-8-120
Pickup Unit 1
F-8-121
Pickup Unit 2

Chapter 8
8-60
F-8-122
Cassette Retry Paper
Sensor 0001-1569
detach the cassette retry paper sensor
[2].
F-8-123
8.7.11 Cassette Paper Sensor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0442
printer unit.

Chapter 8
8-61
F-8-124
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-125
F-8-126
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-62
installed.
F-8-127
hinge in place.
F-8-128
the hinge [2].
F-8-129
machine side plate.
F-8-130
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-63
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0398
F-8-131
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0083
F-8-132
F-8-133
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-64
F-8-134
assembly 2 [3].
F-8-135
[3].
F-8-136
Pickup Unit 1
F-8-137
Pickup Unit 2

Chapter 8
8-65
F-8-138
Cassette Paper Sensor 0001-1584
detach the cassette paper sensor [2].
F-8-139
8.7.12 Cassette Paper Level
Sensor (A/B)
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0441
printer unit.
F-8-140
installed)
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-66
(upper right).
F-8-141
F-8-142
installed.
F-8-143
hinge in place.
F-8-144
the hinge [2].

Chapter 8
8-67
F-8-145
machine side plate.
F-8-146
hinge in place.
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0399
F-8-147
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0084
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-68
F-8-148
F-8-149
F-8-150
assembly 2 [3].
F-8-151
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-69
[3].
F-8-152
Pickup Unit 1
F-8-153
Pickup Unit 2
F-8-154
Cassette Paper Level
Sensor (A/B) 0001-1600
1) Disconnect the connector [1] (1 pc.
each), and detach the cassette power
level sensor (A/B) [2].

Chapter 8
8-70
F-8-155
8.7.13 Slide Resistor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0349
printer unit.
F-8-156
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-71
F-8-157
F-8-158
installed.
F-8-159
hinge in place.
F-8-160
the hinge [2].

Chapter 8
8-72
F-8-161
machine side plate.
F-8-162
hinge in place.
Manual Feed Unit 0001-4377
1) Remove the manual upper guide link [1]
(plastic E-ring [2] and boss [3]).
F-8-163
manual feed guide [1].
F-8-164
3) Remove the connector cover [1] (snap-
on).

Chapter 8
8-73
F-8-165
manual feed unit [3].
F-8-166
F-8-167
8.7.13.4 Removing
Manual Feed Tray
Unit 0001-4326
2) Remove the tie-wrap [2].
F-8-168
3) Remove the manual feed tray unit [3].

Chapter 8
8-74
F-8-169
Slide Resistor 0001-1755
manual feed tray upper cover [2].
If possible, mark the position of the
point of horizontal registration before
removal.
F-8-170
2) Remove the slide resistor [1] (connector
[2]).
F-8-171
8.7.14 Cassette Pickup
Solenoid
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0435
printer unit.

Chapter 8
8-75
F-8-172
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-173
F-8-174
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-76
installed.
F-8-175
hinge in place.
F-8-176
the hinge [2].
F-8-177
machine side plate.
F-8-178
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-77
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0392
F-8-179
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0085
F-8-180
F-8-181
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-78
F-8-182
assembly 2 [3].
F-8-183
Cassette Pickup
Solenoid 0001-1912
remove the screw [2]; then, detach the
F-8-184
8.7.15 Cassette Size Sensor
Relay PCB
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0434
printer unit.

Chapter 8
8-79
F-8-185
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-186
F-8-187
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-80
installed.
F-8-188
hinge in place.
F-8-189
the hinge [2].
F-8-190
machine side plate.
F-8-191
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-81
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0387
F-8-192
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0082
F-8-193
2) Disconnect that 3 connectors [1]; then,
F-8-194
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-82
F-8-195
assembly 2 [3].
F-8-196
Cassette Size Sensor
Relay PCB 0001-1777
1) Remove the PCB cover [1] (snap-on).
F-8-197
2) Remove the cassette size sensor relay
PCB [2] (3 connectors [2], 2 clamps
[3]).
F-8-198

Chapter 8
8-83
8.7.16 Manual Feed Pickup
Clutch
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0427
printer unit.
F-8-199
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-200
F-8-201
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-84
installed.
F-8-202
hinge in place.
F-8-203
the hinge [2].
F-8-204
machine side plate.
F-8-205
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-85
F-8-206
F-8-207
Main Power Switch 0001-3812
1) Remove the 4 fastons [1], and detach the
main power switch [2] (snap-on).
F-8-208
When connecting the 4 fastons, be sure
that the numbers in the following figure
match those on the stickers attached to
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-86
the fastons.
F-8-209
Manual Feed Pickup
Clutch 0001-3810
1) Remove the manual feed pickup gear
[1].
F-8-210
2) Disconnect the connector (2P) [1]; at the
same time, remove the 2 screws [3], and
detach the stop [2].
3) Pull out the pickup manual feed clutch
[4] to the front.
F-8-211
8.7.17 Manual Feed Tray Unit
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0348
printer unit.

Chapter 8
8-87
F-8-212
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-213
F-8-214
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-88
installed.
F-8-215
hinge in place.
F-8-216
the hinge [2].
F-8-217
machine side plate.
F-8-218
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-89
F-8-219
F-8-220
on).
F-8-221
F-8-222

Chapter 8
8-90
F-8-223
8.7.17.4 Removing
Manual Feed Tray
Unit 0001-1677
2) Remove the tie-wrap [2].
F-8-224
3) Remove the manual feed tray unit [3].
F-8-225
8.7.18 Manual Feed Unit
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0347
printer unit.

Chapter 8
8-91
F-8-226
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-227
F-8-228
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-92
installed.
F-8-229
hinge in place.
F-8-230
the hinge [2].
F-8-231
machine side plate.
F-8-232
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-93
F-8-233
F-8-234
on).
F-8-235
F-8-236

Chapter 8
8-94
F-8-237
8.7.19 Manual Pickup Roller
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0452
printer unit.
F-8-238
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-95
F-8-239
F-8-240
installed.
F-8-241
hinge in place.
F-8-242
the hinge [2].

Chapter 8
8-96
F-8-243
machine side plate.
F-8-244
hinge in place.
F-8-245
F-8-246
on).

Chapter 8
8-97
F-8-247
F-8-248
F-8-249
Pickup Roller 0001-1953
1) Remove the manual feed upper cover [1]
(snap-on).
F-8-250
2) Remove the bush [2], and detach the
manual feed pickup roller [3] together
with the shaft.
3) Remove the plastic E-ring [4], and
detach the manual feed pickup roller

Chapter 8
8-98
from shaft. Take care not to drop the
parallel pin.
F-8-251
8.7.20 Manual Feed Separation
Pad
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0453
printer unit.
F-8-252
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-99
F-8-253
F-8-254
installed.
F-8-255
hinge in place.
F-8-256
the hinge [2].

Chapter 8
8-100
F-8-257
machine side plate.
F-8-258
hinge in place.
F-8-259
F-8-260
on).

Chapter 8
8-101
F-8-261
F-8-262
F-8-263
Pickup Roller 0001-4337
1) Remove the manual feed upper cover [1]
(snap-on).
F-8-264
2) Remove the bush [2], and detach the
manual feed pickup roller [3] together
with the shaft.
3) Remove the plastic E-ring [4], and
detach the manual feed pickup roller

Chapter 8
8-102
from shaft. Take care not to drop the
parallel pin.
F-8-265
Manual Feed
Separation Pad 0001-4338
1) Remove the holding plate [5].
2) Remove the separation pad [6].
F-8-266
8.7.21 Transparency Sensor
(Front/Rear)
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0429
printer unit.
F-8-267
installed)
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-103
(upper right).
F-8-268
F-8-269
installed.
F-8-270
hinge in place.
F-8-271
the hinge [2].

Chapter 8
8-104
F-8-272
machine side plate.
F-8-273
hinge in place.
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0390
F-8-274
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0089
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-105
F-8-275
PIck-up Assembly 1 0001-4376
F-8-276
F-8-277
Transparency Sensor 0001-1963
1) Put your hand from behind the pre-
registration guide, and remove the
transparency sensor [1] (snap-on and
connector).
F-8-278
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-106
8.7.22 Registration Sensor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0428
printer unit.
F-8-279
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-280
F-8-281
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-107
installed.
F-8-282
hinge in place.
F-8-283
the hinge [2].
F-8-284
machine side plate.
F-8-285
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-108
F-8-286
F-8-287
F-8-288
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-109
the fastons.
F-8-289
Manual Feed Pickup
Clutch 0001-1709
1) Remove the manual feed pickup gear
[1].
F-8-290
same time, remove the 2 screws [3], and
3) Pull out the pickup manual feed clutch
[4] to the front.
F-8-291
Contact Guide and the
Pre-Registration
Guide Fixing Boss 0001-1711
contact guide [1].
F-8-292

Chapter 8
8-110
pre-registration guide fixing boss (rear)
F-8-293
Inside Front Cover
(right) 0002-4246
inside front cover (right) [2].
F-8-294
Registration Sensor 0001-1721
front cover switch gear unit [1].
F-8-295
front cover switch link [1].
F-8-296
3) Remove the screw, and detach the
varistor fixing screw [1] and the pre-

Chapter 8
8-111
registration guide fixing boss (front) [2].
F-8-297
4) Shift up the per-registration guide [1].
F-8-298
5) Remove the stop, and disconnect the
connector [2]; then, detach the
registration sensor [1].
F-8-299
8.7.23 Registration Clutch
F-8-300
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]

Chapter 8
8-112
F-8-301
Registration Clutch 0001-1730
same time, remove the screw [3], and
2) Pull out the registration clutch [4] to the
front to detach.
F-8-302
8.7.24 Vertical Path Roller
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0445
printer unit.
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-113
F-8-303
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-304
F-8-305
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-114
installed.
F-8-306
hinge in place.
F-8-307
the hinge [2].
F-8-308
machine side plate.
F-8-309
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-115
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0393
F-8-310
Right Cover (lower
front) 0002-0090
F-8-311
F-8-312
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 8
8-116
F-8-313
assembly 2 [3].
F-8-314
[3].
F-8-315
Pickup Unit 1
F-8-316
Pickup Unit 2

Chapter 8
8-117
F-8-317
Vertical Path Roller 0001-1560
1) Free the claw [A] of the gear [1] at the
rear; then, detach the gear and the
bushing [2].
F-8-318
2) Free the claw [A] of the bushing [1] at
the front; then, shift it to the rear, and lift
the vertical path roller [2] to detach.
F-8-319

Chapter 8
8-118
8.7.25 Duplex Feed Roller 2
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0430
printer unit.
F-8-320
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-321
F-8-322
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-119
installed.
F-8-323
hinge in place.
F-8-324
the hinge [2].
F-8-325
machine side plate.
F-8-326
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-120
Duplex Feed Sensor 0001-1683
1) Remove the 2 screws (w/ collar) [1], and
detach the transfer frame [2].
F-8-327
remove the duplex feed sensor [2].
F-8-328
Duplex Feed Roller 2 0001-1687
1) Free the coil spring [1] and, at the same
time, remove the E-ring [2] to pull out
the shaft [3]; then, detach the duplex
feed frame [4].
F-8-329
2) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the
one-way gear [2].
F-8-330
3) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the
duplex feed roller 2 [2].

Chapter 8
8-121
F-8-331
8.7.26 Duplex Feed Sensor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0431
printer unit.
F-8-332
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-122
F-8-333
F-8-334
installed.
F-8-335
hinge in place.
F-8-336
the hinge [2].

Chapter 8
8-123
F-8-337
machine side plate.
F-8-338
hinge in place.
Duplex Feed Sensor 0001-1694
1) Remove the 2 screws (w/ collar) [1], and
detach the transfer frame [2].
F-8-339
remove the duplex feed sensor [2].
F-8-340

Chapter 8
8-124
8.7.27 Duplex Feed Clutch
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0432
printer unit.
F-8-341
installed)
(upper right).
F-8-342
F-8-343
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-125
installed.
F-8-344
hinge in place.
F-8-345
the hinge [2].
F-8-346
machine side plate.
F-8-347
hinge in place.

Chapter 8
8-126
F-8-348
F-8-349
Duplex Feed Clutch 0001-1781
1) Remove the duplex drive gear [1].
F-8-350
2) Disconnect the connector [1]; at the
same time, remove the screw [3], and
3) Pull out the duplex feed clutch [4] to the
front.
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-127
F-8-351
8.7.28 Delivery Assembly 1
delivery tray [2].
F-8-352
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
F-8-353
Support Cover 0002-0067
support cover [2].

Chapter 8
8-128
F-8-354
Delivery Tray Right
Cover 0002-0069
1) Remove the delivery tray right cover
[1]. (There is no mounting screw used
for the delivery tray right over.)
F-8-355
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0449
printer unit.
F-8-356
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 8
8-129
F-8-357
F-8-358
installed.
F-8-359
hinge in place.
F-8-360
the hinge [2].

Chapter 8
8-130
F-8-361
machine side plate.
F-8-362
hinge in place.
Delivery Assembly 1 0001-2480
F-8-363
2) Remove the delivery assembly 1 [1]. (3
screws [2]; 2 on the left are stepped
screws)
F-8-364

Chapter 8
8-131
8.7.29 Delivery Drive Unit
delivery tray [2].
F-8-365
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
F-8-366
Support Cover 0002-0068
support cover [2].
F-8-367
Delivery Tray Right
Cover 0002-0070
1) Remove the delivery tray right cover

Chapter 8
8-132
[1]. (There is no mounting screw used
for the delivery tray right over.)
F-8-368
F-8-369
installed.
F-8-370

Chapter 8
8-133
hinge in place.
F-8-371
the hinge [2].
F-8-372
machine side plate.
F-8-373
hinge in place.
Delivery Assembly 1 0001-2756
F-8-374
2) Remove the delivery assembly 1 [1]. (3
screws [2]; 2 on the left are stepped

Chapter 8
8-134
screws)
F-8-375
Delivery Drive
Assembly 0001-1949
1) Free the fixing harness from the clamp
[1].
remove the 3 screws [3]; then, detach the
delivery drive assembly 1 [4].
F-8-376

Contents
Contents
9.1 Construction...............................................................................................9-1
9.1.2 Major Components..............................................................................9-2
9.1.3 Construction of the Control System....................................................9-5
9.2 Basic Sequence...........................................................................................9-7
9.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On .................................................9-7
9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations During Printing ..................................9-7
9.3 Various Control Mechanisms.....................................................................9-9
9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller.........................................9-9
9.3.1.1 Overview......................................................................................9-9
9.3.1.2 Speed Control According to Paper Type ...................................9-10
9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature.......................................9-12
9.3.2.1 Overview....................................................................................9-12
9.3.2.2 At Power-On ..............................................................................9-14
9.3.2.3 At a Standby State......................................................................9-15
9.3.2.4 At Time of Printing ....................................................................9-16
9.3.2.5 Return Sequence.........................................................................9-18
9.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper .........................................................9-18
9.3.3.1 Detection of the Passage of Paper..............................................9-18
9.4 Protective Functions.................................................................................9-21
9.4.1 Detecting Overheating by the Main Thermistor (TH1) ....................9-21
9.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Sub Thermistor (TH2).......................9-22
9.4.3 Detecting Overheating in Relation to a Triac Short-Circuit .............9-23
9.4.4 Detecting Overheating by the Thermal Switch (TP1).......................9-23
9.4.5 Detecting Overheating of the Heat Retention Heater (H3)...............9-24
9.4.6 Error ..................................................................................................9-25
9.5.1 Fixing Unit ........................................................................................9-27
9.5.1.3 Removing the Fixing Unit..........................................................9-29
9.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame ..........................................................................9-30

9.5.2.3 Removing the Fixing Unit .........................................................9-32
9.5.2.4 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide ..............................................9-33
9.5.2.5 Removing the Fixing Roller.......................................................9-35
9.5.2.6 Removing the Fixing Upper Frame ...........................................9-39
9.5.3 Fixing Roller.....................................................................................9-39
9.5.3.4 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide ..............................................9-43
9.5.3.5 Removing the Fixing Roller.......................................................9-45
9.5.4 Pressure Roller..................................................................................9-48
9.5.4.4 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller........................................9-52
9.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor....................................................................9-55
9.5.5.4 Removing the Fixing Main Thermistor .....................................9-58
9.5.5.5 Point to Note About the Position of the Fixing Main Thermistor9-59
9.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor......................................................................9-60
9.5.6.4 Removing the Fixing Sub Thermistor........................................9-63
9.5.6.5 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Sub Thermistor........9-64
9.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch .....................................................................9-64
9.5.7.4 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch.......................................9-68
9.5.7.5 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch.......9-68
9.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater.............................................9-69

Contents
9.5.8.4 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide...............................................9-73
9.5.8.5 Removing the Fixing Main Heater and the Fixing Sub Heater..9-75
9.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining Heater............................................................9-76
9.5.9.4 Removing the Fixing Heat Retention Heater.............................9-79
9.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide ...........................................................................9-82
9.5.10.4 Removing the Fixing Inlet Guide.............................................9-85
9.5.11 Fixing Delivery Guide.....................................................................9-87
9.5.11.4 Removing the Fixing Delivery Guide......................................9-91
9.5.12 Fixing Inlet Sensor..........................................................................9-91
9.5.12.4 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor............................................9-95
9.5.13 Fixing Delivery Sensor ...................................................................9-97
9.5.13.4 Removing the Fixing Delivery Sensor...................................9-100

Chapter 9
9-1
9.1 Construction
The fixing system has the following functions:
T-9-1
Item Description
Fixing method by heat roller
Fixing heater for fixing roller side, 2 heaters (main, sub)
for pressure roller side, 1 heater (heat retention heater)
Control temperature 190 deg C (at standby)
Fixing drive control by controlling speed of fixing roller (according to paper type)
Fixing temperature
detection
by main thermistor (non-contact; TH1, fixing roller center)
by sub thermistor (contact; TH2, fixing roller front end)
Protective function for the following; cuts off power to fixing heater in response to
error:
- thermistor (TH1/TH2; temperature control)
- fixing thermal switch (TP1; fixing roller rear end; operating
temperature of 190 +8, -8 deg C)
- thermistor connection detection
separation claw non-contact type (assists separation of paper in high humidity
environment; in normal environment, separation by fixing/
pressure roller)
Bias application none
Cleaning mechanism none (cleaning-less)
Oil application none (oil-less fixing)
Unlocking mechanism none (jam removal handle used)

Chapter 9
9-2
Ref:
Cleaning-less Mechanism
The area of the machine where paper moves is free of an object that comes into contact with
the fixing roller (e.g., separation claw, thermistor, thermal switch) so that the fixing roller
remains free of adhesion of paper lint or dust.
Ref:
Separation of Paper
The pressure of the separation roller in the fixing assembly is more or less identical at the
roller center and ends; for this reason, paper comes into contact with and leaves the roller
under even pressure across the roller.
9.1.2 Major Components 0000-7948
The fixing assembly consists of the following components offering the indicated functions:
T-9-2
Fixing roller 48.5 mm in outside diameter
Pressure roller 38.0 mm in outside diameter
Main heater H1 485 W (100/115/230 V halogen heater)
Sub heater H2 315 W (100/115/230 V halogen heater)
Heat retention heater H3 80 W (24 V; DC heater)
Main thermistor TH1 non-contact thermistor (temperature control,
overheating detection)
Sub thermistor TH2 non-contact thermistor (overheating
detection)
Thermal switch TP1 contact type (operating temperature: 190 +8,
-8 deg C)
Separation claw non-contact type
Fixing inlet sensor PS25 detects paper remaining in fixing assembly

Chapter 9
9-3
F-9-1
T-9-3
Fixing delivery sensor PS13 detects delivery of paper from fixing
assembly
Fixing motor M11 DC brush-less motor
[1] Pressure roller
[2] Heat retention heater (H3)
[3] Main heater (H1)
[4] Sub heater (H2)
[5] Sub thermistor (TH2)
[5]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[10]
[6]

Chapter 9
9-4
F-9-2
T-9-4
[6] Fixing roller
[7] Separation claw
[8] Thermistor cover
[9] Main thermistor (TH1) (non-contact)
[10] Thermal switch (TP1)
[1] Fixing outlet roller
[2] Fixing outlet sensor arm
[3] Duplex feed roll 1
[1]
[2]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[3]
[10]
[11]
[9]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[8]
[7]

Chapter 9
9-5
9.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0000-7950
The following is a diagram of the construction of the fixing system:
[4] Pressure roller
[5] Fixing outlet sensor (PS13)
[6] Fixing inlet sensor (PS25)
[7] Fixing inlet guide
[8] Fixing roller
[9] Thermal switch (TP1)
[10] Main thermistor (TH1)
[11] Sub thermistor (TH2)
[12] Separation claw
[13] Fixing outlet sensor roll
[14] Fixing outlet roll

Chapter 9
9-6
F-9-3
AC driver PCB
DC controller PCB
Controller power
supply PCB
HETER2_ON
SHEATER
J210-1
J201-10
J255-2
J255-1
J210-2
J210-5
J210-6
J202-3
J202-5
J202-1
J352-1
J352-2
J316-B3
J316-B4
J316-B6
J325-1
J325-8
J325-9
HETER_ON
TR_SHORT(ERR2)
TR_SHORT(ERR1)
FUSER_C_NCTHM
FUSER_R_NCTHM
FUSER_THM
Triac
Drive
circuit
Sub thermistor
(TH2)
Main thermistor
(TH1) (non-contact)
Heat retention heater (H3)
Main heater (H1)
Sub heater (H2)
Thermal switch
(TP1)

Chapter 9
9-7
9.2 Basic Sequence
9.2.1 Sequence of Operations at Power-On 0000-7951
F-9-4
*1: executes temperature control using the main heater or the sub heater according to the
difference in temperature readings between the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub
thermistor (TH2).
*2: executes temperature control using the sub heater to reduce overshooting (from when
the temperature reaches 180 deg C until the warm-up period ends). However, if the
temperature is less than 170 deg C at the start of the warm-up period, the main heater will
also be used.
*3: executes half-speed rotation if printing starts at the end of the warm-up period.
9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations During Printing 0000-7952
Printing starts in a standby state (black-and-white, plain paper).
Fixing main heater
H1
Fixing sub heater
H2
Fixing heat retention
heater (3
Fixing motor
M11
Main power switch
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
Fixing
system
1
1
50 deg C
185 deg C
190 deg C
Repeats ON/OF
300Sec 480Sec

Chapter 9
9-8
F-9-5
*1: executes temperature control (to 190 deg C) using the main heater or the sub heater
according to the difference in temperature readings between the main thermistor (TH1)
and the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: executes idle rotation of the fixing motor and temperature control at 180 deg C after the
end of printing that lasts 180 sec or more.
*1
*2
*1
PSTBY PSTBY
PINTR PRINT
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention heater
(H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing
system
Start key
ON
Registration
roller ON
LSTR
8Sec 20Sec 30Sec
193 deg C
190 deg C
185 deg C
174 deg C
164 deg C
Heat discharge
fan (FM1/2)
ITB duct fan
(FM3)
Controlled to
190 deg C
Controlled
190 deg
Controlled to
193 deg C Controlled to
185 deg C
Controlled to
174 deg C

Chapter 9
9-9
9.3 Various Control Mechanisms
9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller
9.3.1.1 Overview 0000-7953
The fixing roller is driven by an exclusive DC motor (M11).
The speed of the fixing roller is controlled for the following:
1. speed control for paper type.
2. speed control for printing volume.
3. control against partial deformation of roller (otherwise caused by non-use over time).
The following signals are sent from the DC controller to the fixing motor (M11).
T-9-5
Signal Description
FUSER_DC_MONX_H motor drive signal; if '1', on; if '0', off.
FUSER_DC_LOCK_N motor speed detection signal; if '0', off or short in revolution; if
'1', normal rotation.
FUSER_DC_GAIN motor speed control signal; if '1', half-speed; if '0', full speed.
FUSER_DC_CLK basic frequency input to motor.

Chapter 9
9-10
F-9-6
9.3.1.2 Speed Control According to Paper Type 0000-7956
a. 2-Speed Control
The machine controls the fixing roller to 2 speeds to suit the type of paper being used.
T-9-6
Note:
The machine reduces the speed of the fixing roller (to half) for the following; if thick paper,
Paper type Fixing speed
Plain paper 137.0 mm/sec (full speed)
Heavy paper 68.5 mm/sec (half speed)
Mono color transparency 137.0 mm/sec (full speed)
Full color transparency 68.5 mm/sec (half speed)
6
4
3
2
1
5
4
6
7
8
9
5
M11
1
2
1
2
Fixing motor
DC controller PCB
J2133 J315
J2134
5V 5V
FUSERDC_MONX_H
J316-B9
FUSER_IN_SENS
FUSER_DELI_SENS J316-B13
FUSERDC_LOCK_N
FUSERDC_GAIN
FUSERDC_CLK
24V 24V
J316
Fixing roller Pressure roller
Fixing outlet
sensor arm
(PS13)
Fixing inlet sensor
(PS25)

Chapter 9
9-11
to ensure good fixing; for full color transparencies, for good fixing of color toner layers to
film.
b. Speed Control for Printing Volume (down sequence)
When a large volume of printing is undertaken, paper can collect heat from the pressure
roller, increasing the curling at time of delivery and, thus, adversely affecting stacking
(number of sheets that are stacked).
To prevent the symptom, the machine permits a change to the service mode settings so that
the following takes place: after the 100th sheet in large size mode or after the 200th sheet
in small size mode, the machine increases the distance between sheets and reduces the
printing speed by half to decrease curling and ensuring good stacking. The machine refers
to the counter reading for the sequence, not to the roller temperature reading.
F-9-7
Level 2
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DWNSQ-SW
1: down sequence enabled.
0: down sequence disabled (default)
c. Prevention of Partial Deformation of the Roller (otherwise caused by no use over time)
The fixing roller can start to suffer deformation if left alone for a long time under
temperature control (because of its nip). To prevent deformation, the machine rotates the
fixing roller at 68.5 mm/sec (half speed) for a period of 0.5 sec every 30 min (during
standby).
When the machine starts sleep mode, the machine turns off the power to the fixing motor
(M11) to prevent the fixing motor from rotating; however, since the machine does not
perform temperature control for fixing in sleep mode, the roller will not suffer deformation
even when it remains stationary.
The machine performs temperature control for fixing while it is in power save mode (-50%)
or in low-power mode, and turns off the power to the fixing motor (M11), thus preventing

Chapter 9
9-12
the fixing roller from rotating. If such a condition lasts for 4 hr or more, the roller can start
to suffer deformation; the machine, however, is designed to shift to sleep mode before the
passage of 4 hr so that the roller cannot start to suffer deformation.
9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature
9.3.2.1 Overview 0000-7958
The following is a diagram of the mechanisms involved in fixing roller temperature control;
see the detailed descriptions of the mechanism for the following states:
[1] at time of power-on
[2] in a standby state
[3] during printing
[4] return sequence

Chapter 9
9-13
F-9-8
AC driver PCB
DC controller PCB
Controller power
supply PCB
HETER2_ON
SHEATER
J210-1
J201-10
J255-2
J255-1
J210-2
J210-5
J210-6
J202-3
J202-5
J202-1
J352-1
J352-2
J316-B3
J316-B4
J316-B6
J325-1
J325-8
J325-9
HETER_ON
TR_SHORT(ERR2)
TR_SHORT(ERR1)
FUSER_C_NCTHM
FUSER_R_NCTHM
FUSER_THM
Triac
Drive
circuit
Sub thermistor
(TH2)
Main thermistor
(TH1) (non-contact)
Main heater (H1)
Sub heater (H2)
Thermal switch
(TP1)

Chapter 9
9-14
9.3.2.2 At Power-On 0000-7960
The fixing roller is heated by 2 fixing heaters (H1, main heater; H2, sub heater). The fixing
pressure roller is heated by the heat retention heat heater (H3; DC heater). The main and sub
heaters remain fully on until the fixing roller reaches 185 deg C. Thereafter, the sub heater
remains fully on until the fixing roller reaches 190 deg C; when it reaches 190 deg C, the
machine ends the warm-up period. (If the temperature is 170 deg C or more at the start of
the warm-up period, however, the main heater will also remain fully on until the warm-up
period ends.) The heat retention heater remains fully on from the start of the warm-up period
until the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 50 deg C.
When the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 50 deg C, the machine starts initial
multiple rotation (full speed), and continues it until the warm-up period ends (i.e., when the
fixing roller is heated to 190 deg C).
If printing does not start at the end of the warm-up period, the machine rotates the fixing
roller for 300 sec at half speed (following initial multiple rotation). While the roller is
rotating at half speed, it is controlled to 195 deg C by the work of the sub heater.
Memo:
1. The machine accepts a print job at time of half-speed rotation; if 300 sec has not passed
at the end of the job, it will continue half-speed rotation until 300 sec has passed.
2. The machine uses half-speed rotation so that the temperature of the pressure roller
increases, thereby ensuring good fixing.
F-9-9
Fixing main heater
H1
Fixing sub heater
H2
heater H3
Fixing motor M11
Main power switch ON
WMUP WMUPR PSTBY
Fixing
system
1
1
50 deg C
185 deg C
190 deg C
Repeats ON/OFF.
300Sec 480Sec

Chapter 9
9-15
*1: The machine executes temperature control (to 190 deg C) using the main heater or the
sub heater according to the difference in temperature readings between the main
thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: The machine performs temperature control using the sub heater when the temperature
reaches 180 deg C to reduce overshooting (until the end of the warm-up period). If the
temperature at the start of the warm-up period is less than 170 deg C, the machine
executes temperature control also using the main heater.
*3: If printing does not start at the end of the warm-up period, the machine executes half-
speed rotation.
The machine uses half-speed rotation to increase the temperature of the pressure roller.
9.3.2.3 At a Standby State 0000-7964
The machine controls the temperature of the fixing roller using the main heater (H1) and the
sub heater (H2) to 190 deg C based on the readings of the main thermistor (TH1; non-
contact type) and the sub thermistor (TH2). If we assume that the reading of temperature by
the main thermistor is Th1 and that by the sub thermistor is Th2,
- if Th1 is higher than Th2, the machine uses the sub thermistor to execute temperature
control.
- if TH1 is lower than or is equal to Th2, the machine uses the main heater to execute
temperature control.
Memo:
The main heater emits heat most at its center, while the sub heater emits heat most at its both
ends.
F-9-10
Fixing main heater
H1
Fixing sub heater
H2
heater H3
Fixing motor
M11
WMUPR PSTBY
Fixing
system
300sec 480sec

Chapter 9
9-16
sub heater according to the difference in readings between the main thermistor (TH1) and
the sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: The fixing heat retention heater repeats remaining on for 4.2 sec and off for 1.6
9.3.2.4 At Time of Printing 0000-7967
The machine controls the temperature of the fixing roller by turning on and off the main
heater according to the reading of the main thermistor. The following shows how the
machine controls the temperature when making black-and-white prints using plain paper:
F-9-11
sub heater according to the difference in readings of the main thermistor (TH1) and the
*1
*2
*1
PSTBY PSTBY
PINTR PRINT
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention heater
(H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing
system
Start key
ON
Registration
roller ON
LSTR
8Sec 20Sec 30Sec
193 deg C
190 deg C
185 deg C
174 deg C
164 deg C
Heat discharge
fan (FM1/2)
ITB duct fan
(FM3)
Controlled to
190 deg C
Controlled
190 deg C
Controlled to
193 deg C
Controlled to
185 deg C
Controlled to
174 deg C

Chapter 9
9-17
sub thermistor (TH2).
*2: The machine executes idle rotation of the fixing motor and temperature control to 180
deg C after a print job that lasts for 180 sec or more.
The machine uses the following temperature control sequence when making black-and-
white prints on transparencies or making color prints.
F-9-12
*1: The machine executes temperature control (to 190 dg C) using the main heater or the
sub heater according to the difference in readings of the main thermistor (TH1) and the
sub thermistor (TH2).
*: The machine executes idle rotation of the fixing motor after a print job that lasts 180 sec
or more.
*1
*2
*1
PSTBY PSTBY
PINTR PRINT
Fixing main
heater (H1)
Fixing sub
heater (H2)
Fixing heat
retention heater
(H3)
Fixing motor
(M11)
Fixing
system
Start key
ON
Registration
roller ON
LSTR
8Sec 30Sec
193 deg C
190 deg C
185 deg C
174 deg C
164 deg C
Heat discharge
fan (FM1/2)
ITB duct fan
(FM3)
Controlled to
190 deg C
Controlled to
190 deg C
Controlled to
193 deg C

Chapter 9
9-18
9.3.2.5 Return Sequence 0000-7974
Return from Power Save Mode/Jam Removal/Door Open State
The machine becomes ready for printing when the temperature of the main thermistor
(TH1) reaches 190 deg C.
Return from Low Power Mode
- In the Case of Black-and-White Prints
The machine becomes ready for printing 30 sec (less than 180 deg C) after it starts return
sequence.
- In the Case of Full Color Prints
The machine becomes ready for printing when the temperature of the main thermistor
(TH1) reaches 180 deg C.
F-9-13
The machine permits a change to the conditions imposed on return from low power mode
(so that it becomes ready for printing when the temperature of the main thermistor (TH1)
reaches 180 deg C, 185 deg C, or 190 deg C).
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>LPM-RTRN
0: return in 30 sec (default)
1: return at 180 deg C
9.3.3 Detecting the Passage of Paper
9.3.3.1 Detection of the Passage of Paper 0001-4703
The following is a diagram of the mechanisms used by the machine to detect the passage of
paper for the fixing unit:

Chapter 9
9-19
F-9-14
T-9-7
- Preventing Wrapping of Paper Around the Fixing Roller
The machine starts its mechanism to prevent wrapping of paper around the fixing roller in
response to detection of a jam by the fixing inside sensor.
Sensor Description
Fixing inlet sensor (PS25) detects paper remaining at the fixing assembly inlet at
power-on.
Fixing outlet sensor (PS13) Detects paper delivered by the fixing assembly.
DC controller PCB
FUSER
DELI
SNS
FUSER
IN
SNS
J316-B13
J316-B9
Fixing delivery sensor (PS13)
Fixing delivery sensor (PS25)

Chapter 9
9-20
a. Fixing Inlet sensor (PS25)
When the fixing inlet sensor (PS25) detects a stationary jam at power-on, the machine does
not execute initial multiple rotation, thereby preventing paper from wrapping around the
fixing roller.
The fixing inlet sensor (PS25), however, does not check for a delay or stationary jam while
feed operation is under way.
b. Fixing Outlet Sensor (PS13)
When the fixing outlet sensor (PS13) detects a delay jam, the machine stops the fixing
motor (M11) to prevent wrapping of paper around the fixing roller.

Chapter 9
9-21
9.4 Protective Functions
9.4.1 Detecting Overheating by the Main Thermistor
(TH1) 0000-7976
When the main thermistor (TH1) detects overheating, the CPU on the DC controller PCB
turns off the triac drive circuit.
Moreover, if the CPU on the DC controller detects that the difference in readings between
the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2) is more than specified, the CPU
turns off the triac drive circuit.
F-9-15
DC controller PCB
Sub thermistor
overheating detection
CPU monitoring
J316_B6
J316_
B3/B4
Latch
circuit
IC30
Heat retention heater drive signal
Main heater drive signal
Sub heater drive signal
OFF
J325-8
J325-9
J325-1
Front door
switch
(SW3)
J325-6
J325-12
Heater
drive
enable
signal
AC drive PCB
Triac
short-circuit
detection
Controller power supply PCB
Fixing assembly
Sub thermistor
(TH2)
Sub heater
(H2)
Main heater
(H1)
Heat retention heater
(H3)
CPU
Triac
Triac
AC relay
Drive circuit
Main
thermistor
(TH1)
Thermal
switch
(TP1)
Main
thermistor/
Sub
thermistor
overheating
detection
OFF
Triac drive
circuit
Main thermistor
Main/sub thermistor

Chapter 9
9-22
9.4.2 Detecting Overheating by the Sub Thermistor
(TH2) 0000-8584
When the sub thermistor (TH2) detects overheating, the triac drive circuit of the DC
controller PCB turns off the main heater/sub heater drive signal. Or, the latch circuit of the
DC controller PCB turns off the heater drive enable signal to the triac drive circuit.
F-9-16
DC controller PCB
CPU monitoring
J316_B6
J316_
B3/B4
IC30
OFF
J325-8
J325-9
J325-1
Front door
switch
(SW3)
J325-6
J325-12
Heater
drive
enable
signal
AC driver PCB
Traic
short-circuit
detection
DC controller PCB
Fixing assembly
Sub thermistor
(TH2)
Sub heater
(H2)
Main heater
(H1)
(H3)
CPU
IC29
Triac
Triac
AC relay
Drive circuit
Main
thermistor
(TH1)
Thermal
switch
(TP1)
Main
thermistor/
Sub
thermistor
overheating
detection
Latch
circuit
OFF OFF
Sub thermistor
overheating
detection
Traic drive
circuit
Sub thermistor
overheating
detection
OFF

Chapter 9
9-23
9.4.3 Detecting Overheating in Relation to a Triac Short-
Circuit 0000-8585
When the AC drive detects a short circuit in the triac, the triac drive circuit on the DC
controller PCB turns off the main heater/sub heater drive signal.
F-9-17
9.4.4 Detecting Overheating by the Thermal Switch
(TP1) 0000-8586
When the thermal switch (TP1) reaches a specific temperature, it goes off to cut off the AC
power line to the main heater and the sub heater.
Traic drive
circuit
DC controller PCB
Sub thermistor
CPU monitoring
J316_B6
J316_
B3/B4
Latch
circuit
IC30
OFF
OFF
J325-8
J325-9
J325-1
Front door
switch
(SW3)
J325-6
J325-12
Heater
drive
enable
signal
AC drive PCB
Fixing assembly
Sub thermistor
(TH2)
Sub heater
(H2)
Main heater
(H1)
CPU
IC29
Traic
Traic
AC relay
Drive circuit
Main
thermistor
(TH1)
Thermal
switch
(TP1)
Main
thermistor/
Sub
thermistor
overheating
detection
Traic short-circuit
detection
OFF

Chapter 9
9-24
Caution:
Once open, the contact of the thermal switch will not return to normal even after the
temperature drops to its normal level. Remove the cause of the error that opened the contact,
and be sure to replace the thermal switch with a new one.
F-9-18
9.4.5 Detecting Overheating of the Heat Retention Heater
(H3) 0000-8587
The machine does not monitor the heat retention heater (H3) for overheating, and there is
no mechanism to turn off the power to the heat retention heater.
Triac
drive
circuit
DC controller PCB
Sub thermistor
CPU monitoring
J316_B6
J316_
B3/B4
Latch
circuit
IC30
Heat retention drive signal
OFF
OFF
J325-8
J325-9
J325-1
Front door
switch
(SW3)
J325-6
J325-12
Heater
drive
enable
signal
AC driver PCB
Traic
short-circuit
detection
Fixing assembly
Sub heater
(H2)
Main heater
(H1)
(H3)
CPU
IC29
Triac
Triac
AC relay
Dive circuit
Main
thermistor
(TH1)
Thermal
switch
(TP1)
Main
thermistor/
Sub
thermistor
overheating
detection
OFF
Sub thermistor
(TH2)

Chapter 9
9-25
9.4.6 Error 0000-8588
Related Error
E000
The main thermistor (TH1) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The sub thermistor
(TH2) has an open circuit or poor contact. The thermal switch (TP1) has an open circuit.
The main heater (H1)/sub heater (H2) has an open circuit. The AC drive PCB is faulty. The
DC controller PCB is faulty. The door switch (SW3) is faulty.
E0001
The main thermistor (TH1) is faulty. The sub thermistor (TH2) is faulty. The AC driver
PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E003
The sub thermistor (TH2) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The thermal switch (TP1)
has an open circuit. The main heater (H1)/sub heater (H2) has an open circuit. The AC drive
PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The door switch (SW3) is faulty.
E004
The main thermistor (TH1) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The sub thermistor
(TH2) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The thermal switch (TGP1) has an open
circuit. The main heater (H1)/sub heater (H2) has an open circuit. The AC driver PCB is
faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
E008
The fixing upper roller counter reading has reached its upper limit (180,000 counts: if
smaller than B4, 1 count; if B4 or larger, 2 counts).
E014
The fixing motor (M11) has an open circuit or has poor contact. The DC controller PCB is
faulty.
Note 1:
If the machine indicates E000 through E003, it will not reset the error when its main power
switch is turned off and then on, requiring you to execute the following service mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLER>ERR.

Chapter 9
9-26
Note 2:
If the machine suffers an error because the fixing upper roller count has reached its upper
limit, be sure to replace the fixing assembly or the fixing upper roller, and then execute the
following service mode item: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL.
Note 3:
If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM on the DC controller,
be sure to enter the reading you noted before the replacement or initialization in the
following service mode item: COPIER >COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL.
Note 4:
The machine indicates a warning when the reading of the fixing upper roller counter reaches
100,000.

Chapter 9
9-27
Procedure
9.5.1 Fixing Unit
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0405
printer unit.
F-9-19
installed)
(upper right).
F-9-20
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-28
F-9-21
installed.
F-9-22
hinge in place.
F-9-23
the hinge [2].
F-9-24
machine side plate.

Chapter 9
9-29
F-9-25
hinge in place.
F-9-26
[2].
F-9-27
F-9-28
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 9
9-30
F-9-29
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
9.5.2 Fixing Upper Frame
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-7382
printer unit.
F-9-30
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-31
F-9-31
F-9-32
installed.
F-9-33
hinge in place.
F-9-34
the hinge [2].

Chapter 9
9-32
F-9-35
machine side plate.
F-9-36
hinge in place.
F-9-37
[2].
F-9-38

Chapter 9
9-33
F-9-39
Memo:
stepped screws.
F-9-40
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Inlet Guide 0002-7387
duplex feed guide [2] and the jam access
guide [3] at the same time.

Chapter 9
9-34
F-9-41
Routing the Harness (before re-
mounting the duplex/feed guide)
Be sure that the cable to the fixing heat
retaining heater (H3) is NOT in the path
indicated in Figure A. It must be routed
in the path indicated in Figure B;
otherwise, it can become trapped by the
duplex/feed guide.
F-9-42
F-9-43
jam removal dial [2].
F-9-44
3) Disconnect the fixing inlet sensor
connector [1] and the fixing delivery
sensor connector [2]; then, pull out the
faston [3] connected to the fixing heat
retention heater.

Chapter 9
9-35
F-9-45
fixing inside cover [1].
F-9-46
5) Remove the fixing inlet guide [1].
F-9-47
Fixing Roller 0002-7389
1) Remove the screw, and detach the round
terminal [1] connected to the heat
retention heater.
Keep in mind that the screw used to fix
the round terminal connected to the heat
retention heater is equipped with a
washer.
F-9-48

Chapter 9
9-36
terminal; then, remove the 2 screws [2],
and detach the heater base (front/rear)
[3]. Thereafter, detach the heat retention
heater [4].
the heat retention heater in place is
equipped with a washer.
F-9-49
F-9-50
bearing retainer (front) [3] and the cover
[2].
F-9-51
heater retainer [1]; then, detach the
round terminal [3], remove the 2 heater
retaining screws [4], and detach the
main/sub heater [5].
The following screws are equipped
with a washer:
- 2 screws used to fix the heater retainer in
place [1]
- screw [3] used to fix the round terminal in
place
- screw [4] used to retain the heater in place

Chapter 9
9-37
F-9-52
F-9-53
Memo:
The fixing main heater can be identified by
its white cable, and it is located on the
pickup side. The fixing sub heater can be
identified by the black cable, and it is
located on the pickup side.
5) Remove the 3 E-rings, and detach the 3
gears [1].
bearing retainer (rear) [3].
F-9-54
7) Remove the 2 screws (M5) [1], and
detach the pressure unit (front) [2].
F-9-55
detach the pressure unit (rear) [2]; then,
detach the fixing pressure roller [3].

Chapter 9
9-38
F-9-56
delivery guide [1].
F-9-57
10) Free the 4 separation claws [1].
F-9-58
11) Remove the fixing roller [1].
F-9-59
16) From the fixing roller, detach the 2
bushings [1], and 2 bearings [2], and
gear [3]. (C-ring; 1 pc. each on both
ends)

Chapter 9
9-39
F-9-60
1. If you have replaced the fixing roller, be
sure to initialize the service mode
counter using the following service
mode:
UP-RL
2. If you have replaced the fixing roller
counter reading of the used fixing roller
using the following service mode item:
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-
RL
Fixing Upper Frame 0002-7390
1) Remove the insulating sheet retainer [1];
then, remove the screw [2], and detach
the heat insulating sheet [3].
F-9-61
spur unit [2].
F-9-62
9.5.3 Fixing Roller
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0409
printer unit.
[1] [2]

Chapter 9
9-40
F-9-63
installed)
(upper right).
F-9-64
F-9-65
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-41
installed.
F-9-66
hinge in place.
F-9-67
the hinge [2].
F-9-68
machine side plate.
F-9-69
hinge in place.

Chapter 9
9-42
F-9-70
[2].
F-9-71
F-9-72
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 9
9-43
F-9-73
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
F-9-74
duplex/feed guide.
F-9-75

Chapter 9
9-44
F-9-76
F-9-77
retention heater.
F-9-78
F-9-79

Chapter 9
9-45
F-9-80
1) Remove the screw, and detach the round
terminal [1] connected to the heat
retention heater.
washer.
F-9-81
and detach the heater base (front/rear)
heater [4].
F-9-82
F-9-83
bearing retainer (front) [3] and the cover

Chapter 9
9-46
[2].
F-9-84
heater retainer [1]; then, detach the
round terminal [3], remove the 2 heater
with a washer:
- 2 screws used to fix the heater retainer in
place [1]
- screw [3] used to fix the round terminal in
place
F-9-85
F-9-86
Memo:
The fixing main heater can be identified by
its white cable, and it is located on the
pickup side. The fixing sub heater can be
identified by the black cable, and it is
located on the pickup side.
5) Remove the 3 E-rings, and detach the 3
gears [1].
bearing retainer (rear) [3].

Chapter 9
9-47
F-9-87
F-9-88
F-9-89
delivery guide [1].
F-9-90
10) Free the 4 separation claws [1].

Chapter 9
9-48
F-9-91
11) Remove the fixing roller [1].
F-9-92
16) From the fixing roller, detach the 2
bushings [1], and 2 bearings [2], and
gear [3]. (C-ring; 1 pc. each on both
ends)
F-9-93
1. If you have replaced the fixing roller, be
sure to initialize the service mode
counter using the following service
mode:
UP-RL
2. If you have replaced the fixing roller
counter reading of the used fixing roller
COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FX-UP-
RL
9.5.4 Pressure Roller
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0411
printer unit.

Chapter 9
9-49
F-9-94
installed)
(upper right).
F-9-95
F-9-96
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-50
installed.
F-9-97
hinge in place.
F-9-98
the hinge [2].
F-9-99
machine side plate.
F-9-100
hinge in place.

Chapter 9
9-51
F-9-101
[2].
F-9-102
F-9-103
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 9
9-52
F-9-104
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Pressure Roller 0001-1342
F-9-105
duplex/feed guide.
F-9-106

Chapter 9
9-53
F-9-107
F-9-108
retention heater.
F-9-109
F-9-110
5) Remove the round terminal [1]
connected to the heat retention heater.
washer.

Chapter 9
9-54
F-9-111
and detach the heater base (front, rear)
heater.
F-9-112
F-9-113
cover [2] and the bearing retainer (front)
[3].
F-9-114
8) Remove the 3 gears [1] and the screw
[2]; then, detach the bearing retainer
(rear) [3].

Chapter 9
9-55
F-9-115
F-9-116
9.5.5 Fixing Main Thermistor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0412
printer unit.
F-9-117
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-56
F-9-118
F-9-119
installed.
F-9-120
hinge in place.
F-9-121
the hinge [2].

Chapter 9
9-57
F-9-122
machine side plate.
F-9-123
hinge in place.
F-9-124
[2].
F-9-125

Chapter 9
9-58
F-9-126
Memo:
stepped screws.
F-9-127
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Main
Thermistor 0001-1346
heat insulating sheet retainer [1]; then,
detach the heat insulating sheet [3].
Memo:

Chapter 9
9-59
The following figure shows the back of the
fixing assembly.
F-9-128
thermistor retainer [2].
F-9-129
detach the fixing main thermistor [2].
F-9-130
9.5.5.5 Point to Note
About the Position of
the Fixing Main
Caution 1
Check to be sure that the thermistor cover
[2] is fitted under the fixing main
thermistor [1].
Caution 2
[2] is not mounted in the wrong
orientation. The cover is equipped with
a protrusion to prevent wrong
orientation.

Chapter 9
9-60
F-9-131
Caution 3
Check to be sure that the spring [1] of the
thermistor retainer is found forcing the
thermistor.
Caution 4
Be sure to tighten the screw A and then
the screw B of the thermistor retainer in
sequence.
F-9-132
9.5.6 Fixing Sub Thermistor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0413
printer unit.
F-9-133
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-61
F-9-134
F-9-135
installed.
F-9-136
hinge in place.
F-9-137
the hinge [2].

Chapter 9
9-62
F-9-138
machine side plate.
F-9-139
hinge in place.
F-9-140
[2].
F-9-141

Chapter 9
9-63
F-9-142
Memo:
stepped screws.
F-9-143
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Sub Thermistor 0001-1353
heat insulating sheet retainer [1]; then,
detach the heat insulting sheet [3].
Memo:

Chapter 9
9-64
fixing assembly:
F-9-144
detach the fixing sub thermistor [2]. (1
12-mm long screw [3])
F-9-145
When Mounting the
Fixing Sub Thermistor 0001-8699
Caution 1
Take care not to touch the surface [1] of
the fixing sub thermistor.
Caution 2
Take care not to deform the fixing sub
thermistor.
F-9-146
9.5.7 Fixing Thermal Switch
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0415
printer unit.
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 9
9-65
F-9-147
installed)
(upper right).
F-9-148
F-9-149
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-66
installed.
F-9-150
hinge in place.
F-9-151
the hinge [2].
F-9-152
machine side plate.
F-9-153
hinge in place.

Chapter 9
9-67
F-9-154
[2].
F-9-155
F-9-156
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 9
9-68
F-9-157
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Thermal
Switch 0001-1358
insulating sheet retainer [2]; then, detach
the heat insulating sheet [3].
Memo:
fixing assembly:
F-9-158
fixing thermal switch [2].
Keep in mind that the 2 screws used to
fit the fixing thermal switch in place is
F-9-159
When Mounting the

Chapter 9
9-69
Fixing Thermal
Switch 0001-8698
Caution 1
Check to be sure that the claw [1] of the
thermal switch is in the cut-off of the
conducting plate [2].
Caution 2
Be sure to tighten the fixing screw A and
then the fixing screw B of the thermal
switch.
F-9-160
Caution 3
After tightening the fixing screws of the
thermal switch, perform the following:
Check to be sure that the surface of the
thermal switch [1] is level in relation to the
fixing roller. (Be sure to use a pen light or
the like to shine the thermal switch for this
check; if not level, be sure to repeat the
mounting work.)
F-9-161
F-9-162
9.5.8 Fixing Main Heater/
Fixing Sub Heater
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0408
printer unit.
OK
NG NG
NG NG

Chapter 9
9-70
F-9-163
installed)
(upper right).
F-9-164
F-9-165
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-71
installed.
F-9-166
hinge in place.
F-9-167
the hinge [2].
F-9-168
machine side plate.
F-9-169
hinge in place.

Chapter 9
9-72
F-9-170
[2].
F-9-171
F-9-172
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 9
9-73
F-9-173
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
F-9-174
duplex/feed guide.
F-9-175

Chapter 9
9-74
F-9-176
F-9-177
retention heater.
F-9-178
F-9-179

Chapter 9
9-75
F-9-180
Fixing Main Heater
and the Fixing Sub
Heater 0001-1334
terminal; then, remove the screw [2],
and detach the heater base (front) [3].
F-9-181
cover [2] and the bearing retainer (front)
[3].
F-9-182
heater retainer [1]; then, detect the round
terminal [3], remove the 2 heater
with a washer:
- 2 screws [1] used to fix the heater retainer
in place
- screw [3] used to fix the ground terminal
in place

Chapter 9
9-76
F-9-183
F-9-184
Memo:
The fixing main heater may be identified
by its white cable, and it is located on the
pickup side.
The fixing sub heater may be identified by
its black cable, and it is located on the
delivery side (delivery unit).
9.5.9 Fixing Heat Retaining
Heater
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0410
printer unit.
F-9-185
installed)
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-77
(upper right).
F-9-186
F-9-187
installed.
F-9-188
hinge in place.
F-9-189
the hinge [2].

Chapter 9
9-78
F-9-190
machine side plate.
F-9-191
hinge in place.
F-9-192
[2].
F-9-193

Chapter 9
9-79
F-9-194
Memo:
stepped screws.
F-9-195
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Heat Retention
Heater 0001-1339

Chapter 9
9-80
F-9-196
duplex/feed guide.
F-9-197
F-9-198
jam removal dial.
F-9-199
retention heater.

Chapter 9
9-81
F-9-200
F-9-201
5) Remove the round terminal connected to
the heat retention heater.
Keep in mind that the fixing screw used
for the round terminal is equipped with a
washer.
F-9-202
and detach the heater base [3] and the
heat retention heater [4].
Keep in mind that the screw used for
the heat retention heater is equipped
with a washer.
F-9-203

Chapter 9
9-82
F-9-204
9.5.10 Fixing Inlet Guide
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0406
printer unit.
F-9-205
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-83
F-9-206
F-9-207
installed.
F-9-208
hinge in place.
F-9-209
the hinge [2].

Chapter 9
9-84
F-9-210
machine side plate.
F-9-211
hinge in place.
F-9-212
[2].
F-9-213

Chapter 9
9-85
F-9-214
Memo:
stepped screws.
F-9-215
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL

Chapter 9
9-86
F-9-216
duplex/feed guide.
F-9-217
F-9-218
F-9-219
retention heater.

Chapter 9
9-87
F-9-220
F-9-221
F-9-222
9.5.11 Fixing Delivery Guide
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0447
printer unit.

Chapter 9
9-88
F-9-223
installed)
(upper right).
F-9-224
F-9-225
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-89
installed.
F-9-226
hinge in place.
F-9-227
the hinge [2].
F-9-228
machine side plate.
F-9-229
hinge in place.

Chapter 9
9-90
F-9-230
[2].
F-9-231
F-9-232
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 9
9-91
F-9-233
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Delivery Guide 0001-2263
fixing delivery guide [2].
F-9-234
9.5.12 Fixing Inlet Sensor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0416
printer unit.

Chapter 9
9-92
F-9-235
installed)
(upper right).
F-9-236
F-9-237
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-93
installed.
F-9-238
hinge in place.
F-9-239
the hinge [2].
F-9-240
machine side plate.
F-9-241
hinge in place.

Chapter 9
9-94
F-9-242
[2].
F-9-243
F-9-244
Memo:
stepped screws.

Chapter 9
9-95
F-9-245
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Inlet Sensor 0001-1362
duplex feeding unit [2] and the jam
access guide [3] at the same time.
F-9-246
duplex/feed guide.
F-9-247

Chapter 9
9-96
F-9-248
F-9-249
retention heater.
F-9-250
F-9-251
5) Detach the fixing inlet sensor [1] from
the fixing inside cover.

Chapter 9
9-97
F-9-252
9.5.13 Fixing Delivery Sensor
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0417
printer unit.
F-9-253
installed)
(upper right).
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 9
9-98
F-9-254
F-9-255
installed.
F-9-256
hinge in place.
F-9-257
the hinge [2].

Chapter 9
9-99
F-9-258
machine side plate.
F-9-259
hinge in place.
F-9-260
[2].
F-9-261

Chapter 9
9-100
F-9-262
Memo:
stepped screws.
F-9-263
UP-RL
mode item:
UP-RL
Fixing Delivery
Sensor 0001-1368
detach the fixing delivery sensor [2].

Chapter 10 Externals
and Controls

Contents
Contents
10.1 Control Panel..........................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Overview.........................................................................................10-1
10.1.2 LCD Processing ..............................................................................10-1
10.1.3 Adjusting the LCD Screen Contrast................................................10-2
10.1.4 Control Panel CPU..........................................................................10-2
10.2 Counters .................................................................................................10-3
10.2.1 Overview.........................................................................................10-3
10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count ......................................................10-4
10.3 Fans ........................................................................................................10-6
10.3.1 Overview.........................................................................................10-6
10.3.2 2-Speed Control ..............................................................................10-7
10.3.3 Sequence of Operations...................................................................10-8
10.4 Power Supply .........................................................................................10-9
10.4.1 Power Supply ..................................................................................10-9
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer................................10-9
10.4.1.2 Route of Power to the Reader Unit ........................................10-10
10.4.1.3 Timing of Supplying Power to the Reader Unit.....................10-11
10.4.1.4 Routes of Power to various Options.......................................10-12
10.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB ......................................10-14
10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB............10-14
10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB...............10-14
10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Options Power Supply PCB ..................10-15
10.4.3 Protection Function .......................................................................10-15
10.4.3.1 Protective Functions...............................................................10-15
10.4.4 Backup Battery..............................................................................10-16
10.4.4.1 Backup Battery.......................................................................10-16
10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function................................................................10-16
10.4.5.1 Overview................................................................................10-16
10.4.5.2 Power Supply and Heater Control..........................................10-18
10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure...............................................................10-21
10.5.1 Option Power Supply Assembly ...................................................10-21

10.5.1.2 Removing the Accessories Power Supply .............................10-21
10.5.2 Controller Power Supply Unit ......................................................10-22
10.5.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover (right) ..........................................10-22
10.5.2.2 Removing the Controller Power Supply................................10-23
10.5.3 Printer Power Supply Unit............................................................10-23
10.5.3.2 Removing the Controller Box................................................10-24
10.5.3.5 Removing the Left Cover (lower)..........................................10-27
10.5.3.6 Removing the Printer Unit Power Supply .............................10-27
10.5.4 Control Panel ................................................................................10-28
10.5.4.1 Removing the Support Cover (right) .....................................10-28
10.5.4.2 Removing the Control Panel..................................................10-28
10.5.5 Control Panel LCD Unit ...............................................................10-29
10.5.5.1 Removing the Support Cover (right) .....................................10-29
10.5.5.2 Removing the Control Panel..................................................10-30
10.5.5.3 Removing the Control Panel Lower Cover............................10-31
10.5.5.4 Removing the Control Panel LCD.........................................10-31
10.5.6 DC Controller PCB.......................................................................10-32
10.5.6.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ........................................10-33
10.5.6.3 When Replacing the DC Controller.......................................10-33
10.5.7 Leakage Breaker ...........................................................................10-34
10.5.7.2 Removing the Leakage Breaker.............................................10-35
10.5.8 HVT PCB......................................................................................10-36
10.5.8.2 Removing the Controller Box................................................10-36
10.5.8.4 Removing the High-Voltage Sub PCB ..................................10-39
10.5.8.6 Removing the Printer Power Supply......................................10-40
10.5.8.7 Removing the HVT PCB .......................................................10-41
10.5.8.8 When Replacing the HVT PCB .............................................10-41
10.5.9 High-Voltage Sub PCB.................................................................10-42

Contents
10.5.9.2 Removing the Accessories Power Supply..............................10-43
10.5.9.3 Removing the High-Voltage Sub PCB ..................................10-43
10.5.10 Control Panel CPU PCB .............................................................10-44
10.5.10.1 Removing the Support Cover (right)....................................10-44
10.5.10.2 Removing the Control Panel ................................................10-44
10.5.10.3 Removing the Control Panel Lower Cover..........................10-45
10.5.10.4 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB...............................10-45
10.5.11 Control Panel Key Switch PCB ..................................................10-46
10.5.11.4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB....................10-47
10.5.12 Control Panel Inverter PCB ........................................................10-48
10.5.12.4 Removing the Control Panel Inverter ..................................10-50
10.5.13 Main Power Switch.....................................................................10-50
10.5.13.1 Removing the Rear Cover....................................................10-50
10.5.13.2 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)...............................10-51
10.5.13.3 Removing the Main Power Switch ......................................10-51
10.5.14 Front Cover Open/Closed Detecting Switch...............................10-52
10.5.14.1 Removing the Toner Bottle Retainer ...................................10-52
10.5.14.2 Removing the Inside Front Cover (right).............................10-53
10.5.14.3 Removing the Front Cover Open/Closed SW......................10-53
10.5.15 ITB Fan .......................................................................................10-54
10.5.15.2 Removing the Inside Front Cover (right).............................10-54
10.5.15.3 Removing the ITB Fan.........................................................10-55
10.5.16 Toner Intake Fan .........................................................................10-55
10.5.16.2 Removing the Left Cover (rear)...........................................10-56
10.5.16.3 Removing the Toner Suction Fan ........................................10-56
10.5.17 Machine Heat Discharge Fan......................................................10-57
10.5.17.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)...............................10-57

Contents
10.5.17.3 Removing the Machine Heat Exhaust Fan...........................10-60
10.5.17.4 Routing the Heat Discharge Fan Harness ............................10-60
10.5.18 Toner Intake Fan Filter ...............................................................10-61
10.5.18.1 Removing the Toner Suction Fan Cover .............................10-61
10.5.18.2 Removing the Toner Suction Fan Filter...............................10-61
10.5.19 Motor of Main Drive Assembly..................................................10-61
10.5.19.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ......................................10-62
10.5.19.3 Removing the Controller Box..............................................10-62
10.5.19.4 Removing the Main Drive Motor ........................................10-65
10.5.20 Right Door ..................................................................................10-66
10.5.21 Cautions in Handling the Left Stay.............................................10-68
10.5.21.1 Points to Note about Handling the Left Stay .......................10-68

Chapter 10
10-1
10.1 Control Panel
10.1.1 Overview 0000-8876
The machine's control panel consists of the following PCBs, LCD, and touch panel, each
offering the functions that follow:
- LCD display function
- contrast adjustment
- touch switch input
- hardware key input
F-10-1
10.1.2 LCD Processing 0001-4625
The CPU on the main controlled PCB sends data (display data) to the control panel CPU
PCB as instructed by the program.
Main controller PCB
Control panel CPU PCB
touch panel
Color LCD
Keypad PCB
Control panel
inverter PCB
J1212A,J1212B
J2117A,J2117B
J1114
J1110,J1111
J6891,J6892
J2137
J1112
J1113
Control panel

Chapter 10
10-2
The data is sent through the control panel PCB to reach the color LCD.
10.1.3 Adjusting the LCD Screen Contrast 0001-4628
The machine is equipped with a density adjustment volume (VR6801) on its keypad PCB
for use by the user to adjust the contrast of the LCD screen.
10.1.4 Control Panel CPU 0001-4629
- Monitoring the Key Inputs
It communicates the keypad and function key inputs to the CPU on the main controller
PCB.
- Monitoring the Touch Panel Input
It communicates the key inputs made on the touch panel to the CPU on the main
controller PCB.
- Controlling the Buzzer Sound
- Controlling the Control Panel LED
Memo:
the color LCD is driven by the main controller, and the control panel CPU PCB serves to
relay the drive signals.

Chapter 10
10-3
10.2 Counters
10.2.1 Overview 0003-7582
The machine is equipped with counters that indicate the counts of output according to types
of printers. These counters are indicated in response to a press on the Check key on the
control panel, and they operate as follows (as set at time of shipment from the factory):
T-10-1
Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6
100V
*1
***
total 1 total
(black-and-
white 1)
copy
(full color +
mono; 1)
print
(full color +
mono; 1)
not
indicated**
not
indicated**
101 108 232 324 000 000
100V
*1
****
total 2 copy
(full color +
mono color; 2)
total A
(full color +
mono color; 2)
copy
(black-and-
white 2)
total A
(black-and-
white 2)
not
indicated**
102 231 148 222 133 000
120V
TW
*2
total 1 total
(black-and-
white 1)
copy + print
(full color,
large)
copy + print
(full color,
small)
total
(mono color
1)
not indicated
**
101 108 401 402 118 000
120V
UL
*3
total 1 total
(black-and-
white 1)
copy
(full color +
mono color,
large)
copy
(full color +
mono color,
small)
print
(full color+
mono color,
large)
print
(full color +
mono color,
small)
101 108 229 230 321 322
230V
*4
total 1 total
(black-and-
white 1)
copy + print
(full color,
large)
copy + print
(full color,
small)
total
(mono color
1)
total 1
(duplex)
101 108 401 402 118 114

Chapter 10
10-4
<Guide to Notations>
large: large-size paper (longer than 364 mm in feed direction; count increased by 1).
small: small-size paper (364 mm in feed length or shorter).
total: all (C+P; count increased by 1).
duplex: duplexing (in auto duplexing; count increased by 1).
- The 3-digit number in the counter column indicates the setting of the following service
mode item: COPIER >OPTION >USER > COUNTER1 to 6
- counters 2 through 6 may be changed using the following service mode item:
COPIER>OPTION>USER.
*1: F14-3019/3011/3029/3012/3049/3014/3059/3015
*2: F14-3001
*3: F14-3031
*4: F14-3041/3060/3070/3044 /3048/3078
*5: F14-3061/3068
*6: F14-3091/3094
**: by default, not indicated; may be changed in service mode.
***: if '0' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.
****: if '1' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.
10.2.2 Timing of Increasing the Count 0001-6146
The machine increases the count depending on the selected mode (single-sided, double-
sided), delivery location, and the type of accessory connected to it.
240V
CA
*5
total 1 total
(black-and-
white 1)
copy
(full color +
mono color,
large)
copy
(full color +
mono color,
small)
print
(full color +
mono color,
large)
print
(full color +
mono color,
small)
101 108 229 230 321 322
230V
AMS
*6
total 1 total
(full color +
mono color,
large)
total
(full color +
mono color,
small)
total
(black-and-
white, large)
total
(black-and-
white, small)
scan
(total 1)
101 122 123 112 113 501
Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6

Chapter 10
10-5
1. Single-Sided Print, 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print
In the case of a single-sided print or the 2nd side of a double-sided print, the machine
increase the count when the trailing edge of paper is discharged outside the machine, as
indicated by the output of the following sensor:
T-10-2
2. 1st Side of a Double-Sided Print
The machine increases the count when the duplex feed sensor (PS17) goes on, assuming
that the printing on the 1st side is over.
Condition Delivery location sensor
w/o finisher to tray 1 delivery sensor (PS14)
to tray 2 No. 2 delivery sensor (PS1A)
to tray 3 No. 3 delivery sensor (PS5A)
w/ finisher delivery sensor of finisher

Chapter 10
10-6
10.3 Fans
10.3.1 Overview 0001-4632
The machine is equipped with the following fans arranged as shown in the diagram:
T-10-3
Notation Name Filter
2-speed
control
Remarks
FM1 heat exhaust fan (rear) absent present cools the fixing assembly.
FM2 heat exhaust fan (front) absent present cools the fixing assembly.
FM3 ITB fan present present cools the ITB (intermediate
transfer belt).
FM4 controller cooling fan absent absent cools the controller.
FM5 toner collecting fan present absent collects toner found astray inside
the machine.

Chapter 10
10-7
F-10-2
10.3.2 2-Speed Control 0001-4633
Some of the fans used in the machine are controlled for 2 different speeds (T07-301-01).
These fans rotate at different speeds in response to the switchover of voltage by the voltage
switching circuit.
F-10-3
FM5
FM3
FM2
FM1
FM4
CPU
24V or 13V
24V 13V
Voltage
switching circuit
DC controller PCB
Full-speed
signal
Half-speed
signal
Clock signal
Fan

Chapter 10
10-8
10.3.3 Sequence of Operations 0001-4634
F-10-4
Heat exhaust fan
(rear) (FM1)
Heat exhaust fan
(front) (FM2)
ITB fan
(FM3)
Controller fan
(FM4)
Toner colleting fan
(FM5)
Main power
switch
ON
Main power
switch
OFF
Control panel
power switch
OFF
Print request
signal
Warm-up Standby Standby
Print
Low-power
mode
Power save
mode Sleep mode
half-speed full-speed

Chapter 10
10-9
10.4 Power Supply
10.4.1 Power Supply
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer 0001-4682
The machine's DC power is supplied by the printer power supply PCB. The DC power to
its accessories is supplied by the accessories power supply PCB.
The functions of the individual power supply PCBs and distribution of power is as follows:
T-10-4
Name Description Remarks
Printer power supply
PCB
generates DC power (24V, 13V); supplies DC
power to the controller power supply PCB and
the cassette pedestal.
Accessories power
supply PCB
supplies DC power to the side paper deck,
buffer path, and finisher.
Main switch turns on and off AC power to the AC driver
PCB.
Cover switch turns on and off 24 VU1/13 VA to the DC
controller PCB.
Leakage breaker cuts power in the event of an error.
Environment heater
switch PCB
turns on and off power to the cassette heater,
reader heater, and deck heater.
100/230V
accessory
High-voltage power
supply PCB
generates various high-voltage power.
AC driver PCB supplies AC power to the printer power supply
PCB; drives the fixing system.
Controller power
supply PCB
supplies DC power to the inner 2-way tray, fax
board, controller, DC controller PCB, and
fixing heat retention heater (H3).

Chapter 10
10-10
F-10-5
10.4.1.2 Route of Power to the Reader Unit 0001-4686
The reader controller PCB uses the 24/13 VDC from the printer unit to generate the
following DC voltages:
- 16 VDC (for scanning lamp)
generates DC power (13V, 5V, 3.3V).
Name Description Remarks
Printer power supply
To Finisher-Q1/Q2
To Finisher-Q1/Q2
(by way of Cassette
Feeding Unit-Y1)
To Buffer Path-C1
To Finisher-P1
To Finisher-P1
only 100V
Heater switch
SW5
Cassette heater (H4)
Deck heater (H7)
Cassette pedestal
heater (H1C)
Reader heater (H6)
Leakage breaker
ELCB 1/2
Main switch
SW1
Heater
switch PCB
Pickup
heater
mounting
kit
Reader heater (H5)
AC drive PCB
Accessories
power supply
PCB
Printer power
supply PCB
Arrestor
PCB
Fixing main heater (H1)
Fixing sub heater (H2)
Thermal switch (TP1)
13VA2
24VU2
24VU1
24VU2
13VA1
13VA2
13VB
To Cassette
Feeding Unit-Y1
24VU2
13VA
To Inner 2-Way Tray-C1
24VH
Fixing DC heater (H3)
24VU2
13VA
13VB
3VA
3VB
5VA
12VA
13VB
Controller PCB
Reader
unit
DADF
-L1
Super G3
Fax Board-N1
Front
cover
opne/ closed
swish
SW3
DC controller PCB
3VA
5VA
13VA
24VU2
13VA
24VU1
High-voltage
power supply PCB
24VA
13VA2 13VA2
24VU1: non-all
night
13VA1: non-all
night
5VA1: non-all
night
3VA: non-all night
3VB: all night
13VA2: non-all
night
13VB: all night
13VA: non-all night
24VU2: non-all
night
24VA: non-all
night
13V
24VU2
To Side Paper Deck-Q1

Chapter 10
10-11
- 12 VDC (for CCD)
- 5 VDC (for sensor)
- 3.3 VDC (for IC)
F-10-6
10.4.1.3 Timing of Supplying Power to the Reader Unit 0001-4689
The reader unit is supplied with 24/13 VDC by the printer unit at the following timing:
J
5
0
0
J
5
0
1
J
5
0
2
J
5
1
0
J
5
1
2
J
5
0
1
5
J
5
0
1
8
J
5
0
5
J
5
0
3
/
5
0
4
To DF
Inverter PCB
To DF
To printer unit
(scanner PCB)
DC24V
AC100V
AC100V
DC13V
DC12V/5V
DC24V DC13V
From printer unit
DC24V DC16V
DC13V DC12V
DC13V DC5V
DC13V DC3.3V
DC16V

Chapter 10
10-12
F-10-7
10.4.1.4 Routes of Power to various Options 0001-4693
The power from the printer unit to the accessories is routed as follows:
PSTBY
Main power switch turned on
Power plug connected
to power outlet
Standby
Power save mode
(no return time; -10%, -25%)
Power save mode
(-50%)
Sleep mode

Chapter 10
10-13
F-10-8
[1] Reader unit power cable
[2] DADF I/F cable
[3] DDIS cable
[4] Finisher-Q1/Saddle /Finisher-Q2 I/F cable
[5] Pickup heater cable
[6] Side deck heater cable
[7] Side deck I/F cable
[8] Cassette pedestal I/F cable
[9] AC input
[A] DADF-L1
[B] Reader unit
[E] [8] [7] [6] [D]
[5]
[4]
[C]
[3]
[B]
[A]
[2]
[1]
[9]

Chapter 10
10-14
[C] Printer unit
[D] Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1
[E] Paper Deck-Q1
10.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB
10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB 0001-4716
The ratings and the power tolerances of the printer power supply PCB are as follows:
T-10-5
10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the Controller Power Supply PCB 0001-4719
The ratings and the power tolerances of the controller power supply PCB are as follows:
T-10-6
Output name 13VA 13VB 24VU1 24VU2
all-night/non-all
night
non-all night all night non-all night
rated output 13.2 V 13.2 V 24 V
power supply
tolerance
±3% ±3% ±5%
+3%, -5% (between
4.7 A and 5.2 A)
+8%, -6% (between 8 A and 10
A)
+8%, -6% between 0 A and 0.1
A)
Output name 3VA 3VB 5VA 12VA 24VH
all night/non-
all night
non-all
night all night
non-all
night non-all night
non-all
night
rated output 3.4V 3.4V 5.1V 12V 24V

Chapter 10
10-15
10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the Options Power Supply PCB 0001-4721
The ratings and the power tolerances of the accessories power supply PCB are as follows:
T-10-7
10.4.3 Protection Function
10.4.3.1 Protective Functions 0001-4742
The machine's DC power supply PCB and those of its accessories are equipped with
protective functions against excess current and voltage, which will automatically cut off the
output voltage in response to an error power condition (caused, for example, by a short-
circuit on a load).
If any of these protective mechanism has gone on, turn off the main power switch of the
printer unit, and remove the cause of activation; then, leave the machine alone for about 3
min, and turn its power back on to reset it.
power supply
tolerance ±4% ±4% ±3% ±5% ±7%
+5%, -6%
(between 2A
and 2.5A)
Output name 24VA
all all/non-all night non-all night
rated output 24V
power tolerances ±5%
+8%, -6% (between 6.5A and 12A)
+8%, -6% (between 0A and 0.1A)
Output name 3VA 3VB 5VA 12VA 24VH

Chapter 10
10-16
10.4.4 Backup Battery
10.4.4.1 Backup Battery 0001-4726
The SRAM PCB on the machine's controller PCB and the DC controller PCB are equipped
with a lithium battery (1 pc. each) to serve as a source of power, backing up various data in
the even of power failure.
T-10-8
Be sure to exercise care whenever you have to replace the battery. In certain cases, it may
explode.
Do not use a battery which is not of a type specifically indicated (same name, or equivalent).
Dispose of any used battery according to the instructions of its manufacturer.
10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function
10.4.5.1 Overview 0001-4743
1. Standby Mode
In standby mode, the machine is more or less ready to start a job, i.e., all its components are
supplied with power.
2. Power Save Mode
The control mechanism in which the machine's power status is changed (including power
SRAM PCB manganese dioxide lithium battery (3 V, 1000 mAh)
DC controller PCB lithium battery (3 V, 560 mAh)
Life Both types of batteries are expected to last for 10 yr or more
(with the power plug disconnected).
Replacement The batteries cannot be replaced on their own in the field.

Chapter 10
10-17
save, low power, sleep states) are generically referred to as power save mode. The machine
automatically moves through the following states: power save>low power>sleep.
T-10-9
T-10-10
T-10-11
3. AC Off Mode
Power
save mode
Shift The machine moves through these different states in response to a press on
the Save Power key on the control panel.
Description The machine saves power according to the settings made in Additional
Function (-10%, -25%, -50%). For a saving by -10% or -25%, the output of
the fixing heat retention the heater (H3) is decreased; or its output is turned
off. For a saving by -50%, the fixing heat retention heater (H3) is turned off
and, at the same time, the power to the accessories (except the fax unit) is
turned off.
Low power
mode (at time
of shipment)
shift The machine moves through different states in response to the passage of
times programmed in advance.
Description The machine performs its power save functions in keeping with the
requirements of the Energy Star standards. It controls the fixing
temperature to 175 deg C. The machine uses the same output states as it
uses for a saving by -50%, but uses different fixing AC heater control
temperatures (H1/H2).
Sleep
mode
Shift The machine moves through different sates in response to the passage of times
selected in Additional Function or in response to a press on the control panel
software power switch.
Description In sleep mode 1, the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB are
supplied with power. In sleep mode 2, the main controller PCB is supplied with
power. In both sleep modes 1 and 2, the power to the fixing AC heater is off.

Chapter 10
10-18
The machine remains in this sate when its main power switch remains off. All its power and
heater control mechanisms also remain off.
10.4.5.2 Power Supply and Heater Control 0001-4754
The machine's power supply conditions and its fixing heater states are as follows:
- Standby Mode, Power State Mode (-105, -25%, -50%)
T-10-12
Standby
mode
Power save mode
-10% -25% -50%
remote 1 ON ON ON ON
remote 2 ON ON ON OFF
reader unit non-all night 13VA2 ON ON ON OFF
non-all night 24VU2 ON ON ON OFF
DC controller
PCB
non-all night 3VA ON ON ON ON
non-all night 13VA1 ON ON ON ON
controller PCB non-all night 3VA ON ON ON ON
all night 3VB ON ON ON ON
fax non-all night 13VA1 ON ON ON ON

Chapter 10
10-19
- Low Power Mode, Sleep Mode, AC Off Mode
T-10-13
fixing AC heater
(H1/H2) control
190 deg C 190 deg C 190 deg C 166 deg C
fixing heat
retention heater
(H3) control
repeats
remaining on
for 4.2 sec
and off for
1.6 sec
repeats
remaining on
for 2.8 sec
and off for
2.3 sec
OFF OFF
Low
power
mode
Sleep mode AC off
mode
1 2
remote 1 ON ON OFF OFF
remote 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF
reader unit non-all night 13VA2 OFF OFF OFF OFF
non-all night 24VU2 OFF OFF OFF OFF
DC controller PCB non-all night 3VA ON ON OFF OFF
non-all night 5VA ON ON OFF OFF
non-all night 13VA1 ON ON OFF OFF
controller PCB non-all night 3VA ON ON OFF OFF
all night 3VB ON ON ON OFF
Standby
mode
Power save mode

Chapter 10
10-20
fax non-all night 13VA1 ON ON OFF OFF
fixing AC heater
(H1/H2) control
175 deg C OFF OFF OFF
fixing heat
retention heater
(H3) control
OFF OFF OFF OFF
Low
power
mode
Sleep mode AC off
mode

Chapter 10
10-21
Procedure
10.5.1 Option Power Supply
Assembly
F-10-9
F-10-10
Accessories Power
Supply 0001-2579
1) Disconnect J6401 [1] of the accessories
power supply.
2) Free the relay harness from the clamp
[2] of the accessories power supply.
F-10-11
machine harness from the accessories
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-22
power supply.
4) Remove the 4 TP screws (M3x6) [1],
and detach the accessories power supply
[3].
F-10-12
10.5.2 Controller Power
Supply Unit
DDIS cable.
F-10-13
screws [3])
F-10-14
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]

Chapter 10
10-23
Controller Power
Supply 0001-1452
1) Remove the controller power supply
cover [1] in upward direction. (6 screws
[2])
F-10-15
2) Remove the controller power supply [1].
(15 connectors, 5 clamps, 4 screws [2])
F-10-16
10.5.3 Printer Power Supply
Unit
DDIS cable.
F-10-17
screws [3])
[1]
[1]

Chapter 10
10-24
F-10-18
F-10-19
F-10-20
wire saddles.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]

Chapter 10
10-25
F-10-21
F-10-22
controller box [2].
F-10-23
F-10-24
F-10-25

Chapter 10
10-26
machine.
F-10-26
Accessories Power
Supply 0002-0077
power supply.
F-10-27
power supply.
[3].
F-10-28

Chapter 10
10-27
Controller Power
Supply 0001-4400
[2])
F-10-29
F-10-30
Left Cover (lower) 0002-0500
1) Disconnect the lattice connector [1] to
the finisher. (if equipped with Finisher-Q1
or Saddle Finisher-Q2)
Or, remove the cover of the lattice
connector.
Memo:
Depending on the specifications of the
machine, you may not find a lattice
connector.
2) Remove the cassettes 1 and 2 [1].
lower right cover [3].
F-10-31
Printer Unit Power
Supply 0001-1433
1) Remove the HVT cover [1]. (5 screws
[2], 8 clamps)
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-28
F-10-32
2) Disconnect the lattice connector [1] (1
screws) to the cassette pedestal and the
lattice connector [2] (1 screw) to the
finisher.
3) Remove the printer unit power supply
[3]. (3 connectors, 4 screws)
Memo
machine, you may not find the lattice
connector.
F-10-33
10.5.4 Control Panel
Support Cover (right) 0002-0059
support cover (right) [2].
F-10-34
Control Panel 0001-1469
control panel cable, and free the harness
[2] from the clamp.

Chapter 10
10-29
F-10-35
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the right
side of the control panel.
F-10-36
3) Remove the screw cover [1] from the
left side of the control panel, and remove
the screw from the rear.
F-10-37
4) Shift the control panel [1] to the right,
and detach it toward the front.
F-10-38
10.5.5 Control Panel LCD Unit

Chapter 10
10-30
F-10-39
[2] from the clamp.
F-10-40
F-10-41
F-10-42

Chapter 10
10-31
F-10-43
Control Panel Lower
Cover 0001-8928
1) Remove the control panel lower cover
[1]. (4 TP screws [2])
F-10-44
Control Panel LCD 0001-1484
cable used between the control panel
PCB and the control panel key switch
PCB; then, free the cable from the 2
clamps [2].
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors used
between the control panel PCB and the
control panel LCD.
Be sure to move the stopper in the
direction of the arrow. Each stopper has
its own direction of movement.
control panel inverter PCB.
F-10-45
4) Remove the control panel inside frame
[1]. (1 TP screw [2], 11 self-tapping
screws [3])

Chapter 10
10-32
F-10-46
5) Remove the control panel LCD [1]. (2
self-tapping screws [2]).
F-10-47
10.5.6 DC Controller PCB
F-10-48
F-10-49
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-33
DC Controller PCB 0001-1491
1) Disconnect all connectors of the DC
controller PCB.
2) Remove the 8 TP screws [1] of the DC
controller PCB base.
3) Shift the DC controller PCB together
with the base to the left to disconnect the
connector [2] to the controller PCB.
F-10-50
4) Remove the DC controller PCB together
with the base toward the front.
10.5.6.3 When Replacing
the DC Controller 0001-7538
Before replacing the DC controller
PCB, generate the latest P-PRINT
printout:
PRINT
1) Download the latest system software by
the SST.
2) After replacing the DC controller,
initialize the memory of the DC
controller PCB using the following
service mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC
-CON
3) Enter the values indicated on the service
label using the following service mode
items:
DELAY
- COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG>
REG-V-Y,M,K
REG2-V-Y,M,K
- COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>
SGNL-Y,M,C
REF-Y,M,C
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>
OFST1-AC
PRI-GAIN
PRI-OFST
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>
1TR-GAIN,OFST
2TR-GAIN,OFST
- COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>
MF-A4R,A6R,A4
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>
REGIST
A D J -
C1,C2,MF,C1RE,C2RE,C3RE,C4RE
ADJ-DKRE,MFRE,RG-REFE

Chapter 10
10-34
4) If any value is recorded in the Remarks
field of the service label, enter the value
in service mode.
5) Enter the counter backup data indicated
in the P-PRINT printout using the
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-
RL
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>DV-
UNT-K
6) Enter the drum film thickness current
value in service mode. (The drum film
thickness current value is indicated on
the drum counter label attached to the
front of the drum unit.)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DR-I-
INT
F-10-51
8) Turn off and then on the main power
switch.
item of the drum film thickness level
setting:
COPIER>ADJUST>HVT-PRI>DRM-
CHK
10.5.7 Leakage Breaker
F-10-52
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]

Chapter 10
10-35
F-10-53
Leakage Breaker 0001-1494
1) Remove the 4 fastons [1].
The cords connected to the fastons are
color-coded; be sure the colors are
correctly matched when connecting
them once again.
F-10-54
leakage breaker [3].
F-10-55
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-36
10.5.8 HVT PCB
DDIS cable.
F-10-56
screws [3])
F-10-57
F-10-58
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]

Chapter 10
10-37
F-10-59
wire saddles.
F-10-60
F-10-61
controller box [2].

Chapter 10
10-38
F-10-62
F-10-63
F-10-64
machine.
F-10-65
Accessories Power
Supply 0001-9597
power supply.

Chapter 10
10-39
F-10-66
power supply.
[3].
F-10-67
High-Voltage Sub
PCB 0001-9595
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] from the
high-voltage sub PCB.
2) Remove the 5 supports [2] from the
high-voltage sub PCB [3].
F-10-68
Controller Power
Supply 0001-4401
[2])

Chapter 10
10-40
F-10-69
F-10-70
Printer Power Supply 0001-4526
[2], 8 clamps)
F-10-71
2) Disconnect the lattice connector [1] (1
screws) to the cassette pedestal and the
lattice connector [2] (1 screw) to the
finisher.
3) Remove the printer unit power supply
[3]. (3 connectors, 4 screws)
Memo
machine, you may not find the lattice
connector.
F-10-72

Chapter 10
10-41
HVT PCB 0001-1423
1) Remove the right rear grip [1]. (2 screws
[2])
F-10-73
2) Remove the fan duct [1]. (1 screws [2])
F-10-74
[2], 8 clamps)
F-10-75
4) Remove the HVT PCB [1]. (5
connectors, 8 screws, 2 PCB supports)
F-10-76
10.5.8.8 When Replacing
the HVT PCB 0001-6276
1) Enter the appropriate information using
the following 6 service mode items by
going through the instructions indicated
on the label attached to the HVT PCB:
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRI-

Chapter 10
10-42
GAIN (CHG G)
OFST (CHG Off)
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 1TR-
GAIN (1TR G)
OFST (1TR Off)
GAIN (2TR G)
OFST (2TR Off)
The notations in parentheses indicate the
notations as they appear on the PCB
label.
label.
3) Generate a P-PRINT printout in service
mode.
4) Put away the generated P-PRINT
printout [1] in the service book case to
replace the old printout.
F-10-77
10.5.9 High-Voltage Sub PCB
F-10-78
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]

Chapter 10
10-43
F-10-79
Accessories Power
Supply 0001-9579
power supply.
F-10-80
power supply.
[3].
F-10-81
High-Voltage Sub
PCB 0001-9581
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] from the
high-voltage sub PCB.
2) Remove the 5 supports [2] from the
high-voltage sub PCB [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-44
F-10-82
10.5.10 Control Panel CPU
PCB
F-10-83
[2] from the clamp.
F-10-84

Chapter 10
10-45
F-10-85
F-10-86
F-10-87
Control Panel Lower
Cover 0001-8926
[1]. (4 TP screws [2])
F-10-88
Control Panel CPU
PCB 0001-1966
cable used between control panel PCB

Chapter 10
10-46
and the control panel key switch PCB.
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2] used
control panel LCD.
direction of the arrow. Each of the 2
stoppers has its own direction of
movement.
3) Disconnect the control panel cable [4].
4) Remove the 4 TP screws [5], and detach
the control panel PCB [7].
F-10-89
10.5.11 Control Panel Key
Switch PCB
F-10-90
[2] from the clamp.
F-10-91

Chapter 10
10-47
F-10-92
F-10-93
F-10-94
Control Panel Lower
Cover 0001-8924
[1]. (4 TP screws [2])
F-10-95
Control Panel Key
Switch PCB 0001-1627
cable used between the control panel

Chapter 10
10-48
PCB and the control panel key switch
PCB, and free it from the 3 clamps.
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [3] used
control panel LCD.
direction of the arrow. Each of the 2
stopper has its own direction of
movement.
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors of the
control panel inverter PCB.
F-10-96
4) Remove the control panel inside frame
[1]. (1 TP screw [2], 1 self-tapping
screws [3])
F-10-97
5) Remove the control panel key switch
PCB [1]. (5 self-tapping screws [2])
F-10-98
10.5.12 Control Panel Inverter
PCB

Chapter 10
10-49
F-10-99
[2] from the clamp.
F-10-100
F-10-101
F-10-102

Chapter 10
10-50
F-10-103
Control Panel Lower
Cover 0001-8927
[1]. (4 TP screws [2])
F-10-104
Control Panel Inverter 0001-1475
1) Remove the control panel inverter PCB
[1]. (3 connectors [2], 4 screws [3])
F-10-105
10.5.13 Main Power Switch

Chapter 10
10-51
F-10-106
F-10-107
Right Cover (lower
rear) 0002-0492
F-10-108
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-52
F-10-109
the fastons.
F-10-110
10.5.14 Front Cover Open/
Closed Detecting Switch
Toner Bottle Retainer 0002-0467
2) Open the toner container access cover
[1].
F-10-111
3) Remove the TP screw [1], and detach
the waste toner bottle retainer [2].

Chapter 10
10-53
F-10-112
Inside Front Cover
(right) 0002-0469
F-10-113
Front Cover Open/
Closed SW 0001-1504
1) Remove the link retainer [1]. (2 screws
[2])
F-10-114
front cover open/closed switch [2].
(snap-on)
F-10-115
To find the location of each faston, see
the number indicated on it.

Chapter 10
10-54
F-10-116
10.5.15 ITB Fan
delivery tray [2].
F-10-117
Delivery Tray
lower cover.
F-10-118
Inside Front Cover
(right) 0002-4245

Chapter 10
10-55
F-10-119
ITB Fan 0001-1830
1) Remove the finger guard [1]. (1 tapping
screw [2], 2 self-tapping screws [3])
F-10-120
2) Disconnect the connector [1] in the
direction of the arrow, and remove the 2
self-tapping screws [2]; then, detach the
ITB fan [3].
F-10-121
10.5.16 Toner Intake Fan

Chapter 10
10-56
F-10-122
F-10-123
F-10-124
Toner Suction Fan 0001-1860
1) Disconnect the connector [1] in the
toner suction fan [3] together with its
holder.
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-57
F-10-125
3) Detach the filter [1] from the holder.
F-10-126
4) Detach the toner suction fan [1] from the
holder.
F-10-127
10.5.17 Machine Heat
Discharge Fan
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0450
printer unit.

Chapter 10
10-58
F-10-128
installed)
(upper right).
F-10-129
F-10-130
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-59
installed.
F-10-131
hinge in place.
F-10-132
the hinge [2].
F-10-133
machine side plate.
F-10-134
hinge in place.

Chapter 10
10-60
Machine Heat Exhaust
Fan 0001-1969
1) Remove the right door feed guide 1 [1].
(3 self-tapping screws; if no relay
delivery assembly is used)
2) Remove the right door feed guide 2 [2].
(5 self-tapping screws)
F-10-135
3) Remove the machine fan (front) [1] and
the other machine fan (rear) [2]. (1
connector [3] each)
F-10-136
10.5.17.4 Routing the
Heat Discharge Fan
Harness 0003-9412
1) Route the harness [1] of the machine fan
(front) along the harness guides [2].
F-10-137
2) Fit the connector [2] of the machine fan
(rear) [1] to the harness guide to keep the
harness of the machine fan (front) in
place.

Chapter 10
10-61
F-10-138
10.5.18 Toner Intake Fan Filter
Toner Suction Fan
Cover 0002-0095
toner suction fan cover [1].
F-10-139
Toner Suction Fan
Filter 0001-1866
1) Remove the toner suction fan filter [1] in
upward direction.
F-10-140
10.5.19 Motor of Main Drive
Assembly
[2]
[1]

Chapter 10
10-62
F-10-141
F-10-142
DC Controller PCB 0001-3729
1) Disconnect all connectors of the DC
controller PCB.
2) Remove the 8 TP screws [1] of the DC
controller PCB base.
3) Shift the DC controller PCB together
with the base to the left to disconnect the
connector [2] to the controller PCB.
F-10-143
4) Remove the DC controller PCB together
with the base toward the front.
[1]
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-63
F-10-144
F-10-145
wire saddles.

Chapter 10
10-64
F-10-146
F-10-147
controller box [2].
F-10-148
F-10-149
F-10-150

Chapter 10
10-65
machine.
F-10-151
Main Drive Motor 0001-2608
1) Remove each motor [1]. (2 connectors
[2], 4 screws [3])
F-10-152
The 3 motors on the main drive
assembly may be positioned against the
markings on the main drive frame. Each
of these motors, moreover, may be
identified by the color of its nameplate.
T-10-14
Motor Marking Nameplate
color
Main motor
(M2)
M white
Drum motor
(M9)
D yellow
Fixing motor
(M11)
L pink

Chapter 10
10-66
10.5.20 Right Door
Right Cover (upper
rear) 0002-0423
printer unit.
F-10-153
installed)
(upper right).
F-10-154
F-10-155
[1]
[2]
[3]

Chapter 10
10-67
installed.
F-10-156
hinge in place.
F-10-157
the hinge [2].
F-10-158
machine side plate.
F-10-159
hinge in place.

10.5.21 Cautions in Handling the Left Stay
10.5.21.1 Points to Note about Handling the Left Stay 0001-1863
The left stay is used to keep the interval of the front and rear side plates at a specific
distance.
If the distance is not correct, the output may show blurred images. The distance between
the front and rear side plates cannot be adjusted in the field. Be sure not to loosen the 5
screws [1] used to keep the left stay in place. These screws are paint-locked.
F-10-160

Chapter 11 Maintenanc
e and Inspection

Contents
Contents
11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts....................................................................11-1
11.1.1 Overview.........................................................................................11-1
11.1.2 Reader Unit .....................................................................................11-1
11.1.3 Printer Unit......................................................................................11-1
11.2 Durables and Consumables....................................................................11-2
11.2.1 Overview.........................................................................................11-2
11.2.2 Reader Unit .....................................................................................11-2
11.2.3 Printer Unit......................................................................................11-2
11.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure....................................................11-6
11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure.............................................11-6
11.3.2 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (reader unit).....................11-8
11.3.3 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (printer unit) ....................11-8
11.3.4 Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing Work ..............................11-18
11.4 Cleaning ...............................................................................................11-20
11.4.1 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller..........................................11-20

Chapter 11
11-1
11.1 Periodically Replaced Parts
11.1.1 Overview 0000-9632
Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis so as to ensure a specific
level of performance. They may be free of external changes or damage, but they can
significantly affect the machine performance once they lose their function.
It is best if replacement work is scheduled to coincide with a scheduled visit to the user's.
The values indicated herein are estimates only and are subject to change depending on the
site environment and how the machine is used.
11.1.2 Reader Unit 0000-9633
The machine's reader unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.
11.1.3 Printer Unit 0000-9634
The machine's printer unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.

Chapter 11
11-2
11.2 Durables and Consumables
11.2.1 Overview 0000-9642
Some parts of the machine may have to be replaced once or more over the period of machine
warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to the table of
estimated lives (expressed in terms of the number of prints they make).
Making Checks When Replacing Durables
Use the following service mode items to find out when to replace parts:
- Machine
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC(Bk developing unit only)
- Accessory
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
11.2.2 Reader Unit 0000-9645
The machine's reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables.
11.2.3 Printer Unit 0000-9647
T-11-1
as of January 2004
Ref. Parts name Pats No. Q'ty Estimated life
(prints)
Remarks
[1] Developing unit (Bk) FM2-0056-000 1 500,000
[2] Developing unit (Y) FM2-0057-000 1 50,000
[3] Developing unit (M) FM2-0058-000 1 50,000
[4] Developing unit (C) FM2-0059-000 1 50,000
[5] Intermediate transfer
belt (ITB)
FC5-0334-000 1 300,000 images *1

Chapter 11
11-3
[6] ITB cleaning blade FC5-0368-000 1 100,000 images *1
[7] Primary transfer roller FC5-6920-000 1 300,000 images *1
[8] Secondary transfer
inside roller
FC5-0337-000 1 300,000 images *1
[9] Secondary transfer
outside roller
FC5-0661-000 1 60,000
[10] Separation static
eliminator
FC5-0664-000 1 240,000
[11] Fixing assembly 100 V FM2-0172-000 1 200,000 *2
Fixing assembly 115 V FM2-0173-000 1 200,000 *2
Fixing assembly 230 V FM2-0174-000 1 200,000 *2
[12] Fixing roller FC5-0726-000 1 100,000 *3
[13] Pressure roller FC5-0727-000 1 100,000 *3
[14] Fixing upper frame unit FM2-0176-000 1 100,000 *3
[15] Feed roller/separation
roller
FC5-6934-000 4 120,000
[16] Manual feed pickup
roller
FB1-8581-000 1 240,000
[17] Manual feed separation
pad
FC5-0488-000 1 240,000
[18] Dust-blocking glass
cleaning pad
FL2-0033-000 1 500,000
[19] ITB Waste Toner Unit FM2-0083-000 1 60,000 images *1
*1: The value here is an estimate expressed in terms of the number of mono color prints made. In the
case of full-color prints, the value will be 1/4 of that indicated.
*2: Be sure to replace the fixing roller, pressure roller, and fixing upper frame unit when 100,000 prints
are made.
*3: Be sure to replace the fixing roller, pressure roller, and fixing upper frame unit at a time; or to replace
the fixing assembly every 100,000 prints.
as of January 2004
(prints)
Remarks

Chapter 11
11-4
Expected service life shows the central value of a group of evaluation data points. Parts Numbers may subject
to change because of design changes.
as of January 2004
(prints)
Remarks

Chapter 11
11-5
F-11-1
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[8]
[9]
[5] [7]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[15]
[15]
[19]

Chapter 11
11-6
11.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
11.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 0000-9666
- As a rule, provide scheduled servicing every 60,000 prints.
- Before setting out for a visit, check with the service book, and take parts for which
replacement is expected.
- Disconnect the power plug on a periodical basis, and clean it and the area around it with a
dry cloth. If left connected for a long time in an area subject to high humidity or oily
smoke, it can catch fire (the buildup of dust is likely to absorb moisture and cause
insulation failure).
<Work Procedure>
1) Report to the person in charge, and check the general condition.
2) Record the counter readings, and check the faulty prints.
3) Make the following checks, and clean/adjust the components:
- COPIER > COUNTER > MISC > FX-UP-RL
- COPIER > COUNTER > MISC > DV-UNT-K
Any of the following indicates that the counter reading is incorrect:
a. the counter reading is lower than that recorded for the previous service visit.
b. the counter reading is excessively high in relation to the increase in the total counter
reading recorded for the previous service visit.
If the counter reading is faulty, make the following computation, and enter the result:
A = current reading of 'total 2'.
B = reading of 'total 2' recorded for the previous service visit.
C = reading of 'FX-UP-RL' or 'DV-UNIT-K' recorded for the previous service visit.
Enter the result of the following for 'FX-UP-RL' or 'DV-UNIT-K':

Chapter 11
11-7
(A - B) + C
4) Check the following item, and clean/adjust the parts as necessary.
T-11-2
5) Check the waste toner case.
If the case is half full, dispose of the waste toner in a plastic bag for collection. Or, replace
it with a new one.
- If you have to dispose of waste toner, be sure that you follow the rules and regulations
imposed by the local authorities.
- Do not throw waste toner into fire. (It can explode, creating significant hazards.)
Item to check
Test Copy image density standards
soiling of white background
clarity of characters
margin
fixing incorrect registration, soiling of back
of paper
margin standards (singe-sided print) leading edge: 2.5 +/-1.5 mm
left edge: 2.5 +/-1.5 mm
(double-sided print) leading edge: 2.5 +/- 2.0 mm
left edge: 2.5 +/-2.0 mm
Laser Exposure
System
dust-blocking glass cleaning tool
Feeding System registration upper/lower roller
paper lint in front of registration
assembly

Chapter 11
11-8
6) Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass.
7) Make test copies.
8) Make sample copies.
9) Check the operation of the leakage breaker.
While the machine remains on, press the test switch of the leakage breaker to see if it
operates normally (i.e., the lever shits to the OFF side to cut off the power).
- If the leakage breaker fails to operate normally, replace it, and make the foregoing check
once again.
[Resetting]
After making the check, turn off the power switch; then, shift the lever back to the ON
position, and turn on the power.
10) Put the sample copies in order, and clean up the area around the machine.
11) Record the final counter readings. At this time, be sure also to record the readings of
'FX-UP-RL' and 'DV-UNIT-K'.
12) Fill out the service book and report to the person in charge.
Be sure to record the result of the check on the leakage breaker in the service book.
11.3.2 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (reader
unit) 0000-9673
The machine's reader unit does not have items that must be serviced on a scheduled basis.
Be sure to clean the copyboard glass and the ADF reading glass during each visit you make
for scheduled servicing.
11.3.3 Items of Work for Scheduled Servicing (printer
unit) 0000-9676
Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated.

Chapter 11
11-9
T-11-3
Unit Location Item
of
work
Inter-
vals
Remarks
Transfer
assembly
Transfer/feed
guide
clean At the
time of
drum
unit
replace
ment
[1] Feed guide
[2] Secondary transfer front outside guide
[3] Secondary transfer front inside guide
Transfer
assembly
patch image read
sensor
clean At the
time of
drum
unit
replace
ment

Chapter 11
11-10
Transfer
assembly
Drive roller/
Tension roller/
Inside brade
clean 300,000
images
[1] Drive roller
[2] Tension roller
[3] Inside blade
Unit Location Item
of
work
Inter-
vals
Remarks

Chapter 11
11-11
Transfer
assembly
Mylar sheet clean 300,000
images
[1] Mylar sheet
Transfer
assembly
ITB cleaning
blade fixing base
clean At the
time of
drum
unit
replace
ment
[1] ITB cleaning blade fixing base
Unit Location Item
of
work
Inter-
vals
Remarks

Chapter 11
11-12
Transfer
assembly
ATR sensor
window/shutter
clean At the
time of
drum
unit
replace
ment
[1] ATR sensor unit
[2] ATR sensor window
[3] Shutter
Transfer
assembly
rotary upper
cover
clean At the
time of
drum
unit
replace
ment
If there is no stained image at the time of drum unit
replacement, clean it at the time of 300,000 images.
For instructions on how to remove the rotary upper
cover, see "Disassembly and Assembly" under "Image
Formation System."
Transfer
assembly
ITB/HP sensor clean 300,000
images
Unit Location Item
of
work
Inter-
vals
Remarks

Chapter 11
11-13
Transfer
assembly
ITB releasing part clean 300,000
images
[1]ITB releasing part
Before cleaning the part, remove the ITB
unit and the drum unit from the machine.
Developing
assembly
Photosensitive
drum butting roll
clean 120,000
images
[1] Photosensitive drum butting rolls
Perform the work only for the Bk developing unit. The
color units need not be cleaned (as they are replaced
after 50,000 images).
Unit Location Item
of
work
Inter-
vals
Remarks
[1]

Chapter 11
11-14
Developing
assembly
Developing
assembly casing
clean 120,000
images
[1] Developing assembly casing
Perform the work only for the Bk developing unit. The
color developing units need not be cleaned (as they are
replaced after 50,000 images).
Developing
assembly
Rotary lower
cover
clean 120,000
images
For instructions on how to remove the rotary lower
cover, see "Disassembly and Assembly" under "Image
Formation System."
Feeding
assembly
Registration
roller
clean At the
time of
drum
unit
replace
ment
Unit Location Item
of
work
Inter-
vals
Remarks

Chapter 11
11-15
Feeding
assembly
Registration front
guide
clean At the
time of
drum
unit
replace
ment
[1] Registration front guide
Feeding
assembly
Transparency
sensor surface
clean 240,000
images
Unit Location Item
of
work
Inter-
vals
Remarks

Chapter 11
11-16
Feeding
assembly
Feeding roller,
scraping ring
clean as
needed
[1] Delivery rollers
[2] Scrape rings
Clean the part only when dirt is conspicuous.
You need not clean the parts if a Finisher-P1 is installed.
Feeding
assembly
Duplex feed roller
1/2
clean as
needed
Fixing
assembly
Fixing outlet
roller, roll
clean as
needed
Unit Location Item
of
work
Inter-
vals
Remarks

Chapter 11
11-17
The above values are estimates only, and are subject to change according to future data.
Fixing
assembly
Fixing delivery
guide assembly
clean as
needed
[1] Fixing delivery guide
Clean the part if adhesion is found.
Others Dust-blocking
glass
clean At the
time of
drum
unit
replace
ment
[1] Dust-blocking guide
Unit Location Item
of
work
Inter-
vals
Remarks

Chapter 11
11-18
11.3.4 Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing Work 0000-9678
- If you used solvent, be sure to check that the part has completely dried before fitting it back
to the machine.
- Do not use a wet (moist) cloth in areas not specifically indicated.
- Be sure to conduct scheduled servicing at the indicated intervals.

Chapter 11
11-19
F-11-2
ATR sensor
window shutter
Rotary upper
cover
Rotary lower cover
Dust-blocking
glass
Drive roller
Use a blower brush or
lint-free paper with alcohol.
Dry wipe with lint-free paper.
Be sure to clean in one
direction only. As necessary,
use alcohol, and dry wipe
thereafter.
Never dry wipe.
Dry wipe with
lint-free paper;
as necessary, use alcohol.
ITB cleaning
blade fixing
Patch image reading
sensor window
Unless otherwise specified, use lint-free paper with alcohol.
Note:
Delivery roller
Scraping ring
Fixing/delivery
guide assembly
Fixing outlet roller
Fixing outlet roll
Duplexing
feed roller 1
Duplex feed roller 2
Transfer guide
assembly
Registration roller
Transparency
sensor surface
Never use a blower brush.
Dry wipe with
lint-free paper.
Registration front
guide assembly
Feed guide
Photosensitive drum
Butting roll
ITB HP sensor
Developing cartridge
assembly
Dry wipe with
lint-free paper.
ITB releasing part

Chapter 11
11-20
11.4 Cleaning
11.4.1 Cleaning the Primary Charging Roller 0004-1957
Cleaning the primary charging roller involves rotating the drum manually. Be sure of
the following during the work:
- Do not touch the imaging area of the drum surface. The presence of finger prints or
oils can cause cracking of the surface. Whenever possible, try washing the hands
before starting the work.
- Be sure to rotate the drum in the correct direction. Go over the following, and make
sure not to rotate it in the wrong direction.
Be sure to use paper under the drum unit to prevent adhesion of dust.
1) Insert paper through the gap under the primary charging roller cover [1], all the way until
it stops.
F-11-3
Be sure to perform step 1) without fail to protect the drum from scratches and external

Chapter 11
11-21
light.
2) Free the 4 protrusions [1], and detach the primary charging roller cover [2].
F-11-4
3) Dry wipe the primary charging roller [1] with lint-free paper. Be sure to move the paper
in axial direction and in one direction.
F-11-5
4) Hold the end of the drum [A] (i.e., non-imaging area, shown in beige); then, turn the drum
in the direction of the arrow (clockwise direction when viewing the drum unit from the
front). This will rotate the primary charging roller.

Chapter 11
11-22
F-11-6
Do not touch the imaging area [A] (shown in moss green) of the drum surface. The
presence of fingerprints or oils will cause cracking of the drum surface.
F-11-7
Be sure to pay attention to the direction of drum rotation. Do NOT rotate it
counterclockwise when viewing the drum unit from the front. If you inadvertently

Chapter 11
11-23
started to turn it in the wrong direction, stop immediately; then, put the drum unit
back into the machine, generate a halftone image, and check to see that the output
is free of image faults.
5) Repeat steps 3) and 4) to clean the entire surface of the primary charging roller.
If subjected to light for a long time, the drum will deteriorate. Be sure to work briskly
(e.g., within 5 min or less).
When removing the primary charging roller cover, be sure also to keep paper between
the primary charging roller and the drum as you did when removing the cover. Remove
the paper after you have attached the cover.

Chapter 12 Standards
and Adjustments

Contents
Contents
12.1 Image Adjustments.................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 Standards for Image Position ..........................................................12-1
12.1.2 Checking the Image Position ..........................................................12-1
12.1.3 Cassette ...........................................................................................12-3
12.1.4 Manual Feed Tray ...........................................................................12-6
12.1.5 Side Paper Deck ..............................................................................12-7
12.2 Scanning System..................................................................................12-10
12.2.1 After Replacing the CIS................................................................12-10
12.2.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass...........................................12-10
12.2.3 After Replacing the ADF Reading Glass......................................12-11
12.2.4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or After Initializing the
RAM.....................................................................................................12-12
12.3 Laser Exposure System........................................................................12-15
12.3.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit .......................................12-15
12.4 Image Formation System .....................................................................12-16
12.4.1 After Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ...........................12-16
12.4.2 After Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Belt............................12-16
12.4.3 After Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller................................12-16
12.4.4 After Replacing the Drum Unit.....................................................12-16
12.4.5 After Replacing the Developing Unit (Y, M, C)...........................12-17
12.4.6 After Replacing the Developing Unit (Bk) ...................................12-17
12.4.7 After Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller ..............12-18
12.5 Fixing System.......................................................................................12-19
12.5.1 After Disassembling the Fixing Unit ............................................12-19
12.5.2 After Replacing the Fixing Unit....................................................12-19
12.5.3 After Replacing the Fixing Roller.................................................12-19
12.5.4 Nip Adjustment .............................................................................12-19
12.5.5 Point to Note About the Position of the Fixing Main Thermistor.12-21
12.5.6 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Sub Thermistor...........12-21
12.5.7 Point to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch ..........12-22
12.6 Electrical Components .........................................................................12-24
12.6.1 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB.................................12-24

12.6.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ......................................12-26
12.6.3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)........................12-27
12.6.4 After Replacing the SRAM Board................................................12-28
12.6.5 After Replacing the HDD .............................................................12-28
12.6.6 When Replacing the HVT PCB....................................................12-30
12.7 Pickup/Feeding System........................................................................12-31
12.7.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Pickup
Cassette ................................................................................................12-31
12.7.2 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration When Replacing the Duplex Unit
12-33
12.7.3 Adjust the Horizontal Registration for the Manual Feed Tray .....12-34
12.7.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value.....................................12-35

Chapter 12
12-1
12.1 Image Adjustments
12.1.1 Standards for
A print made at a magnification of 100%
must meet the following standards for
image margin/non-image width:
- Margin Along the Leading Edge
F-12-1
- Left/Right Image Margin
F-12-2
- Leading Edge Non-Image Width
F-12-3
- Left/Right Non-Image Width
F-12-4
12.1.2 Checking the
Make 10 prints each using the following
sources of paper; then, check to make sure
that the image margin and the non-image
width are as indicated;
[1] individual cassettes
[2] manual feed tray
[3] side paper deck
If not as indicated, make the following
adjustments:
1. Leading edge image margin (1st side)
Use the following service mode item to
2 5
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
0
2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of double-sided copy
2.5 2.0mm
10
8
6
5
4
2
0
2.5 1.5mm
2.5 2.0mm
2 5
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
0
2.5 1.5mm
2.5 1.5mm
10
8
6
5
4
2
0
2.5 1.5mm
2.5 1.5mm

Chapter 12
12-2
adjust the registration:
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ>
REGIST
F-12-5
2. Left/right image margin (1st side)
Use it to adjust the horizontal registration
mechanically.
3. Leading edge image margin (2nd side)
adjust the registration:
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> RG-
REFE
F-12-6
4. Left/right image margin (2nd side)
adjust the horizontal registration:
- Cassette 1
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-
C1RE
F-12-7
- Cassette 2
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-
C2RE
2 5
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
0
1st side copy 2.5 1.5mm
Leading edge
of paper
Increase the value
of REGIST.
(An increase by
10 will decrease
the margin by
1 mm.)
Decrease the value of REGIST.
(A decrease by 10 will
increase the margin by 1 mm.)
2 5
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
0
2.5 2.0mm
Leading edge
of paper
Increase the value
of RG-REFE.
(An increase by
10 will decrease
the margin by
1 mm.)
Decrease the value of RG-REFE.
increase the margin by 1 mm.)
2nd side of
double-sided copy
Paper left edge
10
8
6
5
4
2
0
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for cassette
1 2.5 2.0mm
Increase the value of
ADJ-C1RE
(An increase by 1 will
decrease the margin by
0.1 mm.)
Decrease the value of
ADJ-C1RE
increase the margin by
0.1 mm.)

Chapter 12
12-3
F-12-8
5. Leading edge non-image width
make adjustments:
COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-X
F-12-9
6. Left/right non-image width
make adjustments:
COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y
F-12-10
12.1.3 Cassette 0001-1716
A. Left/Right Image Margin
Adjustment (1st side)
1) Open the lower right cover [2]; then,
remove the 2 screws, and detach
the cover (lower front) [1].
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for cassette
1 2.5 2.0mm
ADJ-C2RE
0.1 mm.)
ADJ-C2RE
0.1 mm.)
Paper left edge
10
8
6
5
4
2
0
2 5
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
0
1st side copy 2.5 1.5mm
2.5 1.5mm
Leading edge
of paper
Increase the value
of ADJ-X
(An increase by
10 will increase
the margin by
1 mm.)
Decrease the value
of ADJ-X.
(A decrease by
10 will decrease
the margin by
1 mm.)
Paper left edge
2.5 1.5mm
2nd side of
double-sided copy
2.5 1.5mm
ADJ-Y.
1 mm.)
ADJ-Y.
1 mm.)
10
8
6
5
4
2
0

Chapter 12
12-4
F-12-11
2) Slide out the cassette 1 or 2.
(In the case of a 2-cassette pedestal,
slide out the cassette 3 or 4.)
3) Check the index [1].
(Perform this step also for a 2-cassette
pedestal.)
F-12-12
A-1. Making Adjustments of the
Cassette 1 (left/right image margin;
1st side)
4) Free the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip
(right front) [1].
F-12-13
horizontal registration adjusting plate
[1] of the cassette.
6) In keeping with the index you checked
in step 3), move the horizontal
registration adjusting plate back and
forth. Moving the adjusting plate toward
the rear of the machine will increase the
left/right image margin on the front of
the image.
[1]
[2]

Chapter 12
12-5
F-12-14
8) Fit the cassette 1.
9) Make copies using the cassette 1 as the
source of paper, and check to make sure
that the margin is as indicated.
10) Fit back the grip (right front).
11) Fit back the machine's right front
cover.
A-2. Making Adjustments for the
Cassette 2 ( left/right image margin;
1st side)
5) In keeping with the index you checked
in step 3), move the horizontal
registration adjusting plate back and
forth. Moving the adjusting plate toward
the rear of the machine will increase the
left/right image margin on the front of
the image.
F-12-15
7) Fit back the cassette 2.
that the margin is as indicated.
9) Fit back the machine's right front cover.
B. Left/Right Image Margin (2nd side)
B-1. Making Adjustments for Cassette 1
(left/right image margin; 2nd side)
1) If the margin is not as indicated, change
the adjustment value for the left/right
margin of the 2nd side.
C O P I E R > A D J U S T > F E E D -
ADJ>ADJ-C1RE
An increase by 1 will decrease the
left/right margin on the front by 0.1 mm.

Chapter 12
12-6
F-12-16
B-2. Making Adjustments for Cassette 2
(left/right image margin; 2nd side)
1) Enter the same value as for ADJ-C1RE
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-
C2RE
2) Make double-sided copies from the
cassette 2, and check to make sure that
the margin is as indicated.
3) If not as indicated, change the
adjustment value of the left/right margin
on the 2nd side for the cassette 2.
C2RE
An increase by 1 will decrease the left/right
margin on the front by 0.1 mm.
F-12-17
4) Record the new adjustment values on
the service label.
- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE
mode.
12.1.4 Manual Feed
Tray 0001-1718
A. Left/Right Margin Adjustment (1st
side; mechanical adjustment)
2) Make copies using the manual feed tray,
and check to make sure that the left/right
margin is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
- If not as indicated, perform the following:
tray.
4) Loosen the manual feed tray upper cover
Paper left edge
10
8
6
5
4
2
0
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for cassette
1 2.5 2.0mm
ADJ-C1RE
0.1 mm.)
ADJ-C1RE
0.1 mm.)
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for cassette
1 2.5 2.0mm
ADJ-C2RE
0.1 mm.)
ADJ-C2RE
0.1 mm.)
Paper left edge
10
8
6
5
4
2
0

Chapter 12
12-7
fixing screw [1].
F-12-18
5) So that the margin is as indicated, move
the manual feed tray upper cover back
and froth.
Moving the manual feed tray upper
cover toward the rear of the machine
will decrease the left/right margin on the
front side.
6) Tighten the manual feed tray upper
cover fixing screw.
8) Make copies using the manual feed tray
as the source of paper, and check to
make sure that the margin is as
indicated.
B. Left/Right Margin Adjustment (2nd
side)
1) Make double-sided copies using the
manual feed tray as the source of paper,
and check to make sure that the left/right
margin on the 2nd side is 2.5 ±2.0 mm.
2) If not as indicated, change the
adjustment value of the left/right margin
on the 2nd side for the manual feed tray.
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ >
ADJ-MFRE
An increase by 1 will decrease the left/
right image margin by 0.1 mm on the
front side.
F-12-19
3) Record the new adjustment values on
the service label.
- ADJ-MFRE
mode.
12.1.5 Side Paper
Deck 0001-1722
1) Check to make sure that the 4 adjusters
[1] of the pedestal are in firm contact
with the floor.
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for manual feed
tray: 2.5 2.0mm
ADJ-MFRE.
decrease the margin
by 0.1 mm.)
ADJ-MFRE.
increase the margin
by 0.1 mm.)
Paper left edge
10
8
6
5
4
2
0

Chapter 12
12-8
F-12-20
2) Connect the machine's power plug, and
turn on the power.
3) When the machine has completed its
wait period, make copies using the paper
deck as the source of paper; then, make
checks.
A. Left/Right Margin Adjustment (1st
side; mechanical adjustment)
1) Make copies using the paper deck as the
that the left-right margin is 2.5 -1.5, +1.5
mm.
- If not as indicated, perform the following:
2) Slide out the compartment.
3) Turn the 2 screws [2] to adjust the
position of the latch plate [1] of the deck
open solenoid (SL2D).
At this time, use the index [3] on the
latch plate as a reference.
F-12-21
B. Left/Right Margin Adjustment (2nd
side)
1) Start service mode, and check the left/
right margin for the cassette 1:
CIRE
2) Enter the adjustment value of the left/
right margin on the 2nd side for the
cassette 1 as the left/right margin on the
2nd side of the side deck.
C O P I E R > A D J U S T > F E E D -
ADJ>ADJ-DKRE
An increase by 1 will increase the left/
right image on the front by 0.1 mm.
[1]
[1]
[1] [3] [2]

Chapter 12
12-9
F-12-22
mode.
ADJ-DKRE.
0.1 mm.)
ADJ-DKRE.
increase the margin
by 0.1 mm.)
2nd side of
double-sided copy
for paper deck
: 2.5 2.0mm
Paper left edge
10
8
6
5
4
2
0

Chapter 12
12-10
12.2 Scanning System
12.2.1 After
Replacing the CIS 0002-4555
Be sure to enter the values indicated on the
CIS label attached to the contact image
sensor (CIS) using the following service
mode items:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG
caused by CIS)
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-MG
(MTF correction value for main scanning
direction)
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>MTF-SG
(MTF correction value for sub scanning
direction)
F-12-23
Also, be sure to update the values indicated
on the service label attached behind the
reader left cover by the values indicated on
the CIS label.
Reference:
The machine is not shipped out of the
factory with the CIS label attached to it.
12.2.2 After
Replacing the
A. Enter the value indicated by the bar
code found at the upper right on the
copyboard glass (copyboard cover)
using the following service mode items:
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Y
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Z
(standard white plate white level data X, Y,
Z)
-012. 72. 70
CCDU-RG
MTF-MG
MTF-SG

Chapter 12
12-11
F-12-24
B. Enter the value indicated by the bar code
found at the upper left of the copyboard
glass (copyboard sheet) using the
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>BOOK-RG
caused by copyboard glass)
F-12-25
12.2.3 After
Replacing the
ADF Reading
Glass 0002-4566
Enter the value indicated by the bar code
found on the ADF reading glass using the
caused by stream reading glass)
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
BOOK-RG
-04

Chapter 12
12-12
F-12-26
12.2.4 After
Replacing the
Reader Controller
PCB or After
Initializing the
RAM 0002-4569
PRINT printout.
PCB>
adjustment.
m o d e :
PLT-X,Y,Z
(copyboard cover)
RG
(ADF)
DF-RG
002

Chapter 12
12-13
F-12-27
cover) values
reading)
XY>ADJ-X
XY>ADJ-Y
reading)
XY>ADJ-S
RG
value
MG,SG
value
ST-P-Y,M,C,K
controller PCB:
LUT.
the D-10 Chart.
ADJ2
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
DF-RG BOOK-RG

Chapter 12
12-14
XY>ADJ-Y-DF
FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST
adjustment
items:
LTR
LTRR
reading)
TRD-POS
WLVL1
WLVL2
PRINT printout.
F-12-28

Chapter 12
12-15
12.3 Laser Exposure
System
12.3.1 After
Replacing the
Laser Scanner
Unit 0001-6187
Enter the values indicated on the label
attached to the laser scanner unit using the
DELAY

Chapter 12
12-16
12.4 Image Formation
System
12.4.1 After
Replacing the
Intermediate
Transfer Unit 0001-6190
P>1ATVC-EX
12.4.2 After
Replacing the
Intermediate
Transfer Belt 0001-6879
P>1ATVC-EX
12.4.3 After
Replacing the
Primary Transfer
Roller 0001-6881
P>1ATVC-EX
12.4.4 After
Replacing the
Drum Unit 0001-6872
1) Initialize the drum unit. Execute the
following service mode item.
-
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DRM
-LIFE
While initialization is under way, the
machine flashes "ACTIVE" on its screen.
It indicates "OK!" at the end of
initialization in about 1 min.
Do not touch any of the keys, open the
door, or turn off the power while
initialization is under way. Otherwise,
go back to step 1) and start over.
that the value of the following service
mode item is '0':
LIFE
If not '0', go back to sep 1) and start over.
3) Record the value indicated in the
following service mode item in the
Remarks field of the drum initial value
label (attached to the light-blocking
sheet of a new drum unit):
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DR-I-
INT
As necessary, record the date of drum unit
replacement and the counter reading on

Chapter 12
12-17
the drum initial value label.
4) Attach the drum initial value label to the
front [1] of the drum unit.
F-12-29
12.4.5 After
Replacing the
Developing Unit
(Y, M, C) 0001-6772
item (color):
STIR-Y/M/C
item (color):
INIT-Y/M/C (If you have replaced the
Y, M, and C cartridges at the same time,
execute INIT-3.)
item (color):
SPLY-Y/M/C
4) Record the value for the following
service mode item (color) on the service
label:
- COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> SGNL-Y/
M/C
- COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> REF-Y/M/
C
12.4.6 After
Replacing the
Developing Unit
(Bk) 0001-6193
item:
STIR-K
item:
SPLY-K
item; thereafter, check to see that the
value has been initialized to '0':
- COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> DV-
UNT-K

Chapter 12
12-18
12.4.7 After
Replacing the
Secondary
Transfer Outside
Roller 0001-8396
- If you have replaced the secondary
transfer outside roller, be sure to apply
about 10 mg of grease (FY9-6008) to the
end [2] (side without the blue marking)
at the rear of the secondary transfer
outside roller [1].
F-12-30

Chapter 12
12-19
12.5 Fixing System
12.5.1 After
Disassembling the
1) If you have detached any of the
following electrical components, check
to see if it has been mounted back
correctly;
- fixing main thermistor
- fixing sub thermistor
- fixing thermal switch
2) Adjust the fixing roller nip.
Service Mode;
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-
CHK
fixing nip width auto measurement output
12.5.2 After
Replacing the
1) Initialize the fixing roller counter in
service mode:
RL
12.5.3 After
Replacing the
1) Initialize the fixing roller counter in
service mode:
RL
2) Perform nip adjustments.
12.5.4 Nip
Adjustment 0001-7823
Generate a printout of automatic
measurement of the fixing nip width.
1) Select 'plain paper' or 'recycled paper' as
the type of paper for the cassette 1
(Additional Function> common settings
>paper type).
2) Place A4/LTR plain paper or recycled
paper in the cassette 1.
3) Press the OK key (so that paper is picked
up from the cassette 1).
4) See that the paper is stopped once
between the fixing roller and then
discharged in about 15 sec.
5) Check to see the nip width of the
discharged paper is as indicated.

Chapter 12
12-20
F-12-31
standard: b, c
9.25 -0.25, +0.25 mm (less than 5000
sheets)
9.25 +1.25/ -0.25mm difference between b
and c 0.5 mm or less (5000 sheets or more)
standard: a (reference only)
from 8.5 to 9.0 mm (less than 5000 sheets)
from 8.5 to 10.0 mm (5000 sheets or more)
Note 1:
The point of measurement for a is in the
middle of paper.
Note 2:
The points of measurement for b and c are
10 to 15 mm from the edge of paper.
Note 3:
The arrow in the figure indicates the
direction of paper movement.
Note 4:
The nip tends to increase as more and more
paper is moved past. There is no need,
however, for another session of adjustment
each time 5000 sheets have been moved
past. If adjustments are needed for some
reason, try so that b and c are adjusted to
match the median value of 9.25 mm.
6) If the nip width is not as indicated,
perform the following:
6-1) Turn the front and rear adjusting
screws to adjust the nip.
EX: if the median value of the nip
measurements is closer to the lower
limit,
tighten the screw of the side where the nip
at the ends is smaller; a full turn of the
screw will cause a change of about 0.5
mm.
EX: if the nip balance is correct, turn the
screws of both sides.
F-12-32
7) After the work, generate a test print
using the following: COPIER> TEST>
PG> TYPE6 (grid).
b
a
c

Chapter 12
12-21
12.5.5 Point to Note
About the Position
of the Fixing Main
Caution 1
[2] is fitted under the fixing main
thermistor [1].
Caution 2
[2] is not mounted in the wrong
orientation. The cover is equipped with
a protrusion to prevent wrong
orientation.
F-12-33
Caution 3
Check to be sure that the spring [1] of the
thermistor retainer is found forcing the
thermistor.
Caution 4
Be sure to tighten the screw A and then
the screw B of the thermistor retainer in
sequence.
F-12-34
When Mounting
the Fixing Sub
Caution 1
Take care not to touch the surface [1] of
the fixing sub thermistor.
Caution 2
Take care not to deform the fixing sub
thermistor.

Chapter 12
12-22
F-12-35
When Mounting
the Fixing
Thermal Switch 0003-5496
Caution 1
Check to be sure that the claw [1] of the
thermal switch is in the cut-off of the
conducting plate [2].
Caution 2
Be sure to tighten the fixing screw A and
then the fixing screw B of the thermal
switch.
F-12-36
Caution 3
After tightening the fixing screws of the
thermal switch, perform the following:
Check to be sure that the surface of the
thermal switch [1] is level in relation to the
fixing roller. (Be sure to use a pen light or
the like to shine the thermal switch for this
check; if not level, be sure to repeat the
mounting work.)
F-12-37

Chapter 12
12-23
F-12-38
OK
NG NG
NG NG

Chapter 12
12-24
12.6 Electrical
Components
12.6.1 After
Replacing the
Reader Controller
PCB 0002-4570
PRINT printout.
PCB>
adjustment.
m o d e :
PLT-X,Y,Z
(copyboard cover)
RG
(ADF)
F-12-39
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
DF-RG BOOK-RG

Chapter 12
12-25
cover) values
reading)
XY>ADJ-X
XY>ADJ-Y
reading)
XY>ADJ-S
RG
value
MG,SG
value
ST-P-Y,M,C,K
controller PCB:
LUT.
the D-10 Chart.
ADJ2
XY>ADJ-Y-DF
FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST
adjustment
items:

Chapter 12
12-26
LTR
LTRR
reading)
TRD-POS
WLVL1
WLVL2
PRINT printout.
F-12-40
12.6.2 After
Replacing the DC
Controller PCB 0001-1745
Before replacing the DC controller
PCB, generate the latest P-PRINT
printout:
PRINT
1) Download the latest system software by
the SST.
2) After replacing the DC controller,
initialize the memory of the DC
controller PCB using the following
service mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC
-CON
3) Enter the values indicated on the service
label using the following service mode
items:
DELAY
- COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG>
REG-V-Y,M,K
REG2-V-Y,M,K
- COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>
SGNL-Y,M,C
REF-Y,M,C
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>
OFST1-AC
PRI-GAIN
PRI-OFST

Chapter 12
12-27
- COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>
1TR-GAIN,OFST
2TR-GAIN,OFST
- COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>
MF-A4R,A6R,A4
- COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>
REGIST
A D J -
C1,C2,MF,C1RE,C2RE,C3RE,C4RE
ADJ-DKRE,MFRE,RG-REFE
4) If any value is recorded in the Remarks
field of the service label, enter the value
in service mode.
5) Enter the counter backup data indicated
in the P-PRINT printout using the
RL
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>DV-
UNT-K
6) Enter the drum film thickness current
value in service mode. (The drum film
thickness current value is indicated on
the drum counter label attached to the
front of the drum unit.)
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DR-I-
INT
F-12-41
8) Turn off and then on the main power
switch.
item of the drum film thickness level
setting:
COPIER>ADJUST>HVT-PRI>DRM-
CHK
12.6.3 After
Replacing the
Main Controller
PCB (main) 0001-6280
When you have mounted the main
controller PCB (main), be sure to mount
the PCBs you may have removed before
starting the work:
[1] Boot ROM
[2] Image memory (SDRAM)
[3] Expansion bus PCB
[4] Main controller PCB (sub)
[5] UFR board

Chapter 12
12-28
[6] Ethernet board
F-12-42
F-12-43
12.6.4 After
Replacing the
- Inform the user that replacing the SRAM
board will cause all image data in Box to
be lost. Be sure to obtain the user's
consent before starting the work.
- Be sure that the SRAM board you are
using is a new one.
The machine will be likely to
malfunction if you use a RAM that
has been used in a different printer
unit.
1) Replace the SRAM board, and turn on
the main power. (The machine will
execute automatic initialization.)
2) See that the machine indicates the
message "Turn On the Power Switch on
the Right Side" on its control panel.
Turn off and then on the power.
3) Initialize the RAM.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MN-
CON
Make the foregoing selections, and press
the OK key.
12.6.5 After
Replacing the
HDD 0001-7305
A. If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not
Used
1) Format the HDD.
Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e.,
turn on the main power while holding
down the 2 and 8 keys).

Chapter 12
12-29
Using the SST's HD formatting function,
execute formatting of all partitions. (For
details, see the instructions on how to
upgrade the machine.)
Using the SST, download the system,
language, and RUI files.
It may take about 5 min for the machine
to start up after a download session.
B. If a Card Reader and NetSpot
Accountant (NSA) Are Used
A card ID used by the NSA exists on the
HDD. If you have replaced the HDD,
you must also download the card data
used by the NSA once again; otherwise,
you will not be able to make use of
statistical management functions of the
NSA.
You will first have to format the HDD
and download the system software as for
A above; thereafter, you need to perform
additional steps:
1) Format the HDD.
3) Make the following selections:
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CA
RD
4) Enter a card number.
Enter the number of the first card of those
to be used for group control, and press
the OK key. (For instance, if the group
will be using numbers between 1
through 1000, enter '1'.)
power.
6) Make a check.
settings>group ID control>count
control; then, check to make sure the
following IDs are made ready:
ID00000001 through ID00001000.
7) Set the appropriate addresses.
settings>network settings>TCP/IP
settings>IP address. Then, set the
following addresses: IP address,
gateway address, subnet mask.
8) Enter a number.
Additional Function, and enter a
number: system administrator
information settings>system control
group ID/system control ID No.
power.
Unless you set up the system control ID
and the system control ID No., you will not
be able to register a card to the machine
while using NSA.
10) Download the card ID.
Keep the machine in a standby state, and
download the card ID through the NSA.
11) Check the count control.

Chapter 12
12-30
Additional Function to bring up the
Count Control screen: system control
settings>group ID control; then, check
to see that only the ID data you have
downloaded are indicated.
12) Check to see that the operation is
normal.
Using a user card that has been registered
to the NSA, make copies; then, check
that the number of copies you have
made are associated with the card you
have used in the machine.
12.6.6 When
Replacing the
HVT PCB 0001-1750
1) Enter the appropriate information using
the following 6 service mode items by
going through the instructions indicated
on the label attached to the HVT PCB:
GAIN (CHG G)
OFST (CHG Off)
GAIN (1TR G)
OFST (1TR Off)
GAIN (2TR G)
OFST (2TR Off)
The notations in parentheses indicate the
notations as they appear on the PCB
label.
label.
3) Generate a P-PRINT printout in service
mode.
4) Put away the generated P-PRINT
printout [1] in the service book case to
replace the old printout.
F-12-44

Chapter 12
12-31
12.7 Pickup/Feeding
System
Horizontal
Registration When
Replacing the
Pickup Cassette 0001-1751
- 1st side (mechanical adjustment)
1)Make copies using the cassette 1/2 as the
2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm.
- If the margin is not as indicated, make the
following adjustment:
F-12-45
2) If a 2-Cassette Pedestal-Y1 is installed,
open the right door [1] of the pedestal.
3) After opening the lower right cover [2],
remove the 2 screws, and detach the
cover (lower front) [3].
F-12-46
4) Slide out the cassette 1 or 2.
5) Check the index [1] on the adjusting
plate.
F-12-47
- Adjusting the Cassette 1
0
2
4
6
8
10
(-) (+)
2.5±1.5mm
[3]
[2]
[1]

Chapter 12
12-32
6) Free the 2 claws [2], and detach the grip
(right front) [1].
F-12-48
7) Loosen the fixing screw [2] on the
8) Move the adjusting plate back and forth
with reference to the index you have
checked in step 5). Moving the adjusting
plate toward the rear of the machine will
increase the margin on the front side of
the image.
F-12-49
10) Put back the cassette 1.
sure that the margin along the image
front side is 2.5 +1.5, -1.5 mm.
12) Fit back the grip (right front).
13) Attach the machine's right front cover.
- Adjusting the Cassette 2
7) Move the adjusting plate back and forth
along the index you checked in step 5).
(Moving the adjusting plate toward the
margin on the image front.)
F-12-50
9) Fit back the cassette 2.
sure that the margin on the image front is

Chapter 12
12-33
2.2 +1.5, -1.5 mm.
11) Fit back the machine's right front
cover.
-Margin (2nd side)
cassette you have adjusted for the 1st
side; then, check to make sure that the
margin on the front side is 2.5 +2.0, -2.0
mm.
F-12-51
the adjustment value of the horizontal
registration on the 2nd side for the
cassette in question.
C1RE
C2RE
An increase by 1 will decrease the margin
on the front by 0.1 mm.
service label.- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE
Horizontal
Registration When
Replacing the
Duplex Unit 0001-1754
cassette 1/2 as the source of paper; then,
check to be sure that the margin on the
front side is 2.5 -2.0, +2.0 mm.
F-12-52
registration on the 2nd side for the
cassette in question.
C1RE
C2RE
0
2
4
6
8
10
(–) (+)
2.5±2.0mm
0
2
4
6
8
10
(–) (+)
2.5±2.0mm

Chapter 12
12-34
An increase by 1 will decrease the margin
service label.
- ADJ-C1RE
- ADJ-C2RE
12.7.3 Adjust the
Horizontal
Registration for
the Manual Feed
Tray 0001-7739
- 1st side (mechanical adjustment)
1) Place paper in the manual feed tray. For
instructions on how to place paper, see
the label attached to the manual feed
assembly.
side is 2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm.
F-12-53
- If the margin is not as indicated, make the
following adjustments:
tray.
manual feed tray upper cover.
5) Move the manual feed tray upper cover
back and forth based on the value you
checked in step 2). (Moving the manual
feed tray upper cover toward the rear of
the machine will increase the margin on
the front side.
F-12-54
6) Tighten the fixing screw of the manual
feed tray upper cover.
side is 2.5 -1.5, +1.5 mm.
- Manual Feed Margin (2nd side)
0
2
4
6
8
10
(-) (+)
2.5±1.5mm

Chapter 12
12-35
manual feed tray as the source of paper;
then, check to make sure that the margin
on the front side of the 2nd side is 2.5 -
2.0, +2.0 mm.
F-12-55
registration on the 2nd side.
MFRE
An increase of 1 will decrease the margin
service label.
- ADJ-MFRE
12.7.4 Registering
the Paper Width
Basic Value 0001-6579
2) Register the paper width basic value for
A4R as follows:
2-1) Match the manual feed side guide [1]
against A4R.
F-12-56
2-2) Start service mode, and select 'register
manual feed A4R width'.
CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4R
2-3) Press the OK key to store the A4R
width.
2-4) Record the A4 basic value indicated
on the control panel on the service label.
3) Register the paper width basic value for
A4 as follows:
3-1) Match the manual feed guide against
A4.
3-2) Select 'register manual feed A4 width'
in service mode.
CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4
3-3) Press the OK key to storp the A4
width.
0
2
4
6
8
10
(–) (+)
2.5±2.0mm
[1]
[1]

Chapter 12
12-36
4) Register the A6R paper width basic
value as follows:
4-1) Match the manual feed side guide
against A6R.
4-2) Select 'register manual feed A6R
width' in service mode.
CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A6R
4-3) Press the OK key to store the A6R
width.
5) Press the Rest key twice to end service
mode.

Chapter 13 Correcting
Faulty Images

Contents
Contents
13.1 Making lnitial Checks ............................................................................13-1
13.1.1 Checking the Site Environment ......................................................13-1
13.1.2 Checking the Paper .........................................................................13-1
13.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ...................................................13-1
13.1.4 Checking the Durables ....................................................................13-1
13.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts ......................................13-1
13.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks.....................................13-2
13.1.7 Others ..............................................................................................13-4
13.2 Test Print................................................................................................13-5
13.2.1 Overview.........................................................................................13-5
13.2.2 Test Print TYPE..............................................................................13-5
13.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE ..............................................................13-5
13.2.4 16-Gradation (TYPE=4)..................................................................13-6
13.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5).........................................................13-7
13.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6)................................................................................13-8
13.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10).........................................13-9
13.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12)..............................................................13-10
13.2.9 Full Color 16-Gradation (TYPE=14)............................................13-11
13.3 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................13-13
13.3.1 Symptoms......................................................................................13-13
13.3.1.1 Symptoms...............................................................................13-13
13.3.2 Image Faults..................................................................................13-14
13.3.2.1 Light Image / Weak Density ..................................................13-14
13.3.2.1.1 Density is different between front and rear sides (front or rear
side is light in density), Developer of Y/M/C/BK leaks, Abnormal Noise
from developing ass'y...................................................................13-14
13.3.2.1.2 Density is excessively different between front and rear sides .
13-14
13.3.2.1.3 Developing cylinder locks up..........................................13-15
13.3.2.2 Out of Focus...........................................................................13-16
13.3.2.2.1 Blurred image in main scanning direction only on copies13-16
13.3.2.2.2 Image registration failure at leading edge because of anomalous

data of DC Controller PCB..........................................................13-16
13.3.2.2.3 Blurred Image/Line Caused by Condensation ................13-17
13.3.2.2.4 Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction .............13-17
13.3.2.3 Partially Blank/Streaked ........................................................13-18
13.3.2.3.1 White streaks in sub scanning direction..........................13-18
13.3.2.3.2 Horizontal White Streaks................................................13-19
13.3.2.3.3 White Horizontal Lines at Intervals of 75.4 mm ............13-20
13.3.2.3.4 Vertical White Line.........................................................13-21
13.3.2.3.5 White Spots Along the Trailing Edge.............................13-23
13.3.2.3.6 White Spot Indicating Trace of the Pickup Roller..........13-24
13.3.2.3.7 Cyclic Image Fault..........................................................13-25
13.3.2.4 Smudged/Streaked .................................................................13-27
13.3.2.4.1 Yellow streaks on full-colored copy, black streaks on black-and-
white copy, in sub scanning direction..........................................13-27
13.3.2.4.2 Toner scattering inside machine and soiled image because side
seal in Transfer Cleaning As'y peeled off....................................13-27
13.3.2.4.3 Horizontal Black Line Along Leading Edge ..................13-27
13.3.2.4.4 Fine, Black Line in Stream Read Mode..........................13-28
13.3.2.4.5 Rib-Shaped Dirt ..............................................................13-29
13.3.2.5 Faulty Color Reproduction ....................................................13-34
13.3.2.5.1 How to adjust color on prints (color density adjustment)13-34
13.3.2.5.2 Poor Reproduction of Horizontal Fine Lines..................13-34
13.3.3 Faulty Feeding ..............................................................................13-34
13.3.3.1 Skew Feed..............................................................................13-34
13.3.3.1.1 Last Paper Skew (manually fed postcard) ......................13-34
13.3.3.1.2 Skew in Manually Fed Paper ..........................................13-35
13.3.3.2 Fold/Rip .................................................................................13-36
13.3.3.2.1 Peeling of a Manually Fed Label Sheet ..........................13-36
13.3.4 Malfunction...................................................................................13-36
13.3.4.1 No Power ...............................................................................13-36
13.3.4.1.1 iRC3100 does not start up, Progress bar on start-up window
stops at three-quarters point.........................................................13-36
13.3.4.1.2 iRC3100 does not start up from sleep state ....................13-37
13.3.4.1.3 LCD on control panel does not come on (start up) for about 10
seconds when host machine recovers from sleep state ................13-37
13.3.4.1.4 iRC3100 does not start up: Power is unintentionally shut off
after progress bar on start-up window completes and thereafter iRC3100

Contents
never start up ................................................................................13-38
13.3.4.1.5 iRC3100 does not recover from sleep state; although energy
consumption in sleep mode has been set to [High]......................13-38
13.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related ............................................................13-38
13.3.4.2.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Not recognized by iRC3100 13-38
13.3.4.2.2 LCD does not come on although main power indicator on
control panel lights up..................................................................13-38
13.3.4.2.3 DADF-L1: Original size detection failure / How to adjust tray
width of DADF-L1.......................................................................13-39
13.3.4.2.4 Power lamp light up but LCD on control panel does not:
Because BootROM is not securely fitted .....................................13-40
13.3.4.3 Malfunction/Faulty Detection ................................................13-40
13.3.4.3.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Paper lifting plate does not ascend
upon installation...........................................................................13-40
13.3.4.3.2 Finisher-P1: Not operate upon installation .....................13-40
13.3.4.3.3 Paper size detection failure at Cassette 2 ........................13-40
13.3.4.3.4 DADF-L1: Message [Original scanning area is dirty.] / How to
adjust white level..........................................................................13-41
13.3.4.3.5 DADF-L1: Auto orientation feature does not work upon
installation....................................................................................13-42
13.3.4.3.6 DADF-L1: Paper pick-up roller does not ascend because shaft
of registration sensor lever comes off ..........................................13-42
13.3.4.3.7 iRC3100 displays message prompting to confirm size guide
position although designated size of paper is placed on stack bypass13-
43
13.3.4.4 Noise ......................................................................................13-43
13.3.4.4.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Abnormal noise from drive unit13-
43
13.3.4.4.2 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette.....................13-43
13.3.4.5 User Warning Message ..........................................................13-44
13.3.4.5.1 Message [Check the network connection.] / Message [Check the
TCP/IP.]........................................................................................13-44
13.3.4.5.2 Once arbitrary paper is registered in user mode [Common
Settings> Stack Bypass Standard Settings], paper of different paper
sizes cannot be copied from stack bypass....................................13-44
13.3.4.5.3 #853 User Error Code during printing ............................13-44
13.3.4.5.4 Message 'The file attachment cannot be processed by Internet
Fax. No programs can process the file attachment.' is printed out with

Contents
text of received I-Fax...................................................................13-45
13.3.4.5.5 When attempting to access iRC3100 via Remote UI, message
'User information is invalid' is displayed.....................................13-45
13.3.4.5.6 The machine frequently indicates the message "Clean DF
Reading Glass."............................................................................13-45
13.3.4.5.7 The machine frequently indicates the message "Clean reading
Glass." (The user wants to disable it.)..........................................13-46
13.3.4.6 Other Defect...........................................................................13-47
13.3.4.6.1 Key Switch Unit-A1: Key not recognized upon installation13-
47
13.3.5 Printing/scanning ..........................................................................13-48
13.3.5.1 No Output...............................................................................13-48
13.3.5.1.1 2nd page and later are not output or abnormal image is output
when attempting to print multiple sheets of huge data from computer
13-48
13.3.5.1.2 #852 User Error Code .....................................................13-48
13.3.5.2 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result ............................................13-48
13.3.5.2.1 Message [Waiting to print …] keeps appearing at UFR printing
/ Half of image becomes solid black............................................13-48
13.3.5.2.2 Image sent to computer in PDF format (Compact, 300dpi) is
scaled down when printing ..........................................................13-49
13.3.5.2.3 Print settings made in printer driver were not effective when
printing multiple sheets of MS Excel data...................................13-49
13.3.6 Network.........................................................................................13-49
13.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure .....................................................................13-49
13.3.6.1.1 Utility software (e.g. Network ScanGear) cannot be used, no
problem with other functions.......................................................13-49
13.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related ............................................................13-50
13.3.7.1 Transmission Problem ...........................................................13-50
13.3.7.1.1 One-sheet original is output in two sheets at receiving side13-
50
13.3.7.2 Reception Problem.................................................................13-50
13.3.7.2.1 iR C3100 cannot receive FAX while it is in sleep state .13-50
13.3.7.2.2 DADF-L1: Image at receiving side is partially missing at FAX
transmission .................................................................................13-50
13.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect.......................................................13-51
13.3.7.3.1 #899 User Error Code: After e-mail or I-Fax transmission 13-
51

Contents
13.3.8 Jam (Main Unit)............................................................................13-52
13.3.8.1 010C JAM CODE: 2nd side of duplex print is jammed because of
duplex inlet sensor coming off.........................................................13-52
13.3.8.2 Jam Immediately After Pickup (heavy paper, envelope, postcard)
13-52
13.3.8.3 0A0B JAM CODE occurred upon installation of Inner 2way Tray-
C1 .....................................................................................................13-53
13.3.8.4 0D91 JAM CODE: Occurred at all cassettes upon installation13-53
13.3.8.5 Pickup Faults (pickup from the side paper deck)...................13-54
13.3.8.6 Delivery Delay Jam (label sheet) ...........................................13-54
13.3.8.7 Pickup Stationary Jam............................................................13-55
13.3.9 Error Code.....................................................................................13-56
13.3.9.1 E004-0001 Error Code: Displayed after opening/closing front panel
13-56
13.3.9.2 E020 Error Code: Occurred upon installation because developer
failed to be filled inside developing ass'y ........................................13-57
13.3.9.3 E020 Error Code and Toner scattering inside machine: Because
wrong screw is used for fixing developing ass'y..............................13-57
13.3.9.4 E021-000x Error Code: Developing rotary does not rotate and
abnormal noise comes from motor...................................................13-57
13.3.9.5 E021-0003 Error Code: Occurs during copy, not upon FAX
reception but output becomes yellow...............................................13-58
13.3.9.6 E026-0x01 Error Code / Message [Remaining toner is low.] / Toner
scattering inside machine .................................................................13-59
13.3.9.7 E067-0100 Error Code: Because tension spring for Primary Transfer
Roller comes off...............................................................................13-59
13.3.9.8 E070-0003 Error Code: Improper ground of ITB tension roller shaft
in ITB unit........................................................................................13-59
13.3.9.9 E070-0003 Error Code: Because ITB-HP sensor (PS19) is soiled .
13-60
13.3.9.10 E100 / E110 Error Code: Occurred because J328 connector on DC
Controller PCB was not securely fitted............................................13-60
13.3.9.11 E110 Error Code: Error occurred at the time when paper was
delivered to transfer unit ..................................................................13-61
13.3.9.12 E225-0001 Error Code: Scanning lamp came on.................13-61
13.3.9.13 E315-0010/0034/0038 Error Code: Occurred during PCFAX
transmission, then host machine rebooted .......................................13-61
13.3.9.14 E351-0000 Error Code: Occasionally occurs while host machine is

Contents
being energized ................................................................................13-62
13.3.9.15 E400-0002 Error Code: Because ADF Controller PCB is faulty .
13-62
13.3.9.16 E500 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-63
13.3.9.17 E505 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-63
13.3.9.18 E514 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-63
13.3.9.19 E530 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-64
13.3.9.20 E531 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-65
13.3.9.21 E532 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-65
13.3.9.22 E535 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-66
13.3.9.23 E537 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-67
13.3.9.24 E540 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-67
13.3.9.25 E542 Error Code: Saddle Delivery Tray of Saddle Finisher-Q2 not
completely latched ...........................................................................13-69
13.3.9.26 E577 (Finisher-P1)...............................................................13-70
13.3.9.27 E602-0001 Error Code: Ticktack sound is heard upon start-up and
then the error code is displayed .......................................................13-71
13.3.9.28 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR ........13-72
13.3.9.29 E602-0402 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR ........13-73
13.3.9.30 E602-0111 Error Code.........................................................13-74
13.3.9.31 E602-0113 Error Code: Because of faulty HDD .................13-74
13.3.9.32 E674-0001 Error Code: Because J1210 connector is not securely
fitted on Main Controller PCB (Main).............................................13-75
13.3.9.33 E732-0001 Error Code: Reader Controller PCB is faulty ...13-76
13.3.9.34 E732-0001 Error Code: iRC3200 locks up during copying.13-76
13.3.9.35 E747-8702 / E747-00FF Error Code: Scanning lamp keeps lighting
up at its home position when making a copy...................................13-77
13.3.9.36 E747-0031 Error Code: Half of image becomes blank when
printing list in user mode .................................................................13-77
13.3.9.37 E803-0002 Error Code: Front Door Switch (SW3) is faulty13-77
13.3.9.38 E803-0001/E227-0004 Error Code: Poor soldering on Printer
Power Supply PCB ..........................................................................13-78
13.4 Outline of Electrical Components........................................................13-79
13.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid.............................................................................13-79
13.4.1.1 Clutch/Solenoid Table ...........................................................13-79
13.4.2 Motor.............................................................................................13-80
13.4.2.1 Motor Table ...........................................................................13-80

Contents
13.4.3 Fan.................................................................................................13-83
13.4.3.1 Fan Table................................................................................13-83
13.4.4 Sensor............................................................................................13-86
13.4.4.1 Sensor Table...........................................................................13-86
13.4.5 Switch............................................................................................13-92
13.4.5.1 Switch Table...........................................................................13-92
13.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ..........................................................13-93
13.4.6.1 Lamp. Heaters, and Others Table...........................................13-93
13.4.7 PCBs..............................................................................................13-96
13.4.7.1 PCBs Table.............................................................................13-96
13.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins
by PCB ...............................................................................................13-100
13.4.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emiting Diodes (LED), and Check
Pins by PCB ...................................................................................13-100
13.4.8.2 Points to Note about the Leakage Breaker...........................13-100
13.4.8.3 Main Controller PCB (main)................................................13-101
13.4.8.4 DC Controller PCB ..............................................................13-102
13.4.8.5 High-Voltage Power Supply PCB........................................13-103

Chapter 13
13-1
13.1 Making lnitial Checks
13.1.1 Checking the Site Environment 0001-6073
a. The voltage of the source of power must be as indicated (+/-10%), and the power plug
must remain connected day and night.
b. The temperature and humidity of the site must be as indicated, and the site must be away
from a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier; moreover, the machine must not be near a
fire or subjected to dust.
c. The site must be free of ammonium gas.
d. The machine must not be subjected to the direct rays of the sun. As necessary, curtains
must be furnished.
e. The site must be well ventilated, and its floor must keep the machine level.
f. The machine must remain connected to the wall outlet at all times.
13.1.2 Checking the Paper 0001-6076
a. Check to see if the paper is of a type recommended by Canon.
b. Check to see if the paper is dry. If moist, try paper fresh out of package.
13.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper 0001-6077
a. Check to see that the amount of paper placed in the cassette and the manual feed tray is
as indicated.
b. If transparencies are used, check to see if they are placed in the correct orientation.
13.1.4 Checking the Durables 0001-6079
Check the Durables Table, and replace those parts that have reached the end of the indicated
lifetimes.
13.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts 0001-6080
Check the Scheduled Servicing Chart and the Periodically Replaced Parts Table, and
replace those parts that have reached the end of the indicated lifetimes.

Chapter 13
13-2
13.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks 0001-6082
<Reader Unit>
- Check the optical system (contact sensor, white plate, copyboard glass) for a scar, dirt, and
foreign matter.
- Check the contact sensor unit to see if it moves smoothly. Check its rail for dirt.
- Check the contact sensor for flickering.
- Check the scanner for condensation.
<Process>
- Check the drum unit/developing unit to see if it is fitted properly.
- Check the photosensitive drum for a scar and dirt.
- Check the patch image read sensor window for dirt.
<Transfer>
- Check the secondary transfer outside roller for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the blade of the cleaning unit for a tear, warping, deformation, and stray toner.
<Fixing>
- Check the fixing roller/pressure roller for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the fixing heater (main/sub) to see if it goes on when the power is turned on.
- Check the fixing thermistor for an open circuit.
- Check the thermal switch for electrical continuity.
<Paper Movement>
- Check to see if there is foreign matter such as paper lint.
- Check the pickup/feed/separation roller for a buildup of paper powder, wear, scar, dirt, and
deformation.
- Check the registration roller (middle, outside)/paper path roller for wear, scar, dirt, and
deformation.
- Check the feed guide for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation.
- Check the paper for a bent leading edge, curling, waving, and moisture.
- As necessary, try transparencies of a type recommended by Canon to see if the problem,
if any, is corrected.
<Machine>

Chapter 13
13-3
- Check to see if an excess load is imposed on the drive system.
- Check the gears for wear and chipping.
<Cassette>
- Check to see if the cassettes are fitted properly. Check also to see that an appropriate paper
size is selected. As necessary, try a normal cassette to see if the problem, if any, stops.
- Check to see that the movement of the cassette holding plate is smooth. Check also to see
that the holding plate is free of deformation.
- Check to see if the side guide plate/trailing edge plate inside the cassette are set correctly.
- Check to see if the cassette heater switch is at the ON side (if a cassette heater is fitted).
<Service Mode>
- Check to see that the various CCD adjustment values are as indicated on the service label.
(COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items)
- Check to see if registration adjustment is correct.
(COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST)
- Check to see if the machine inside temperature/humidity is the correct reading.
(COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG>TEMP/ABS-HUM)
- Check to see that the image read position adjustment is correct.
(COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X/ADJ-Y)
- Check to see if the value for ADJUST/OPTION is as indicated on the service label.
- Check to see if error initialization has been executed.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)
<General>
- Check to see that the power plug is connected properly.
- Check to see that there is the rated AC voltage at the power outlet.
- Check to see that the sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids operate normally. Check the
connectors for poor contact.
(Be sure to check with the General Timing Chart for reference to power/signal routes.)
- Check to see that the leakage breaker/circuit breaker operates normally.
- Check the wiring for trapping and loose screws.
- Check to see that the external cover are all fitted properly.
- Check to see that the main power switch/control panel power switch are at the ON side.
- Check to see that the power cable/signal cable to accessories are correctly routed.
- Check to see that the cover switch operates normally.

Chapter 13
13-4
- Check the fuses on the PCBs to see if they have blown.
- Check to see that the user knows how to use the machine correctly.
13.1.7 Others 0001-6094
If a machine is brought in from a cold to a warm place, its inside can develop condensation,
which will lead to various problems.
a. condensation on the BD sensor can cause faults associated with E100.
b. condensation on the dust-blocking glass can cause the images in sub scanning direction
to be too light.
c. condensation on the contact sensor of the reader unit or the copyboard glass can lead to
light images.
d. condensation on the pickup/feed guide can cause faulty paper movement.
If d above is noted, be sure to dry wipe the units involved in the feed system.
The same is true of toner cartridges, developing units, and drum units, i.e., when they are
unpacked after being brought in from a cold place. To prevent condensation, advise the user
to leave the package alone (for about 1 to 2 hr) before opening it.

Chapter 13
13-5
13.2 Test Print
13.2.1 Overview 0001-6108
The machine offers the following 6 types of test prints (TYPE), each designed for
identification of a specific type of image fault. The data for these test prints is prepared by
the main controller: if the output of a test print is free of the fault in question, suspect a fault
on the PDL input or the reader unit.
13.2.2 Test Print TYPE 0001-6109
T-13-1
13.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE 0001-6111
1) Set the copy count, paper size, and pickup mode (single-sided or double-sided).
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG.
3) Make the following selections: COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE.
Type No. Description
0 normal copy/print
1 ～ 3 － (for R&D)
4 16 gradations
5 full half-tone
6 grid
7 ～ 9 － (for R&D)
10 MCYBk horizontal stripe (sub scanning direction)
11 － (for R&D)
12 64 gradations
13 － (for R&D)
14 full color 16 gradations
15 ～ 100 － (for R&D)

Chapter 13
13-6
4) Enter the appropriate TYPE No. using the keypad, and press the OK key.
5) Select the appropriate color using COLOR-Y/M/C/K (output at 1).
6) Set the density using DENS-Y/M/C/K (valid only if TYPE=5).
7) Press the start key.
13.2.4 16-Gradation (TYPE=4) 0001-6113
Use this test print to check gradation, fogging, white line, and uneven density at the front/
rear.
a. Gradation
If the 16-gradation[1] is not properly produced, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the
laser exposure system.
b. Fogging
If fogging is found only in the white area[2], suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser
exposure system.
c. White Line
If a white line is found in the image, suspect a fault in the developing system.
d. Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density is found at the front/rear, suspect a fault in the drum unit, laser exposure
system, or transfer system.

Chapter 13
13-7
F-13-1
13.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5) 0001-6115
Use this test print to check a transfer fault, black line, white line, and uneven density at
specific intervals.
Memo:
- You can print out test prints for individual colors by making the following selections in
service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG and then COLOR-Y/M/C/K.
- You can also change the density of the test prints by making the following selections in
service mode: TEST>PG>DENS>Y/M/C/K.
a. Transfer Fault
If a transfer fault (white spot) occurs, suspect a fault in the ITB unit or the secondary transfer
outside roller.
b. Black Line
If a black line occurs, suspect a scratch in the photosensitive drum or dirt on the primary
charging roller.
[1]
[2]

Chapter 13
13-8
c. White Line
If a white line occurs, suspect a fault in the ITB unit, secondary transfer outside roller, or
laser exposure system.
d. Uneven Density
If the density is uneven at specific intervals, suspect the following:
- photosensitive drum (if at 194.7 mm)
- developing cylinder (if at 37.6 mm)
e. Uneven Density
If uneven density occurs, suspect dirt on the dust-blocking glass of the laser unit or
deterioration of the ITB.
F-13-2
13.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) 0001-6117
Use this text print to check color displacement, right angles, and straight lines.
a. Color Displacement
If color displacement is found, suspect a scar in the ITB and a fault in the drum unit.
COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0

Chapter 13
13-9
b. Right Angle, Straight Lines
If the right angles or straight lines are not correct, suspect a fault in the laser exposure
system, a fault in the shape of the registration (middle/outside) roller, and a fault in the
secondary transfer outside roller.
F-13-3
13.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10) 0001-6118
Use this test print to check the density of dark areas of individual colors, balance among
colors, and white lines associated with development.
a. Solid Density of Individual Colors and Balance Among Colors
- the density must not be appreciably low (too light).
- if the density of a specific color is too low (too light), suspect a fault in the developing
system.
- if the density of all colors is low (too light), suspect a fault in the laser exposure system
and the transfer block.
b. While Line
If a white line is found in a specific color, suspect a fault in the development system of that
particular color.
c. Uneven Density at the Front/Rear
If uneven density is found in a specific color, suspect a fault in the development system of

Chapter 13
13-10
that particular color. If it is found in all colors, suspect a fault in the drum unit, ITB unit,
and laser exposure system.
F-13-4
13.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12) 0001-6119
Use this test print to check the gradation of Y, M, C, and Bk at once.
2.5 1.5mm
2.5 1.5mm

Chapter 13
13-11
F-13-5
13.2.9 Full Color 16-Gradation (TYPE=14) 0001-6120
Use this test print to check the gray balance, gradation of individual colors (YMCBk), and
fogging.
a. Gray Balance
Check the grayscale area to see if the densities of all colors are even.
b. Gradation
Check the gradation of individual colors (YMCBk) and for any difference in color.
c. Fogging
If fogging is found in the white area, suspect a fault in the developing system, a fault in the
drum unit, and poor adjustment of the laser exposure system.

Chapter 13
13-12
F-13-6
Light area
White
White
3 colors (YMC)
4 colors (YMCK)

Chapter 13
13-13
13.3 Troubleshooting
13.3.1 Symptoms
13.3.1.1 Symptoms 0001-8098
T-13-2
Item Description
Image fault blurry image/line caused by condensation
color displacement in sub scanning direction
white spot in horizontal direction
horizontal lines at intervals of 75.4 mm
vertical white line
round, white spot along trailing edge
white spot indicating traces of pickup roller
cyclic image fault
black line along leading edge
fine, black line in stream reading
rib-shaped dirt
poor reproduction of horizontal fine line
Paper movement fault skew of last postcard from manual feed tray
skew of paper from manual feed tray
peeling of a manually fed label sheet
Operation fault noise during pickup from cassette
Jam (machine) pickup fault from side paper deck
jam immediately after pickup (heavy paper, envelope, postcard)
delivery delay jam (label sheet)
Pickup Stationary Jam

Chapter 13
13-14
For details, see the remedies given for individual faults.
13.3.2 Image Faults
13.3.2.1 Light Image / Weak Density
13.3.2.1.1 Density is different between front and rear sides (front or rear side
is light in density), Developer of Y/M/C/BK leaks, Abnormal Noise from
developing ass'y 0005-1494
[ Case in the field ]
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the developing ass'y was transferred in a
vertical position to a site after pre-installation of the host machine, causing the
developer to lean to one side.
Follow the steps below:
1. Visually inspect the surface of the developing cylinder of the affected developing
ass'y. If the developer extremely accumulates at one point, go to the Step 4. If not, it
is possible the developing ass'y can recover, so go to the Step 2.
2. Rotate the developing cylinder while softly swaying the developing ass'y from side
to side in order to uniform the amount of the developer on the surface.
3. Install the developing ass'y and check whether or not the symptom recurs. If it
recurs, go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the developing ass'y with a new one.
Developing Ass'y (BLACK): FM2-0056
Developing Ass'y (YELLOW): FM2-0057
Developing Ass'y (MAGENTA): FM2-0058
Developing Ass'y (CYAN): FM2-0059
Note: Be sure not to transfer the developing ass'y in a vertical position when it is
transferred after pre-installation or as a service part.
13.3.2.1.2 Density is excessively different between front and rear sides 0005-1503
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Main) was

Chapter 13
13-15
faulty. Follow the steps below:
1. Make a copy and output a PG test print.
If the symptom occurs only on the copy, it is possible the Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
is faulty. If it occurs only on the PG test print or on both, go to the Step 2.
2. Make sure that the connectors on the Main Controller PCB are securely fitted or
there is no pinched cable, and whether the BootROM and SDRAM are securely fitted.
If no problem is found, go to the Step 3.
3. Remove the Resolution Switch PCB and the UFR Board PCB in that order, and
output a PG test print each time of removal. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step
4.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB (Main) with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main) Ass'y: FG3-3221
Contact Image Sensor Ass'y: FM2-1563
Resolution Switch PCB Ass'y: FG3-2728
UFR Board PCB Ass'y: FG3-3223
13.3.2.1.3 Developing cylinder locks up 0005-4360
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the developing ass'y was transferred in a
vertical position to a site after pre-installation of the host machine, causing the developer
to lean to one side.
1. Visually inspect the surface of the developing cylinder of the affected developing ass'y.
If the developer extremely accumulates at one point, go to the Step 4. If not, it is possible
the developing ass'y can recover, so go to the Step 2.
2. Rotate the developing cylinder while softly swaying the developing ass'y from side to
side in order to uniform the amount of the developer on the surface.
3. Install the developing ass'y and check whether or not the symptom recurs. If it recurs,
go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the developing ass'y with a new one.
Note: Be sure not to transfer the developing ass'y in a vertical position when it is

Chapter 13
13-16
transferred after pre-installation or as a service part.
13.3.2.2 Out of Focus
13.3.2.2.1 Blurred image in main scanning direction only on copies 0005-3470
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (sub) was faulty (1
case).
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors on the Main Controller PCB are securely fitted or there
is no pinched cable. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (main): FG3-3221
13.3.2.2.2 Image registration failure at leading edge because of anomalous
data of DC Controller PCB 0005-6476
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the data of the
DC Controller PCB was anomalous.
Field Remedy
1. Check whether the values indicated in the service label attached to the inside of the
front cover are input in the corresponding service mode. If not, input the value indicated
in the service label in service mode.
2. Adjust the registration in service mode [COPIER> Adjust> FEED-ADJ> REGIST (-
50 to 50)].
3. If the symptom still recurs, initialize RAM on the DC Controller PCB as follows:
Output a P-PRINT that lists the service mode settings in service mode [COPIER>
Function> MISC-P> P-PRINT]. Then, select [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> DC-
CON] and press OK. Turn the power OFF/ON afterwards. Enter the service mode
settings once again by referring to P-PRINT as necessary.

Chapter 13
13-17
13.3.2.2.3 Blurred Image/Line Caused by Condensation 0002-1418
<Cause>
The machine fails to create normal images because of condensation.
<Field Remedy>
Remove the left cover and the delivery tray, and leave the machine alone so that it will
become used to the room temperature.
13.3.2.2.4 Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction 0002-1429
<Cause>
- The transfer to the ITB has become displaced because of a shock occurring when the ITB
cleaning blade is engaged/disengaged.
- Transfer to the ITB has become displaced because of a shock occurring when the
secondary transfer outside roller is engaged/disengaged.
<Field Remedy>
Make the following selections in service mode to make adjustments:
COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG.
Service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG
Use it to fine-adjust the image sub scanning direction start position.
- REG-V-Y (Y, 1st side)
- REG-V-M (M, 1st side)
- REG-V-K (K, 1st side)
- REG2-V-Y (Y, 2nd side)
- REG2-V-M (M, 2nd side)
- REG2-V-K (K, 2nd side)
<Making Adjustments>
- An increase by '1' will move the image by a single pixel (about 0.04 mm) toward the rear.
- Be sure to enter the values indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM
on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB.
<Range of Adjustment>
-10 to +10 (unit: pixel) [at time of shipment: factory value] [at time of RAM initialization:
0]

Chapter 13
13-18
Service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TBLD-TMG (level 2)
Timing of Execution of ITB Cleaning in Direct, Full Color Mode
<Settings>
0: do not delay [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
1: delay
<Note>
Setting it to '1' will lead to lowered productivity.
13.3.2.3 Partially Blank/Streaked
13.3.2.3.1 White streaks in sub scanning direction 0005-3241
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because foreign substances were trapped inside the
developing ass'y.
Field Remedy
1. Output each color of test print (Y/M/C/Bk) in service mode:
Change the set value from [0] to [5] in [COPIER> Test> PG> TYPE]. In order to output
a test print in e.g. yellow (single color), set [1] for [COLOR-Y] and [0] for [COLOR-M/
COLOR-C/COLOR-K]. Then press the start key. For Magenta, Cyan and Black, do the
same thing by setting [1] for each color.
2. If white streaks appear on any of the test prints, inspect the affected developing ass'y
to see any scratches on the developing cylinder surface or any foreign substances
between the cylinder and the blade.
Checking Method:
Move toner between the cylinder and the blade using a sheet of OHT. If the position of
the white streaks is changed, foreign substances might be the root cause.

Chapter 13
13-19
13.3.2.3.2 Horizontal White Streaks 0002-1420
<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in a full color, halftone image made in a high temperature/
humidity environment.
<Cause>
The secondary transfer outside roller has been left in contact with the ITB, thus causing a
secondary transfer fault.
<Field Remedy>
Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>TBLT-CLN.
<Caution>
The machine moves the secondary transfer roller away from the ITB for the following:
- about 30 sec after it enters a standby state.
- the control panel power switch is tuned off.
If the main power switch is turned off in about 30 sec after the machine enters a standby
state, the machine cannot move the secondary transfer roller away from the ITB, leaving it
in contact with the ITB.
<Notes>
The symptom starts to appear when the secondary transfer outside roller is left in contact
with the ITB for about 30 min to 1 hr; it tends to disappear when about 200 sheets of paper
have been moved past.
<Image Sample>

Chapter 13
13-20
F-13-7
13.3.2.3.3 White Horizontal Lines at Intervals of 75.4 mm 0002-1421
<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur on the 2nd side of a halftone image print.
<Cause>
The secondary transfer outside roller is approaching the end of its life, thus starting to show
abnormal discharge.
<Field Remedy>
Replace the secondary transfer outside roller.
<Image Sample>

Chapter 13
13-21
F-13-8
13.3.2.3.4 Vertical White Line 0002-1422
<Cause>
There is adhesion of dust in a specific area [1] or [2] of the drum unit or scanner hood,
respectively.
F-13-9

Chapter 13
13-22
F-13-10
<Field Remedy>
Dry wipe the area [1] or [2] of the drum unit or the scanner hood, respectively with a moist
cloth.
<Caution>
Never dry wipe the areas; otherwise, static charges will occur and attract dust.
<Image Sample>

Chapter 13
13-23
F-13-11
13.3.2.3.5 White Spots Along the Trailing Edge 0002-1423
<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in a low humidity environment.
<Cause>
The movement of paper is disrupted when the secondary transfer roller moves away.
<Field Remedy>
Make adjustments using the following service mode item:
COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-B.
T-13-3
BLANK-B Use it to enter an adjustment value for the non-image width (trailing edge).
Method of
adjustment
Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on
the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB.

Chapter 13
13-24
<Caution>
Executing this field remedy will increase the trailing edge margin/non-image width.
<Image Sample>
F-13-12
13.3.2.3.6 White Spot Indicating Trace of the Pickup Roller 0002-1424
<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in a high temperature/humidity environment.
<Cause>
An ingredient contained in the pickup roller builds up on the ITB, causing the white spots.
<Field Remedy>
1. Replace the ITB.
Range of
adjustment
0 to 1000 [at time of shipment/at time of RAM initialization, +59]
BLANK-B Use it to enter an adjustment value for the non-image width (trailing edge).

Chapter 13
13-25
2. If FB6-3406 (w/ green collar) is used as the feed roller/separation roller, replace it with
the roller designed for the iR C3100 Series (see the Parts Catalog).
<Caution>
Do not use FB6-3406 (w/ green collar) as the feed roller/separation roller to avoid white
spots.
<Image Sample>
F-13-13
13.3.2.3.7 Cyclic Image Fault 0002-1425
<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in sub scanning direction.
<Field Remedy>
See the following table to identify the part; then, clean or replace the part:

Chapter 13
13-26
T-13-4
Interval (mm) Part
14.1 fixing outlet sensor roll
15.7 fixing inlet roll
27.3 delivery roll
29.5 fixing outlet roll
37.6 developing cylinder
40.8 registration roller (middle)
44.0 primary charging roller
45.4 delivery roller
46.3 duplexing feed roller 1/2
50.2 primary transfer roller
pickup roller
vertical path roller 1/2
vertical path slave roller
50.5 registration roller (outside)
56.5 duplex feed roller 1/2
62.8 fixing outlet roller
65.9 secondary transfer inside roller
75.4 secondary transfer outside roller
feed roller
separation roller
113.0 manual feed pickup roller
119.3 pressure roller
152.3 fixing roller
194.7 photosensitive drum

Chapter 13
13-27
13.3.2.4 Smudged/Streaked
13.3.2.4.1 Yellow streaks on full-colored copy, black streaks on black-and-
white copy, in sub scanning direction 0005-3466
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) was faulty (1
case). Follow the steps below:
In service mode [COPIER> Test> PG], select either of 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, or 14 for [TYPE] to
output a test print. If no streak appears on the test print, it is possible that the CIS is faulty,
so replace it with a new one.
After replacement, follow the instructions described in Service Manual [Chapter 12
Standards and Adjustments > Scanning System > After Replacing the CIS].
13.3.2.4.2 Toner scattering inside machine and soiled image because side
seal in Transfer Cleaning As'y peeled off 0005-4383
Field Remedy
In the field, it was found that toner scattered inside the machine upon installation because
the side seal in the Transfer Cleaning Ass'y (FM2-0082) peeled off. Check whether or
not the side seal peels off when this symptom occurs.
Transfer Cleaning Ass'y (ITB Cleaning Unit): FM2-0082
13.3.2.4.3 Horizontal Black Line Along Leading Edge 0002-1426
<Notes>
This symptom tends to occur in a high temperature/humidity environment.
<Cause>
The movement of paper is disrupted during secondary transfer.
<Remedy>
584.0 ITB
Interval (mm) Part

Chapter 13
13-28
Increase the value of the following service mode item:
COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK>-T.
<Caution>
Execution of this field remedy will increase the leading edge margin/non-image width.
<Image Sample>
F-13-14
13.3.2.4.4 Fine, Black Line in Stream Read Mode 0002-1427
<Cause>
Dust causing black streaks has 2 types, and measures to be taken against the streaks differ
depending upon the dust type.
- Airborne Dust
Suspended on the DADF feeding path.
- Adherent Dust
Adhered to the DADF reading glass.

Chapter 13
13-29
<How to Identify the Dust Type>
- Airborne Dust
Cause is regarded as airborne dust if black streaks are short at random.
- Adherent Dust
Cause is regarded as adherent dust if black streaks are long in the same direction (height
direction).
<Field Remedy>
- Measures against airborne dust
1)Clean the white mylar and platen roller to remove dust.
2)Clean inside the DADF to remove dust.
For environment where user often uses paper containing much paper dust, however, there
is possibility that black streaks caused by airborne dust still occur even after these measures
are taken. In this case, advise user to make the background removal setting in user mode.
- Measures against adherent dust
1)Clean the DADF reading glass (using silicone oil and cleaning tissue).
For environment where black streaks caused by adherent dust often occur, advise user to
clean the reading glass with cleaning tissue.
2)Fix the reading position at 6.5mm. (In service mode, COPIER>OPTION>BODY and set
2 to DST-POS.)
This reading position can prevent the DADF reading glass from adhesion of much dust
(since document does not come in contact with the glass). In other words, black streaks
appear as long as any dust is adhered to this position.
If black streaks often occur even after these measures are taken, advise user to make the
background removal setting in user mode.
13.3.2.4.5 Rib-Shaped Dirt 0002-1428
<Cause>
A rib in the path is soiled with stray toner or paper powder to cause dirt in the form of a rib.
<Field Remedy>
Clean the area of the rib identified by the map that follows.

Chapter 13
13-30
F-13-15
Feed
roller
separation
roller
Vertical
path
roller
Vertical
path
roller
Vertical
path
slave
roller
Vertical
path
guide
Vertical
path
slave
roller
Pickup
roller
Lower
right
door
deck
path
Lower
right
door
grip
Return
guide
Return
guide
Return
guide
Return
guide
Lower
right
door
Pickup
roller
Feed
roller
Separation
roller
Pickup
frame
Pickup
frame
Return
guide
Return
guide
100mm
*
Make
a
copy
of
this
diagram
so
that
the
interval
here
is
as
long
as
100
mm.

Chapter 13
13-31
F-13-16
Pre-registration
Side
guide
Pre-registration
Side
guide
Pre-registration
auxiliary
guide
sheet
Pre-registration
machine
Side
guide
Feed
frame
Secondary
transfer
outside
roller
Registration
roller
outside
Registration
roller
inside
Registration
outside
Registration
roller
inside
Registration
roller
outside
Registration
roller
inside
Vertical
path
roller
Lower
right
inside
door
MP
holding
plate
MP
frame
MMP
separation
pad
Holding
plate
sheet
Lower
right
inside
door
100mm
*
Make
a
copy
of
this
diagram
so
that
the
interval
here
is
as
long
as
100
mm.

Chapter 13
13-32
F-13-17
Duplex
feed
guide
2
Fixing
delivery
reversing
flapper
Inside
delivery
guide
lower
Inside
delivery
guide
upper
Delivery
roller
Delivery
roll
Delivery
roll
Delivery
roll
Delivery
roll
Delivery
roller
Delivery
roller
Delivery
roller
Upper
right
cover
Delivery
guide
Fixing
roller
Pressure
roller
Fixing
outlet
roll
Fixing
outlet
roll
Fixing
outlet
roll
Fixing
outlet
roll
Fixing
outlet
sensor
roll
Fixing
inlet
guide
100mm
*
Make
a
copy
of
this
diagram
so
that
the
interval
here
is
as
long
as
100
mm.

Chapter 13
13-33
F-13-18
Duplex
feed
roll
Duplex
feed
roller
duplex
fed
roll
Duplex
feed
roller
Duplex
feed
roll
Duplex
feed
roller
Duplex
feed
roll
Duplex.
feed
roller
Reversing
guide
Right
outside
roller
Duplex
inside
guide
Duplex
feed
guide
2
Duplex
feed
guide
1
Inside
delivery
guide
lower
100mm
*
Make
a
copy
of
this
diagram
so
that
the
interval
here
is
as
long
as
100
mm.

Chapter 13
13-34
13.3.2.5 Faulty Color Reproduction
13.3.2.5.1 How to adjust color on prints (color density adjustment) 0005-5989
Field Remedy
In user mode [Printer Settings> Settings> Print Quality> Density], select any color you
want to adjust.
13.3.2.5.2 Poor Reproduction of Horizontal Fine Lines 0002-1430
<Notes>
This fault tends to occur in text/photo/map mode and photo mode.
<Cause>
- characteristics of the contact image sensor
- image processing characteristics used for text
<Field Remedy>
Recommend the use of film photo/print photo mode.
13.3.3 Faulty Feeding
13.3.3.1 Skew Feed
13.3.3.1.1 Last Paper Skew (manually fed postcard) 0002-1431
<Note>
This symptom tends to occur on last sheets of paper.
<Cause>
The last of a group of postcards tends to be subject to friction by the separation pad, at times
causing the side guide plate to fail to move it along a straight path.
<Field Remedy>
Advise the user to use an MP sheet (FC5-6560; available as a separate remedy) when using
postcards.

Chapter 13
13-35
F-13-19
13.3.3.1.2 Skew in Manually Fed Paper 0002-1432
<Cause>
This symptom tends to occur when the side guide plate is not set to the correct position of
the size of paper in use.
<Field Remedy>
If the user is not using paper larger than A3 (i.e., 305x457, 320x450), attach an MP side
guide stopper (FC5-0530; available as a separate remedy) to the machine.
F-13-20
POSTCARD
POSTCARD

Chapter 13
13-36
13.3.3.2 Fold/Rip
13.3.3.2.1 Peeling of a Manually Fed Label Sheet 0002-7030
<Cause>
The glue used on the label sheet stuck to a metal area of the manual feed separation pad.
<Field Remedy>
Clean the metal area of the manual feed separation pad to remove the glue.
13.3.4 Malfunction
13.3.4.1 No Power
13.3.4.1.1 iRC3100 does not start up, Progress bar on start-up window stops
at three-quarters point 0005-1508
< Field Remedy >
n the field, this symptom occurred because the HDD was faulty (1 case). If the
progress bar stops at the three-quarters point, it is possible that a writing error into the
HDD could have occurred or the SRAM Board PCB Ass'y could have failed.
1. Make sure that the BootROM, SDRAM and connectors on the Main Controller PCB
are securely fitted or there is no pinched cable. If the symptom still recurs, go to the
Step 2.
2. Turn the power OFF and then ON while pressing the numeric keys 1+9
simultaneously. The recovery program will automatically start and the LCD on the
control panel will be shut off (blackened). When the LCD comes on, turn the power
OFF/ON. If the host machine starts up normally, reinstall the system software
(SYSTEM, LANG, RUI). If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 3.
3. Start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the power ON while pressing 2+8 keys)
and execute HDD format (ALL) and download the system software (SYSTEM,
LANG, RUI) by using SST, and then turn the power OFF/ON. If the symptom still
recurs, go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn
the power ON while pressing 2+8 keys) and execute HDD format (ALL) and

Chapter 13
13-37
download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) by using SST, and then turn
the power OFF/ON. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 5.
5. Replace the SRAM Board PCB with a new one.
HDD: WM2-5188
SRAM Board PCB Ass'y: FG3-3225
Note: After replacement of the HDD, be sure to follow the instructions described in
[12.6.5 After Replacing the HDD].
13.3.4.1.2 iRC3100 does not start up from sleep state 0005-3469
< Field Remedy >
The following describes the suspect cause and their temporary solutions:
a. If the host machine can recover by pressing the control panel switch; however, printing
cannot be done in the sleep state.
It is possible that the Network board PCB (NIC) or the UFR board PCB is not securely
fitted.
1. Remove and reinstall both PCBs. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Replace either of the Network board PCB (NIC) or the UFR board PCB with a new
one.
Network Board PCB: FG3-3135
UFR Board PCB: FG3-3223
b. If the host machine can recover by tuning the power ON.
As a temporary solution, change the energy consumption in sleep mode to [High]. In user
mode [Common Settings> Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode> High].
c. If the host machine can recover by turning the power OFF/ON several times.
It is possible that BootROM or SDRAM is not securely fitted. Remove and reinsert them.
13.3.4.1.3 LCD on control panel does not come on (start up) for about 10
seconds when host machine recovers from sleep state 0005-5378
[ Manual-related ]
Description
This is a specification constraint of this product. The LCD on the control panel does not
come on for about 10 seconds until the HDD starts up following a press of the control
panel switch.

Chapter 13
13-38
13.3.4.1.4 iRC3100 does not start up: Power is unintentionally shut off after
progress bar on start-up window completes and thereafter iRC3100 never
start up 0005-5380
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the front cover
open sensor (PS22) was damaged, causing 5V line to be short-circuited. The suspect
cause of the sensor breakage is that an excessive force could have been applied to the
front cover during transportation.
Field Remedy
Inspect the front cover open sensor (FH7-7312). Replace it with a new one if it is
damaged.
13.3.4.1.5 iRC3100 does not recover from sleep state; although energy
consumption in sleep mode has been set to [High] 0005-7441
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the DDI-S serial cable that connects the printer
unit and the reader unit of the host machine was faulty. So, replace it with a new one.
DDI-S serial cable: FH2-7036
13.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related
13.3.4.2.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Not recognized by iRC3100 0005-1498
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the connector at J319 on the DC Controller
PCB was not securely fitted.
Make sure that the connector at J319 and the lattice connector for the Cassette Feeding
Unit-Y1 (back side of iRC3100) are securely fitted or there is no pinched cable.
13.3.4.2.2 LCD does not come on although main power indicator on control
panel lights up 0005-1506

Chapter 13
13-39
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, the following were found:
- SDRAM512MB at J1107 on the Main Controller PCB was not securely fitted: 1 case
- Main Controller PCB (Main) was faulty: 1 case
1. Check whether the connectors on the Main Controller PCB are securely fitted or
there is no pinched cable, and whether BootROM and SDRAM are securely fitted. Try
unplugging and reinserting them. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step .2
Main Controller PCB Ass'y (Main): FG3-3221
13.3.4.2.3 DADF-L1: Original size detection failure / How to adjust tray
width of DADF-L1 0005-4387
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the adjustment of the tray width had not been
executed upon installation of DADF-L1.
Field Remedy
Execute the tray width adjustment (either of a or b).
a. For AB
1. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-A4], set the tray side guide at the A4/A3
position and press OK to store the A4 width.
2. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-A5R], set the tray side guide at the A5R
position and press OK to store the A5R width.
3. Clear service mode and turn the power OFF/ON.
b. For INCH
1. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-LTR], set the tray side guide at the LTR/
11x17 position and press OK to store the LTR width.
2. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-LTRR], set the tray side guide at the
STMT/LTRR/LGL position and press OK to store the LTRR width.
Note: When installing DADF-L1 as an option, be sure to execute all of the following
adjustments by referring to the DADF-L1 Service Manual [Chapter 3 Unpacking and
Installation > Making Adjustments].
- Adjusting the Height

Chapter 13
13-40
- Adjusting the Tray Height
- Adjusting the Read Position
- Adjusting the Magnification
- Adjusting the Horizontal Registration
- Adjusting the Trailing Edge Registration
- Adjusting the White Level
13.3.4.2.4 Power lamp light up but LCD on control panel does not: Because
BootROM is not securely fitted 0005-7443
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the BootROM was not securely fitted. So,
remove and insert the BootROM once again.
13.3.4.3 Malfunction/Faulty Detection
13.3.4.3.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Paper lifting plate does not ascend
upon installation 0005-1483
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the connector of J723 on the Pedestal
Driver PCB was not securely fitted. So, check this connector.
13.3.4.3.2 Finisher-P1: Not operate upon installation 0005-1492
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the DIPSWs 2 and 6 on the Finisher
Controller PCB have been set at [ON] since factory shipment.
Make sure that all of the DIPSWs on the Finisher Controller PCB are set at [OFF]
when this symptom occurs.
13.3.4.3.3 Paper size detection failure at Cassette 2 0005-1578
< Field Remedy >

Chapter 13
13-41
In the field, this symptom occurred because the DC Controller PCB was faulty.
1. Make sure that the connectors at J321 on the DC Controller PCB and at the Cassette
2 Size Sensor PCB are securely fitted and that there is no pinched cable.
2. Swap the Cassette 2 Size Sensor PCB with the Cassette 1 Size Sensor PCB.
- If the symptom keeps occurring at the Cassette 2, the DC Controller PCB is likely to
be faulty.
- If the symptom occurs at the Cassette 1, the Cassette 2 Size Sensor PCB is likely to
be faulty.
Cassette Size Sensor PCB Ass'y: FG3-2798
DC Controller PCB Ass'y: FG3-2795
13.3.4.3.4 DADF-L1: Message [Original scanning area is dirty.] / How to
adjust white level 0005-4355
Cause
In the field, the message [Original scanning area is dirty.] was displayed because the
adjustment of the white level had not been executed upon installation of DADF-L1.
Field Remedy
Follow the steps below (adjusting the white level):
First of all, clean the reading glass and the platen roller.
1. Place a sheet of paper on the copyboard glass and close the DADF. In service mode
[COPIER> Function> CCD> DF-MLVL1], press OK (OK will be displayed when the
adjustment has been completed.)
2. Remove the paper and place it on the DADF tray. In service mode [COPIER>
Function> CCD> DF-MLVL2], press OK (OK will be displayed when the adjustment
has been completed.)
If this symptom still recurs, decrement the set value in service mode [COPIER> Option>
BODY> DFDST-L1/DFDST-L2] by 5 so as to optimize the dust detection level.

Chapter 13
13-42
13.3.4.3.5 DADF-L1: Auto orientation feature does not work upon
installation 0005-5915
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the adjustment of DADF-L1 had not been
executed upon its installation.
Field Remedy
When DADF-L1 is installed as an option, it is necessary to execute all the following
13.3.4.3.6 DADF-L1: Paper pick-up roller does not ascend because shaft of
registration sensor lever comes off 0005-6477
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the shaft of
the registration sensor lever in DADF-L1 came off.
Field Remedy
Open the feeder cover and inspect the registration sensor lever above the registration
roller to make sure that the shaft is securely fitted.

Chapter 13
13-43
13.3.4.3.7 iRC3100 displays message prompting to confirm size guide
position although designated size of paper is placed on stack bypass 0005-7440
Field Remedy
Register the paper width for the stack bypass in service mode as follows:
1. Select in service mode [COPIER> Function> CST].
2. Place A4R paper on the stack bypass, and adjust the size guide to A4R width. Press
[MF-A4R] to highlight and press the OK key so that the value will be stored after auto
adjustment.
3. Likewise, repeat the step 2 for A6R and A4.
13.3.4.4 Noise
13.3.4.4.1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y1: Abnormal noise from drive unit 0005-3245
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, abnormal noise occurred somewhere between the gear of the
cassette paper pick-up motor and the driving gear (80T/16T gear) inside the drive unit
because the attachment position of the motor was not proper (1 case).
Make sure the motor is in proper alignment with the drive gear when this symptom
occurs.
Drive Ass'y: FM2-0147
13.3.4.4.2 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette 0002-1433
<Cause>
The symptom (i.e., noise) occurs when multiple sheets are moved to the feed roller or the
separation roller, causing the separation roller assembly to vibrate.
<Field Remedy>
Use a sponge retard roller (FB5-0873; available as a separate remedy).

Chapter 13
13-44
13.3.4.5 User Warning Message
13.3.4.5.1 Message [Check the network connection.] / Message [Check the
TCP/IP.] 0005-1394
< Field Remedy >
If the host machine is not connected to network, follow the steps below:
Change the service mode setting so as not to display the network error messages.
In service mode (LEVEL 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> NWERR-SW], change the
set value from [1] to [0], and then turn the control panel switch off and turn the main
power switch OFF/ON.
0: not display
1: display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear)
13.3.4.5.2 Once arbitrary paper is registered in user mode [Common
Settings> Stack Bypass Standard Settings], paper of different paper sizes
cannot be copied from stack bypass 0005-1912
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
This is a specification constraint of this product. Explain to the customer that if they
want to use paper of several sizes from the stack bypass [Stack Bypass Standard
Settings] should be set at [OFF].
13.3.4.5.3 #853 User Error Code during printing 0005-4366
[ Manual-related ]
Cause
If the host machine stops printing because of no paper or no toner remaining, or if the
speed of data input is faster than the one of data processing (e.g. a large volume of print
job is sent to the host machine), the area of spooling on network will become full and
communication clogging occur. As a result, a timeout occurs on the computer and #853
is displayed without a completion of the job.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the host machine does not stop for any reasons such as no paper or no
toner.

Chapter 13
13-45
2. Enable network spooling function in user mode [System Settings> Network Settings>
Use Spooler> On] so that it will become faster to release the computer that sends the job
from network environment.
13.3.4.5.4 Message 'The file attachment cannot be processed by Internet Fax.
No programs can process the file attachment.' is printed out with text of
received I-Fax 0005-5390
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
This symptom can occur when the files (images) that are attached to received I-fax
documents are not compatible with this machine. In that case, the machine does not
process (print, forward, or store) these files, but erases them instead. The names of the
erased files and the message above is printed out with the text of the received I-fax.
For your information, iRC3100 I-Fax can support only TIFF format (MH, MR, MMR).
13.3.4.5.5 When attempting to access iRC3100 via Remote UI, message
'User information is invalid' is displayed 0005-6478
Field Remedy
It is impossible that the above message will be displayed when the privacy preference
setting is set to 'High'. Try changing the privacy preference setting to 'Medium'.
In the Internet Explorer's case, click [Tool]> [Internet Option]> [Privacy].
13.3.4.5.6 The machine frequently indicates the message "Clean DF Reading
Glass." 0004-6846
<Cause 1>
The reading glass is soiled with dust or dirt. (The reader detects the presence of dust on the
glass, but does not detects stray dust.)
<Field Remedy 1>
Clean the reading glass using cleaning tissue/cleaning oil.
<Cause 2>
The read roller is soiled. The white sheet film is soiled with dust.
<Field Remedy 2>
Dry wipe the white sheet/ read roller. (Or, alcohol may be used.)

Chapter 13
13-46
MEMO
If the machine is installed in an area subject to dust, it is a good idea to periodically perform
cleaning.
<Cause 3>
The reading glass has scratches or dirt that cannot be removed by cleaning.
<Field Remedy 3>
Replace the reading glass.
<Cause 4>
The read roller has scratches in radial direction, or has dirt that cannot be removed by
cleaning.
<Field Remedy 4>
Replace the read roller.
MEMO
When you have replaced the read roller, be sure to perform the following:
- while level adjustment
- DF height adjustment
- read position adjustment
<Cause 5>
The CIS has soiled pixel cells.
<Checking the CIS for Soiled Pixel Cells>
Make a copy in copyboard mode. The presence of a soiled pixel cell will cause a line in the
image.
<Field Remedy 5>
Replace the CIS.
13.3.4.5.7 The machine frequently indicates the message "Clean reading
Glass." (The user wants to disable it.) 0004-8893
Since the message is not serious (not triggered by soiling inside the machine), the user may
want to disable it.

Chapter 13
13-47
<Cause 1>
Change the setting (level 2) of the machine's dust detection mechanism.
<Field Remedy 1>
Make the following selections in service mode, and decrease the level:
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L2. The setting will decrease in units of '5'.
MEMO
A lower setting will decrease the dust correction level, thus possibly leaving light black
lines in the images. Setting the level to '0' will disable the dust detection mechanism all
together.
<Cause 2>
The user wants to disable the cleaning message.
<Field Remedy 2>
Make the following selections, and turn it off so as to disable the cleaning message:
Additional Function>Common Settings>Cleaning Display for Original Scanning Area.
MEMO
The reader unit executes dust detection even after the cleaning message has been disabled,
changing the read position as needed depending on the result of detention.
13.3.4.6 Other Defect
13.3.4.6.1 Key Switch Unit-A1: Key not recognized upon installation 0005-1583
[ Manual-related ]
< Field Remedy >
When installing the Key Switch Unit-A1, the following setting change is required.
In service mode [COPIER> Install> KEY], type [1], shut off the control panel switch
and turn the power OFF/ON.

Chapter 13
13-48
13.3.5 Printing/scanning
13.3.5.1 No Output
13.3.5.1.1 2nd page and later are not output or abnormal image is output
when attempting to print multiple sheets of huge data from computer 0005-1501
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, there are two cases where the SDRAM512MB on the Main
Controller PCB was faulty.
Unplug and insert the SDRAM512MB at J1107 on the Main Controller PCB. If the
symptom still recurs, replace the SDRAM512MB with a new one.
SDRAM512MB: WA7-2326
13.3.5.1.2 #852 User Error Code 0005-3251
< Description >
#852 indicates a state that the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being
processed.
< Field Remedy >
If this error code is displayed in other cases than the above, check the user mode setting
as described below because the setting change corrected the symptom in the field: User
mode [Common Settings> Entergy Consumption in Sleep Mode> High].
13.3.5.2 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result
13.3.5.2.1 Message [Waiting to print …] keeps appearing at UFR printing /
Half of image becomes solid black 0005-1589
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the UFR Board PCB was faulty. If this
kind of abnormal image occurs on prints from a computer, not on copies or PG test
prints, the UFR Board PCB is likely to be faulty.

Chapter 13
13-49
1. Remove and reinsert the UFR Board PCB to make sure of its connection.
2. If the symptom still recurs, replace the UFR Board PCB with a new one.
UFR Board PCB Ass'y: FG3-3223
13.3.5.2.2 Image sent to computer in PDF format (Compact, 300dpi) is
scaled down when printing 0005-5179
Cause
When printing a PDF file using Acrobat, the image will be shrunk if a check mark is
placed on [Shrink oversized pages to paper size].
Field Remedy
Clear the check mark on [Shrink oversized pages to paper size] when printing.
13.3.5.2.3 Print settings made in printer driver were not effective when
printing multiple sheets of MS Excel data 0005-5388
Field Remedy
In order to print multiple sheets of MS Excel data with some special features (e.g. duplex
mode, specifying a particular paper source), it is necessary to make those settings for
every sheet. Before printing, make the appropriate settings in [Properties] of the printer
driver for every sheet.
13.3.6 Network
13.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure
13.3.6.1.1 Utility software (e.g. Network ScanGear) cannot be used, no
problem with other functions 0005-5996
Description
It is possible that [SNMP Settings] and [Enable Dedicated Port] are set to 'Off'. If so,
change them to 'On'.
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> SNMP Settings> On

Chapter 13
13-50
In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Enable Dedicated Port> On
[SNMP Settings]: If you want to set or browse each item of the machine with utility
software that uses SNMP to obtain information, set it to 'On'.
[Enable Dedicated Port]: If you want to set or browse detailed information on the
machine with a Canon printer driver or utility software, set it to 'On'.
13.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related
13.3.7.1 Transmission Problem
13.3.7.1.1 One-sheet original is output in two sheets at receiving side 0005-5983
Field Remedy
Make the sender information smaller or change the printing position of the transmission
terminal ID.
a. How to make sender information smaller
In service mode [FAX> NCU> SPECIAL-B> SW28], change bit6 to [1].
b. How to change TX transmission terminal ID position
In user mode [Communications Settings> Common Settings> TX Settings> TX
Terminal ID> On> Option> Printing Position], select [Inside].
13.3.7.2 Reception Problem
13.3.7.2.1 iR C3100 cannot receive FAX while it is in sleep state 0005-4370
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom was corrected by changing the setting of the energy
consumption in sleep mode to [High].
How to set: In user mode [Common Settings> Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode>
High]
13.3.7.2.2 DADF-L1: Image at receiving side is partially missing at FAX
transmission 0005-4385

Chapter 13
13-51
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the adjustment of the tray width had not been
executed upon installation of DADF-L1.
Field Remedy
Execute the tray width adjustment (either of a or b).
a. For AB
1. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-A4], set the tray side guide at the A4/A3
position and press OK to store the A4 width.
2. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-A5R], set the tray side guide at the A5R
position and press OK to store the A5R width.
b. For INCH
1. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-LTR], set the tray side guide at the LTR/
11x17 position and press OK to store the LTR width.
2. In service mode [FEEDER> Function> TRY-LTRR], set the tray side guide at the
STMT/LTRR/LGL position and press OK to store the LTRR width.
13.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect
13.3.7.3.1 #899 User Error Code: After e-mail or I-Fax transmission 0005-5648
[ Manual-related ]
Field Remedy
#899 can be displayed when the e-mail or I-Fax has been successfully sent; however, it
is unknown whether or not reception has been complete because transmission was

Chapter 13
13-52
relayed via multiple servers.
13.3.8 Jam (Main Unit)
13.3.8.1 010C JAM CODE: 2nd side of duplex print is jammed
because of duplex inlet sensor coming off 0005-5923
Description
010C: Delay jam at duplex inlet sensor PS3A (3rd Delivery Frame Ass'y)
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the duplex inlet sensor came off.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the duplex inlet sensor at the duplex inlet guide unit does not come off.
If it comes off, reinstall it securely.
Duplex Inlet Sensor: FH7-7312
13.3.8.2 Jam Immediately After Pickup (heavy paper, envelope,
postcard) 0002-6207
<Cause>
The heavy paper, envelope, or postcard was not given curling before it was set in the manual
feed tray.
<Field Remedy>
Give heavy paper, envelope, or postcard curling of about 3 mm before placing it in the
manual feed tray as shown.

Chapter 13
13-53
F-13-21
[1] Direction of paper feed
Memo:
The remedy herein is indicated in the User's Manual for use by the user. If a similar jam
recurs, advise the user to refer to the User's Manual (i.e., to curl the edge of the paper).
13.3.8.3 0A0B JAM CODE occurred upon installation of Inner 2way
Tray-C1 0005-5917
Description
0A0B: Stationary jam at the No. 3 delivery sensor PS5A (3rd Delivery Frame Ass'y)
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the spring of the No. 3 delivery sensor lever
came off (1 case). So, inspect the spring.
Torsion Spring: FC5-1011
13.3.8.4 0D91 JAM CODE: Occurred at all cassettes upon
installation 0005-1582
< Field Remedy >
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the spring
of the pre-registration sensor (PS9) flag was deviated from the hook portion (1 case).
Generally speaking, the 0D91 jam code can be displayed when the paper size is
wrongly designated (paper in shorter length than designated is delivered).
[1]

Chapter 13
13-54
If the paper jam occurs at all the cassettes, check whether there are any abnormalities
on the sensor (PS9), the sensor flag and its spring.
13.3.8.5 Pickup Faults (pickup from the side paper deck) 0002-1434
<Note>
This symptom tends to occur when the deck adjuster is not correctly adjusted at time of
installation.
<Cause>
The point of paper passage from the paper deck to the machine is too low, adversely
affecting the latching to the machine; the resulting low pressure of the pull-off roller causes
pickup faults.
<Field Remedy>
Turn the adjuster found on the bottom of the paper deck to adjust the height of the deck.
<Remarks>
If the adjuster is not adjusted correctly at time of installation, the following symptoms can
also occur in addition to jams:
1. the release lever movement tends to be heavy.
2. the door tends to close more tightly at the rear than at the front.
3. the deck may not easily settle in place.
13.3.8.6 Delivery Delay Jam (label sheet) 0002-7023
<Cause>
The glue used on the delivered label sheet stuck on the rib found where the feed path curves
immediately in front of the delivery roller. The glue used on the label sheet that follows
joined the glue left by the preceding sheet, thus turning into a delivery delay jam.
<Field Remedy>
Clean the delivery path [1] to remove the glue left behind the label sheets.

Chapter 13
13-55
F-13-22
13.3.8.7 Pickup Stationary Jam 0003-5010
<Cause>
Paper moving past leaves lint behind it, which tends to collect around the sensor flag. The
build-up of lint soon starts to hinder the movement of the sensor flag, at times preventing it
from returning to its initial position.
<Field Remedy>
1) Remove the pickup unit in question.
2) Clean the area around the sensor flag [1] using a blower brush or the like to remove the
paper lint.
[1]

Chapter 13
13-56
F-13-23
3) Put the pickup unit back into place.
13.3.9 Error Code
13.3.9.1 E004-0001 Error Code: Displayed after opening/closing
front panel 0005-1486
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred for the following reasons (3 cases):
During transportation, the front panel was held with an excessive force. As a result,
the front panel actuator interfered with and detached the front panel sensor (PS22).
The sensor came in contact with the sensor mount causing 5V line to be short-
circuited.
If the front panel sensor is damaged, replace it with a new one. At that time, visually
inspect the front panel actuator to make sure that it does not interfere with the sensor.
Front Panel Sensor (PS22): FH7-7312
[1]

Chapter 13
13-57
13.3.9.2 E020 Error Code: Occurred upon installation because
developer failed to be filled inside developing ass'y 0005-1489
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred upon installation because a developing ass'y
without developer being filled had been wrongly enclosed in the package.
If this occurs, replace the affected developing ass'y:
13.3.9.3 E020 Error Code and Toner scattering inside machine:
Because wrong screw is used for fixing developing ass'y 0005-7894
Description
E020 indicates that the drum or the developer-related errors occur.
Cause
As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because of the following fact. When the
developing ass'y is fixed inside the developing rotary, a TP screw was wrongly used
although the designated stepped screw should have been used. Consequently, a clearance
became wider between the developing cylinder and the drum at a time of developing.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the developing ass'y is fixed with the designated stepped screw. In
addition, move the developing ass'y with your hand to make sure that there is
approximately 1.5 to 2.0mm-clearance in all directions.
Stepped Screw: FS1-9003
13.3.9.4 E021-000x Error Code: Developing rotary does not rotate
and abnormal noise comes from motor 0005-5650
Description
E021 can be displayed when an error occurs in the developing rotary. The detail codes
are:

Chapter 13
13-58
0001: The developing rotary home position cannot be detected.
0002: The intervals of flag detection during rotation is too short or long.
0003: The sensor does not detect the flag when the developing rotary stops at
development point.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the DC Controller PCB was unable to control
the motor because it was faulty (1 case).
Field Remedy
1. Check whether or not the developing rotary receives any physical load.
Rotate the developing rotary in a counterclockwise direction by hand to see whether it
rotates smoothly. If any abnormality is found, eliminate the root cause. No problem is
found, go to the Step 2.
2. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between J313 on the DC Controller
PCB and the Rotary Motor (M8) or there is no pinched wire. No problem is found, go to
the Step 3.
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one. If the symptom still recurs, go to the
Step 4.
4. Replace the Rotary Motor with a new one.
DC Controller PCB: FG3-2795
Rotary Motor: FM2-0080
13.3.9.5 E021-0003 Error Code: Occurs during copy, not upon FAX
reception but output becomes yellow 0005-7415
Description
E021-0003 can be displayed when the rotary HP sensor cannot detect the developing
position detecting sensor flag although the developing rotary stops at development point.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because of breakage of the developing position
detecting sensor flag that is located on the rear rotary flange.
Field Remedy
Visually inspect the rear rotary flange to see whether or not the developing position
detecting sensor flag is broken.
Rear Rotary Flange: FC5-0299

Chapter 13
13-59
13.3.9.6 E026-0x01 Error Code / Message [Remaining toner is low.]
/ Toner scattering inside machine 0005-4367
Description
E026-0x01 can be displayed when the toner concentration does not return to a normal
level after replacement of the toner bottle and 5-time toner recovery sessions following
the detection of toner absence.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the toner shutter in the developing ass'y was
not open completely and the toner was not supplied from the toner bottle to the
developing ass'y.
Field Remedy
Before installing the developing ass'y into the host machine, be sure to slide and fix the
toner shutter so as to cover the opening for toner. Then, install the toner bottle.
13.3.9.7 E067-0100 Error Code: Because tension spring for Primary
Transfer Roller comes off 0005-7405
Description
E067-0100 can be displayed when the value of the primary transfer output current
measures abnormal two straight times.
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the tension spring for the primary transfer
roller shaft in the ITB came off. So, make sure that the spring is securely installed.
13.3.9.8 E070-0003 Error Code: Improper ground of ITB tension
roller shaft in ITB unit 0005-4358
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the grounding plate did not come in contact
with the shaft of the ITB drive roller in the ITB unit, causing a poor ground (1 case). This
grounding plate is used to establish a ground for the ITB tension roller to the ITB drive
roller.
E070-0003 can be displayed when the time that passes between the first detection of the

Chapter 13
13-60
ITB home position (HP) and the next HP detection is shorter than a specific period of
time.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the inner surface of the ITB has stains or scratches on it.
2. Make sure that the ITB-HP sensor (PS19) operates normally.
3. Make sure that the grounding plate properly comes in contact with the shaft of the ITB
drive roller.
Grounding Plate: FC5-0715
ITB-HP Sensor (PS19): FH7-7630
13.3.9.9 E070-0003 Error Code: Because ITB-HP sensor (PS19) is
soiled 0005-7411
Description
E070-0003 can be displayed when the time from the first detection of the ITB home
position to the next detection is shorter than a specific period of time.
Field Remedy
In the field, this symptom occurred because the ITB-HP sensor (PS19) was soiled. So,
remove the ITB and clean the sensor with a blower brush.
13.3.9.10 E100 / E110 Error Code: Occurred because J328 connector
on DC Controller PCB was not securely fitted 0005-3197
Description
E100 is a BD error and E110 is a fault of the laser scanner motor operation.
Field Remedy
As a result of inspection, it was found that the connector at J328 on the DC Controller PCB
was not securely fitted (1 case). Check whether the connectors are securely fitted between
the laser scanner unit and the DC Controller PCB (J327, J328, J329), and whether there is
no pinched cable.

Chapter 13
13-61
13.3.9.11 E110 Error Code: Error occurred at the time when paper
was delivered to transfer unit 0005-3235
< Description >
E110 can be displayed when a fault of the laser scanner motor operation occurs.
< Field Remedy >
In the field, it was found that the laser scanner unit was faulty (1 case).
Check whether the connectors are securely fitted between the laser scanner unit and the
DC Controller PCB (J327, J328, J329) or whether there is no pinched cable. If no
problem is found, replace the Laser Scanner unit with a new one.
Laser Scanner Ass'y: FM2-0041
13.3.9.12 E225-0001 Error Code: Scanning lamp came on 0005-5375
Description
E225-0001 indicates a CIS light intensity error occurs and can be displayed when the
machine cannot find out whether the lamp has come on normally during shading
correction at time of power-on or at the start of a job.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Contact Image Sensor (CIS) Ass'y was
faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between the CIS Ass'y - CIS Inverter
PCB - Reader Controller PCB, and that there is no pinched cable. If no problem is found,
go to the Step 2.
2. Replace the CIS Ass'y with a new one.
CIS Inverter PCB: FH3-7215
Reader Controller PCB: FG3-3159
13.3.9.13 E315-0010/0034/0038 Error Code: Occurred during
PCFAX transmission, then host machine rebooted 0005-1477
< Field Remedy >

Chapter 13
13-62
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Resolution Switch PCB was faulty (1
case).
E315 can be displayed when the image data failure has occurred (The Resolution
Switch PCB is faulty, the image memory (SDRAM) and HDD are faulty or not
securely fitted.)
Make sure that the connectors on the Main Controller PCB are securely fitted or there
is no pinched cables. If no problem is found, replace the Resolution Switch PCB with
a new one.
Resolution Switch PCB: FG3-2728
13.3.9.14 E351-0000 Error Code: Occasionally occurs while host
machine is being energized 0005-5916
Description
E351 can be displayed when an Main Controller PCB (Sub) error occurs.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main
Controller PCB (Sub) was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between J1207 on the Main
Controller PCB (Main) and Main Controller PCB (Sub), and there is no pinched wire.
2. If this symptom recurs with a low frequency, it is possible that the Main Controller
PCB (Sub) is faulty. So, replace it with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Sub): FM2-0209
13.3.9.15 E400-0002 Error Code: Because ADF Controller PCB is
faulty 0005-5918
Description
E400 can be displayed when a feeder communication error occurs. The detail code 0002
indicates a reception status error.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the ADF Controller PCB was faulty.
Field Remedy

Chapter 13
13-63
Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted on the ADF Controller PCB, and
between the ADF Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB (Sub), and that there is
no pinched wire. If no abnormality is found, replace the ADC Controller PCB with a new
one.
ADF Controller PCB: FG3-3124
13.3.9.16 E500 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9116
<Cause 1>
- The harness is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Check the connection between J2 of the finisher controller PCB and the DC controller PCB
of the host machine.
<Cause 2>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty, or the host machine has a fault.
<Field Remedy 2>
- Replace the finisher controller PCB, or replace the DC controller of the host machine.
13.3.9.17 E505 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9118
<Cause>
- The backup memory is inadequate.
<Field Remedy>
Initialize the RAM.
Replace the finisher controller PCB.
13.3.9.18 E514 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9119
<Cause 1>
- The stack delivery motor (M2) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
- Replace the stack delivery motor (M2).
<Cause 2>
- The return belt escape HP sensor (SR5) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>

Chapter 13
13-64
Replace the return belt escape HP sensor (SR5).
<Cause 3>
- The stack retaining roll drive mechanism is faulty.
<Field Remedy 3>
Correct the stack retaining roll drive mechanism.
EX:
Check to see that the drive cam [2] is under the belt arm [1].
F-13-24
<Cause 4>
- The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
<Field Remedy 4>
Initialize the RAM.
13.3.9.19 E530 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9120
<Cause 1>
- The rear alignment motor (M4) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the rear alignment motor (M4).
<Cause 2>
- The rear alignment HP sensor (SR4) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>

Chapter 13
13-65
Replace the rear alignment HP sensor (SR4).
<Cause 3>
<Field Remedy 3>
Initialize the RAM.
13.3.9.20 E531 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9121
<Cause 1>
- A staple has jammed.
<Field Remedy 1>
Remove the staple.
<Cause 2>
- The stapler motor (M9) is faulty.
- The stapler punching home position sensor (SR18) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
- Replace the stapler.
<Cause 3>
<Field Remedy 3>
Initialize the RAM.
13.3.9.21 E532 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9122
<Cause 1>
- The stapler slide motor (M8) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the stapler slide motor (M8).
Check the harness between the stapler slide motor (M8) and the finisher controller PCB.
<Cause 2>
- The stapler slide HP sensor (SR6) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the stapler slide HP sensor (SR6).

Chapter 13
13-66
Check the harness between the stapler slide HP sensor (SR76) and the finisher controller
PCB.
<Cause 3>
- The stapler shift belt is faulty.
<Field Remedy 3>
Check the stapler shift belt.
<Cause 4>
<Field Remedy 4>
Initialize the RAM.
13.3.9.22 E535 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9123
<Cause 1>
- The swing cam motor (M5) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the swing cam motor (M5).
<Cause 2>
- The swing cam HP sensor (SR7) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the swing cam HP sensor (SR7).
<Cause 3>
- The stack delivery roller swing mechanism is faulty
<Field Remedy 3>
Replace the upper guide assembly.
Correct the stack delivery motor swing mechanism.
<Cause 4>
<Field Remedy 4>
Initialize the RAM.

Chapter 13
13-67
13.3.9.23 E537 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9124
<Cause 1>
- The front alignment motor (M3) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the font alignment motor (M3).
<Cause 2>
- The front alignment HP sensor (SR3) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the front alignment HP sensor (SR3).
<Cause 3>
<Field Remedy 3>
Initialize the RAM.
13.3.9.24 E540 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9126
<Cause 1>
- The stack tray shift motor (M7) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the stack tray shift motor (M7).
Adjust the belt tension of the stack tray shift motor (M7).
After mounting the motor back in place, loosen the screw [3] once and then tighten it.
The spring [1] will automatically adjust the tension of the belt [2].

Chapter 13
13-68
F-13-25
F-13-26
<Cause 2>
- The stack tray upper paper sensor (SR9) is faulty.
- The stack tray lower paper sensor (SR10) is faulty.
- The stack tray lower limit sensor (SR12) is faulty.
- The stack tray upper limit sensor (SR13) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
Replace the individual sensors.
<Cause 3>

Chapter 13
13-69
<Field Remedy 3>
Initialize the RAM.
13.3.9.25 E542 Error Code: Saddle Delivery Tray of Saddle
Finisher-Q2 not completely latched 0005-4373
Description
E542 can be displayed when the tray 2 shift motor (M38) is faulty.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the cover of the saddle delivery tray was not
completely latched (rear side, specifically) as a result of opening/closing for jam
clearance, causing the finisher tray to hit against the cover.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the cove of the saddle delivery tray is completely latched.

Chapter 13
13-70
F-13-27
13.3.9.26 E577 (Finisher-P1) 0002-9128
<Cause 1>
- The paddle motor (M6) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 1>
Replace the paddle motor (M6).
<Cause 2>
- The paddle HP sensor (SRE8) is faulty.
<Field Remedy 2>
- Replace the paddle HP sensor (SR8).
<Cause 3>
- The paddle and the stacking wall drive mechanism are faulty.

Chapter 13
13-71
<Field Remedy 3>
Check the paddle and the stacking wall drive mechanism..
Check to see if the drive gear phase is correct.
Be sure to mount the 3 gears so that the groove [1] of gear B fully engages with the
extensions of gears A and B.
F-13-28
<Cause 4>
<Field Remedy 4>
Initialize the RAM.
13.3.9.27 E602-0001 Error Code: Ticktack sound is heard upon start-
up and then the error code is displayed 0005-4356
n the field, it was found that the HDD was faulty.
E602-0001 can be displayed when the machine cannot recognize the HDD or cannot
find BOOTDEV at start-up.
Follow the steps below (Described in the Service Manual [Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis
> Error Code Details> E602 in detail]).
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the 2 types of cables (for Power Supply and IDE) that come from the

Chapter 13
13-72
HDD are securely fitted. If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 2.
2. Turn the power OFF and then ON while pressing the numeric keys 1+9
simultaneously. The recovery program will automatically start and the LCD on the
control panel will be shut off (blackened). When the LCD comes on, turn the power OFF/
ON.
- If the host machine starts up normally, reinstall the system software (SYSTEM, LANG,
RUI).
- If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 3.
3. Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the
power ON while pressing 2+8 keys). Format the HDD (ALL) and download the system
software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the SST, and then turn the power OFF/ON. If
the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 4.
HDD: WM2-5188
Main Controller PCB Ass'y (Main): FG3-3221
Note: After replacement of the HDD, be sure to follow the instructions described in the
Service Manual [Chapter 12 Standards and Adjustments > Electrical Components >
After Replacing the HDD].
13.3.9.28 E602-0202 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR 0005-4357
Field Remedy
E602-0202 can be displayed when no image data exists although it should be stored in
[FSTDEV] (the image storage area in the HDD). This error is determined by the data
held in the SRAM on the SRAM Board PCB Ass'y. So, the host machine will not recover
by replacement of the HDD without initializing the SRAM. Executing [HD-CLEAR] in
service mode will initialize the image storage area and update the data in the SRAM.
Consequently, when any E602-related error codes occur, do not replace the HDD first.
Follow the instructions described in Service Manual [Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis > Error
Code Details > E602 in detail].
Outline of procedures
1. Partition check and recovery process
In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], enter [1]. Select [HD-
CHECK] and press [OK]. Upon completion, turn the power OFF/ON.
- If the host machine recovers, download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).

Chapter 13
13-73
2. Partition initialization
CLEAR] and press [OK]. Upon completion, turn the power OFF/ON.
3. Replacement of HDD and system software download
Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the
software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the SST, and then turn the power OFF/ON.
HDD: WM2-5188
13.3.9.29 E602-0402 Error Code: Recovered after HD-CLEAR 0005-4359
Field Remedy
E602-0402 can be displayed when no image data exists although it should be stored in
[FSTPDEV] (the image storage area in the HDD). This error is determined by the data
held in the SRAM on the SRAM Board PCB Ass'y. So, the host machine will not recover
by replacement of the HDD without initializing the SRAM. Executing [HD-CLEAR] in
service mode will initialize the image storage area and update the data in the SRAM.
Consequently, when any E602-related error codes occur, do not replace the HDD first.
Follow the instructions described in Service Manual [Chapter 14 Self Diagnosis > Error
Code Details > E602 in detail].
Outline of procedures

Chapter 13
13-74
HDD: WM2-5188
13.3.9.30 E602-0111 Error Code 0005-5184
Description
E602-0111 can be displayed when an error occurs in the DOSDEV (retains multipurpose
data). The suspect causes are HDD contact failure, HDD failure, main controller PCB
(Main) failure.
Remedy
1. Turn the power OFF and make sure that the 2 types of cables (for Power Supply and
IDE) that come from the HDD are securely fitted. If the symptom still recurs, go to the
Step 2.
2. Replace the HDD with a new one and start up the host machine in SafeMode (turn the
software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the SST. If the symptom still recurs, go to the
Step 3.
HDD: WM2-5188
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-3221
13.3.9.31 E602-0113 Error Code: Because of faulty HDD 0005-7407
Description
E602-0113 can be displayed when a readout error occurs in the general data storage area
of the HDD.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that the HDD was faulty.

Chapter 13
13-75
Field Remedy
- If the host machine recovers, reinstall the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
- If the host machine recovers, reinstall the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI).
HDD: WM2-5188
13.3.9.32 E674-0001 Error Code: Because J1210 connector is not
securely fitted on Main Controller PCB (Main) 0005-5919
Description
E674-0001 can be displayed when the fax board can be detected, but cannot
communicate with the host machine.
Cause
As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because the connector at J1210 on the
Main Controller PCB (Main) was not securely fitted.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between J1210 on the Main Controller
PCB (Main) and the FAX board, and there is no pinched wire.

Chapter 13
13-76
13.3.9.33 E732-0001 Error Code: Reader Controller PCB is faulty 0005-5182
Description
E732-0001 can be displayed when a communication error occurs.
Cause
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Reader Controller PCB was faulty.
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connector between the host machine and the reader unit is securely
fitted.
2. Make sure that the connectors on the Reader Controller PCB are securely fitted or there
is no pinched cables.
3. Remove and insert the Main Controller PCB (Sub) from the Main Controller PCB
(Main). If the symptom still recurs, go to the Step 4.
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB with a new one.
13.3.9.34 E732-0001 Error Code: iRC3200 locks up during copying 0005-6475
Description
E732-0001 can be displayed when a reader communication error occurs.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because of poor
soldering of J1302-34pin on the Main Controller PCB (Sub).
Field Remedy
1. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between J1302 on the Main
Controller PCB (Sub) and J502 on the Reader Controller PCB and that there is no
pinched cable.
2. If no problem is found, replace the Main Controller PCB (Sub) with a new one.

Chapter 13
13-77
13.3.9.35 E747-8702 / E747-00FF Error Code: Scanning lamp keeps
lighting up at its home position when making a copy 0005-3467
< Description >
E747 indicates that IC1010 (for image processing ASIC) or IC1012 (memory control/
communication control ASIC, CPU) on the Main Controller PCB has a fault (e.g.,
image data transfer error).
< Field Remedy >
In the field, this symptom occurred because the Main Controller PCB (Sub) was faulty
(1 case). Remove and reinsert the Main Controller PCB (Sub). If the symptom still
recurs, replace it with a new one.
13.3.9.36 E747-0031 Error Code: Half of image becomes blank
when printing list in user mode 0005-5922
Description
E747 can be displayed when an error (e.g., image data transfer error) occurs in IC1015
(image processing ASIC) or IC1012 (memory control/communication control ASIC,
CPU) on the Main Controller PCB.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred because the Main
Controller PCB (Main) was faulty.
Field Remedy
Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted on the Main Controller PCB and there
is no pinched wire. If there is no abnormality, replace the PCB with a new one.
Main Controller PCB (Main): FG3-3221
13.3.9.37 E803-0002 Error Code: Front Door Switch (SW3) is faulty 0005-7409
Description
E803-0002 can be displayed when it is detected that 13V is not supplied to the 13V line
that is connected by the front door switch (SW3) upon closure of the front door.
Field Remedy

Chapter 13
13-78
As a result of inspection, it was found that the front door switch (SW3) was faulty and
13V line was not connected, leading to this symptom. So, check whether the front door
switch works normally.
Front Door Switch (SW3): WC2-5327
13.3.9.38 E803-0001/E227-0004 Error Code: Poor soldering on
Printer Power Supply PCB 0005-7412
Description
that is connected by the front door switch (SW3) upon closure of the front door.
of the Reader unit when indicates that an error has occurred in supplying power to the
Reader unit, and can be displayed when it is detected that the 24V line opens or there is
no output.
Cause
As a result of inspection, it was found that 24V was not output due to poor soldering on
the Printer Power Supply PCB, leading to this symptom.
Field Remedy
Follow the steps in the designated order.
1. Check whether the front door switch (SW3) works normally.
2. Make sure that the connectors are securely fitted between the Printer Power Supply
PCB, the Controller Power Supply PCB, and the DC Controller PCB, and also that there
is no pinched cable.
3. If no problem is found, replace the Printer Power Supply PCB with a new one.
Printer Power Supply PCB: FM2-0190 (220/240V), FM2-0216 (100/120V)

Chapter 13
13-79
13.4 Outline of Electrical Components
13.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid
13.4.1.1 Clutch/Solenoid Table 0003-6400
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit does not have clutches or solenoids.
<Printer Unit>
T-13-5
T-13-6
Ref. Name Description
CL1 manual feed pickup clutch drives the manual feed pickup roller
CL2 registration cultch drives the registration roller
CL3 developing sleeve clutch drives the developing sleeve
CL6 duplex feed clutch drives the duplexing roller 1/2
CL7 toner supply clutch drives the toner feedscrew (Bk)
CL8 ITB cleaning clutch drives the ITB cleaning blade
CL9 secondary transfer clutch
moves the secondary transfer roller in contact/
away
SL1 cassette 1 pickup solenoid drives the cassette 1 pickup roller
SL2 cassette 2 pickup solenoid drives the cassette 2 pickup roller
SL3 ATR shutter solenoid drives the ATR shutter
Ref. Parts number I/O PART-CHK DC controller PCB
CL1 FM2-0197 P004-6 1:ON CL>7 J320
CL2 FH6-5075 P004-5 1:ON CL>6 J320
CL3 FH6-5076 P004-2 1:ON CL>3 J311

Chapter 13
13-80
F-13-29
13.4.2 Motor
13.4.2.1 Motor Table 0003-6403
<Reader Unit>
CL6 FM2-0197 P004-4 1:ON CL>5 J320
CL7 FH6-5005 P004-0 1:ON CL>1 J311
CL8 FM2-0197 P004-1 1:ON CL>2 J311
CL9 RH7-5168 P004-3 1:ON CL>4 J320
SL1 FH6-5055 P005-7 1:ON SL>1 J322
SL2 FH6-5055 P005-6 1:ON SL>2 J322
SL3 FH6-5078 SL>3 J307
Ref. Parts number I/O PART-CHK DC controller PCB
SL1
SL3
CL8
CL7
CL3
CL9
CL1
CL6
CL2
SL2

Chapter 13
13-81
T-13-7
T-13-8
F-13-30
<Printer Unit>
T-13-9
M501 reader motor drives the carriage
Ref. Parts number I/O reader controller PCB
M501 FH5-1028 P002-2
1: forward
J505
0: reverse
M1 polygon motor drives the laser scanner
M501

Chapter 13
13-82
T-13-10
M2 main motor drives major printer unit components
M4 delivery motor 1 drives the delivery roller
M6 cassette 1 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 1
M7 cassette 2 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 2
M8 rotary motor drives the rotary
M9 drum motor drives the drum
M11 fixing motor drives the fixing assembly
Ref. Parts number I/O
PART-
CHK
DC
controller
PCB
E code
M1
FM2-0041(the scanner
Unit)
MTR>1 J328
M2 FH5-1001 MTR>7 J311,312 E010
M4 FH6-1997 MTR>5 J314
M6 FH6-1972 MTR>3 J321
M7 FH6-1972 MTR>4 J321
M8 FM2-0080 MTR>2 J313
M9 FH5-1004 MTR>6 J311,J312 E012
M11 FH5-1006
P017-0
(fixing
motor
locked)
1:ON
MTR>8 J315,316 E014
P017-1
(fixingspeed
switch-over)
1:half-
speed
P017-2
(fixing
motor ON)
1:ON

Chapter 13
13-83
F-13-31
13.4.3 Fan
13.4.3.1 Fan Table 0003-6405
<Reader Unit>
M8
M1
M2
M6
M7
M9
M11
M4

Chapter 13
13-84
The reader unit does not have a fan.
<Printer Unit COPY>
T-13-11
T-13-12
FM1 exhaust fan (front) discharges heat from fixing unit
FM2 exhaust fan (rear) discharges heat from fixing unit
FM3 ITB duct fan prevents overheating near ITB/fixing assembly
FM4 controller fan cools inside controller box
FM5 toner suction fan collects stray toner inside machine
Ref.
Parts
number
I/O
PART-
CHK
main
controller
PCB
DC
controller
PCB
E Code
FM1 FH6-1998
P003-2
exhaust fan 1
half speed
(machine
rear)
1 half
speed
MTR>1 J317 E805-0001
P005-0
exhaust fan 1
full speed
(machine
rear)
1 ON

Chapter 13
13-85
F-13-32
FM2 FH6-1998
P006-2
exhaust fan 2
full speed
(machine
front)
1 ON
MTR>2 J317 E805-0002
P006-3
exhaust fan 2
full speed
(machine
front)
1 ON
FM3 FH6-1885 MTR>4 J308 E805-0003
FM4 FH5-1033 J1113 E804-0004
FM5 FH6-1999 MTR>3 J311 E805-0004
Ref.
Parts
number
I/O
PART-
CHK
main
controller
PCB
DC
controller
PCB
E Code
FM1
FM5
FM4
FM3
FM2

Chapter 13
13-86
13.4.4 Sensor
13.4.4.1 Sensor Table 0003-6406
<Reader Unit>
T-13-13
Parts
number
reader
controller
PCB
PS501 CIS HP sensor detects CIS home position FH7-7462 J506
PS502
copyboard cover open/closed
sensor (front)
detects the state (open/closed) of the
copyboard cover
FH7-7312 J506
PS503
copyboard cover open/closed
sensor (rear)
detects the state (open/closed) of the
copyboard cover
FH7-7312 J506
CIS1 CIS reads originals FM2-1563
SIZE1 original size sensor identifies the size of originals FH7-7569 J511

Chapter 13
13-87
F-13-33
<Printer Unit>
T-13-14
PS1 cassette 1 paper sensor detects the presence/absence of paper in cassette 1
PS2 cassette 2 paper sensor detects the presence/absence of paper in cassette 2
PS3 cassette 1 paper level A senor detects paper level A in cassette 1
PS4 cassette 1 paper level B sensor detects paper level B in cassette 1
PS5 cassette 2 paper level A sensor detects paper level A in cassette 2
PS6 cassette 2 paper level B sensor detects paper level B in cassette 2
PS7 manual feed tray paper sensor
detects the presence/absence of paper in the
manual feed tray
PS9 pre-registration sensor detects paper for pre-registration
PS10 cassette 1 retry sensor detects retry for cassette 1
PS11 cassette 2 retry sensor detects retry for cassette 2
PS502 CIS1
SIZE1
PS501
PS503

Chapter 13
13-88
PS12 pickup cover sensor detects the state (open/closed) of the pickup cover
PS13 fixing outlet sensor detects paper at the fixing outlet
PS14 No. 1 delivery sensor detects delivery
PS15 No. 1 delivery full sensor detects the state (full) of delivery
PS17 duplex feed sensor detects movement for duplexing
PS18 feed cover sensor detects the state of the feed cover
PS19 ITB HP sensor detects ITB home position
PS20 waste toner sensor (light-emitting) detects waste toner (light-emitting)
PS21 waste toner sensor (light-receiving) detects waste toner (light-receiving)
PS22 front cover sensor detects the state (open/closed) of the front cover
PS23 patch image read sensor detect the density of toner image on the drum
PS24 rotary sensor detects rotary home position
PS25 fixing inlet sensor detects paper at the fixing inlet
PS26 transparency sensor identifies transparencies
PS27 ATR sensor
detects the density of toner on the developing
cylinder
PS28 toner cartridge access cover sensor
detects the state (open/closed) of the toner
cartridge access cover
HU1 environment sensor detects the humidity inside the machine
TH1 fixing main thermistor
detects the temperature of the fixing roller
(middle)
TH2 fixing sub thermistor detects the temperature of the fixing roller (ends)
TP1 thermal switch
cuts off the power line to the heater in response to
overheating

Chapter 13
13-89
T-13-15
Ref.
Parts
number
I/O
DC
controller
PCB
JAM/E
Code
PS1 FH7-7312 P001-7 1 paper absent J322
PS2 FH7-7312 P001-3 1 paper absent J322
PS3 FH7-7312 P001-6 1 about half or less J322
PS4 FH7-7312 P001-5 1 about 50 sheets or less J322
PS5 FH7-7312 P001-2 1 about half or less J322
PS6 FH7-7312 P001-1 1 about 50 sheets or less J322
PS7 FH7-7312 P002-2 0 paper present J317
PS9 FH7-7312 P002-7 1 paper present J320 xx05
PS10 FH7-7312 P001-4 1 detected J322 xx01
PS11 FH7-7312 P001-0 1 detected J322 xx02
PS12 FH7-7312 J321
PS15 FH7-7312 P002-4 0 paper present J314
PS17 FH7-7312 P002-3 1 paper present J317 xx0D
PS18 FH7-7312 J308
PS19 FH7-7630 J320
PS20 FG3-2374 J308
PS21 FG3-2375 J308
PS22 FH7-7312 J308
PS23 FH7-7629 J310
PS24 FH7-7312 J311 E021
PS25 FH7-7312 J316
xx06
(residual
paper only)
PS26 RH7-7129 J320
PS27 FM2-0096 J307

Chapter 13
13-90
T-13-16
PS28 FH7-7312 J308
HU1 FH7-7620 J310
Ref. Parts number DC controller PCB AC driver PCB
TH1 FH7-7631 J316
TH2 FH7-7632 J316
TP1 FH7-6367 J202
Ref.
Parts
number
I/O
DC
controller
PCB
JAM/E
Code

Chapter 13
13-91
F-13-34
PS24
PS28
PS21
PS20
PS15
PS14
PS17
PS7
PS9
PS27
PS22
HU1
PS23
PS18
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS26
PS13
TP1
TH1
TH2
PS19
PS25

Chapter 13
13-92
13.4.5 Switch
13.4.5.1 Switch Table 0003-6408
<Reader Unit>
The reader unit doe not have a switch.
<Printer Unit>
T-13-17
T-13-18
SW1 main power switch turns on/off the main power
SW3 cover open/closed switch
detects the state (open/closed) of the front cover/
right door
SW4 control key serves to control copy work
SW5 environment heater switch turns on/off the environment heater
Ref. Parts
number COPIER>FUNCTION main controller PCB
SW1 FH7-6368
SW3 WC2-5327
SW4 FG3-3004
INSTALL>KE
Y
0: do not recognize control
key. [at time of shipment/
after RAM initialization: 0] J1208
1: recognize control key
function.
SW5 WC1-5182

Chapter 13
13-93
F-13-35
13.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others
13.4.6.1 Lamp. Heaters, and Others Table 0003-6409
<Reader Unit>
T-13-19
Ref. Name
Parts
number
Description
H5 anti-condensation heater (left) NPN prevents condensation on the copyboard glass
H6 anti-condensation heater (right) NPN prevents condensation on the reading glass
LCD1 LCD panel FL2-1148
provides visual indications on the control
panel (touch panel)
SW4
SW1
SW3
SW5

Chapter 13
13-94
F-13-36
<Printer Unit>
T-13-20
H1 fixing main heater
serves the main heater (controls the temperature of the fixing
roller)
H2 fixing sub heater
serves the sub heater (controls the temperature of the fixing
roller)
H3 fixing heat retention heater retains heat (keeps the pressure roller heated)
H4 cassette heater prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the cassette
H7 deck heater prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side deck
ELCB1 leakage breaker (100V) protects against leakage
ELCB2 leakage breaker (230V) protects against leakage
H5
LCD1
H6

Chapter 13
13-95
T-13-21
VA1,2 varistor protects against a voltage surge
HDD1 hard disk holds programs and images
SVR1 paper width detecting volume detects the width of paper from the manual feed tray
SP1 speaker provides audio indication (fax unit)
Ref. Parts number main controller PCB DC controller PCB E Code
H1
FG3-2787 (100V)
FG3-2790 (120V)
FG3-2791 (240V)
H2
FG3-2787 (100V)
FG3-2790 (120V)
FG3-2791 (240V)
H3 FH7-4768-000
H4 NPN
H7 NPN
ELCB1 FH7-7624
ELCB2 FH7-7623
VA1,2 FF3-4529
HDD1 WM2-5188 J1110/1111 E315
SVR1 FG3-2800 J317
SP1 FH5-3218

Chapter 13
13-96
F-13-37
13.4.7 PCBs
13.4.7.1 PCBs Table 0003-6410
<Reader Unit>
T-13-22
Ref. Name Parts number Description
[1] reader controller PCB FG3-3159 controls the reader unit/ADF
[2] CIS inverter PCB FH3-7215 controls the scanning lamp
[3] PANEL-SW-CL PCB FG6-8938
communicates the image data detected by the
reader unit to the printer unit
[4] control panel inerter PCB FG3-2834 controls the activation of the LCD backlight
[5] control panel CPU PCB FG6-8939 controls the control panel
[6] control panel KEY PCB FH6-0834 controls the inputs from the keypad
H3
HDD1
H2
H1
VA1
VA2
SVR1
ELCB1
ELCB2
H4
SP1
H7

Chapter 13
13-97
F-13-38
<Printer Unit>
T-13-23
[1] arrestor PCB FG3-2851 protects against over-voltage
[2] cassette 1 size detection PCB FG3-2798 detects the size setting of cassette 1
[3] cassette 2 size PCB FG3-2798 detects the size setting of cassette 2
[4] cassette size detection relay PCB NPN
relays the detected size setting of the
cassette
[5] pseudo CIP PCB FM2-0103 generates pseudo CI signals
[6] BD PCB FM2-0041 generates the BD signal
[7] NCU PCB HG5-1866 controls line switching
[8] fax board PCB FG3-1587 controls the fax unit
[9] laser driver PCB FM2-0041 controls the laser unit
[10] G3F AX power supply PCB FG3-2801 serves as the power supply for G3FAX
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]

Chapter 13
13-98
[11] modular PCB FG3-3464 serves as an interface
[12] high-voltage power supply PCB FG3-2796 serves as a high-voltage power supply
[13] printer power supply PCB
FM2-0190 (100/
120V)
FM2-0216 (230V)
serves as the printer power supply
[14] controller power supply PCB FG3-2792 serves as the controller power supply
[15] AC driver PCB
FM2-0190 (100/
120V)
FM2-0216 (230V)
drives AC loads
[16] high-voltage sub PCB FG3-3584 serves as a high-voltage sub power supply
[17] accessories power supply PCB
FH3-2656 (100/
120V)
FH3-2657 (230V)
serves as the power supply for accessories
[18] environment switch PCB FG3-2797 serves as the heater power switch
[19] DC controller PCB FG3-2795 controls the printer unit/accessories
[20] SRAM PCB FG3-3225
retains service mode settings/HDD control
information
[21] main controller PCB (main) FG3-3221
processes image data for output to the
printer unit
[22] ECO-ID PCB NPN assists image processing
[23] expansion bus PCB FM2-0210
serves the color LCD controller, card reader
interface, etc.
[24] main controller PCB (sub) FM2-0209 converts images from the reader unit
[25] resolution conversion board FG3-2728 converts resolution
[26]
USB board/TokenRing board FG3-3226
serves as an USB/TokenRing interface
TokenRing board FG3-3223
[27] UFR board FG3-3223 executes image rendering
[28] LAN board FG3-3135 permits connection to a network

Chapter 13
13-99
F-13-39
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[22]
[21]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[11]
[9]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]

Chapter 13
13-100
13.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and
Check Pins by PCB
13.4.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emiting Diodes (LED), and
Check Pins by PCB 0001-1848
Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the
machine those needed in the field are discussed.
- Although normal, some LEDs may emit dim light when they remain off becouse of
leakege current.
- Keep the following symbols in mind;
---VR that may be used in the field.
---VR that must not be used in the field.
13.4.8.2 Points to Note about the Leakage Breaker 0003-1806
Points to Note When Checking the Output of PCBs
While the machine is supplied with power, an AC voltage is applied to the terminlas of the
leaksge breaker [1].
Be sure not to touch it inadvertently during a check.
F-13-40

Chapter 13
13-101
13.4.8.3 Main Controller PCB (main) 0001-1849
F-13-41
T-13-24
Notation Description
LED2001 in operation
LED2 +3.3V (all-night) being supplied
LED5 +3.3V (non-all night) being supplied
LED5
LED2
LED2001

Chapter 13
13-102
13.4.8.4 DC Controller PCB 0001-1854
F-13-42
T-13-25
SW1 for high-viltage PCB
Be sure that the bits of the switch are positioned as follows:
SW1
SW1
ON
OFF
1 2

Chapter 13
13-103
13.4.8.5 High-Voltage Power Supply PCB 0003-2199
F-13-43
T-13-26
VR601 for factory adjustment
VR851 for factory adjustment
VR601
VR851

Contents
Contents
14.1 Error Code Table....................................................................................14-1
14.1.1 Error Code.......................................................................................14-1
14.2 Error Code Details..................................................................................14-5
14.2.1 Error Code Details Table ................................................................14-5
14.3 Error Codes (SEND) ............................................................................14-40
14.3.1 Self-Diagnostic Display ................................................................14-40
14.3.2 List of Error Codes without Messages..........................................14-43
14.4 Error Code Details................................................................................14-53
14.4.1 E code Overview...........................................................................14-53
14.4.2 E000 ..............................................................................................14-53
14.4.3 E001 ..............................................................................................14-53
14.4.4 E002 ..............................................................................................14-56
14.4.5 E003 ..............................................................................................14-58
14.4.6 E004 ..............................................................................................14-58
14.4.7 E006 ..............................................................................................14-58
14.4.8 E008 ..............................................................................................14-59
14.4.9 E010 ..............................................................................................14-59
14.4.10 E012 ............................................................................................14-60
14.4.11 E013 ............................................................................................14-60
14.4.12 E014 ............................................................................................14-61
14.4.13 E020 ............................................................................................14-61
14.4.14 E021 ............................................................................................14-65
14.4.15 E026 ............................................................................................14-65
14.4.16 E032 ............................................................................................14-66
14.4.17 E045 ............................................................................................14-66
14.4.18 E067 ............................................................................................14-67
14.4.19 E070 ............................................................................................14-67
14.4.20 E100 ............................................................................................14-68
14.4.21 E110 ............................................................................................14-69
14.4.22 E202 ............................................................................................14-70
14.4.23 E225 ............................................................................................14-70
14.4.24 E227 ............................................................................................14-71

14.4.25 E240............................................................................................14-71
14.4.26 E243............................................................................................14-72
14.4.27 E248............................................................................................14-72
14.4.28 E315............................................................................................14-73
14.4.29 E351............................................................................................14-74
14.4.30 E400............................................................................................14-74
14.4.31 E490............................................................................................14-75
14.4.32 E500............................................................................................14-76
14.4.33 E503............................................................................................14-76
14.4.34 E505............................................................................................14-77
14.4.35 E514............................................................................................14-78
14.4.36 E519............................................................................................14-79
14.4.37 E530............................................................................................14-79
14.4.38 E531............................................................................................14-80
14.4.39 E532............................................................................................14-81
14.4.40 E535............................................................................................14-83
14.4.41 E537............................................................................................14-84
14.4.42 E540............................................................................................14-85
14.4.43 E542............................................................................................14-86
14.4.44 E577............................................................................................14-86
14.4.45 E580............................................................................................14-87
14.4.46 E584............................................................................................14-88
14.4.47 E590............................................................................................14-88
14.4.48 E591............................................................................................14-89
14.4.49 E592............................................................................................14-89
14.4.50 E593............................................................................................14-90
14.4.51 E5F0............................................................................................14-91
14.4.52 E5F1............................................................................................14-91
14.4.53 E5F2............................................................................................14-92
14.4.54 E5F3............................................................................................14-92
14.4.55 E5F4............................................................................................14-93
14.4.56 E5F5............................................................................................14-93
14.4.57 E5F6............................................................................................14-94
14.4.58 E5F8............................................................................................14-95
14.4.59 E5F9............................................................................................14-95
14.4.60 E601............................................................................................14-97

Contents
14.4.61 E602 ............................................................................................14-97
14.4.62 E602 in detail ..............................................................................14-97
14.4.63 E604 ..........................................................................................14-103
14.4.64 E605 ..........................................................................................14-103
14.4.65 E606 ..........................................................................................14-104
14.4.66 E674 ..........................................................................................14-104
14.4.67 E677 ..........................................................................................14-105
14.4.68 E710 ..........................................................................................14-105
14.4.69 E711 ..........................................................................................14-106
14.4.70 E712 ..........................................................................................14-107
14.4.71 E713 ..........................................................................................14-107
14.4.72 E716 ..........................................................................................14-107
14.4.73 E717 ..........................................................................................14-108
14.4.74 E719 ..........................................................................................14-108
14.4.75 E730 ..........................................................................................14-110
14.4.76 E731 ..........................................................................................14-111
14.4.77 E732 ..........................................................................................14-112
14.4.78 E733 ..........................................................................................14-113
14.4.79 E740 ..........................................................................................14-114
14.4.80 E743 ..........................................................................................14-114
14.4.81 E744 ..........................................................................................14-115
14.4.82 E745 ..........................................................................................14-116
14.4.83 E746 ..........................................................................................14-117
14.4.84 E747 ..........................................................................................14-118
14.4.85 E803 ..........................................................................................14-118
14.4.86 E804 ..........................................................................................14-119
14.4.87 E805 ..........................................................................................14-120

Chapter 14
14-1
14.1 Error Code Table
14.1.1 Error Code 0001-2273
The machine is equipped with a function that checks its state (particularly, sensor output);
it runs a check and, upon detection of a fault, indicates an error code on its control panel.
The tables that follow show individual codes and the causes they are used for, and provide
general descriptions of the codes.
A 4-digit code is a detail code, and is indicated in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR.
T-14-1
Code Description
E000 inadequate rise in the temperature of the fixing unit at power-on
E001 error in the fixing unit
E002 inadequate rise in the temperature of the fixing unit
E003 low temperature error associated with the fixing unit after standby
E004 protection circuit error of the fixing unit
E006 fixing unit connection error
E008 fixing roller service life error
E010 main motor error
E012 drum motor error
E013 ITB waste toner full error
E014 fixing motor error
E020 drum/developer-related error
E021 developing assembly rotary error
E026 toner absent error
E032 NE controller counter error
E045 transparency sensor error

Chapter 14
14-2
E067 high-voltage-related error
E070 ITB HP detection error
E100 BD error
E110 laser scanner motor operation error
E202 CIS unit HP detection error
E225 CIS light intensity error
E227 reader unit power supply error
E240 communication error between main controller and DC controller
E243 control panel error
E248 backup memory error
E315 image data error
E351 ECO PCB error
E400 feeder communication error
E490 wrong model error
E500 finisher communication error
E503 finisher internal communication error
E505 finisher backup memory error
E514 stack delivery error/trailing edge assist motor error
E519 gear change motor error
E530 rear alignment error/front alignment error
E531 stapler error
E532 stapler relocation error
E535 swing error
E537 front alignment error/rear alignment error
E540 stack tray ascent/descent error, upper tray ascent/descent error
E542 lower tray ascent/descent error
Code Description

Chapter 14
14-3
E577 paddle error
E584 shutter error
E590 punch error
E591 punch dust sensor error
E592 punch horizontal registration sensor error
E593 punch relocation error
E5F0 saddle paper positioning error
E5F1 saddle paper folding error
E5F2 saddle guide error
E5F3 saddle alignment error
E5F4 saddle rear stapler error
E5F5 saddle front stapler error
E5F6 saddle butting error
E5F8 saddle connector error
E5F9 saddle switch error
E602 hard disk error
E604 image memory (SDRAM) shortage error
E674 fax board error
E677 external controller error
E710 IPC initialization error
E711 IPC function error
E712 communication error between ADF and reader unit
E717 communication error with NE controller
E719 communication error with coin vendor/card reader
E730 PDL error
E731 UFR board error
Code Description

Chapter 14
14-4
E732 reader unit communication error
E733 printer unit communication error
E740 Ethernet board error
E743 DDI communication error (reader unit side)
E744 language file/boot ROM error
E745 TokeRing board error
E746 accessories board wrong model error
E747 image processing ASIC or memory control/communication control ASIC
error
E803 door close error
E804 controller fan error
E805 fan error
Code Description

Chapter 14
14-5
14.2 Error Code Details
14.2.1 Error Code Details Table 0003-5636
T-14-2
Code Description Remedy
E000 inadequate rise in temperature of the fixing unit at power-on
0001
delay error, temperature rise, at power-on
At power-on, the output of the non-contact thermistor
does not reach 50 deg C.
reset:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0001
high reading, end thermistor; hardware
The reading of the end thermistor is abnormally high
(230 deg C or more) for 400 msec continuously
(hardware detection).
reset:
0002
high reading, non-contact thermistor; software
The reading of the non-contact thermistor is
abnormally high (250 deg C or more) for 500 msec
continuously.
reset:
0003
high reading, end thermistor; software
The reading of the end thermistor is abnormally high
(220 deg C or more) for 500 msec continuously.
reset:
0004
difference in reading between end and center large
The difference in readings of the non-contact
thermistor and the end thermistor is 80 deg C or more
for 500 msec continuously.
thermistor error
Check the thermistor, and then reset using
the following service mode:
0005
foreign matter, non-contact thermistor
The difference in readings of the non-contact
thermistor and the end thermistor at the end of initial
rotation is 20 deg C or more for 200 msec
continuously.
residual paper indicated fixing assembly/thermistor
error
Check the inside of the fixing assembly for
residual paper, and check the thermistor;
then, reset using the following service mode
item:

Chapter 14
14-6
0006
open-circuit, non-contact thermistor film
The A/D value of the film side of the non-contact
thermistor is FFh for 500 msec continuously.
open-circuit in thermistor/disconnected connector
Check the thermistor for an open-circuit, and
check for a disconnected connector; then,
reset using the following service mode item:
0007
short-circuit, non-contact thermistor film
The A/D value of the film side of the non-contact
thermistor is 30h or less for 500 msec continuously.
short-circuit in thermistor
Check the thermistor, then, reset using the
0008
open-circuit, no-contact thermistor case side
The A/D value on the case side of the non-contact
open-circuit in thermistor/disconnected connector
check for a disconnected connector; then,
0009
short-circuit, non-contact thermistor case
The A/D value on the case side and the A/D value of
the film side of the non-contact thermistor is 0 deg C
or more for 700 msec continuously.
Check the thermistor, and reset using the
0010
open-circuit, end thermistor
The A/D value on the case side of the contact
open-circuit in disconnected/disconnected connector
0011
short-circuit in end thermistor
The A/D value on the case is of the contact thermistor
is 39h or less for 500 msec continuously.
Check the thermistor, and reset using the
E002 inadequate rise in temperature of the fixing unit
0002
The reading of the non-contact thermistor reaches 50
deg C but does not reach 70 deg C within 180 sec
thereafter.
Reset using the following service mode item:
0003
thereafter.
0004
dg C but does not reach 120 deg C within 180 sec
thereafter.

Chapter 14
14-7
0005
C deg but does not reach 140 deg C within 180 sec
thereafter.
0006
thereafter.
0007
thereafter.
0008
deg C but does not reach the standby temperature
(normally, 190 deg c) within 180 sec thereafter.
0101
The reading of the non-contact thermistor does not
reach 120 deg C within 300 sec after power-on.
0102
deg C but does not reach the standby temperature
(normally 190 deg C) within 300 sec thereafter.
E003 low temperature error of the fixing unit after standby
0001
The reading of the non-contact thermistor show a low
temperature error (130 deg C or less) for 3.5 sec
continuously after standby.
0001
A short-circuit is detected in the triac (for 1 sec or
more continuously) while the heater remains off
(hardware detection) for 40 msec continuously.
fixing assembly triac malfunction/13V power supply
error
Turn off and then on the main power supply.
0000
The fixing unit is identified as not being connected for
400 msec continuously (hardware detection).
fixing unit present/absent signal open-circuit/
disconnected connector
E008 fixing roller life detection error

Chapter 14
14-8
0001
The reading of the fixing roller life counter has
reached its upper limit.
Turn off the main power, and replace the
fixing roller or the fixing assembly; then, set
'0' to the following in service mode:
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL.
0001
After the motor start-up, a lock state is not detected
within 2 sec or more.
excess load on feeding assembly
Turn off and then on the main power.
0002
An off-lock state is detected for 500 msec or more
after motor stabilization rotation.
excess load on feeding assembly
0001
After the motor goes on, a lock state is not detected
within 2 sec.
excess load on photosensitive drum
0002
After motor stabilization rotation, a motor unlock
state is detected for 500 msec or more.
excess load on photosensitive drum.
E013 ITB waste toner case full error
0000
After the ITB waste toner case full sensor goes on, a
job is executed for an equivalent of 500 images (in
terms of small size).
Replace the waste toner case.
0001
After the motor goes on, a lock state is not detected for
2 sec or more.
excess load on fixing motor
0002
After motor stabilization rotation, a motor unlock
state is detected for 500 msec or more.
excess load on fixing motor
E020
drum/developer-related error
xx=01: Y xx=02: M xx=03: C xx=04: K xx=00: no color distinction

Chapter 14
14-9
XX10
For INIT control at time of initial setting, the SGNL
value is lower than 62.
damage on ATR sensor, soiling of ATR sensor
window, poor developing assembly engagement,
open-circuit in ATR sensor
XX11
For INIT control at time of initial setting, the REF
damage on ATR sensor, open-circuit in ATR sensor
XX12
For INIT control at time of initial setting, the SGNL
value is 960 or higher.
damage to ATR sensor, malfunction of shutter, open-
circuit in ATR sensor
XX13
For INIT control at time of initial setting, the REF
damage to ATR sensor, open-circuit in ATR sensor
XX50
For ATR control, a fault in the backup data during
computation of density data based on the SGNL value
and the REF value caused the REF value to go '0'.
check on backup data
XX52
For ATR control, a fault in the backup data during
computation of density data based on the SGNL value
and the REF value caused the sensitivity coefficient to
go '0'.
check on backup data
XX81
When the background (drum surface) is read for patch
detection, the value of P-SENS-P is lower than 255.
error in sensor read value caused by soiling of patch
image read sensor with toner
XX90
The result of computation based on patch readings in
patch detection is lower than 16.
damage to patch image read sensor, poor rotation of
developing sleeve, poor engagement of developing
assembly, poor stirring of toner inside developing
assembly, damage to toner stirring screw or feedscrew
XX91
The result of computation based on patch readings in
patch detection is 1008 or higher.
leakage from toner buffer inside developing
assembly, damage to sensor

Chapter 14
14-10
XX92
The result of computation based on 3 continuous
patch readings in patch detection is lower than 42 for
Y, M, and C and lower than 73 for Bk.
damage to patch image read sensor, poor rotation of
developing sleeve, poor engagement of developing
assembly, poor stirring of toner inside developing
assembly (damage to toner stirring screw or
feedscrew)
XX93
The result of computation based on 3 continuous
patch readings in patch detection is 52 or higher for Y,
M, and C and 543 or higher for Bk.
leakage from toner buffer inside developing
assembly, damage to sensor
XXA0
For ATR control, the value of SGNL is lower than 62.
damage to ATR sensor, soiling of ATR sensor
window, poor developing assembly engagement,
open-circuit in ATR sensor
XXA1
For ATR control, the value of REF is lower than 62.
XXA2
For ATR control, the value of SGNL is 960 or higher.
damage to ATR sensor, malfunction of shutter, open-
circuit in ATR sensor
XXA3
For ATR control, the value of REF is 960 or higher.
XXA8
For ATR control, the detected T/D ratio exceeds the
upper limit (13%) 3 times continuously.
leakage from toner buffer inside developing assembly
XXA9
For ATR control, the detected T/D ratio exceeds the
lower limit (3%) 3 times continuously.
E021 developing assembly error
0001
The developing rotary home position cannot be
detected.
error in HP sensor, fault in DC controller PCB, poor
torque caused by excess load on developing assembly

Chapter 14
14-11
0002
The timing at which the flag goes on is too early with
the developing rotary rotating, or is too late.
error in HP sensor, flat in DC control PCB wiring,
poor torque caused by excess load on developing
assembly
0003
The sensor does not detect the flag when a stop is
made at the position of developing rotary.
error in HP sensor, fault in DC controller PCB
writing, poor torque caused by excess load on
E026
toner absent error
xx=01: Y xx=02: M xx=03: C xx=04: K
xx01
The toner concentration does not return to a normal
level after replacement of the toner bottle and 5 toner
recovery sessions following the detention of the
absence of toner.
Some users tend to fit an empty toner bottle and cause
the machine to execute a toner recovery session,
causing the carrier to fly astray and damaging the ITB.
Turn off and then on the main power, and fit
a new toner bottle.
E032 NE controller counter failure
0001
A break is detected in the count pulse signal. Turn off the main power, and check the cable
for an open-circuit; then, turn the power back
on.
0001
A sampling is taken in the absence of an obstacle
during initial multiple rotation; the sampling data
indicates a level lower than a specific level.
0100
The current measured of the primary transfer ATVC
is faulty 2 times in succession.
0110
The computed voltage of the primary transfer ATVC
is faulty 2 times in succession.

Chapter 14
14-12
0001
The ITB home position is not detected within a
specific period of time.
error in HP sensor, full displacement of belt, soiling of
seal
Turn off the main power, and check the ITB-
HP sensor; then, turn the main power back
on.
0002
The time that passes after detection of the ITB home
position to the next detection of the home position is
longer than a specific period of time.
slippage of belt against roller, causing delay in HP
detection timing
Turn off the main power, and check the drive
of the ITB; then, turn the main power back
on.
0003
The time that passes after detection of the ITB home
position to the next detection of the home position is
shorter than a specific period of time.
rear in ITB, causing sensor to wrongly detect home
position
Turn off the main power, and check the
surface of the ITB for scars; then, turn the
main power back on.
E100 BD error
0001
After the polygon scanner goes on, a speed lock state
does not occur for BD speed control within 5 sec.
Turn off the main power, and check the DC
controller PCB wiring and the 24-V system
fuses; then, turn the main power back on.
0002
While the polygon scanner is rotating at a constant
speed, the speed clock for BD speed control goes off.
control PCB wiring and the 24-V fuses; then,
turn the main power back on.
0003
While the polygon scanner is rotating at a constant
speed, the phase lock for BD phase control goes off.
0004
After the polygon scanner goes on, the phase lock
does not go on for BD phase control within 6 sec.
fuse; then, turn the main power back on.
0001
After the polygon scanner goes on, the speed lock for
FG speed control does not go on within 5 sec.
Turn off the main power, check the DC

Chapter 14
14-13
0001
The HP sensor does not go on after the unit is moved
in reverse for a specific length/period.
Disconnect and then connect the harness
connectors; as necessary, replace the scanner
HP sensor, scanner motor, and reader
controller PCB.
0002
The HP sensor does not go off after the unit is moved
forward for a specific length/period.
Disconnect and then connect the harness
connector; as necessary, replace the scanner
HP sensor, scanner motor, and reader
controller PCB.
0001
At time of power-on or at the start of a job, the
machine cannot find out whether the lamp has gone on
normally for shading correction.
Disconnect and connect the harness
connectors; as necessary, replace the
scanning lamp (xenon tube), CIS, inverter
PCB, and reader controller PCB.
E227 reader power supply error
0001
At time of power-on, the 24V port is off. Disconnect and connect the power supply
harness connector; as necessary, replace the
power supply.
0002
At the start of a job, the 24V port is off. Disconnect and then connect the power
supply harness; as necessary, replace the
power supply.
0003
At the end of a job, the 24V port is off. Disconnect and then connect the power
supply harness; as necessary, replace the
power supply.
0004
When a load is driven, the 24V port is off. Disconnect and connect the power supply
harness; as necessary, replace the power
supply.
0000
An error occurred in the serial communication
between the main controller and the DC controller.
0002
While printing is under way, no response arrives from
the DC controller within a specific period of time.

Chapter 14
14-14
0000
An error occurred in the communication between the
controller and the control panel.
connectors between the main controller PCB
and the control panel for connection; then,
0000
check error on backup SRAM board at time of start-up Turn off the main power, and check the
backup SRAM PCB for connection or
replace the backup SRAM PCB; then, turn
the main power back on.
0001 error on reader controller EEPROM at power-on Replace the reader controller PCB.
0002 write error in reader controller EEPROM Replace the reader controller PCB.
0003
reader error in reader controller EEPROM after check
error wire operation
Replace the reader controller PCB.
E315 image data error (fault in image conversion board, SDRAM, or HDD; or, poor connection)
0008
The ASIC on the Resolution switching board is faulty.
time-out error at time of encoding (no response within
30 sec)
000e
data damage/memory HDD error
software decoding error
0010
The ASIC on the Resolution switching board is
faulty.
time-out error at time of decoding
0025
image data transfer error at time of rotation processing
0028
time-out error at time of rotation processing
0034
The ASIC on the main controller PCB is faulty.
image data transfer error at time of magnification
processing
0036
time-out error rat time of magnification processing
E351 ECO PCB error

Chapter 14
14-15
0000
communication error between ECO PCB and main
controller PCB at start-up
Turn off the main power, and check the main
controller PCB (main, sub); then, turn the
main power back on.
0001 data communication error
check sum error
Disconnect and then connect the connector;
as necessary, replace the reader controller
PCB and the DC controller of the ADF.
0002
reception status error Disconnect and connect the connector; as
necessary, replace the reader controller PCB
and the DC controller PCB of the ADF.
0003
reception interrupt error Disconnect and then connect the connector;
as necessary, replace the reader controller
PCB and the DC controller PCB of the ADF.
0001
model ID mismatch
A feeder for a different model is connected.
Use an ADF designed for the machine.
E500 finisher communication error (common among finishers)
0001
data communication error
In the communication between the machine and the
finisher, an error has been detected for a specific
number of times and for a specific period of time.
controller PCB, finisher PCB wiring, and
24V system fuses; then, turn the main power
back on.
E503 finisher internal communication error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0002
error in communication between finisher and saddle
unit
0003
error in communication between finisher and punch
unit
E505 backup memory error of finisher (Finisher-P1)
0001
an error has occurred in the data stored in the backup
memory.
back on.
E505 backup memory error of finisher (Finisher-Q1/Q2)

Chapter 14
14-16
0001
An error has occurred in the data stored in the backup
memory.
back on.
0002 punch unit EEPROM data error
E514 stack delivery error (Finisher-P1)
0001
when the return belt is moved to HP, the HP sensor
does not go on within 1500 msec after the start of the
operation.
finisher PCB wiring and the 24V system
A shift may be made to mode that puts a limit
to the function.
0002
When moving the return belt to the belt contact
position, the HP sensor does not go off within 1500
msec after the start of the operation.
finisher PCB and the 24V system fuses; then,
to the function.
E514 rear end assist motor error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001
The HP sensor does not go off after the rear end assist
motor has rotated for a specific period of time.
0002
The HP sensor does not go on after the rear end assist
E519 gear change motor error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001
The HP sensor does not go off after the gear change
0002
The HP sensor does not go on after the gear change
E530 rear alignment error (Finisher-P1)
0001
When the rear aligning plate is being moved to home
potion, the HP sensor does not go on within 2000
Turn off and then on the main power, and
check the finisher PCB wiring and the 24V
system fuses; then, turn the main power back
on.
on the function.

Chapter 14
14-17
0002
When the rear aligning plate is being moved to home
fuses: then, turn the main power back on.
to the function.
E530 front aligning plate error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001
The HP sensor does not go off after the front
alignment motor has rotated for a specific period of
time.
0002
The HP sensor does not go on when the front
alignment motor has rotated for a specific period of
time.
E531 staple error (Finisher-P1)
0001
At time of staple jam recovery, the HP sensor does not
go on within 500 msec after the start of the reversal
rotation of the stapler motor.
Turn off the main motor, and check the
to the function.
0002
The HP sensor does not go off within 500 msec after
the start of the stapler motor operation.
to the function.
E531 stapler error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001
The HP sensor does not go off after the stapler motor
has rotated for a specific period of time.
0002
The HP sensor does not go on after the stapler motor
E532 stapler relocation error (Finisher-P1)
0001
When the stapler unit is being moved to binding home
position, the HP sensor does not go on within 1100
to the function.

Chapter 14
14-18
0002
While the stapler unit is being moved from home
to the function.
E532 stapler relocation error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001
The HP sensor does not go off after the stapler
relocation motor has rotated for a specific period of
time.
0002
The HP sensor does not go on after the stapler
relocation motor has rotated for a specific period of
time.
E535 swing error (Finisher-P1)
0001
When the swing arm is moved to home position, the
HP sensor does not go on within 2000 msec after the
start of the operation.
turn on the main power back on.
0002
When the swing arm is moved from the home
E535 swing error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001
The HP sensor does not go off after the swing motor
0002
0003 hazardous area
E537 front alignment error (Finisher-P1)
0001
When the front aligning plate is moved to home
to the function.

Chapter 14
14-19
0002
When the front aligning plate is moved from home
to the function.
E537 rear alignment error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001
0002
The HP sensor does not go on after the swing motor
E540 stack tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-P1)
0002
A paper surface search does not end within 1000
msec.
Turn of the main power, and check the
wiring; then, turn the main power back on.
to the function.
0003
In the course of a paper surface search, the encoder
lock signal within 200 msec does not reach 10 pulses.
finisher PCB wiring an the 24V system
to the function.
0004
In the course of a paper surface search, an error is
found in the input of the paper upper surface, paper
power surface, tray upper limit, or tray lower limit
sensor.
Turn off the main power, and correct the
stack tray position; then, check the finisher
PCB wiring and the 24V system fuses, and
to the function.
E540 upper tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001 upper tray ascent/descent motor clock error
0002 area error
0003 safety switch activation
E542 lower tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001 lower try ascent/descent motor clock error
0002 area error

Chapter 14
14-20
E577 paddle error (Finisher-P1)
0001
When the paper retaining paddle is moved to home
on the function.
0002
When the paper retaining paddle is moved from home
Turn the main power off, and check the
on the function.
E580 stack tray ascent/descent error
faulty stack tray ascent motor (M5), stack tray power
height sensor (S10), stack tray ascent/descent motor
clock sensor (S9); disconnected connector; error load
on stack tray ascent/descent motor
While the stack tray decent/decent motor is in
operation, the stack tray upper limit sensor goes on;
or, within 0.8 sec, the clock signal of the stack tray
direction motor clock sensor is not detected 15 times
or more. After the stack tray ascent/descent motor has
started ascent operation, the tray does not reach the
stack tray height sensor within 4 sec; or, the tray does
not leave the height sensor.
E584 shutter unit error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001
The shutter open sensor does not go off (i.e., the
shutter does not close).
0002
The shutter open sensor does not go on (i.e., the
shutter does not open).
0003 hazardous area
E590 punch motor error (punch unit)
0001 HP detection error
0002 initial

Chapter 14
14-21
E591 punch dust sensor error (punch unit)
0001
error light reception voltage when the light emitter is
on
0002
off
E592 punch horizontal registration sensor error (punch unit)
0001
on (rear end sensor)
0002
off (rear end sensor)
0003
on (horizontal registration sensor 1)
0004
off (horizontal registration sensor 1)
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
000A
E593 punch relocation motor error (punch unit)
0001
When the light emitter is on, the light reception
voltage HP sensor does not go off.
0002
When the light emitter is off, the light reception
voltage HP sensor does not go on.

Chapter 14
14-22
0001
The paper positioning plate HP sensor does not go on
within 1.33 sec after the paper positioning plate motor
is driven.
paper positioning plate motor (M4S), paper
positioning plate HP sensor (PI7S)
0002
The paper position plate HP sensor does not go off
within 1 sec after the paper positioning plate motor is
driven for 1 sec.
paper positioning plate motor (M4S), paper
positioning plate HP sensor (PI7S)
0001
The number of detection pulses of the paper fold
motor clock sensor drops below a specific value.
paper fold motor (M2S), paper fold motor clock
sensor (PI4S)
0002
The start of the paper fold HP sensor does not change
within 3 sec after the paper fold motor is driven.
paper fold motor (M2S), paper fold motor clock
sensor (PI4S)
0001
The guide HP sensor does not go on within 0.455 sec
after the guide motor is driven.
guide motor (M3S), guide HP sensor (PI3S)
0002
The guide HP sensor dose not go off within 1 sec after
the guide motor is driven.
guide motor (M3S), guide HP sensor (PI3S)
0001
The aligning plate HP sensor does not go on within
0.5 sec after the alignment motor is driven. (at time of
initialization, 1.67 sec)
alignment motor (M5S), aligning plate HP sensor
(PI5S)

Chapter 14
14-23
0002
The aligning plate HP sensor does not go off within 1
sec after the alignment motor is driven.
alignment motor (M5S), aligning plate HP sensor
(PI5S)
0001
The stitching operation HP sensor does not go on
when the switch motor (rear) is driven in reverse for
0.5 sec or more.
stitch motor (rear; M6S), switching HP sensor (rear,
MS5S)
0002
The stitching HP sensor does not go off when the
switch motor (rear) is driven in normal direction for
0.5 sec or more.
switch motor (rear, M6S), stitching HP sensor (rear,
MS5S)
0001
The stitching HP sensor does not go on when the
switch motor (front) is driven in reverse for 0.5 sec or
more.
switch motor (front, M7S), stitching HP sensor (front,
MS7S)
0002
The stitching HP sensor does not go off when the
stitch motor (front) is driven in normal direction for
0.5 sec or more.
switch motor (front, M7S), stitching HP sensor (front,
MS7S)
0001
The paper pushing plate HP sensor does not go on
when the paper pushing motor is driven for 0.3 sec or
more.
paper pushing plate motor (M8S), paper pushing plate
HP sensor (PI14S)

Chapter 14
14-24
0002
The paper pushing plate HP sensor does not go off
when the paper pushing plate motor is driven for 80
msec or more.
HP sensor (PI14S)
0003
The number of detection pulses of the paper pushing
plate motor clock sensor drops below a specific value.
motor clock sensor (PI1S)
0004
The paper pushing plate leading edge sensor does not
go off when the paper pushing plate motor is driven
for 80 msec or more.
leading edge sensor (PI15S)
0005
The paper pushing plate leading edge sensor does not
go on when the paper pushing motor is driven for 0.3
sec or more.
leading edge sensor (PI15S)
0001
The connector of the guide HP sensor is identified as
being disconnected.
connector of guide HP sensor (PI13S)
0002
The connector of the paper pushing plate HP sensor is
identified as being disconnected.
connector of paper pushing plate HP sensor (PI4S)
0003
The connector of the paper pushing plate leading edge
sensor is identified as being disconnected.
connector of paper pushing plate leading edge sensor
(PI5S)

Chapter 14
14-25
0001
The inlet cover switch is identified as being open for
1 sec or more after the start of printing or after the start
of initial rotation of the host machine with the cover
identified by the following sensor as being closed:
- inlet cover sensor (PI9S)
- front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S)
- delivery cover sensor (PI3S) or, the front cover
switch (MS2S) or the delivery cover switch (MS3S) is
open.
inlet cover switch (MSIS), front cover switch (MS2S),
delivery cover switch (MS3S)
0002
The front cover switch is identified as being open for
1 sec or more after the start of printing or after the start
of initial rotation of the host machine with the cover
identified by the following sensor as being closed:
- delivery cover sensor (PI3S)
front cover switch (MS2S), delivery cover switch
(MS3S)
0003
The delivery cover switch is identified as being open
for 1 sec or more after the start of printing or after the
start of initial rotation of the host machine with the
cover identified by the following sensor as being
closed:
delivery cover switch (MS3S)
E601
0000 communication error in image memory (SDRAM)
E604 image memory (SDRAM) shortage
0000
The machine does not recognize an amount of
memory needed for the model in question.
E605 image memory battery fault

Chapter 14
14-26
0000
The machine has detected a drop in the voltage (below
a specific level).
0001
The machine has detected a mount error on the HD at
time of a boot from the boot ROM.
0002
The machine has detected a read error when booting
the HD from the boot ROM.
0001
The machine has recognized the fax board, but it
cannot communicate with it.
connection between the fax board and the
main controller PCB; then, turn the main
power back on.
If the fault is not corrected, replace the fax
board or the main controller PCB.
E677 external controller fault
0003
fault in EFI controller
The machine has detected a fault during a
configuration check when starting up an EFI
controller.
connection cable; then, turn the main power
back on.
If the fault is not corrected, reinstall the
system software of the EFI controller.
0010
A controller designed for a different model is
connected.
Turn off the main power, and check to see if
the controller is one designed for the model
and check the connector cable; then, turn the
main power back on.
0080
The external controller has started up normally, but
the machine has detected an error in the
communication with the printer unit.
cable; then, turn the main power back on.
0001
The machine does not become ready 3 sec after
starting up the IPC chip.
cable; then, turn the main power back on.
E711 IPC communication error

Chapter 14
14-27
0001
An error is recorded in the IPC chip error register 4
times or more within 1.5 sec.
fault in ADF controller/reader controller PCB; poor
connection of connector between reader and DADF
Turn off the power, and check the cable;
then, turn the power back on.
0002
IPC communication error
An error is detected but cannot be corrected within 1.5
sec after the communication between the finisher and
the printer is suspended.
error in data communication; fault in finisher
controller PCB, DC controller PCB; poor connection
of connector
cable; then, turn the power back on.
E712 error in communication between ADF and reader unit
The communication between the reader unit and the
ADF has stopped, and 5 sec or more has passed
without recovery.
E713 error in communication between finisher and printer
error in data communication; fault in fisher controller
PCB, DC controller PCB
The communication between the machine and the
finisher is disrupted.
Turn off the power, and check the cable;
then, turn the power back on.
E716 error in communication between cassette pedestal and printer unit
0000
error in data communication; fault in deck controller
or cassette pedestal controller PCB
The communication between the cassette pedestal and
the machine stopped, and 2 sec or more has passed
without recovery.
E717 error in communication with NE controller
0000
The communication stopped with the NE controller,
and is not resumed within 3 sec.
0001
The machine does not recognize the NE controller that
was connected before its power was turned off.
Reset the error in service mode:
0002
The IPC has an open-circuit, and the machine cannot
correct the error in the IPC.
Check the cable, and reset the error in
service mode:

Chapter 14
14-28
E719 error in communication with coin vendor/card reader
0000
The machine does not recognize the presence of a coin
vendor at time of start-up.
0001
When the power is turned on, the machine does not
recognize the presence of the coin vendor that was
connected before the power was turned off.
service mode:
0002
The IPC cable connected to the coin vendor has an
open-circuit. The machine cannot recover IPC
communication.
The machine has detected an open-circuit in the
pickup/delivery signal.
The machine has detected an illegal connection
(short-circuit in Tx and Rx of IPC)
service mode:
0011
When the power is turned on, the machine does not
recognize the card reader that was connected before
the power was turned off.
service mode:
0012
The machine has detected an open-circuit in the IPC
cable connected to the card reader, and the machine
cannot recover the communication.
service mode:
E730 PDL error
1001
PDL software error
The machine has detected an initialization error at the
start of a job.
Execute a PDL reset, or turn off and then on
the main power.
100A
PDL software error
While processing a job, the machine failed to release
the semaphore; the machine has detected a system
error (e.g., initialization error).
the main power.
100B
PDL master font error
At time of start-up, the machine detected a mismatch
between the version number indicated in the master
font control file and the bootable version. The
machine does not detect the presence of master font
control file in /BOOTEV.
the main power.
appropriate font file, or format and reinstall
all system software.

Chapter 14
14-29
9004
open I/F communica-tion error
The machine has detected a PAI error in the
communication with the EFI controller.
Turn off the main power, and check the open
I/F board and the cable for connection; then,
If the fault is not corrected, replace the EFI
controller, open I/F PCB, or main controller
PCB.
9005
The machine has detected a fault in the video cable
connected to the EFI controller.
Turn off the main power, and check the open I/F board
and the cable for connection; then, turn the main
power back on.
Turn off the main power, and check the open
I/F board and the cable for connection; then,
If the fault is not corrected, replace the EFI
controller, open I/F PCB, or main controller
PCB.
A006 PDL communica-tion error
PDL does not respond. PDL does not respond because
of a fault in the sub bootbable program, the absence of
a sub bootable program, or fault in RIPA.
Execute a PDL reset; or, turn off the main
power, check the SURF2 board for
connection, and turn the main power back
on.
firmware, or replace the main controller
PCB.
A007
PDL version mismatch
At time of start-up, the machine detected a mismatch
in the versions between the machine's control
software and the PDL control software.
the main power.
If the fault is not corrected, format and
reinstall all system software.
B013
PDL built-in font error
At time of start-up, the machine detected damage in
the font data.
If the fault is not corrected, format and
reinstall all system software.
3000 UFR board error
At time of start-up, the machine does not recognize
the presence of a UFR1 board.
connection of the UFR2 board; then, turn the
main power back on.
If the fault is not corrected, replace the UFR2

Chapter 14
14-30
3001 The machine cannot initialize the UFR board.
At time of startup, the machine failed to initialize
UFR1.
UFR2 board; then, turn the main power back
on.
If the fault is not corrected, replace the UFR2
3002 The machine cannot initialize the RAM bus.
3015
No image data arrives at the main controller PCB.
The machine's software is free of a fault when
processing a job; however, video data fails to arrive at
CL1-G.
If the fault cannot be corrected, replace the
UFR2 board or the main controller PCB.
E732 reader communication error
0001
DDI-S communica-tion error Turn off the main power, and check the
connectors used to connect to the reader unit;
then, check the reader power supply, and
9999
On a printer model, a reader unit has been detected at
time of start-up. (A copier model starts up once as a
printer model at time of RAM initialization.)
The indication on the machine is limited to "Turn On
the Power."
E733 printer communication error
0000 printer communica-tion error
At time of start-up, the machine cannot detect the
presence of a printer unit.
connectors used to connect the DC controller
PCB and the main controller PCB; then,
check the power supply of the printer unit,
and turn the main power back on.
0001
DDI-P communica-tion error Turn off the main power, and check the
connectors used to connect the DC controller
PCB and the main controller PCB; then,
check the power supply of the printer unit,
and turn the main power back on.
0002
At time of start-up, the MAC address proves to be
illegal.
The machine has detected a non-Canon MAC address.
NIC; then, turn the main power back on.

Chapter 14
14-31
E743 DDI communication error
The reader controller PCB has detected an error in
communication between the main controller PCB an
the reader controller PCB.
Disconnect and then connect the DDI-S
cable connector; replace the reader
controller PCB or the main controller PCB.
0001
The language version stored on the HDD and the
bootable ROM version are different from each other.
Download a language file with the correct
version using the service support tool.
0002
The size of the language file on the HDD is too large. Download a language file with the correct
0003
The machine cannot find a language file specified by
config.txt stored on the HDD.
The machine cannot switch over to a language file
stored on the HDD.
Download a language file with the correct
0004
The machine cannot switch power to a language file
stored on the HDD.
0005
The boot ROM mounted in the machine is one
designed for a different model.
1000
boot ROM project error
The boot ROM connected to the machine is one
boot ROM with an appropriate one; then,
3000
illegal boot ROM module version
At time of start-up, the boot ROM is identified as not
being able to operate normally.
Upgrade the boot ROM, or replace it.
E745 TokenRing board error
0001
When initializing the TokeRing driver, the machine
failed to initialize the PCI.
connector of the TokenRing board; then,
replace the TokenRing, and turn the main
power back on.
0002
faulty MAC address
When initializing the TokenRing driver, the machine
found that the MAC address was faulty.
TokenRing board; then, turn the main power
back on.

Chapter 14
14-32
0003
The machine cannot obtain board information.
When initializing the TokeRing driver, the machine
suffered an error in obtaining/setting up the board
information.
TokenRing board; then, turn the main power
back on.
0004
connector error
When starting up the TokeRing driver, the machine
suffered a connection error.
Turn off the main power, and check the cable
connection and the power supply of the
MAU; then, turn the main power back on.
0005 TBD
E746 wrong accessories board
0003
At time of start-up, the machine detected a UFR board
The machine checks the engine ID to see if it is a
correct one.
Replace the UFR board with an appropriate
one.
0004
At time of start-up, the machine detects a scanner
board designed for a different model.
The machine checks the engine ID to see if it is a
correct one.
Replace the scanner board with an
appropriate one.
E747 error in image processing ASIC or memory control/communication control ASIC
---
The machine has detected an error (e.g., image data
transfer error) in IC1015 (image processing ASIC) or
IC1012 (memory control/communication ASIC;
CPU) of the main controller PCB.
Turn off the main power, and check the main
controller PCB; then, turn the main power
back on.
E803 door closed error
0001
The machine detected a remote (+24V) OFF state
immediately after the door is closed.
fault in interlock; short-circuit in 24V system; other
fault in power supply; open-circuit around power
supply; blown fuse
controller PCB and the presence/absence of
a fault in the interlock; then, turn the main
power back on.
0002
The machine detects a remote (+13V) OFF state
immediately after the door is closed.
fault in interlock; open-circuit in 13V system; other
fault in power supply; open-circuit around power
supply
controller PCB wiring and the presence/
absence of a fault in the interlock; then, turn

Chapter 14
14-33
<E602 in detail>
If the machine indicates E602-xxyy, it requires different approaches as indicated by its
suffix (detail code).
If the machine indicates E602-xxyy, be sure to turn off and then on the main power
once (so that the machine will execute automatic recovery sequence).
T-14-3
0004
The machine has detected that the controller fan
remained at rest for 16 sec continuously.
power to the fan or replace the fan; then, turn
E805 fan error
0001
With the exhaust fan (front) in operation, the machine
does not detect a lock state for 5 sec continuously.
disconnected fan connector; absence of lock signal
because of fault in fan
controller PCB; then, turn the main power
back on.
0002
With the exhaust fan (rear) in operation, the machine
does not detect a lock state for 5 sec continuously.
controller PCB wiring; then, turn the main
power back on.
0003
With the ITB fan in operation, the machine does not
detect a lock state for 5 sec continuously.
controller PCB; then, turn the power back
on.
0004
With the fan and the toner fan in operation, the
machine does not detect a lock state for 5 sec
continuously.
disconnected fan connector; absence of signal
controller PCB wiring; then, turn the main
power back on.
00 entire HDD 01 The machine cannot recognize the HDD. The machine cannot

Chapter 14
14-34
Remedy:
Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of cables
(power, IDE) that come from the HDD for connection;
then, turn the main power back on.
02 The machine cannot find the system software for the main
controller (main ) CPU in BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
03 The machine detects a faulty read sector while it reads data from
BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
06 The machine cannot find system software for the main controller
(sub) CPU in BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
07 The machine cannot find appropriate ICCProfile in BOOTDEV/
PDLDEV.
Remedy:
D
F NG
F
E
NG
H F
E
NG NG
F
E
NG
F
E
NG

Chapter 14
14-35
T-14-4
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
FF
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
not specified
01, 02 The machine has detected a read error or a file system error at
start-up.
Remedy:
- in the case of xxyy = 0701, 0702
Remedy:
Ask the user to collect address book data, transfer
settings, and user mode data using the remote UI.
Remedy:
- in the case of xxyy = FF01, FF02
Remedy:
03 The system has detected an HDD contact fault or an
operation system error.
Remedy:
Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of
cables (power supply, IDE) that come from the HDD
for connection; then, turn the main power back on. At
that time, check to see if the HDD is rotating and that
power is being supplied.
11, 21 The machine detected an HDD contact fault.
I F
B
NG NG
J F
C
NG NG
J F
E
NG NG
A F
E
NG NG
E D
F
NG NG

Chapter 14
14-36
A:
TYPE.
B:
1) By referring to [HDD format], make the following selections, and enter the appropriate
value: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE.
Remedy:
cables (power supply, IDE) for connection; then, turn
the power back on.
At that time, check to see that the HDD is rotating and
13, 25 The machine has detected a read error.
Remedy:
Remedy:
- in the case of xxy = 0813, 0825
Remedy:
10, 12, 14,
22, 23, 24
The machine has detected a system error or a packet data
error.
Remedy:
D
F NG
I F
B
NG NG
I F
C
NG NG
I F
E
NG NG
F
E
NG

Chapter 14
14-37
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key:
C:
1)** Start up the machine in normal mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down
the 1 and 7 keys); then, make the following selections, and press the OK key:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD.
2) Execute DOSDEV4 using the SST (formatting).
3) When done, turn on and then off the main power.
D:
2) Remove the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM from the older board, and
mount them to the new board.
E:
1)** Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down
the 2 and 8 keys).
2) Format the HDD (ALL) and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI)
using the SST.
F:
1)** Replace the HDD, and start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power
while holding down the 2 and 8 keys).
using the SST.
G:
TYPE.
H:
1) Turn off the main power, and press the 1 and 9 keys to turn it back on (so that the machine
will automatically start its recovery program*, turning the control panel to go fully
black).
2) When done (i.e., when the screen has turned fully white), turn off and then on the main

Chapter 14
14-38
power.
If the machine does not start its recovery program in response to the foregoing
operation, go to E.
I:
1) By referring to [HDD format], make the following selections, and enter an appropriate
J:
TYPE.
** As necessary, ask the user to collect address book data, transfer settings, and user mode
data in advance using the remote UI.
T-14-5
- HDD Format
Partition CHK-TYPE Data deleted
DOSDEV 1 all image-related data (reservations, Box, fax), mode
FSTDEV 1
DOSDEV2 1
FSTPDEV 1
DOSDEV3 2 PDL spool
PDLDEV 3 PDL-related file (font, registration from, ICCProfile, etc.)

Chapter 14
14-39
software
BOOTDEV 4
DOSDEV5 5 -
not specified 0 -
- HDD Format

Chapter 14
14-40
14.3 Error Codes (SEND)
14.3.1 Self-Diagnostic Display 0003-9199
T-14-6
Cause Remedy
Scanning has stopped because the size of the data for the scanned original exceeds the limit. Scanning may
be possible if [Data Cmprssn] is set to [High Ratio], Resolution is lowered, or [Sharpness] is reduced.
Scanning was stopped because the data size of the
scanned original exceeded the maximum data size that
the machine could handle.
By selecting [High Ratio] for Data Compression Ratio,
lowering the Resolution, and lowering the Sharpness
setting, scanning may become possible.
Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.
You cannot browse the network. There is a lack of
TCP/IP resources because documents have just been
continuously sent or are being continuously sent
through FTP or Windows (SMB).
Wait for a while, and try browsing again.
Set the IP Address.
This machine is not set with an IP address.
Specify the IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen), then turn the machine's
main power OFF and back ON again.
No response from the server. Check the settings.
The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server
is not turned ON. Alternatively, the machine's TCP/IP
resources may be low.
Wait for a while, and try browsing again. If there is still
no response from the server, try selecting another
server.
NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.
You cannot browse the network because NetWare is
printing through a Pserver or NDS PServer.
Wait until printing is complete, then try browsing
again.
There are too many subdirectories.
You have exceeded the maximum number of
subdirectory levels allowed.
Specify a different destination because the directory
level that you are trying to access cannot be specified.
No response.

Chapter 14
14-41
The server was not running when you tried to send.
Make sure that the server is ON, and check the
destination.
The network connection was lost when you tried to
send. (Either you could not connect to the destination,
or the connection was lost before the job could be
completed.)
Check the status of the network.
You tried to send through NetWare, but the Tree name
was not entered.
Enter the Tree name.
A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e-
mail message or an I-fax.
Check that the network cables and connectors are
properly connected.
Check the TCP/IP.
Cause The machine's TCP/IP connection is not
operating.
Check the IP Address Settings (IP Address, DHCP,
RARP, BOOTP) in TCP/IP Settings in Network
Settings in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.
The IP address that the machine should connect to
cannot be determined.
1. Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Additional Functions screen).
2. Check whether the DNS server's DNS settings are
correct.
If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen)
is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, the
machine will not be able to determine the host name.
Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-42
The machine cannot connect to the specified IP
address/port.
1. Check the Gateway Address setting in IP Address
Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
System Settings (from the Additional Functions
screen).
2. Check the Server Address and Port Number in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
3. Check whether the LDAP server is operating
normally.
4. If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in
is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server,
check whether UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
packages are blocked by the filter.
Check the user name and password or check settings.
When setting Login Information for the LDAP server
to 'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)', the user name or
password is incorrect.
Check the User and Password settings when Login
Information in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)'.
When setting Login Information for the LDAP server
to 'Use (security auth.)', the domain name is incorrect.
Check the Domain Name setting when Login
Information in Register LDAP Server in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to
'Use (security auth.)'.
Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.
The search could not be completed within the time
specified under <Search Timeout>.
Increase the time setting for Search Timeout in Register
LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again.
The number of addresses that meet the search criteria
exceeds the specified maximum number of addresses to
search.
1. Narrow down the search criteria, and then search
again.
2. Increase the maximum number of addresses to
search.
Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.
"/" is used in the search criterion. Remove "/" from the search criterion, and search again.
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-43
14.3.2 List of Error Codes without Messages 0003-9233
T-14-7
The combination of characters used in the search
criterion does not constitute an acceptable search
criterion.
There is an unequal number of "(" and ")".
"*" is not placed within "( )".
Make sure that the characters for the search criterion
are combined properly, and search again.
If <Server LDAP version and character code> is set to
'ver.2 (JIS)', characters other than ASCII Code (0x20-
0x7E) are being used.
Omit characters that cannot be used, and search again.
Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the settings.
Although 'ver. 3' is set as the server LDAP version
number in Register LDAP Server in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen), the LDAP
server is running on version 2.
Set Server LDAP version and character code in
Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) to 'ver. 2'.
Cause Remedy
# 001
Paper or originals are jammed.
Place the document properly in the feeder or on the
platen glass, and remove any jammed paper or
originals.
# 003
Communications that take longer than the preset time
(64 minutes) caused the error.
1. Reduce the resolution, and try sending the document
again.
2. When receiving a document, ask the remote party to
either reduce the resolution at which the document is
scanned, or divide the document into two or more parts
before sending it.
# 005
The other party did not answer within 35 seconds.
Confirm that the remote machine is able to
communicate, and try again.
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-44
The receiving machine is not a G3 fax.
Check the type of receiving machine with the receiving
party.
# 009
There is no paper. Load paper.
The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the
machine.
Insert the paper drawer properly.
# 011
The document that you are sending is not placed
correctly.
Place the document properly in the feeder or on the
platen glass, and repeat the whole procedure from the
beginning.
# 012
The document could not be sent because the receiving
fax machine was out of paper.
Ask the receiving party to load paper into their fax
machine.
# 018
The receiving machine did not respond when your
machine redialed.
Confirm that the receiving machine is able to
The documents could not be sent because the receiving
machine was engaged.
The settings on your machine do not match the settings
on the receiving machine.
# 022
Forwarding could not be performed because all of the
addresses stored under the specified Group destination
have been deleted, or User Inboxes are specified as the
Group destination.
Re-enter the forwarding address and try sending again.
Transmission could not be performed because the
specified destination was deleted while the documents
were waiting to be sent.
Re-enter the address in the address book and try
sending again.
# 037
Documents could not be received because there was
insufficient memory available.
Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors
from memory to increase the amount of available
memory.
# 080
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-45
A subaddress is not set in the remote machine.
Check the subaddress of the remote machine, and try
again.
# 081
A password is not set in the remote machine.
Check the password of the remote machine, and try
again.
# 099
Sending was interrupted. Try sending again.
# 102
The subaddress and/or password do not match.
Check the subaddress and/or password of the remote
machine, and try again.
# 107
The document could not be sent because there was
insufficient memory available.
1. Resend the document in a lower resolution.
2. Erase unwanted documents to make memory
available.
3. If this problem occurs frequently, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
# 701
The specified Department ID does not exist, or the
password has changed.
Enter the correct Department ID or password using 0-9
(numeric keys) on the control panel, and try sending
again.
# 702
The document could not be sent because the memory is
full.
1. Wait a few moments, and try again after the other
send jobs are complete.
2. Do not send the document to too many recipients at
the same time. Send the document to a smaller number
of recipients each time.
# 703
The memory for the image data is full.
1. Wait a few moments, and try again after the other
send jobs are complete.
2. Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine
still does not operate normally, turn the main power
OFF, and then back ON again.
# 704
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-46
An error occurred while reading address information
from the Address Book.
Check the address settings. If the machine still does not
operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then
back ON again.
# 705
The send operation was interrupted because the size of
the image data is larger than the Maximum Data Size
for Sending set in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in
Communications Settings in System Settings (from the
Change the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting in
E-mail/I-Fax Settings in Communications Settings in
screen). Select a lower resolution, or if you are using I-
fax, decrease the number of pages containing images
that you are sending each time, so that you do not
exceed the Maximum Data Size for Sending limit.
# 706
The Address Book is being imported or exported from
the Remote UI, or it is being used by another sending
component.
Wait until the Address Book import/export function
from the Remote UI or the other sending component is
complete, and try sending again.
# 711
The inbox memory is full. Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox.
# 712
The maximum number of documents is already stored
in the inbox.
Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox.
# 751
The server is not functioning. The network is down (the
server is unable to connect to the network or was
disconnected).
Check the recipient's address.
Check that the network is up.
# 752
The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not
correct, or the server is not functioning.
The domain name or e-mail address may not be set. The
network is down.
Check the SMTP Server name and E-mail Address in
E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen).
Check that the SMTP server is operating properly.
Check the network status.
# 753
A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail
message. (Socket, Select error, etc.)
Check the network cables and connectors. If the
machine still does not operate normally, turn the main
power OFF, and then back ON again.
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-47
# 754
The server is not functioning or the network is down.
The destination setting is not correct.
Check the server and network.
Check the destination's address settings.
# 755
You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not
functioning correctly.
Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
The IP address is not set.
When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was
not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or
BOOTP server.
# 756
NetWare in NetWare Settings in Network Settings in
is set to 'Off'.
Turn NetWare to 'On'.
# 801
A timeout error occurred while the machine was
communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail
message or send/receive an I-fax.
1. Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally.
2. Check the network status.
The SMTP server returned an error while trying to
connect. The destination is not correct. An error
occurred on the server side during transmission to a file
server.
1. Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally.
2. Check the network status.
3. Check the destination setting.
4. Check the status and setting of the file server.
You are sending a file to a destination to which you
have no write permission.
Check the destination setting.
When the machine tried to send a file to the server, a
file with the same name already exists on the FTP
server and that file cannot be overwritten.
Change the setting on the file server to enable the file to
be overwritten.
When the machine tried to send a file to the server,
either the folder name is incorrectly specified or the
password is incorrect.
Check the destination setting.
# 802
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-48
The name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax settings
in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. The DNS
server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings
in Network Settings in System Settings (from the
Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. Connection
to the DNS server failed.
Check the name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax
and DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in
Check that the DNS server is functioning normally.
# 803
The connection was interrupted due to reasons on the
recipient's side before all of the pages could be sent.
Try sending again.
# 804
Unable to match the specified directory name when
sending data to a file server.
Check the destination.
You have no permission to access the folder.
Change the setting on the server to enable access to the
folder.
# 806
An incorrect user name or password was specified for
the sending of a file to a file server.
Change the user name or password.
An incorrect destination was specified for the sending
of an e-mail message or I-fax.
Check the e-mail or I-fax address.
# 810
A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error
occurred while receiving an I-fax.
Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally.
The POP server returned an error during the
connection.
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-49
A timeout error occurred on the server while
connecting to the POP server.
# 815
You cannot log on to the file server because the
machine is printing a document sent to that server.
Simultaneous connections are not possible.
Wait for a few moments before trying to send the data
again, or change the NetWare server to which you are
sending your documents. Alternatively, stop the
Pserver.
# 818
The received data is not in a printable file format.
Ask the sender to change the file format and resend the
data.
# 819
You have received data that cannot be processed
(MIME information is incorrect).
Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the
data.
# 820
(BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).
data.
# 821
You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF
analysis error).
data.
# 822
(image data cannot be decoded).
data.
# 827
(contains MIME information that is not supported).
data.
# 828
You have received HTML data.
Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML,
and resend the data.
# 829
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-50
Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.
This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data
in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this
limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages.
# 830
A DSN (Delivery Status Notification) error notification
is received because of an incorrect I-fax address or
destination setting, or the data size of the sent
documents exceeds the mail server capacity.
1. Check the I-fax address or destination setting.
2. Set Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax
Settings in Communication Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) so that it is less
than the mail server capability.
3. Check the status of the mail server, DNS server, and
network.
# 831
An I-fax document could not be received using SMTP
because of the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address
screen).
Reset the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address
screen).
# 832
DSN (Delivery Status Notification) mail was not sent
because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/I-Fax in Network
Functions screen) have not been set, or trouble has
occurred in the mail server.
1. Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address
Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and E-mail/I-Fax in
2. Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.
# 833
MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail was not sent
because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/I-Fax in Network
Functions screen) have not been set, or trouble has
occurred in the mail server.
1. Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address
Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and E-mail/I-Fax in
2. Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.
# 834
An MDN error notification is received because of an
incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or trouble
has occurred in the network or mail server.
Alternatively, the memory of the receiving machine is
full.
Check the I-fax address and destination settings.
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-51
# 835
The maximum number of text lines for receiving an I-
fax has been exceeded.
Ask the sender to reduce the amount of text data in the
body of the document, and resend the data.
# 837
A connection request was received from a host whose
connection is restricted by IP Address Settings, which
can be set in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in
screen).
Check the settings in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP
Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from
the Additional Functions screen). Make sure that the
connection request is made from an authorized host.
# 839
The user name or password for the SMTP
authentication (SMTP AUTH) in Authent./Encryption
in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect.
Check the user name and password for SMTP
Authentication (SMTP AUTH) in Authent./Encryption
in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional Functions screen).
# 841
The encryption algorithm that matches the mail server
does not exist for sending e-mail or I-fax.
1. Set Allow SSL in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'.
2. Add the same encryption algorithm as the mail server
in the mail server settings.
# 842
Authentication using the client certificate was
requested by the mail server for sending e-mail or I-fax.
1. Set Allow SSL in Network Settings in System
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'.
2. Change the mail server settings so that the client
certificate is not requested.
# 843
There is large difference between the current time set in
the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server and the one
set in the machine.
1. Change the current date and time in Date & Time
Settings in Timer Settings (from the Additional
Functions screen).
2. Change the current time set in the KDC (Key
Distribution Center) server.
# 851
There is insufficient memory remaining in the system.
Check the system's available memory, and delete
unwanted documents in the inboxes.
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-52
The scanned document cannot be stored because there
are more than 100 documents in the specified inbox.
Delete unnecessary documents from the specified
inbox.
# 852
An error occurred because the main power switch was
turned OFF while a job was being processed.
Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON.
Try processing the job again, if necessary.
# 899
The e-mail message or I-fax has been successfully sent,
but reception may be incomplete because the
transmission was relayed via multiple servers.
1. Confirm whether reception was complete.
2. Check if you received an error notification.
# 995
Reserved communication jobs were cleared. Reserve the jobs again, if necessary.
Cause Remedy

Chapter 14
14-53
14.4 Error Code Details
14.4.1 E code Overview 0003-1069
The machine is equipped with a function that checks its state; it runs a check at such times
as programmed, and indicates a code on its control panel upon detection of a fault. The
tables that follow show codes together with detail codes and the causes associated with the
codes and timing of detection. They also offer how these errors may be reset.
14.4.2 E000 0003-0340
T-14-8
14.4.3 E001 0003-0341
T-14-9
Code Detail
code
Nature Description Remedy Remarks
E000 inadequate rise in temperature of the fixing unit at power-on
0001 delay error,
temperature rise, at
power-on
At power-on, the output of
the non-contact thermistor
does not reach 50 deg C.
Use the following
service modeitemto
reset:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
Code Detail
code
0001 high reading, end
thermistor;
hardware
The reading of the end
thermistor is abnormally
high (230 deg C or more)
for 400 msec
continuously (hardware
detection).
Use the following
service mode item to
reset:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.

Chapter 14
14-54
0002 high reading, non-
contact
thermistor;
software
The reading of the non-
contact thermistor is
abnormally high (250
deg C or more) for 500
msec continuously.
Use the following
reset:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
0003 high reading, end
thermistor;
software
The reading of the end
thermistor is abnormally
high (220 deg C or more)
for 500 msec
continuously.
Use the following
reset:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
0004 difference in
reading between
end and center
large
The difference in
readings of the non-
contact thermistor and
the end thermistor is 80
deg C or more for 500
msec continuously.
Check the
thermistor, and then
reset using the
following service
mode:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
thermistor error
0005 foreign matter,
non-contact
thermistor
The difference in
readings of the non-
contact thermistor and
the end thermistor at the
end of initial rotation is
20 deg C or more for 200
msec continuously.
Check the inside of
the fixing assembly
for residual paper,
and check the
thermistor; then,
reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
residual paper
indicated fixing
assembly/
thermistor error
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-55
0006 open-circuit, non-
contact thermistor
film
The A/D value of the film
side of the non-contact
thermistor is FFh for 500
msec continuously.
Check the thermistor
for an open-circuit,
and check for a
disconnected
connector; then,
reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
open-circuit in
thermistor/
disconnected
connector
0007 short-circuit, non-
contact thermistor
film
The A/D value of the film
side of the non-contact
thermistor is 30h or less
for 500 msec
continuously.
Check the
thermistor, then,
reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
short-circuit in
thermistor
0008 open-circuit, no-
contact thermistor
case side
The A/D value on the
case side of the non-
contact thermistor is FFh
for 500 msec
continuously.
and check for a
disconnected
connector; then,
reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
open-circuit in
thermistor/
disconnected
connector
0009 short-circuit, non-
contact thermistor
case
case side and the A/D
value of the film side of
the non-contact
thermistor is 0 deg C or
more for 700 msec
continuously.
Check the
thermistor, and reset
using the following
service mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
short-circuit in
thermistor
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-56
14.4.4 E002 0003-0346
T-14-10
0010 open-circuit, end
thermistor
case side of the contact
thermistor is FFh for 500
msec continuously.
and reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
open-circuit in
disconnected/
disconnected
connector
0011 short-circuit in
end thermistor
case is of the contact
thermistor is 39h or less
for 500 msec
continuously.
Check the
thermistor, and reset
using the following
service mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
short-circuit in
thermistor
Code Detail
code
E002 inadequate rise in temperature of the fixing unit
0002 The reading of the non-contact
thermistor reaches 50 deg C but
does not reach 70 deg C within
180 sec thereafter.
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
thermistor reaches 70 deg C but
180 sec thereafter.
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-57
thermistor reaches 100 dg C but
180 sec thereafter.
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
thermistor reaches 120 C deg
but does not reach 140 deg C
within 180 sec thereafter.
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
thermistor reaches 140 deg C
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
but does not reach the standby
temperature (normally, 190 deg
c) within 180 sec thereafter.
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
thermistor does not reach 120
deg C within 300 sec after
power-on.
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
but does not reach the standby
temperature (normally 190 deg
C) within 300 sec thereafter.
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-58
14.4.5 E003 0003-0350
T-14-11
14.4.6 E004 0003-0352
T-14-12
14.4.7 E006 0003-0355
T-14-13
Code Detail
code
E003 low temperature error of the fixing unit after standby
0001 The reading of the non-
contact thermistor show a
low temperature error (130
deg C or less) for 3.5 sec
continuously after standby.
Reset using the
following service
mode item:
COPIER>FUNCTION
>CLEAR>ERR.
Code Detail
code
0001 A short-circuit is detected
in the triac (for 1 sec or
more continuously) while
the heater remains off
(hardware detection) for
40 msec continuously.
Turn off and then
on the main power
supply.
fixing assembly
triac malfunction/
13V power supply
error
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-59
14.4.8 E008 0003-0358
T-14-14
14.4.9 E010 0003-0360
T-14-15
0000 The fixing unit is
identified as not being
connected for 400 msec
continuously (hardware
detection).
Turn off and then
on the main power
supply.
fixing unit present/
absent signal open-
circuit/disconnected
connector
Code Detail
code
E008 fixing roller life detection error
0001 The reading of the fixing
roller life counter has
reached its upper limit.
Turn off the main
power, and replace the
fixing roller or the
fixing assembly; then,
set '0' to the following in
service mode:
COPIER>COUNTER>
MISC>FX-UP-RL.
Code Detail
code
0001 After the motor start-up, a
lock state is not detected
within 2 sec or more.
Turn off and then
on the main power.
excess load on
feeding assembly
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-60
14.4.10 E012 0003-0363
T-14-16
14.4.11 E013 0003-0365
T-14-17
0002 An off-lock state is
detected for 500 msec or
more after motor
stabilization rotation.
Turn off and then
on the main power.
excess load on
feeding assembly
Code Detail
code
0001 After the motor goes on, a
lock state is not detected
within 2 sec.
Turn off and then
on the main
power.
excess load on
photosensitive drum
0002 After motor stabilization
rotation, a motor unlock
state is detected for 500
msec or more.
Turn off and then
on the main
power.
excess load on
photosensitive
drum.
Code Detail
code
E013 ITB waste toner case full error
0000 After the ITB waste toner case
full sensor goes on, a job is
executed for an equivalent of
500 images (in terms of small
size).
Replace the waste
toner case.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-61
14.4.12 E014 0003-0369
T-14-18
14.4.13 E020 0003-0380
T-14-19
Code Detail
code
0001 After the motor goes on,
a lock state is not
detected for 2 sec or
more.
Turn off and then on
the main power
supply.
excess load on
fixing motor
0002 After motor stabilization
rotation, a motor unlock
state is detected for 500
msec or more.
the main power
supply.
excess load on
fixing motor
Code Detail
code
E020 drum/developer-related error
xx=01: Y xx=02: M
xx=03: C xx=04: K
xx=00: no color
distinction

Chapter 14
14-62
XX10 For INIT control at time
of initial setting, the
SGNL value is lower than
62.
the main power.
damage on ATR
sensor, soiling of
ATR sensor
window, poor
developing
assembly
engagement, open-
circuit in ATR
sensor
of initial setting, the REF
the main power.
damage on ATR
sensor, open-circuit
in ATR sensor
of initial setting, the
SGNL value is 960 or
higher.
the main power.
damage to ATR
sensor, malfunction
of shutter, open-
circuit in ATR
sensor
of initial setting, the REF
the main power.
damage to ATR
in ATR sensor
XX50 For ATR control, a fault
in the backup data during
computation of density
data based on the SGNL
value and the REF value
caused the REF value to
go '0'.
the main power.
check on backup
data
XX52 For ATR control, a fault
in the backup data during
computation of density
data based on the SGNL
value and the REF value
caused the sensitivity
coefficient to go '0'.
the main power.
check on backup
data
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-63
XX81 When the background
(drum surface) is read for
patch detection, the value
of P-SENS-P is lower
than 255.
the main power.
error in sensor read
value caused by
soiling of patch
image read sensor
with toner
XX90 The result of computation
based on patch readings
in patch detection is
lower than 16.
the main power.
damage to patch
image read sensor,
poor rotation of
developing sleeve,
poor engagement of
developing
assembly, poor
stirring of toner
inside developing
assembly, damage
to toner stirring
screw or feedscrew
based on patch readings
in patch detection is 1008
or higher.
the main power.
leakage from toner
buffer inside
developing
assembly, damage
to sensor
based on 3 continuous
patch readings in patch
detection is lower than 42
for Y, M, and C and
lower than 73 for Bk.
the main power.
damage to patch
image read sensor,
poor rotation of
developing sleeve,
poor engagement of
developing
assembly, poor
stirring of toner
inside developing
assembly (damage
to toner stirring
screw or feedscrew)
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-64
based on 3 continuous
patch readings in patch
detection is 52 or higher
for Y, M, and C and 543
or higher for Bk.
the main power.
leakage from toner
buffer inside
developing
assembly, damage
to sensor
XXA0 For ATR control, the
value of SGNL is lower
than 62.
the main power.
damage to ATR
sensor, soiling of
ATR sensor
window, poor
developing
assembly
engagement, open-
circuit in ATR
sensor
value of REF is lower
than 62.
the main power.
damage to ATR
in ATR sensor
value of SGNL is 960 or
higher.
the main power.
damage to ATR
sensor, malfunction
of shutter, open-
circuit in ATR
sensor
value of REF is 960 or
higher.
the main power.
damage to ATR
in ATR sensor
detected T/D ratio
exceeds the upper limit
(13%) 3 times
continuously.
the main power.
leakage from toner
buffer inside
developing
assembly
detected T/D ratio
exceeds the lower limit
(3%) 3 times
continuously.
the main power.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-65
14.4.14 E021 0003-0384
T-14-20
14.4.15 E026 0003-0387
T-14-21
Code Detail
code
E021 developing assembly error
0001 The developing rotary
home position cannot be
detected.
the main power.
error in HP sensor,
fault in DC
controller PCB, poor
torque caused by
excess load on
developing assembly
0002 The timing at which the
flag goes on is too early
with the developing
rotary rotating, or is too
late.
the main power.
error in HP sensor,
flat in DC control
PCB wiring, poor
torque caused by
excess load on
developing assembly
0003 The sensor does not
detect the flag when a
stop is made at the
position of developing
rotary.
the main power.
error in HP sensor,
fault in DC
controller PCB
writing, poor torque
caused by excess
load on developing
assembly.
Code Detail
code
E026 toner absent error

Chapter 14
14-66
14.4.16 E032 0003-0391
T-14-22
14.4.17 E045 0003-0393
T-14-23
xx=01: Y
xx=02: M
xx=03: C
xx=04: K
xx01 The toner concentration
does not return to a
normal level after
replacement of the toner
bottle and 5 toner
recovery sessions
following the detention
of the absence of toner.
the main power, and
fit a new toner
bottle.
Some users tend to
fit an empty toner
bottle and cause the
machine to execute a
toner recovery
session, causing the
carrier to fly astray
and damaging the
ITB.
Code Detail
code
E032 NE controller counter failure
0001 A break is detected in the
count pulse signal.
Turn off the main power,
and check the cable for
an open-circuit; then,
turn the power back on.
Code Detail code Nature Description Remedy Remarks
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-67
14.4.18 E067 0003-0395
T-14-24
14.4.19 E070 0003-0399
T-14-25
0001 A sampling is taken in the
absence of an obstacle
during initial multiple
rotation; the sampling data
indicates a level lower than
a specific level.
the main power.
Code Detail
code
0100 The current measured of the
primary transfer ATVC is
faulty 2 times in succession.
the main power.
0110 The computed voltage of the
primary transfer ATVC is
faulty 2 times in succession.
the main power.
Code Detail
code
0001 The ITB home position is
not detected within a
Turn off the main
power, and check the
ITB-HP sensor; then,
turn the main power
back on.
error in HP sensor,
full displacement of
belt, soiling of seal

Chapter 14
14-68
14.4.20 E100 0003-0403
T-14-26
0002 The time that passes after
detection of the ITB
home position to the next
detection of the home
position is longer than a
Turn off the main
drive oftheITB; then,
turn the main power
back on.
slippage of belt
against roller,
causing delay in HP
detection timing
0003 The time that passes after
detection of the ITB
home position to the next
detection of the home
position is shorter than a
Turn off the main
surface of the ITB for
scars; then, turn the
main power back on.
rear in ITB, causing
sensor to wrongly
detect home position
Code Detail
code
E100 BD error
0001 After the polygon scanner
goes on, a speed lock
state does not occur for
BD speed control within
5 sec.
Turn off the main
DC controller PCB
wiring and the 24-V
system fuses; then, turn
0002 While the polygon
scanner is rotating at a
constant speed, the speed
clock for BD speed
control goes off.
Turn off the main
DC control PCB wiring
and the 24-V fuses; then,
turn the main power
back on.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-69
14.4.21 E110 0003-0405
T-14-27
0003 While the polygon
scanner is rotating at a
constant speed, the phase
lock for BD phase control
goes off.
Turn off the main
DC controller PCB
wiring and the 24-V
system fuses; then, turn
goes on, the phase lock
does not go on for BD
phase control within 6
sec.
Turn off the main
DC controller PCB
wiring and the 24-V
system fuse; then, turn
Code Detail
code
goes on, the speed lock for
FG speed control does not
go on within 5 sec.
Turn off the main
power, check the DC
controller PCB
wiring and the 24-V
system fuses; then,
turn the main power
back on.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-70
14.4.22 E202 0003-0407
T-14-28
14.4.23 E225 0003-0409
T-14-29
Code Detail
code
0001 The HP sensor does not go
on after the unit is moved
in reverse for a specific
length/period.
Disconnect and then
connect the harness
connectors; as necessary,
replace the scanner HP
sensor, scanner motor, and
reader controller PCB.
off after the unit is moved
forward for a specific
length/period.
Disconnect and then
connect the harness
connector; as necessary,
replace the scanner HP
sensor, scanner motor, and
reader controller PCB.
0001 At time of power-on or at
the start of a job, the
machine cannot find out
whether the lamp has
gone on normally for
shading correction.
Disconnect and connect
the harness connectors; as
necessary, replace the
scanning lamp (xenon
tube), CIS, inverter PCB,
and reader controller
PCB.

Chapter 14
14-71
14.4.24 E227 0003-0412
T-14-30
14.4.25 E240 0003-0414
T-14-31
Code Detail
code
E227 reader power supply error
0001 At time of power-on, the
24V port is off.
the power supply
harness connector; as
power supply.
0002 At the start of a job, the 24V
port is off.
Disconnect and then
connect the power
supply harness; as
power supply.
0003 At the end of a job, the 24V
port is off.
Disconnect and then
connect the power
supply harness; as
power supply.
0004 When a load is driven, the
24V port is off.
the power supply
harness; as necessary,
replace the power
supply.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-72
14.4.26 E243 0003-0416
T-14-32
14.4.27 E248 0003-0419
T-14-33
0000 An error occurred in the
serial communication
between the main controller
and the DC controller.
0002 While printing is under way,
no response arrives from the
DC controller within a
Code Detail
code
0000 An error occurred in the
communication between
the controller and the
control panel.
and check the connectors
between the main
controller PCB and the
control panel for
connection; then, turn the
main power back on.
Code Detail
code
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-73
14.4.28 E315 0003-0421
T-14-34
0000 check error on backup
SRAM board at time of
start-up
and check the backup
SRAM PCB for
connectionorreplacethe
backup SRAM PCB;
then, turn the main
power back on.
0001 error on reader controller
EEPROM at power-on
Replace the reader
controller PCB.
0002 write error in reader
controller EEPROM
Replace the reader
controller PCB.
0003 reader error in reader
controller EEPROM after
check error wire operation
Replace the reader
controller PCB.
Code Detail
code
E315 image data error (fault in image conversion board, SDRAM, or HDD; or, poor connection)
0008 The ASIC on the main
controller is faulty.
time-out error at time of
encoding (no response
within 30 sec)
000e data damage/memory
HDD error
software decoding error
controller PCB is faulty.
decoding
image data transfer error
at time of rotation
processing
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-74
14.4.29 E351 0003-0424
T-14-35
14.4.30 E400 0003-0427
T-14-36
rotation processing
image data transfer error
at time of magnification
processing
time-out error rat time of
magnification processing
Code Detail
code
E351 Main controller PCB (sub) error
0000 communication error
between Main controller
PCB (sub) and main
controller PCB (main)
at start-up
and check the main
controller PCB (main,
sub); then, turn the main
power back on.
Code Detail
code
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-75
14.4.31 E490 0003-0429
T-14-37
0001 data communication
error
check sum error Disconnect and then
connect the connector;
as necessary, replace the
reader controller PCB
and the DC controller of
the ADF.
0002 reception status error Disconnect and connect
the connector; as
and the DC controller
PCB of the ADF.
0003 reception interrupt
error
Disconnect and then
connect the connector;
as necessary, replace the
and the DC controller
PCB of the ADF.
Code Detail
code
0001 model ID
mismatch
A feeder for a different
model is connected.
Use an ADF
designed for the
machine.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-76
14.4.32 E500 0003-0437
T-14-38
14.4.33 E503 0003-0439
T-14-39
Code Detail
code
E500 finisher communication error (common among finishers)
error
In the communication
between the machine
and the finisher, an
error has been
detected for a specific
number of times and
for a specific period of
time.
Turn off the main
DC controller PCB,
finisher PCB wiring,
and 24V system fuses;
then, turn the main
power back on.
Code Detail
code
E503 finisher internal communication error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0002 data
communication
error
error in communication
between finisher and
saddle unit
0003 error in communication
between finisher and
punch unit

Chapter 14
14-77
14.4.34 E505 0003-0440
T-14-40
T-14-41
Code Detail
code
E505 backup memory error of finisher (Finisher-P1)
0001 an error has occurred in the
data stored in the backup
memory.
Turn off the main
DC controller PCB,
then, turn the main
power back on.
Code Detail
code
E505 backup memory error of finisher (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001 An error has occurred in
the data stored in the
backup memory.
Turn off the main
DC controller PCB,
then, turn the main
power back on.
0002 punch unit EEPROM data
error

Chapter 14
14-78
14.4.35 E514 0003-0441
T-14-42
T-14-43
Code Detail
code
E514 stack delivery error (Finisher-P1)
0001 when the return belt is
moved to HP, the HP
sensor does not go on
within 1500 msec after
the start of the operation.
Turn off the main
finisher PCB wiring
and the 24V system
fuses; then, turn the
main power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
0002 When moving the return
belt to the belt contact
position, the HP sensor
does not go off within
1500 msec after the start
of the operation.
Turn off the main
finisher PCB and the
24V system fuses;
then, turn the main
power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
Code Detail
code
E514 rear end assist motor error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
off after the rear end assist
motor has rotated for a
on after the rear end assist

Chapter 14
14-79
14.4.36 E519 0003-0443
T-14-44
14.4.37 E530 0003-0445
T-14-45
Code Detail
code
E519 gear change motor error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
off after the gear change
on after the gear change
Code Detail
code
E530 rear alignment error (Finisher-P1)
0001 When the rear aligning
plate is being moved to
home potion, the HP
the main power, and
check the finisher
PCB wiring and the
24V system fuses;
then, turn the main
power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode
that puts a limit
on the function.

Chapter 14
14-80
T-14-46
14.4.38 E531 0003-0447
T-14-47
0002 When the rear aligning
plate is being moved to
home position, the HP
sensor does not go off
Turn off the main
finisher PCB wiring
and the 24V system
fuses: then, turn the
main power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode
that puts a limit
to the function.
Code Detail
code
E530 front aligning plate error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001 The HP sensor does not
go off after the front
alignment motor has
rotated for a specific
period of time.
go on when the front
alignment motor has
period of time.
Code Detail
code
E531 staple error (Finisher-P1)
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-81
T-14-48
14.4.39 E532 0003-0449
T-14-49
0001 At time of staple jam
recovery, the HP sensor
does not go on within 500
msec after the start of the
reversal rotation of the
stapler motor.
Turn off the main
motor, and check the
finisher PCB wiring
and the 24V system
main power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
off within 500 msec after
the start of the stapler
motor operation.
Turn off the main
finisher PCB wiring
and the 24V system
main power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
Code Detail
code
E531 stapler error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
off after the stapler motor
has rotated for a specific
period of time.
on after the stapler motor
period of time.
Code Detail
code
E532 stapler relocation error (Finisher-P1)
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-82
T-14-50
0001 When the stapler unit is
being moved to binding
within 1100 msec after the
Turn off the main
power, and check
the finisher PCB
wiring and the 24V
system fuses; then,
turn the main power
back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
0002 While the stapler unit is
being moved from home
does not go off within
1000 msec after the start of
the operation.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the finisher PCB
wiring and the 24V
system fuses; then,
turn the main power
back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
Code Detail
code
E532 stapler relocation error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
off after the stapler
relocation motor has
period of time.
on after the stapler
relocation motor has
period of time.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-83
14.4.40 E535 0003-0451
T-14-51
T-14-52
Code Detail
code
E535 swing error (Finisher-P1)
0001 When the swing arm is
moved to home position, the
HP sensor does not go on
Turn off the main
finisher PCB and the
24V system fuses;
then, turn on the
main power back on.
0002 When the swing arm is
moved from the home
position, the HP sensor does
not go off within 1000 msec
after the start of the
operation.
Turn off the main
finisher PCB wiring
and the 24V system
main power back on.
Code Detail
code
E535 swing error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
off after the swing motor
period of time.
off after the swing motor
period of time.
0003 hazardous area

Chapter 14
14-84
14.4.41 E537 0003-0453
T-14-53
T-14-54
E537 front alignment error (Finisher-P1)
0001 When the front aligning
plate is moved to home
does not go on within
of the operation.
Turn off the main
finisher PCB wiring
and the 24V system
main power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
0002 When the front aligning
plate is moved from
Turn off the main
finisher PCB wiring
and the 24V system
main power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
E537 rear alignment error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
go off after the swing
go on after the swing

Chapter 14
14-85
14.4.42 E540 0003-0455
T-14-55
T-14-56
Code Detail
code
E540 stack tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-P1)
0002 A paper surface search does
not end within 1000 msec.
Turn of the main
finisher PCB wiring
and the 24V system
wiring; then, turn the
main power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
0003 In the course of a paper
surface search, the encoder
lock signal within 200 msec
does not reach 10 pulses.
Turn off the main
finisher PCB wiring
an the 24V system
main power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
0004 In the course of a paper
surface search, an error is
found in the input of the
paper upper surface, paper
power surface, tray upper
limit, or tray lower limit
sensor.
Turn off the main
power, and correct the
stack tray position;
then, check the
finisher PCB wiring
and the 24V system
fuses, and turn the
main power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit to the
function.
Code Detail
code
E540 upper tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001 upper tray ascent/descent
motor clock error
0002 area error

Chapter 14
14-86
14.4.43 E542 0003-0457
T-14-57
14.4.44 E577 0003-0459
T-14-58
Code Detail
code
E542 lower tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001 lower try ascent/descent
motor clock error
0002 area error
Code Detail
code
E577 paddle error (Finisher-P1)
0001 When the paper retaining
paddle is moved to home
does not go on within
of the operation.
Turn off the main
power, and check
thefinisherPCB and
the 24V system
main power back
on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit on the
function.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-87
14.4.45 E580 0003-0461
T-14-59
0002 When the paper retaining
paddle is moved from
Turn the main
power off, and
check the finisher
PCB wiring and the
24V system fuses;
then, turn the main
power back on.
A shift may be
made to mode that
puts a limit on the
function.
Code Detail
code
E580 stack tray ascent/descent error
faulty stack tray
ascent motor (M5),
stack tray power
height sensor (S10),
stack tray ascent/
descent motor clock
sensor (S9);
disconnected
connector; error load
on stack tray ascent/
descent motor
While the stack tray decent/
decent motor is in operation,
the stack tray upper limit
sensor goes on; or, within
0.8 sec, the clock signal of
the stack tray direction
motor clock sensor is not
detected 15 times or more.
After the stack tray ascent/
descent motor has started
ascent operation, the tray
does not reach the stack tray
height sensor within 4 sec;
or, the tray does not leave
the height sensor.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-88
14.4.46 E584 0003-0463
T-14-60
14.4.47 E590 0003-0464
T-14-61
E584 shutter unit error (Finisher-Q1/Q2)
0001 The shutter open sensor does
not go off (i.e., the shutter
does not close).
0002 The shutter open sensor does
not go on (i.e., the shutter does
not open).
0003 hazardous area
Code Detail
code
E590 punch motor error (punch unit)
0001 The puncher does not
detect the punch home
position sensor when the
punch motor has been
driven 200 msec.
0002 After the motor is stopped
during initalization of the
punch motor, the puncher
does not detect the punch
home position sensor.

Chapter 14
14-89
14.4.48 E591 0003-0466
T-14-62
14.4.49 E592 0003-0468
T-14-63
E591 punch dust sensor error (punch unit)
0001 error light reception voltage
when the light emitter is on
when the light emitter is off
Code Detail
code
E592 punch horizontal registration sensor error (punch unit)
when the light emitter is on (rear
end sensor)
when the light emitter is off (rear
end sensor)
(horizontal registration sensor 1)

Chapter 14
14-90
14.4.50 E593 0003-0470
T-14-64
000A error light reception voltage
E593 punch relocation motor error (punch unit)
0001 When the light emitter is on,
the light reception voltage
HP sensor does not go off.
0002 When the light emitter is off,
the light reception voltage
HP sensor does not go on.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-91
14.4.51 E5F0 0003-0472
T-14-65
14.4.52 E5F1 0003-0474
T-14-66
Code Detail
code
0001 The paper positioning
plate HP sensor does not
go on within 1.33 sec after
the paper positioning plate
motor is driven.
paper positioning plate
motor (M4S), paper
positioning plate HP
sensor (PI7S)
0002 The paper position plate
HP sensor does not go off
within 1 sec after the paper
positioning plate motor is
driven for 1 sec.
paper positioning plate
motor (M4S), paper
positioning plate HP
sensor (PI7S)
Code Detail
code
0001 The number of detection
pulses of the paper fold
motor clock sensor drops
below a specific value.
paper fold motor (M2S),
paper fold motor clock
sensor (PI4S)
0002 The start of the paper fold
HP sensor does not
change within 3 sec after
the paper fold motor is
driven.
paper fold motor (M2S),
paper fold motor clock
sensor (PI4S)

Chapter 14
14-92
14.4.53 E5F2 0003-0476
T-14-67
14.4.54 E5F3 0003-0483
T-14-68
Code Detail
code
0001 The guide HP sensor does
not go on within 0.455 sec
after the guide motor is
driven.
guide motor (M3S), guide
HP sensor (PI3S)
0002 The guide HP sensor dose
not go off within 1 sec
after the guide motor is
driven.
guide motor (M3S), guide
HP sensor (PI3S)
0001 The aligning plate HP
within 0.5 sec after the
alignment motorisdriven.
(at time of initialization,
1.67 sec)
alignment motor
(M5S), aligning plate
HP sensor (PI5S)
0002 The aligning plate HP
within 1 sec after the
alignment motor is driven.
alignment motor
(M5S), aligning plate
HP sensor (PI5S)

Chapter 14
14-93
14.4.55 E5F4 0003-0479
T-14-69
14.4.56 E5F5 0003-0481
T-14-70
Code Detail
code
0001 The stitching operation
when the switch motor
(rear) is driven in reverse
for 0.5 sec or more.
stitch motor (rear;
M6S), switching HP
sensor (rear, MS5S)
0002 The stitching HP sensor
does not go off when the
switch motor (rear) is
driven in normal
direction for 0.5 sec or
more.
switch motor (rear,
M6S), stitching HP
sensor (rear, MS5S)
does not go on when the
switch motor (front) is
driven in reverse for 0.5
sec or more.
switch motor (front,
M7S), stitching HP
sensor (front, MS7S)

Chapter 14
14-94
14.4.57 E5F6 0003-0485
T-14-71
does not go off when the
stitch motor (front) is
driven in normal
direction for 0.5 sec or
more.
switch motor (front,
M7S), stitching HP
sensor (front, MS7S)
Code Detail
code
0001 The paper pushing plate
when the paper pushing
motor is driven for 0.3 sec
or more.
paper pushing plate
motor (M8S), paper
pushing plate HP sensor
(PI14S)
HP sensor does not go off
when the paper pushing
plate motor is driven for 80
msec or more.
paper pushing plate
motor (M8S), paper
pushing plate HP sensor
(PI14S)
0003 The number of detection
pulses of the paper
pushing plate motor clock
sensor drops below a
specific value.
paper pushing plate
motor (M8S), paper
pushing plate motor
clock sensor (PI1S)
leading edge sensor does
not go off when the paper
pushing plate motor is
driven for 80 msec or
more.
paper pushing plate
motor (M8S), paper
pushing plate leading
edge sensor (PI15S)

Chapter 14
14-95
14.4.58 E5F8 0003-0487
T-14-72
14.4.59 E5F9 0003-0489
T-14-73
leading edge sensor does
not go on when the paper
pushing motor is driven
for 0.3 sec or more.
paper pushing plate
motor (M8S), paper
edge sensor (PI15S)
0001 The connector of the
guide HP sensor is
identified as being
disconnected.
connector of guide HP
sensor (PI13S)
paper pushing plate HP
sensor is identified as
being disconnected.
connector of paper
pushing plate HP
sensor (PI4S)
paper pushing plate
leading edge sensor is
identified as being
disconnected.
connector of paper
edge sensor (PI5S)
Code Detail
code
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-96
0001 The inlet cover switch is
identified as being open for 1
sec or more after the start of
printing or after the start of
initial rotation of the host
machine with the cover
identified by the following
sensor as being closed:
- front cover open/closed sensor
(PI2S)
or, the front cover switch
(MS2S) or the delivery cover
switch (MS3S) is open.
inlet cover switch
(MSIS), front cover
switch (MS2S),
delivery cover switch
(MS3S)
0002 The front cover switch is
(PI2S)
front cover switch
(MS2S), delivery
cover switch (MS3S)
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-97
14.4.60 E601 0003-0342
T-14-74
14.4.61 E602 0003-0491
T-14-75
14.4.62 E602 in detail 0003-0493
If the machine indicates E602-xxyy, it requires different approaches as indicated by its
suffix (detail code).
0003 The delivery cover switch is
(PI2S)
delivery cover switch
(MS3S)
Code Detail
code
E601 communication error in image memory (SDRAM)
0000
Code Nature
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-98
If the machine indicates E602-xxyy, be sure to turn off and then on the main power
once (so that the machine will execute automatic recovery sequence).
T-14-76
00 entire HDD 01 The machine cannot recognize the HDD. The machine cannot
Remedy:
Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of cables
(power, IDE) that come from the HDD for connection;
then, turn the main power back on.
02 The machine cannot find the system software for the main
controller (main ) CPU in BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
03 The machine detects a faulty read sector while it reads data from
BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
06 The machine cannot find system software for the main controller
(sub) CPU in BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
07 The machine cannot find appropriate ICCProfile in BOOTDEV/
PDLDEV.
Remedy:
D
F NG
F
E
NG
H F
E
NG NG
F
E
NG
F
E
NG

Chapter 14
14-99
T-14-77
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
FF
DOSDEV
FSTDEV
DOSDEV2
FSTPDEV
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
BOOTDEV
DOSDEV5
not specified
01, 02 The machine has detected a read error or a file system error at
start-up.
Remedy:
Remedy:
Ask the user to collect address book data, transfer
settings, and user mode data using the remote UI.
Remedy:
- in the case of xxyy = FF01, FF02
Remedy:
03 The system has detected an HDD contact fault or an
operation system error.
Remedy:
cables (power supply, IDE) that come from the HDD
for connection; then, turn the main power back on. At
that time, check to see if the HDD is rotating and that
I F
B
NG NG
J F
C
NG NG
J F
E
NG NG
A F
E
NG NG
E D
F
NG NG

Chapter 14
14-100
A:
TYPE.
B:
11, 21 The machine detected an HDD contact fault.
Remedy:
cables (power supply, IDE) for connection; then, turn
the power back on.
At that time, check to see that the HDD is rotating and
13, 25 The machine has detected a read error.
Remedy:
Remedy:
- in the case of xxy = 0813, 0825
Remedy:
10, 12, 14,
22, 23, 24
The machine has detected a system error or a packet data
error.
Remedy:
D
F NG
I F
B
NG NG
I F
C
NG NG
I F
E
NG NG
F
E
NG

Chapter 14
14-101
1) By referring to [HDD format], make the following selections, and enter the appropriate
2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key:
C:
1)** Start up the machine in normal mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down
the 1 and 7 keys); then, make the following selections, and press the OK key:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD.
2) Execute DOSDEV4 using the SST (formatting).
3) When done, turn on and then off the main power.
D:
2) Remove the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM from the older board, and
mount them to the new board.
E:
1)** Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down
the 2 and 8 keys).
using the SST.
F:
1)** Replace the HDD, and start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power
while holding down the 2 and 8 keys).
using the SST.
G:
TYPE.
H:
1) Turn off the main power, and press the 1 and 9 keys to turn it back on (so that the machine
will automatically start its recovery program*, turning the control panel to go fully

Chapter 14
14-102
black).
2) When done (i.e., when the screen has turned fully white), turn off and then on the main
power.
If the machine does not start its recovery program in response to the foregoing
operation, go to E.
I:
1) By referring to [HDD format], make the following selections, and enter an appropriate
J:
TYPE.
** As necessary, ask the user to collect address book data, transfer settings, and user mode
data in advance using the remote UI.
T-14-78
- HDD Format
DOSDEV 1 all image-related data (reservations, Box, fax), mode
FSTDEV 1
DOSDEV2 1
FSTPDEV 1
DOSDEV3 2 PDL spool
PDLDEV 3 PDL-related file (font, registration from, ICCProfile, etc.)

Chapter 14
14-103
14.4.63 E604 0003-0344
T-14-79
14.4.64 E605 0003-0345
T-14-80
software
BOOTDEV 4
DOSDEV5 5 -
not specified 0 -
E604 image memory (SDRAM) shortage
0000 The machine does not
recognize an amount of
memory needed for the
model in question.
For information on
models and memory
amounts, see the
table prepared for it.
Code Detail
code
E605 image memory battery fault
0000 The machine has detected
a drop in the voltage
(below a specific level).
- HDD Format

Chapter 14
14-104
14.4.65 E606 0003-0347
T-14-81
14.4.66 E674 0003-0348
T-14-82
a mount error on the HD at
time of a boot from the
boot ROM.
a read error when booting
the HD from the boot
ROM.
Code Detail
code
0001 The machine has
recognized the fax
board, but it cannot
communicate with it.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the connection
between the fax
board and the main
controller PCB;
then, turn the main
power back on.
If the fault is not
corrected, replace
the fax board or the
main controller
PCB.

Chapter 14
14-105
14.4.67 E677 0003-0349
T-14-83
14.4.68 E710 0003-0351
T-14-84
Code Detail
code
E677 external controller fault
0003 fault in EFI
controller
The machine has
detected a fault during a
configuration check
when starting up an EFI
controller.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the connection
cable; then, turn the
main power back
on.
If the fault is not
corrected,reinstall
the system
software of the
EFI controller.
0010 A controller designed
for a different model is
connected.
Turn off the main
power, and check to
see if the controller
is one designed for
the model and check
the connector cable;
then, turn the main
power back on.
If the fault is not
corrected,reinstall
the system
software of the
EFI controller.
0080 The external controller
has started up normally,
but the machine has
detected an error in the
communication with the
printer unit.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the cable; then, turn
themain powerback
on.
If the fault is not
corrected,reinstall
the system
software of the
EFI controller.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-106
14.4.69 E711 0003-0353
T-14-85
become ready 3 sec after
starting up the IPC chip.
Turn off the main
cable; then, turn the
main power back on.
Code Detail
code
E711 IPC communication error
error
An error is recorded in
the IPC chip error
register 4 times or more
within 1.5 sec.
Turn off the power,
and check the
cable;then, turnthe
power back on.
fault in ADF
controller/reader
controller PCB;
poor connection of
connectorbetween
reader and DADF
0002 IPC communication
error
An error is detected but
cannot be corrected
within 1.5 sec after the
communication
between the finisher
and the printer is
suspended.
Turn off the main
power, and check
thecable;then,turn
the power back on.
error in data
communication;
fault in finisher
controller PCB,
DC controller
PCB; poor
connection of
connector
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-107
14.4.70 E712 0003-0354
T-14-86
14.4.71 E713 0003-0356
T-14-87
14.4.72 E716 0003-0357
T-14-88
Code Detail
code
E712 error in communication between ADF and reader unit
The communication
between the reader unit
and the ADF has stopped,
and 5 sec or more has
passed without recovery.
Code Detail
code
E713 error in communication between finisher and printer
error in data
communication;
fault in fisher
controller PCB, DC
controller PCB
The communication
between the machine
and the finisher is
disrupted.
Turn off the
power, and check
the cable; then,
turn the power
back on.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the cable; then,
turn the main
power back on.
Code Detail
code
E716 error in communication between cassette pedestal and printer unit

Chapter 14
14-108
14.4.73 E717 0003-0359
T-14-89
14.4.74 E719 0003-0361
T-14-90
0000 error in data
communication;
fault in deck
controller or cassette
pedestal controller
PCB
The communication
between the cassette
pedestal and the machine
stopped, and 2 sec or more
has passed without
recovery.
Code Detail
code
E717 error in communication with NE controller
0000 The communication stopped
with the NE controller, and is
not resumed within 3 sec.
recognize the NE controller
that was connected before its
power was turned off.
Reset the error in
service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTIO
N>CLEAR>ERR.
0002 The IPC has an open-circuit,
and the machine cannot
correct the error in the IPC.
Check the cable, and
reset the error in
service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTIO
N>CLEAR>ERR.
E719 error in communication with coin vendor/card reader
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-109
recognize the presence of
a coin vendor at time of
start-up.
0001 When the power is turned
on, the machine does not
recognize the presence of
the coin vendor that was
connected before the
power was turned off.
reset the error in
service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
0002 - The IPC cable
connected to the coin
vendor has an open-
circuit. The machine
cannot recover IPC
communication.
- The machine has
detected an open-circuit
in the pickup/delivery
signal.
- The machine has
detected an illegal
connection (short-circuit
in Tx and Rx of IPC).
reset the error in
service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
0011 When the power is turned
on, the machine does not
recognize the card reader
that was connected
before the power was
turned off.
reset the error in
service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.
detected an open-circuit
in the IPC cable
connected to the card
reader, and the machine
cannot recover the
communication.
reset the error in
service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTI
ON>CLEAR>ERR.

Chapter 14
14-110
14.4.75 E730 0003-0362
T-14-91
Code Detail
code
E730 PDL error
1001 PDL software
error
The machine has
detected an initialization
error at the start of a job.
Execute a PDL
reset, or turn off
and then on the
main power.
100A PDL software
error
While processing a job,
the machine failed to
release the semaphore;
the machine has detected
a system error (e.g.,
initialization error).
Execute a PDL
reset, or turn off
and then on the
main power.
100B PDL master font
error
At time of start-up, the
machine detected a
mismatch between the
version number
indicated in the master
font control file and the
bootable version. The
machine does not detect
the presence of master
font control file in /
BOOTEV.
Execute a PDL
reset, or turn off
and then on the
main power.
If the fault is not
corrected, reinstall
the appropriate
font file, or format
and reinstall all
system software.
9004 open I/F
communica-tion
error
The machine has
detected a PAI error in
the communication with
the EFI controller.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the open I/F board
and the cable for
connection; then,
turn the main
power back on.
If the fault is not
corrected, replace
the EFI controller,
open I/F PCB, or
main controller
PCB.

Chapter 14
14-111
14.4.76 E731 0003-0364
T-14-92
detected a fault in
the video cable
connected to the
EFI controller.
and check the open I/F
board and the cable for
connection; then, turn
Turn off the main
power, and check
the open I/F board
and the cable for
connection; then,
turn the main
power back on.
If the fault is not
corrected, replace
the EFI controller,
open I/F PCB, or
main controller
PCB.
A006 PDL communica-
tion error
PDL does not respond.
PDL does not respond
because of a fault in the
sub bootbable program,
the absence of a sub
bootable program, or
fault in RIPA.
Execute a PDL
reset; or, turn off
the main power,
check the SURF2
board for
connection, and
turn the main
power back on.
If the fault is not
corrected, reinstall
the firmware, or
replace the main
controller PCB.
A007 PDL version
mismatch
machine detected a
mismatch in the versions
between the machine's
control software and the
PDL control software.
Execute a PDL
reset, or turn off
and then on the
main power.
If the fault is not
corrected, format
and reinstall all
system software.
B013 PDL built-in font
error
machine detected
damage in the font data.
Turn off and then
on the main power.
If the fault is not
corrected, format
and reinstall all
system software.
Code Detail
code
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-112
14.4.77 E732 0003-0366
T-14-93
3000 UFR board error At time of start-up, the
machine does not
recognizethepresence of
a UFR1 board.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the connection of
the UFR2 board;
then, turn the main
power back on.
If the fault is not
corrected, replace
the UFR2 board or
the main
controller PCB.
3001 The machine
cannot initialize
the UFR board.
At time of startup, the
machine failed to
initialize UFR1.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the UFR2 board;
then, turn the main
power back on.
If the fault is not
corrected, replace
the UFR2 board or
the main
controller PCB.
3002 The machine
cannot initialize
the RAM bus.
TBD
3015 No image data
arrives at the
main controller
PCB.
The machine's software
is free of a fault when
processing a job;
however, video data fails
to arrive at CL1-G.
Turn off and then
on the main power.
If the fault cannot
be corrected,
replace the UFR2
board or the main
controller PCB.
Code Detail
code
E732 reader communication error
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-113
14.4.78 E733 0003-0367
T-14-94
0001 DDI-S
communica-
tion error
Turn off the main
power, and check
the connectors used
to connect to the
reader unit; then,
check the reader
power supply, and
turn the main power
back on.
9999 On a printer model, a
reader unit has been
detected at time of start-
up. (A copier model
starts up once as a printer
model at time of RAM
initialization.)
Turn off and then
on the main power.
The indication on
the machine is
limited to "Turn On
the Power."
Code Detail
code
E733 printer communication error
0000 printer
communica-tion
error
machine cannot detect
the presence of a printer
unit.
Turn off the main
connectors used to
connect the DC
controller PCB and
the main controller
PCB; then, check the
power supply of the
printer unit, and turn
the main power back
on.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-114
14.4.79 E740 0003-0368
T-14-95
14.4.80 E743 0003-0370
T-14-96
0001 DDI-P
communica-tion
error
Turn off the main
connectors used to
connect the DC
controller PCB and
the main controller
PCB; then, check the
power supply of the
printer unit, and turn
the main power back
on.
Code Detail
code
0002 At time of start-up, the
MAC address proves to be
illegal.
Turn off the main
power, and replace
the NIC; then, turn
the main power
back on.
The machine has
detected a non-
Canon MAC
address.
Code Detail
code
E743 DDI communication error
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-115
14.4.81 E744 0003-0381
T-14-97
The reader controller PCB
has detected an error in
communication between
the main controller PCB
an the reader controller
PCB.
Disconnect and then
connect the DDI-S
cable connector;
replace the reader
controller PCB or the
main controller PCB.
Code Detail
code
0001 The language version
stored on the HDD and
the bootable ROM
version are different
from each other.
Download a
language file with
the correct version
using the service
support tool.
0002 The size of the language
file on the HDD is too
large.
Download a
language file with
the correct version
using the service
support tool.
0003 The machine cannot find
a language file specified
by config.txt stored on
the HDD.
Download a
language file with
the correct version
using the service
support tool.
The machine cannot
switch over to a language
file stored on the HDD.
Download a
language file with
the correct version
using the service
support tool.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-116
14.4.82 E745 0003-0382
T-14-98
0004 The machine cannot
switch power to a
language file stored on
the HDD.
0005 The boot ROM mounted
in the machine is one
designed for a different
model.
1000 boot ROM
project error
The boot ROM
connectedto the machine
is one designed for a
different model.
Turn off the main
power, and replace
the boot ROM with
an appropriate one;
then, turn the main
power back on.
3000 illegal boot
ROM module
version
boot ROM is identified
as not being able to
operate normally.
Upgrade the boot
ROM, or replace it.
Code Detail
code
E745 TokenRing board error
0001 When initializing the
TokeRing driver, the
machine failed to
initialize the PCI.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the connector of the
TokenRing board;
then, replace the
TokenRing, and
turn the main
power back on.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-117
14.4.83 E746 0003-0383
T-14-99
0002 faulty MAC
address
When initializing the
TokenRing driver, the
machine found that the
MAC address was faulty.
Turn off the main
power, and replace
the TokenRing
board; then, turn
the main power
back on.
0003 The machine
cannot obtain
board
information.
When initializing the
machine suffered an error
in obtaining/setting up
the board information.
Turn off the main
power, and replace
the TokenRing
board; then, turn
the main power
back on.
0004 connector error When starting up the
machine suffered a
connection error.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the cable
connection and the
power supply of the
MAU; then, turn
the main power
back on.
Code Detail
code
E746 wrong accessories board
machine detected a UFR
board designed for a
different model.
Replace the UFR
board with an
appropriate one.
The machine
checks the engine
ID to see if it is a
correct one.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-118
14.4.84 E747 0003-0385
T-14-100
14.4.85 E803 0003-0388
T-14-101
machine detects a
scanner board designed
for a different model.
Replace the scanner
board with an
appropriate one.
The machine
checks the engine
ID to see if it is a
correct one.
Code Detail
code
E747 error in image processing ASIC or memory control/communication control ASIC
--- The machine has detected
an error (e.g., image data
transfer error) in IC1015
(image processing ASIC)
or IC1012 (memory
control/communication
ASIC; CPU) of the main
controller PCB.
Turn off the main
main controller
PCB; then, turn the
main power back on.
Code Detail
code
E803 door closed error
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-119
14.4.86 E804 0003-0390
T-14-102
0001 The machine detected a
remote (+24V) OFF
state immediately after
the door is closed.
Turn off the main
DC controller PCB
and the presence/
absence of a fault in
the interlock; then,
turn the main power
back on.
fault in interlock;
short-circuit in 24V
system; other fault
in power supply;
open-circuit around
power supply;
blown fuse
0002 The machine detects a
remote (+13V) OFF
state immediately after
the door is closed.
Turn off the main
DC controller PCB
wiring and the
presence/absenceofa
fault in the interlock;
then, turn the main
power back on.
fault in interlock;
open-circuit in 13V
system; other fault
in power supply;
open-circuit around
power supply
Code Detail
code
that the controller fan
remained at rest for 16 sec
continuously.
Turn off the main
power to the fan or
replace the fan; then,
turn the main power
back on.
Code Detail
code

Chapter 14
14-120
14.4.87 E805 0003-0392
T-14-103
Code Detail
code
E805 fan error
0001 With the exhaust fan
(front) in operation, the
machine does not detect a
lock state for 5 sec
continuously.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the DC controller
PCB; then, turn the
main power back
on.
disconnected fan
connector; absence
of lock signal
because of fault in
fan
0002 With the exhaust fan
(rear) in operation, the
continuously.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the DC controller
PCB wiring; then,
turn the main power
back on.
disconnected fan
connector; absence
of lock signal
because of fault in
fan
0003 With the ITB fan in
operation, the machine
does not detect a lock state
for 5 sec continuously.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the DC controller
PCB; then, turn the
power back on.
disconnected fan
connector; absence
of lock signal
because of fault in
fan
0004 With the fan and the toner
fan in operation, the
continuously.
Turn off the main
power, and check
the DC controller
PCB wiring; then,
turn the main power
back on.
disconnected fan
connector; absence
of signal because of
fault in fan

Contents
Contents
15.1 Outline....................................................................................................15-1
15.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ........................................................15-1
15.1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections ...............................15-2
15.1.3 Ending Service Mode......................................................................15-3
15.1.4 Back-Up ..........................................................................................15-3
15.1.5 Initial Screen ...................................................................................15-5
15.1.6 2nd/3rd Item Screen ........................................................................15-5
15.1.7 4th Item Screen ...............................................................................15-6
15.2 DISPLAY（Status Display Mode）
.......................................................15-8
15.2.1 COPIER...........................................................................................15-8
15.2.1.1 VERSION ................................................................................15-8
15.2.1.1.1 Overview...........................................................................15-8
15.2.1.1.2 <DC-CON>.......................................................................15-8
15.2.1.1.3 <R-CON>..........................................................................15-8
15.2.1.1.4 <PANEL> .........................................................................15-8
15.2.1.1.5 <ECO> ..............................................................................15-8
15.2.1.1.6 <FEEDER> .......................................................................15-8
15.2.1.1.7 <SORTER>.......................................................................15-8
15.2.1.1.8 <FAX> ..............................................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.9 <NIB> ...............................................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.10 <PS/PCL> .......................................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.11 <LIPS> ............................................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.12 <SDL-STCH> .................................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.13 <OP-CON> .....................................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.14 <MN-CON> ....................................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.15 <BOOT-ROM>...............................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.16 <DIAG-DVC>.................................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.17 <RUI> .............................................................................15-9
15.2.1.1.18 <PUNCH>.....................................................................15-10
15.2.1.1.19 <LANG-EN>.................................................................15-10
15.2.1.1.20 <LANG-FR>.................................................................15-10
15.2.1.1.21 <LANG-DE>.................................................................15-10

15.2.1.1.22 <LANG-IT>..................................................................15-10
15.2.1.1.23 <LANG-JP>..................................................................15-10
15.2.1.1.24 <GDI-UFR>..................................................................15-10
15.2.1.2 ACC-STS...............................................................................15-10
15.2.1.2.1 Overview.........................................................................15-10
15.2.1.2.2 <FEEDER>.....................................................................15-10
15.2.1.2.3 <SORTER>.....................................................................15-11
15.2.1.2.4 <DECK> .........................................................................15-11
15.2.1.2.5 <CARD>.........................................................................15-11
15.2.1.2.6 <DATA-CON> ...............................................................15-11
15.2.1.2.7 <RAM>...........................................................................15-11
15.2.1.2.8 <COINROBO> ...............................................................15-11
15.2.1.2.9 <NIB> .............................................................................15-11
15.2.1.2.10 <NETWARE>...............................................................15-12
15.2.1.2.11 <SEND>........................................................................15-12
15.2.1.3 ANALOG...............................................................................15-12
15.2.1.3.1 Overview.........................................................................15-12
15.2.1.3.2 <TEMP> .........................................................................15-12
15.2.1.3.3 <HUM>...........................................................................15-12
15.2.1.3.4 <ABS-HUM>..................................................................15-12
15.2.1.3.5 <FIX-UC>.......................................................................15-12
15.2.1.3.6 <FIX-UE>.......................................................................15-13
15.2.1.4 JAM........................................................................................15-13
15.2.1.4.1 Overview.........................................................................15-13
15.2.1.4.2 <No.> ..............................................................................15-16
15.2.1.4.3 <DATE> .........................................................................15-16
15.2.1.4.4 <TIME1> ........................................................................15-16
15.2.1.4.5 <TIME2> ........................................................................15-16
15.2.1.4.6 <L>..................................................................................15-16
15.2.1.4.7 <CODE> .........................................................................15-17
15.2.1.4.8 <P>..................................................................................15-17
15.2.1.4.9 <CNTR> .........................................................................15-17
15.2.1.4.10 <SIZE>..........................................................................15-17
15.2.1.4.11 Jam Code (jam type) .....................................................15-17
15.2.1.4.12 Jam Code (printer unit) .................................................15-18
15.2.1.4.13 Jam Code (finisher-related)...........................................15-19

Contents
15.2.1.4.14 Jam Code (ADF-related)...............................................15-20
15.2.1.5 ERR........................................................................................15-22
15.2.1.5.1 Overview.........................................................................15-22
15.2.1.5.2 <No.> ..............................................................................15-22
15.2.1.5.3 <DATE>..........................................................................15-22
15.2.1.5.4 <TIME1>.........................................................................15-23
15.2.1.5.5 <DATE2>........................................................................15-23
15.2.1.5.6 <CODE> .........................................................................15-23
15.2.1.5.7 <DTL>.............................................................................15-23
15.2.1.5.8 <L>..................................................................................15-23
15.2.1.5.9 <P> ..................................................................................15-23
15.2.1.6 DENS .....................................................................................15-24
15.2.1.6.1 Overview.........................................................................15-24
15.2.1.6.2 <DENS-Y>......................................................................15-24
15.2.1.6.3 <DENS-M>.....................................................................15-24
15.2.1.6.4 <DENS-C>......................................................................15-25
15.2.1.6.5 <DENS-K>......................................................................15-25
15.2.1.6.6 <REF-Y/M/C> ................................................................15-25
15.2.1.6.7 <SGNL-Y/M/C> .............................................................15-26
15.2.1.6.8 <P-SENS-P> ...................................................................15-26
15.2.1.7 MISC......................................................................................15-26
15.2.1.7.1 Overview.........................................................................15-26
15.2.1.7.2 <DRM-LIFE> .................................................................15-27
15.2.1.8 ALARM-1..............................................................................15-27
15.2.1.8.1 Overview.........................................................................15-27
15.2.1.8.2 <IMG-DT-Y>..................................................................15-27
15.2.1.8.3 <IMG-DT-M>.................................................................15-27
15.2.1.8.4 <IMG-DT-C>..................................................................15-27
15.2.1.8.5 <IMG-DT-K>..................................................................15-27
15.2.1.9 ALARM-2..............................................................................15-27
15.2.1.9.1 Overview.........................................................................15-27
15.2.1.10 ENVRNT..............................................................................15-29
15.2.1.10.1 Overview.......................................................................15-29
15.2.2 FEEDER........................................................................................15-30
15.2.2.1 Overview................................................................................15-30
15.2.2.2 <FEEDSIZE>.........................................................................15-31

Contents
15.2.2.3 <TRY-WIDE> .......................................................................15-31
15.2.3 DISPLAY(Status Display Mode)Level2 ......................................15-31
15.2.3.1 COPIER .................................................................................15-31
15.2.3.1.1 VERSION .......................................................................15-31
15.2.3.1.2 CST-STS.........................................................................15-33
15.2.3.1.3 HV-STS...........................................................................15-33
15.2.3.1.4 CCD ................................................................................15-33
15.2.3.1.5 DPOT ..............................................................................15-34
15.2.3.1.6 DENS ..............................................................................15-35
15.3 I/O （I/O Display Mode）
....................................................................15-37
15.3.1 Overview.......................................................................................15-37
15.3.2 <DC-CON>...................................................................................15-38
15.3.3 <R-CON>......................................................................................15-42
15.3.4 <FEEDER>...................................................................................15-44
15.3.5 <SORTER>...................................................................................15-45
15.3.6 <MN-CON>..................................................................................15-53
15.4 ADJUST（Adjustment Mode）
............................................................15-56
15.4.1 COPIER ........................................................................................15-56
15.4.1.1 ADJ-XY .................................................................................15-56
15.4.1.1.1 Overview.........................................................................15-56
15.4.1.1.2 <ADJ-X>.........................................................................15-56
15.4.1.1.3 <ADJ-Y>.........................................................................15-57
15.4.1.1.4 <ADJ-S> .........................................................................15-58
15.4.1.1.5 <ADJ-Y-DF>..................................................................15-59
15.4.1.1.6 <STRD-POS> .................................................................15-59
15.4.1.2 CCD .......................................................................................15-59
15.4.1.2.1 Overview.........................................................................15-59
15.4.1.2.2 <W-PLT-X/Y/Z>............................................................15-60
15.4.1.2.3 <CCDU-RG>..................................................................15-60
15.4.1.2.4 <MTF-MG>....................................................................15-61
15.4.1.2.5 <MTF-SG> .....................................................................15-61
15.4.1.2.6 <BOOK-RG>..................................................................15-62
15.4.1.2.7 <DF-RG>........................................................................15-63
15.4.1.2.8 <50-RG> .........................................................................15-63
15.4.1.2.9 <50-GB> .........................................................................15-63
15.4.1.2.10 <100-RG> .....................................................................15-63

Contents
15.4.1.2.11 <100-GB> .....................................................................15-63
15.4.1.2.12 <50DF-RG> ..................................................................15-64
15.4.1.2.13 <50DF-GB> ..................................................................15-64
15.4.1.2.14 <100DF-RG> ................................................................15-64
15.4.1.2.15 <100DF-GB> ................................................................15-64
15.4.1.2.16 <DFTAR-R> .................................................................15-64
15.4.1.2.17 <DFTAR-G>.................................................................15-65
15.4.1.2.18 <DFTAR-B> .................................................................15-65
15.4.1.2.19 <DFTAR2-R> ...............................................................15-65
15.4.1.2.20 <DFTAR2-G>...............................................................15-66
15.4.1.2.21 <DFTAR2-B> ...............................................................15-66
15.4.1.3 LASER ...................................................................................15-66
15.4.1.3.1 Overview.........................................................................15-66
15.4.1.3.2 <PVE-OFST>..................................................................15-67
15.4.1.3.3 <LA-DELAY> ................................................................15-67
15.4.1.4 IMG-REG...............................................................................15-67
15.4.1.4.1 Overview.........................................................................15-67
15.4.1.4.2 <REG-V-Y>....................................................................15-68
15.4.1.4.3 <REG-V-K>....................................................................15-68
15.4.1.4.4 <REG2-V-Y>..................................................................15-69
15.4.1.4.5 <REG2-V-K>..................................................................15-69
15.4.1.4.6 <REG-V-M> ...................................................................15-70
15.4.1.4.7 <REG2-V-M> .................................................................15-70
15.4.1.5 DENS .....................................................................................15-71
15.4.1.5.1 Overview.........................................................................15-71
15.4.1.5.2 <SGNL-Y>......................................................................15-71
15.4.1.5.3 <SGNL-M>.....................................................................15-71
15.4.1.5.4 <SGNL-C>......................................................................15-71
15.4.1.5.5 <SGNL-D>......................................................................15-72
15.4.1.5.6 <REF-Y>.........................................................................15-72
15.4.1.5.7 <REF-M> ........................................................................15-72
15.4.1.5.8 <REF-C>.........................................................................15-72
15.4.1.5.9 <REF-D>.........................................................................15-73
15.4.1.6 BLANK..................................................................................15-73
15.4.1.6.1 Overview.........................................................................15-73
15.4.1.6.2 <BLANK-T>...................................................................15-73

Contents
15.4.1.6.3 <BLANK-L>...................................................................15-74
15.4.1.6.4 <BLANK-R> ..................................................................15-74
15.4.1.6.5 <BLANK-B> ..................................................................15-74
15.4.1.7 PASCAL ................................................................................15-75
15.4.1.7.1 Overview.........................................................................15-75
15.4.1.7.2 <OFST-P-Y>...................................................................15-75
15.4.1.7.3 <OFST-P-M>..................................................................15-75
15.4.1.7.4 <OFST-P-C>...................................................................15-76
15.4.1.7.5 <OFST-P-K>...................................................................15-76
15.4.1.8 COLOR..................................................................................15-76
15.4.1.8.1 Overview.........................................................................15-76
15.4.1.8.2 <ADJ-Y>.........................................................................15-77
15.4.1.8.3 <ADJ-M>........................................................................15-77
15.4.1.8.4 <ADJ-C>.........................................................................15-77
15.4.1.8.5 <ADJ-K>.........................................................................15-78
15.4.1.8.6 <OFST-Y>......................................................................15-78
15.4.1.8.7 <OFST-M> .....................................................................15-78
15.4.1.8.8 <OFST-C> ......................................................................15-79
15.4.1.8.9 <OFST-K>......................................................................15-79
15.4.1.9 HV-PRI ..................................................................................15-79
15.4.1.9.1 Overview.........................................................................15-79
15.4.1.9.2 <OFST1-AC> .................................................................15-80
15.4.1.9.3 <PRI-GAIN>...................................................................15-80
15.4.1.9.4 <PRI-OFST>...................................................................15-81
15.4.1.9.5 <DR-I-INT>....................................................................15-81
15.4.1.10 HV-TR .................................................................................15-82
15.4.1.10.1 Overview.......................................................................15-82
15.4.1.10.2 <2TR-GAIN>................................................................15-82
15.4.1.10.3 <2TR-OFST>................................................................15-82
15.4.1.10.4 <1TR-GAIN>................................................................15-83
15.4.1.10.5 <1TR-OFST>................................................................15-83
15.4.1.11 FEED-ADJ...........................................................................15-84
15.4.1.11.1 Overview.......................................................................15-84
15.4.1.11.2 <REGIST>....................................................................15-84
15.4.1.11.3 <ADJ-C1>.....................................................................15-85
15.4.1.11.4 <ADJ-C2>.....................................................................15-85

Contents
15.4.1.11.5 <ADJ-C3>.....................................................................15-85
15.4.1.11.6 <ADJ-C4>.....................................................................15-86
15.4.1.11.7 <ADJ-MF>....................................................................15-86
15.4.1.11.8 <ADJ-DK>....................................................................15-87
15.4.1.11.9 <RG-REFE>..................................................................15-87
15.4.1.11.10 <ADJ-C1RE>..............................................................15-88
15.4.1.11.11 <ADJ-C2RE>..............................................................15-88
15.4.1.11.12 <ADJ-C3RE>..............................................................15-89
15.4.1.11.13 <ADJ-C4RE>..............................................................15-89
15.4.1.11.14 <ADJ-DKRE>.............................................................15-90
15.4.1.11.15 <ADJ-MFRE>.............................................................15-90
15.4.1.11.16 <RG-HF-SP>...............................................................15-91
15.4.1.12 CST-ADJ..............................................................................15-91
15.4.1.12.1 Overview.......................................................................15-91
15.4.1.12.2 <MF-A4R>....................................................................15-91
15.4.1.12.3 <MF-A6R>....................................................................15-92
15.4.1.12.4 <MF-A4> ......................................................................15-92
15.4.1.13 MISC....................................................................................15-93
15.4.1.13.1 Overview.......................................................................15-93
15.4.1.13.2 <SEG-ADJ> ..................................................................15-93
15.4.1.13.3 <K-ADJ>.......................................................................15-93
15.4.1.13.4 <ACS-ADJ>..................................................................15-94
15.4.2 FEEDER........................................................................................15-94
15.4.2.1 Overview................................................................................15-94
15.4.2.2 <DOCST> ..............................................................................15-94
15.4.2.3 <LA-SPEED> ........................................................................15-95
15.4.3 SORTER .......................................................................................15-95
15.4.3.1 Overview................................................................................15-95
15.4.3.2 <PNCH-HLE>........................................................................15-95
15.4.4 ADJUST （Adjustment Mode）Level2.......................................15-95
15.4.4.1 COPIER..................................................................................15-95
15.4.4.1.1 LASER ............................................................................15-95
15.4.4.1.2 DENS ..............................................................................15-96
15.4.4.1.3 V-CONT..........................................................................15-96
15.4.4.1.4 COLOR .........................................................................15-100
15.4.4.1.5 HV-TR...........................................................................15-101

Contents
15.4.4.1.6 FEED-ADJ....................................................................15-106
15.4.4.1.7 MISC.............................................................................15-107
15.5 FUNCTION （Operation/Inspection Mode）
....................................15-109
15.5.1 COPIER ......................................................................................15-109
15.5.1.1 INSTALL.............................................................................15-109
15.5.1.1.1 Overview.......................................................................15-109
15.5.1.1.2 <STIR-Y> .....................................................................15-109
15.5.1.1.3 <STIR-M>.....................................................................15-109
15.5.1.1.4 <STIR-C> .....................................................................15-109
15.5.1.1.5 <STIR-K> .....................................................................15-110
15.5.1.1.6 <STIR-4>......................................................................15-110
15.5.1.1.7 <INIT-Y>......................................................................15-110
15.5.1.1.8 <INIT-M> .....................................................................15-111
15.5.1.1.9 <INIT-C>......................................................................15-111
15.5.1.1.10 <INIT-3>.....................................................................15-111
15.5.1.1.11 <SPLY-H-Y>..............................................................15-111
15.5.1.1.12 <SPLY-H-M> .............................................................15-112
15.5.1.1.13 <SPLY-H-C>..............................................................15-112
15.5.1.1.14 <SPLY-H-K>..............................................................15-112
15.5.1.1.15 <SPLY-H-4>...............................................................15-113
15.5.1.1.16 <STRD-POS> .............................................................15-113
15.5.1.1.17 <CARD>.....................................................................15-113
15.5.1.1.18 <KEY>........................................................................15-114
15.5.1.2 CCD .....................................................................................15-114
15.5.1.2.1 Overview.......................................................................15-114
15.5.1.2.2 <DF-WLVL1/2>...........................................................15-114
15.5.1.3 CST ......................................................................................15-115
15.5.1.3.1 Overview.......................................................................15-115
15.5.1.3.2 <MF-A4R, MF-A6R, MF-A4>.....................................15-115
15.5.1.4 CLEANING .........................................................................15-116
15.5.1.4.1 Overview.......................................................................15-116
15.5.1.4.2 <TBLT-CLN>...............................................................15-116
15.5.1.4.3 <FDRL-CLN>...............................................................15-116
15.5.1.4.4 <RVRL-CLN>..............................................................15-117
15.5.1.4.5 <DEVL-CLN>..............................................................15-117
15.5.1.4.6 <TB-INSD> ..................................................................15-117

Contents
15.5.1.5 FIXING ................................................................................15-118
15.5.1.5.1 Overview.......................................................................15-118
15.5.1.5.2 <NIP-CHK> ..................................................................15-118
15.5.1.6 PANEL.................................................................................15-120
15.5.1.6.1 Overview.......................................................................15-120
15.5.1.6.2 <LCD-CHK>.................................................................15-120
15.5.1.6.3 <LED-CHK>.................................................................15-121
15.5.1.6.4 <LED-OFF>..................................................................15-121
15.5.1.6.5 <KEY-CHK> ................................................................15-121
15.5.1.6.6 <TOUCHCHK>............................................................15-122
15.5.1.7 PART-CHK..........................................................................15-122
15.5.1.7.1 Overview.......................................................................15-122
15.5.1.7.2 <CL> .............................................................................15-123
15.5.1.7.3 <CL-ON> ......................................................................15-123
15.5.1.7.4 <FAN> ..........................................................................15-124
15.5.1.7.5 <FAN-ON> ...................................................................15-124
15.5.1.7.6 <MTR>..........................................................................15-124
15.5.1.7.7 <MTR-ON>...................................................................15-125
15.5.1.7.8 <SL>..............................................................................15-126
15.5.1.7.9 <SL-ON>.......................................................................15-127
15.5.1.8 CLEAR.................................................................................15-127
15.5.1.8.1 Overview.......................................................................15-127
15.5.1.8.2 <ERR>...........................................................................15-127
15.5.1.8.3 <DC-CON>...................................................................15-128
15.5.1.8.4 <R-CON>......................................................................15-128
15.5.1.8.5 <JAM-HIST> ................................................................15-129
15.5.1.8.6 <ERR-HIST> ................................................................15-129
15.5.1.8.7 <PWD-CLR> ................................................................15-129
15.5.1.8.8 <ADRS-BK>.................................................................15-129
15.5.1.8.9 <CNT-MCON>.............................................................15-130
15.5.1.8.10 <CNT-DCON>............................................................15-130
15.5.1.8.11 <OPTION>..................................................................15-130
15.5.1.8.12 <MMI>........................................................................15-131
15.5.1.8.13 <MN-CON> ................................................................15-131
15.5.1.8.14 <CARD> .....................................................................15-132
15.5.1.8.15 <DRM-LIFE> .............................................................15-132

Contents
15.5.1.9 MISC-R................................................................................15-133
15.5.1.9.1 Overview.......................................................................15-133
15.5.1.9.2 <SCANLAMP> ............................................................15-133
15.5.1.10 MISC-P ..............................................................................15-133
15.5.1.10.1 Overview.....................................................................15-133
15.5.1.10.2 <P-PRINT>.................................................................15-133
15.5.1.10.3 <USER-PRT> .............................................................15-134
15.5.1.10.4 <LBL-PRNT>.............................................................15-134
15.5.1.10.5 <DEV-DR-Y>.............................................................15-134
15.5.1.10.6 <DEV-DR-M>............................................................15-135
15.5.1.10.7 <DEV-DR-C>.............................................................15-135
15.5.1.10.8 <DEV-DR-K>.............................................................15-136
15.5.1.10.9 <ITB-CLSW> .............................................................15-136
15.5.1.10.10 <DRM-CHK> ...........................................................15-137
15.5.1.10.11 <1ATVC-EX>...........................................................15-137
15.5.1.10.12 <ENV-PRT> .............................................................15-138
15.5.1.11 SYSTEM............................................................................15-138
15.5.1.11.1 Overview.....................................................................15-138
15.5.1.11.2 <DOWNLOAD>.........................................................15-138
15.5.1.11.3 <CHK-TYPE> ............................................................15-139
15.5.1.11.4 <HD-CHECK> ...........................................................15-139
15.5.1.11.5 <HD-CLEAR>............................................................15-139
15.5.2 FEEDER .....................................................................................15-140
15.5.2.1 Overview..............................................................................15-140
15.5.2.2 <MTR-CHK>.......................................................................15-140
15.5.2.3 <TRY-A4>...........................................................................15-140
15.5.2.4 <TRY-A5R> ........................................................................15-141
15.5.2.5 <TRY-LTR> ........................................................................15-141
15.5.2.6 <TRY-LTRR> .....................................................................15-141
15.5.2.7 <FEED-CHK> .....................................................................15-141
15.5.2.8 <SL-CHK>...........................................................................15-141
15.5.2.9 <SL-ON> .............................................................................15-142
15.5.2.10 <MTR-ON> .......................................................................15-142
15.5.2.11 <ROLL-CLN> ...................................................................15-142
15.5.2.12 <FEED-ON>......................................................................15-142
15.5.3 FUNCTION （operation/inspection mode）:Level 2................15-143

Contents
15.5.3.1 COPIER................................................................................15-143
15.5.3.1.1 CCD...............................................................................15-143
15.5.3.1.2 LASER ..........................................................................15-143
15.5.3.1.3 CLEAR..........................................................................15-144
15.5.3.1.4 MISC-P .........................................................................15-144
15.6 OPTION （Machine Settings Mode）
................................................15-145
15.6.1 COPIER.......................................................................................15-145
15.6.1.1 BODY ..................................................................................15-145
15.6.1.1.1 Overview.......................................................................15-145
15.6.1.1.2 <MODEL-SZ> ..............................................................15-145
15.6.1.1.3 <PASCAL>...................................................................15-145
15.6.1.1.4 <CONFIG> ...................................................................15-146
15.6.1.1.5 <TEMP-TBL>...............................................................15-146
15.6.1.1.6 <W/SCNR>...................................................................15-147
15.6.1.1.7 <RUI-DSP>...................................................................15-147
15.6.1.1.8 <NW-SPEED> ..............................................................15-147
15.6.1.1.9 <DEVL-PTH>...............................................................15-148
15.6.1.1.10 <DFDST-L1>..............................................................15-148
15.6.1.1.11 <DFDST-L2>..............................................................15-148
15.6.1.1.12 <DST-POS> ................................................................15-149
15.6.1.1.13 <CCD-LUT>...............................................................15-149
15.6.1.1.14 <2T-RL-TM> ..............................................................15-149
15.6.1.1.15 <ENVP-INT>..............................................................15-150
15.6.1.1.16 <FX-SPD2>.................................................................15-150
15.6.1.1.17 <LPW-TIME>.............................................................15-151
15.6.1.2 USER....................................................................................15-151
15.6.1.2.1 Overview.......................................................................15-151
15.6.1.2.2 <COPY-LIM>...............................................................15-151
15.6.1.2.3 <SLEEP>.......................................................................15-151
15.6.1.2.4 <COUNTER 1> ............................................................15-152
15.6.1.2.5 <COUNTER 2> ............................................................15-152
15.6.1.2.6 <COUNTER 3> ............................................................15-152
15.6.1.2.7 <COUNTER 4> ............................................................15-153
15.6.1.2.8 <COUNTER 5> ............................................................15-153
15.6.1.2.9 <COUNTER 6> ............................................................15-153
15.6.1.2.10 Software Counter Specifications.................................15-154

Contents
15.6.1.2.11 <CONTROL> .............................................................15-167
15.6.1.2.12 <B4-L-CNT> ..............................................................15-168
15.6.1.2.13 <COPY-JOB>.............................................................15-168
15.6.1.2.14 <IDPRN-SW>.............................................................15-168
15.6.1.2.15 <CPRT-DSP> .............................................................15-169
15.6.1.2.16 <CNT-SW>.................................................................15-169
15.6.1.2.17 <REMPNL>................................................................15-169
15.6.1.2.18 <BCONT-AST>..........................................................15-169
15.6.1.2.19 <DFLT-CPY>.............................................................15-170
15.6.1.2.20 <DFLT-BOX> ............................................................15-170
15.6.1.2.21 <DOC-REM>..............................................................15-170
15.6.1.3 CST ......................................................................................15-171
15.6.1.3.1 Overview.......................................................................15-171
15.6.1.3.2 <ENV1/ENV2>.............................................................15-171
15.6.1.4 ACC .....................................................................................15-171
15.6.1.4.1 Overview.......................................................................15-171
15.6.1.4.2 <COIN> ........................................................................15-172
15.6.1.4.3 <DK-P>.........................................................................15-172
15.6.1.4.4 <CARD-SW>................................................................15-172
15.6.1.4.5 <OUT-TRAY>..............................................................15-172
15.6.1.5 INT-FACE ...........................................................................15-173
15.6.1.5.1 Overview.......................................................................15-173
15.6.1.5.2 <IMG-CONT>..............................................................15-173
15.6.1.6 COMBO...............................................................................15-175
15.6.1.6.1 Overview.......................................................................15-175
15.6.1.6.2 <PPR/COL/MOD-SLCT> ............................................15-175
15.6.1.6.3 <2TR-SW1/SW2/SW3/SW4/SW5> .............................15-176
15.6.2 SORTER .....................................................................................15-176
15.6.2.1 Overview..............................................................................15-176
15.6.2.2 <BLNK-SW>.......................................................................15-176
15.6.2.3 <MD-SPRTN>.....................................................................15-177
15.6.3 BOARD.......................................................................................15-177
15.6.3.1 Overview..............................................................................15-177
15.6.3.2 <SURF-OFF> ......................................................................15-177
15.6.4 OPTION （mechanical specifications setting mode）:Level 2.15-178
15.6.4.1 COPIER ...............................................................................15-178

Contents
15.6.4.1.1 BODY ...........................................................................15-178
15.6.4.1.2 USER.............................................................................15-194
15.6.4.1.3 CST ...............................................................................15-198
15.6.4.1.4 ACC...............................................................................15-199
15.6.4.1.5 INT-FACE.....................................................................15-200
15.6.4.2 BOARD................................................................................15-201
15.6.4.2.1 <MENU-1 to 4> ...........................................................15-201
15.7 TEST （Test Print Mode）
.................................................................15-202
15.7.1 COPIER.......................................................................................15-202
15.7.1.1 PG.........................................................................................15-202
15.7.1.1.1 Overview.......................................................................15-202
15.7.1.1.2 <TYPE> ........................................................................15-202
15.7.1.1.3 <TXPH>........................................................................15-203
15.7.1.1.4 <THRU> .......................................................................15-203
15.7.1.1.5 <DENS-Y,DENS-M,DENS-C,DENS-K> ....................15-204
15.7.1.1.6 <COLOR-Y,COLOR-M,COLOR-C,COLOR-K>........15-204
15.7.1.1.7 <F/M-SW>....................................................................15-204
15.7.1.1.8 <PG-PICK>...................................................................15-204
15.7.1.1.9 <2-SIDE> ......................................................................15-205
15.7.1.1.10 <PG-QTY>..................................................................15-205
15.7.1.2 NETWORK..........................................................................15-205
15.7.1.2.1 <Outline> ......................................................................15-205
15.7.1.2.2 <PING>.........................................................................15-206
15.8 COUNTER （Counter Mode）
...........................................................15-208
15.8.1 COPIER.......................................................................................15-208
15.8.1.1 TOTAL.................................................................................15-208
15.8.1.1.1 <Overview>...................................................................15-208
15.8.1.1.2 <SERVICE1>................................................................15-208
15.8.1.1.3 <SERVICE2>................................................................15-208
15.8.1.1.4 <COPY>........................................................................15-208
15.8.1.1.5 <PDL-PRT> ..................................................................15-208
15.8.1.1.6 <FAX-PRT>..................................................................15-209
15.8.1.1.7 <RMT-PRT>.................................................................15-209
15.8.1.1.8 <BOX-PRT> .................................................................15-209
15.8.1.1.9 <RPT-PRT> ..................................................................15-209
15.8.1.1.10 <2-SIDE>....................................................................15-210

Contents
15.8.1.1.11 <SCAN> .....................................................................15-210
15.8.1.2 PICK-UP..............................................................................15-210
15.8.1.2.1 <Outline>......................................................................15-210
15.8.1.2.2 <C1> .............................................................................15-210
15.8.1.2.3 <C2> .............................................................................15-210
15.8.1.2.4 <C3> .............................................................................15-211
15.8.1.2.5 <C4> .............................................................................15-211
15.8.1.2.6 <MF> ............................................................................15-211
15.8.1.2.7 <DK> ............................................................................15-211
15.8.1.2.8 <2-SIDE>......................................................................15-211
15.8.1.3 FEEDER ..............................................................................15-211
15.8.1.3.1 <Overview> ..................................................................15-211
15.8.1.3.2 <FEED>........................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4 JAM......................................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4.1 <Overview> ..................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4.2 <TOTAL>.....................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4.3 <FEEDER>...................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4.4 <SORTER>...................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4.5 <2-SIDE>......................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4.6 <MF> ............................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4.7 <C1> .............................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4.8 <C2> .............................................................................15-212
15.8.1.4.9 <C3> .............................................................................15-213
15.8.1.4.10 <C4> ...........................................................................15-213
15.8.1.4.11 <DK> ..........................................................................15-213
15.8.1.5 MISC....................................................................................15-213
15.8.1.5.1 <Overview> ..................................................................15-213
15.8.1.5.2 <FX-UP-RL>................................................................15-213
15.8.1.5.3 <DV-UNT-K>...............................................................15-214
15.8.1.5.4 <DRM-CNTR>.............................................................15-215
15.8.1.6 DRBL-1................................................................................15-215
15.8.1.6.1 <Overview> ..................................................................15-215
15.8.1.6.2 <LSR-DRV>.................................................................15-215
15.8.1.6.3 <LSR-MTR>.................................................................15-215
15.8.1.6.4 <T-CLN-BD> ...............................................................15-215
15.8.1.6.5 <TR-BLT>....................................................................15-215

Contents
15.8.1.6.6 <TR-ROLL> .................................................................15-216
15.8.1.6.7 <2TR-ROLL> ...............................................................15-216
15.8.1.6.8 <2TR-CL>.....................................................................15-216
15.8.1.6.9 <ITB-CL> .....................................................................15-216
15.8.1.6.10 <EL-NDL>..................................................................15-216
15.8.1.6.11 <DV-UNT-C>.............................................................15-216
15.8.1.6.12 <DV-UNT-Y>.............................................................15-216
15.8.1.6.13 <DV-UNT-M>............................................................15-216
15.8.1.6.14 <C1-PU-RL>...............................................................15-216
15.8.1.6.15 <C2-PU-RL>...............................................................15-217
15.8.1.6.16 <M-PU-RL>................................................................15-217
15.8.1.6.17 <FX-LW-RL> .............................................................15-217
15.8.1.6.18 <FX-UNIT> ..

iRC3100N Service Manual - USER MANUAL.pdf

More Related Content

Similar to iRC3100N Service Manual - USER MANUAL.pdf (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

iRC3100N Service Manual - USER MANUAL.pdf